title: Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2015/1278 of 9 July 2015 amending Implementing Regulation (EU) No 680/2014 laying down implementing technical standards with regard to supervisory reporting of institutions as regards instructions, templates and definitions (Text with EEA relevance)

text:
                  31.7.2015

                  EN

                  Official Journal of the European Union

                  L 205/1

            COMMISSION IMPLEMENTING REGULATION (EU) 2015/1278
      of 9 July 2015
      amending Implementing Regulation (EU) No 680/2014 laying down implementing technical standards with regard to supervisory reporting of institutions as regards instructions, templates and definitions
      (Text with EEA relevance)
      THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION,
      Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union,
      Having regard to Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 of 26 June 2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council on prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms and amending Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 (1) and in particular the fourth subparagraph of Article 99(5), the fourth subparagraph of Article 99(6), the third subparagraph of Article 101(4), the third subparagraph of Article 394(4), the fourth subparagraph of Article 415(3) and the third subparagraph of Article 430(2) thereof,
      Whereas:

                  (1)

                  Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 680/2014 (2) specifies the requirements according to which institutions are required to report information relevant to their compliance with Regulation (EU) No 575/2013. Given that the regulatory framework established by Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 is gradually being supplemented and amended in its non-essential elements by the adoption of regulatory technical standards, then Implementing Regulation (EU) No 680/2014 needs to be updated accordingly to reflect those rules; to provide further precision in the instructions and definitions used for the purposes of institutions' supervisory reporting.

                  (2)

                  In order to ensure a correct and uniform application of the requirements laid down in Implementing Regulation (EU) No 680/2014, further precision should be provided to the templates, instructions and definitions used for the purposes of supervisory reporting. Therefore, for reasons of legal clarity, it is appropriate to replace several templates of Annexes I, III and IV and to amend some of the instructions laid down in Annexes II, V, IX and XVII.

                  (3)

                  To provide institutions and competent authorities with adequate time to implement the amendments set out in this Regulation, it should apply from 1 June 2015.

                  (4)

                  This Regulation is based on the draft implementing technical standards submitted by the European Banking Authority (EBA) to the Commission.

                  (5)

                  Given that the necessary amendments to Implementing Regulation (EU) No 680/2014 do not involve significant changes in substantive terms, in accordance with the second subparagraph of Article 15(1) of Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010 of the European Parliament and of the Council (3), the EBA has not conducted any open public consultation, considering that it would be disproportionate in relation to the scope and impact of the draft implementing technical standards concerned.

                  (6)

                  Implementing Regulation (EU) No 680/2014 should be amended accordingly,

            HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:
      Article 1
      Implementing Regulation (EU) No 680/2014 is amended as follows:

                  1.

                  The templates numbered 1, 4, 6.2, 7, 8.1, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 17, 21 and 22 of Annex I are replaced by the respectively numbered templates set out in Annex I to this Regulation.

                  2.

                  Annex II is replaced by the text set out in Annex II to this Regulation.

                  3.

                  The templates numbered 1.3, 16, 20 and 46 of Annex III are replaced by the respectively numbered templates set out in Annex III to this Regulation.

                  4.

                  The templates numbered 1.3, 16, 20 and 46 of Annex IV are replaced by the respectively numbered templates set out in Annex IV to this Regulation.

                  5.

                  Annex V is replaced by the text set out in Annex V to this Regulation.

                  6.

                  Annex IX is replaced by the text set out in Annex VI to this Regulation.

                  7.

                  Annex XVII is replaced by the text set out in Annex VII to this Regulation.

            Article 2
      This Regulation shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.
      It shall apply from 1 June 2015.

         This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.
         Done at Brussels, 9 July 2015.

               For the Commission

               The President

            Jean-Claude JUNCKER

         (1)  OJ L 176, 27.6.2013, p. 1.

         (2)  Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 680/2014 of 16 April 2014 laying down implementing technical standards with regard to supervisory reporting of institutions according to Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 191, 28.6.2014, p. 1).

         (3)  Regulation (EU) No 1093/2010 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 24 November 2010 establishing a European Supervisory Authority (European Banking Authority), amending Decision No 716/2009/EC and repealing Commission Decision 2009/78/EC (OJ L 331, 15.12.2010, p. 12).

         ANNEX I

            C 01.00 — OWN FUNDS (CA1)

                        Rows

                        ID

                        Item

                        Amount

                        010

                        1

                        OWN FUNDS

                        015

                        1.1

                        TIER 1 CAPITAL

                        020

                        1.1.1

                        COMMON EQUITY TIER 1 CAPITAL

                        030

                        1.1.1.1

                        Capital instruments eligible as CET1 Capital

                        040

                     1.1.1.1.1

                     Paid up capital instruments

                        045

                     1.1.1.1.1*

                        Of which: Capital instruments subscribed by public authorities in emergency situations

                        050

                     1.1.1.1.2*

                     Memorandum item: Capital instruments not eligible

                        060

                     1.1.1.1.3

                     Share premium

                        070

                     1.1.1.1.4

                     (-) Own CET1 instruments

                        080

                     1.1.1.1.4.1

                     (-) Direct holdings of CET1 instruments

                        090

                     1.1.1.1.4.2

                     (-) Indirect holdings of CET1 instruments

                        091

                     1.1.1.1.4.3

                     (-) Synthetic holdings of CET1 instruments

                        092

                     1.1.1.1.5

                     (-) Actual or contingent obligations to purchase own CET1 instruments

                        130

                        1.1.1.2

                        Retained earnings

                        140

                     1.1.1.2.1

                     Previous years retained earnings

                        150

                     1.1.1.2.2

                     Profit or loss eligible

                        160

                     1.1.1.2.2.1

                     Profit or loss attributable to owners of the parent

                        170

                     1.1.1.2.2.2

                     (-) Part of interim or year-end profit not eligible

                        180

                        1.1.1.3

                        Accumulated other comprehensive income

                        200

                        1.1.1.4

                        Other reserves

                        210

                        1.1.1.5

                        Funds for general banking risk

                        220

                        1.1.1.6

                        Transitional adjustments due to grandfathered CET1 Capital instruments

                        230

                        1.1.1.7

                        Minority interest given recognition in CET1 capital

                        240

                        1.1.1.8

                        Transitional adjustments due to additional minority interests

                        250

                        1.1.1.9

                        Adjustments to CET1 due to prudential filters

                        260

                     1.1.1.9.1

                     (-) Increases in equity resulting from securitised assets

                        270

                     1.1.1.9.2

                     Cash flow hedge reserve

                        280

                     1.1.1.9.3

                     Cumulative gains and losses due to changes in own credit risk on fair valued liabilities

                        285

                     1.1.1.9.4

                     Fair value gains and losses arising from the institution's own credit risk related to derivative liabilities

                        290

                     1.1.1.9.5

                     (-) Value adjustments due to the requirements for prudent valuation

                        300

                        1.1.1.10

                        (-) Goodwill

                        310

                     1.1.1.10.1

                     (-) Goodwill accounted for as intangible asset

                        320

                     1.1.1.10.2

                     (-) Goodwill included in the valuation of significant investments

                        330

                     1.1.1.10.3

                     Deferred tax liabilities associated to goodwill

                        340

                        1.1.1.11

                        (-) Other intangible assets

                        350

                     1.1.1.11.1

                     (-) Other intangible assets before deduction of deferred tax liabilities

                        360

                     1.1.1.11.2

                     Deferred tax liabilities associated to other intangible assets

                        370

                        1.1.1.12

                        (-) Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and do not arise from temporary differences net of associated tax liabilities

                        380

                        1.1.1.13

                        (-) IRB shortfall of credit risk adjustments to expected losses

                        390

                        1.1.1.14

                        (-) Defined benefit pension fund assets

                        400

                     1.1.1.14.1

                     (-) Defined benefit pension fund assets

                        410

                     1.1.1.14.2

                     Deferred tax liabilities associated to defined benefit pension fund assets

                        420

                     1.1.1.14.3

                     Defined benefit pension fund assets which the institution has an unrestricted ability to use

                        430

                        1.1.1.15

                        (-) Reciprocal cross holdings in CET1 Capital

                        440

                        1.1.1.16

                        (-) Excess of deduction from AT1 items over AT1 Capital

                        450

                        1.1.1.17

                        (-) Qualifying holdings outside the financial sector which can alternatively be subject to a 1 250 % risk weight

                        460

                        1.1.1.18

                        (-) Securitisation positions which can alternatively be subject to a 1 250 % risk weight

                        470

                        1.1.1.19

                        (-) Free deliveries which can alternatively be subject to a 1 250 % risk weight

                        471

                        1.1.1.20

                        (-) Positions in a basket for which an institution cannot determine the risk weight under the IRB approach, and can alternatively be subject to a 1 250 % risk weight

                        472

                        1.1.1.21

                        (-) Equity exposures under an internal models approach which can alternatively be subject to a 1 250 % risk weight

                        480

                        1.1.1.22

                        (-) CET1 instruments of financial sector entites where the institution does not have a significant investment

                        490

                        1.1.1.23

                        (-) Deductible deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences

                        500

                        1.1.1.24

                        (-) CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                        510

                        1.1.1.25

                        (-) Amount exceeding the 17,65 % threshold

                        520

                        1.1.1.26

                        Other transitional adjustments to CET1 Capital

                        524

                        1.1.1.27

                        (-) Additional deductions of CET1 Capital due to Article 3 CRR

                        529

                        1.1.1.28

                        CET1 capital elements or deductions — other

                        530

                        1.1.2

                        ADDITIONAL TIER 1 CAPITAL

                        540

                        1.1.2.1

                        Capital instruments eligible as AT1 Capital

                        550

                     1.1.2.1.1

                     Paid up capital instruments

                        560

                     1.1.2.1.2*

                     Memorandum item: Capital instruments not eligible

                        570

                     1.1.2.1.3

                     Share premium

                        580

                     1.1.2.1.4

                     (-) Own AT1 instruments

                        590

                     1.1.2.1.4.1

                     (-) Direct holdings of AT1 instruments

                        620

                     1.1.2.1.4.2

                     (-) Indirect holdings of AT1 instruments

                        621

                     1.1.2.1.4.3

                     (-) Synthetic holdings of AT1 instruments

                        622

                     1.1.2.1.5

                     (-) Actual or contingent obligations to purchase own AT1 instruments

                        660

                        1.1.2.2

                        Transitional adjustments due to grandfathered AT1 Capital instruments

                        670

                        1.1.2.3

                        Instruments issued by subsidiaries that are given recognition in AT1 Capital

                        680

                        1.1.2.4

                        Transitional adjustments due to additional recognition in AT1 Capital of instruments issued by subsidiaries

                        690

                        1.1.2.5

                        (-) Reciprocal cross holdings in AT1 Capital

                        700

                        1.1.2.6

                        (-) AT1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                        710

                        1.1.2.7

                        (-) AT1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                        720

                        1.1.2.8

                        (-) Excess of deduction from T2 items over T2 Capital

                        730

                        1.1.2.9

                        Other transitional adjustments to AT1 Capital

                        740

                        1.1.2.10

                        Excess of deduction from AT1 items over AT1 Capital (deducted in CET1)

                        744

                        1.1.2.11

                        (-) Additional deductions of AT1 Capital due to Article 3 CRR

                        748

                        1.1.2.12

                        AT1 capital elements or deductions — other

                        750

                        1.2

                        TIER 2 CAPITAL

                        760

                        1.2.1

                        Capital instruments and subordinated loans eligible as T2 Capital

                        770

                     1.2.1.1

                     Paid up capital instruments and subordinated loans

                        780

                     1.2.1.2*

                     Memorandum item: Capital instruments and subordinated loans not eligible

                        790

                     1.2.1.3

                     Share premium

                        800

                     1.2.1.4

                     (-) Own T2 instruments

                        810

                     1.2.1.4.1

                     (-) Direct holdings of T2 instruments

                        840

                     1.2.1.4.2

                     (-) Indirect holdings of T2 instruments

                        841

                     1.2.1.4.3

                     (-) Synthetic holdings of T2 instruments

                        842

                     1.2.1.5

                     (-) Actual or contingent obligations to purchase own T2 instruments

                        880

                        1.2.2

                        Transitional adjustments due to grandfathered T2 Capital instruments and subordinated loans

                        890

                        1.2.3

                        Instruments issued by subsidiaries that are given recognition in T2 Capital

                        900

                        1.2.4

                        Transitional adjustments due to additional recognition in T2 Capital of instruments issued by subsidiaries

                        910

                        1.2.5

                        IRB Excess of provisions over expected losses eligible

                        920

                        1.2.6

                        SA General credit risk adjustments

                        930

                        1.2.7

                        (-) Reciprocal cross holdings in T2 Capital

                        940

                        1.2.8

                        (-) T2 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                        950

                        1.2.9

                        (-) T2 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                        960

                        1.2.10

                        Other transitional adjustments to T2 Capital

                        970

                        1.2.11

                        Excess of deduction from T2 items over T2 Capital (deducted in AT1)

                        974

                        1.2.12

                        (-) Additional deductions of T2 Capital due to Article 3 CRR

                        978

                        1.2.13

                        T2 capital elements or deductions — other

            C 04.00 — MEMORANDUM ITEMS (CA4)

                        Row

                        ID

                        Item

                        Column

                        Deferred tax assest and liabilities

                        010

                     010

                     1

                        Total deferred tax assets

                     020

                     1.1

                     Deferred tax assets that do not rely on future profitability

                     030

                     1.2

                     Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and do not arise from temporary differences

                     040

                     1.3

                     Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences

                     050

                     2

                        Total deferred tax liabilities

                     060

                     2.1

                     Deferred tax liabilities non deductible from deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability

                     070

                     2.2

                     Deferred tax liabilities deductible from deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability

                     080

                     2.2.1

                     Deductible deferred tax liabilities associated with deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and do not arise from temporary differences

                     090

                     2.2.2

                     Deductible deferred tax liabilities associated with deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences

                        Credit risk adjustments and expected losses

                     100

                     3

                        IRB excess (+) or shortfall (-) of credit risk adjustments, additional value adjustments and other own funds reductions to expected losses for non defaulted exposures

                     110

                     3.1

                     Total credit risk adjustments, additional value adjustments and other own funds reductions eligible for inclusion in the calculation of the expected loss amount

                     120

                     3.1.1

                     General credit risk adjustments

                     130

                     3.1.2

                     Specific credit risk adjustments

                     131

                     3.1.3

                     Additional value adjustments and other own funds reductions

                     140

                     3.2

                     Total expected losses eligible

                     145

                     4

                        IRB excess (+) or shortfall (-) of specific credit risk adjustments to expected losses for defaulted exposures

                     150

                     4.1

                     Specific credit risk adjustments and positions treated similarily

                     155

                     4.2

                     Total expected losses eligible

                     160

                     5

                        Risk weighted exposure amounts for calculating the cap to the excess of provision eligible as T2

                     170

                     6

                        Total gross provisions eligible for inclusion in T2 capital

                     180

                     7

                        Risk weighted exposure amounts for calculating the cap to the provision eligible as T2

                        Thresholds for Common Equity Tier 1 deductions

                     190

                     8

                        Threshold non deductible of holdings in financial sector entities where an institution does not have a significant investment

                     200

                     9

                        10 % CET1 threshold

                     210

                     10

                        17,65 % CET1 threshold

                     225

                     11.1

                        Eligible capital for the purposes of qualifying holdings outside the financial sector

                     226

                     11.2

                        Eligible capital for the purposes of large exposures

                        Investments in the capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     230

                     12

                        Holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment, net of short positions

                     240

                     12.1

                     Direct holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     250

                     12.1.1

                     Gross direct holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     260

                     12.1.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above

                     270

                     12.2

                     Indirect holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     280

                     12.2.1

                     Gross indirect holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     290

                     12.2.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above

                     291

                     12.3

                     Synthetic holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     292

                     12.3.1

                     Gross synthetic holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     293

                     12.3.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above

                     300

                     13

                        Holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment, net of short positions

                     310

                     13.1

                     Direct holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     320

                     13.1.1

                     Gross direct holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     330

                     13.1.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above

                     340

                     13.2

                     Indirect holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     350

                     13.2.1

                     Gross indirect holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     360

                     13.2.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above

                     361

                     13.3

                     Synthetic holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     362

                     13.3.1

                     Gross synthetic holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     363

                     13.3.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above

                     370

                     14

                        Holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment, net of short positions

                     380

                     14.1

                     Direct holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     390

                     14.1.1

                     Gross direct holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     400

                     14.1.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above

                     410

                     14.2

                     Indirect holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     420

                     14.2.1

                     Gross indirect holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     430

                     14.2.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above

                     431

                     14.3

                     Synthetic holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     432

                     14.3.1

                     Gross synthetic holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                     433

                     14.3.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above

                        Investments in the capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     440

                     15

                        Holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment, net of short positions

                     450

                     15.1

                     Direct holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     460

                     15.1.1

                     Gross direct holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     470

                     15.1.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above

                     480

                     15.2

                     Indirect holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     490

                     15.2.1

                     Gross indirect holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     500

                     15.2.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above

                     501

                     15.3

                     Synthetic holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     502

                     15.3.1

                     Gross synthetic holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     503

                     15.3.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above

                     510

                     16

                        Holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment, net of short positions

                     520

                     16.1

                     Direct holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     530

                     16.1.1

                     Gross direct holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     540

                     16.1.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above

                     550

                     16.2

                     Indirect holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     560

                     16.2.1

                     Gross indirect holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     570

                     16.2.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above

                     571

                     16.3

                     Synthetic holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     572

                     16.3.1

                     Gross synthetic holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     573

                     16.3.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above

                     580

                     17

                        Holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment, net of short positions

                     590

                     17.1

                     Direct holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     600

                     17.1.1

                     Gross direct holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     610

                     17.1.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above

                     620

                     17.2

                     Indirect holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     630

                     17.2.1

                     Gross indirect holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     640

                     17.2.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above

                     641

                     17.3

                     Synthetic holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     642

                     17.3.1

                     Gross synthetic holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                     643

                     17.3.2

                     (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above

                        Total risk exposure amounts of holdings not deducted from the corresponding capital category:

                     650

                     18

                        Risk weighted exposures of CET1 holdings in financial sector entities which are not deducted from the institution's CET1 capital

                     660

                     19

                        Risk weighted exposures of AT1 holdings in financial sector entities which are not deducted from the institution's AT1 capital

                     670

                     20

                        Risk weighted exposures of T2 holdings in financial sector entities which are not deducted from the institution's T2 capital

                        Temporary waiver from deduction from own funds

                     680

                     21

                        Holdings on CET1 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment temporary waived

                     690

                     22

                        Holdings on CET1 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment temporary waived

                     700

                     23

                        Holdings on AT1 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment temporary waived

                     710

                     24

                        Holdings on AT1 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment temporary waived

                     720

                     25

                        Holdings on T2 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment temporary waived

                     730

                     26

                        Holdings on T2 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment temporary waived

                        Capital buffers

                     740

                     27

                        Combined buffer requirement

                     750

                        Capital conservation buffer

                     760

                        Conservation buffer due to macro-prudential or systemic risk identified at the level of a Member State

                     770

                        Institution specific countercyclical capital buffer

                     780

                        Systemic risk buffer

                     790

                        Systemical important institution buffer

                     800

                        Global Systemically Important Institution buffer

                     810

                        Other Systemically Important Institution buffer

                        Pillar II requirements

                     820

                     28

                        Own funds requirements related to Pillar II adjustments

                        Additional information for investment firms

                     830

                     29

                        Initial capital

                     840

                     30

                        Own funds based on Fixed Overheads

                        Additional information for calculation of reporting thresholds

                     850

                     31

                        Non-domestic original exposures

                     860

                     32

                        Total original exposures

                        Basel I floor

                     870

                        Adjustments to total own funds

                     880

                        Own funds fully adjusted for Basel I floor

                     890

                        Own funds requirements for Basel I floor

                     900

                        Own funds requirements for Basel I floor — SA alternative

            C 06.02 — GROUP SOLVENCY: INFORMATION ON AFFILIATES (GS)

                        ENTITIES WITHIN SCOPE OF CONSOLIDATION

                        INFORMATION ON ENTITIES SUBJECT TO OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS

                        NAME

                        CODE

                        LEI code

                        INSTITUTION OR EQUIVALENT

                        (YES/NO)

                        SCOPE OF DATA: SOLO FULLY CONSOLIDATED (SF) OR SOLO PARTIALLY CONSOLIDATED (SP)

                        COUNTRY CODE

                        SHARE OF HOLDING (%)

                        TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                        CREDIT; COUNTERPARTY CREDIT; DILUTION RISKS, FREE DELIVERIES AND SETTLEMENT/DELIVERY RISK

                        POSITION, FX AND COMMODITIES RISKS

                        OPERATIONAL RISK

                        OTHER RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNTS

                     010

                     020

                     025

                     030

                     040

                     050

                     060

                     070

                     080

                     090

                     100

                     110

                        INFORMATION ON ENTITIES SUBJECT TO OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS

                        OWN FUNDS

                        TOTAL TIER 1 CAPITAL

                        TIER 2 CAPITAL

                        COMMON EQUITY TIER 1 CAPITAL

                        ADDITIONAL TIER 1 CAPITAL

                        OF WHICH: QUALIFYING OWN FUNDS

                        RELATED OWN FUNDS INSTRUMENTS, RELATED RETAINED EARNINGS AND SHARE PREMIUM ACCOUNTS

                        OF WHICH: QUALIFYING TIER 1 CAPITAL

                        RELATED T1 INSTRUMENTS, RELATED RETAINED EARNINGS AND SHARE PREMIUM ACCOUNTS

                        OF WHICH: MINORITY INTERESTS

                        RELATED OWN FUNDS INSTRUMENTS, RELATED RETAINED EARNINGS, SHARE PREMIUM ACCOUNTS AND OTHER RESERVES

                        OF WHICH: QUALIFYING ADDITIONAL TIER 1 CAPITAL

                        OF WHICH: QUALIFYING TIER 2 CAPITAL

                     120

                     130

                     140

                     150

                     160

                     170

                     180

                     190

                     200

                     210

                     220

                     230

                     240

                        INFORMATION ON THE CONTRIBUTION OF ENTITIES TO SOLVENCY OF THE GROUP

                        TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                        QUALIFYING OWN FUNDS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED OWN FUNDS

                        CONSOLIDATED OWN FUNDS

                        CREDIT; COUNTERPARTY CREDIT; DILUTION RISKS, FREE DELIVERIES AND SETTLEMENT/DELIVERY RISK

                        POSITION, FX AND COMMODITIES RISKS

                        OPERATIONAL RISK

                        OTHER RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNTS

                        QUALIFYING TIER 1 INSTRUMENTS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED TIER 1 CAPITAL

                        QUALIFYING OWN FUNDS INSTRUMENTS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED TIER 2 CAPITAL

                        MEMORANDUM ITEM: GOODWILL (-) /(+) NEGATIVE GOODWILL

                        OF WHICH: COMMON EQUITY TIER 1

                        MINORITY INTERESTS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED COMMON EQUITY TIER 1 CAPITAL

                        QUALIFYING TIER 1 INSTRUMENTS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED ADDITIONAL TIER 1 CAPITAL

                     250

                     260

                     270

                     280

                     290

                     300

                     310

                     320

                     330

                     340

                     350

                     360

                     370

                        INFORMATION ON THE CONTRIBUTION OF ENTITIES TO SOLVENCY OF THE GROUP

                        CAPITAL BUFFERS

                        COMBINED BUFFER REQUIRE-MENTS

                        OF WHICH: ADDITIONAL TIER 1

                        OF WHICH: CONRIBUTIONS TO CONSOLIDATED RESULT

                        OF WHICH: (-) GOODWILL/(+) NEGATIVE GOODWILL

                        CAPITAL CONSERVATION BUFFER

                        INSTITUTION SPECIFIC COUNTER-CYCLICAL CAPITAL BUFFER

                        CONSERVATION BUFFER DUE TO MACRO-PRUDENTIAL OR SYSTEMIC RISK IDENTIFIED AT THE LEVEL OF A MEMBER STATE

                        SYSTEMIC RISK BUFFER

                        SYSTEMICAL IMPORTANT INSTITUTION BUFFER

                        GLOBAL SYSTEMICALLY IMPORTANT INSTITUTION BUFFER

                        OTHER SYSTEMICALLY IMPORTANT INSTITUTION BUFFER

                     380

                     390

                     400

                     410

                     420

                     430

                     440

                     450

                     460

                     470

                     480

            C 07.00 — CREDIT AND COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES: STANDARDISED APPROACH TO CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS (CR SA)

            SA Exposure class

                        ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                        (-) VALUE ADJUSTMENTS AND PROVISIONS ASSOCIATED WITH THE ORIGINAL EXPOSURE

                        EXPOSURE NET OF VALUE ADJUSTMENTS AND PROVISIONS

                        CREDIT RISK MITIGATION (CRM) TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS ON THE EXPOSURE

                        UNFUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION: ADJUSTED VALUES (Ga)

                        (-) GUARANTEES

                        (-) CREDIT DERIVATIVES

                     010

                     030

                     040

                     050

                     060

                     010

                        TOTAL EXPOSURES

                     020

                        of which: SME

                     030

                        of which: Exposures subject to SME-supporting factor

                     040

                        of which: Secured by mortgages on immovable property — Residential property

                     050

                        of which: Exposures under the permanent partial use of the standardised approach

                     060

                        of which: Exposures under the standardised approach with prior supervisory permission to carry out a sequential IRB implementation

                        BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES BY EXPOSURE TYPES:

                     070

                        On balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk

                     080

                        Off balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk

                        Exposures/Transactions subject to counterparty credit risk

                     090

                        Securities Financing Transactions

                     100

                        of which: centrally cleared through a QCCP

                     110

                        Derivatives & Long Settlement Transactions

                     120

                        of which: centrally cleared through a QCCP

                     130

                        From Contractual Cross Product Netting

                        BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES BY RISK WEIGHTS:

                     140

                        0 %

                     150

                        2 %

                     160

                        4 %

                     170

                        10 %

                     180

                        20 %

                     190

                        35 %

                     200

                        50 %

                     210

                        70 %

                     220

                        75 %

                     230

                        100 %

                     240

                        150 %

                     250

                        250 %

                     260

                        370 %

                     270

                        1 250 %

                     280

                        Other risk weights

                        MEMORANDUM ITEMS

                     290

                        Exposures secured by mortgages on commercial immovable property

                     300

                        Exposures in default subject to a risk weight of 100 %

                     310

                        Exposures secured by mortgages on residential property

                     320

                        Exposures in default subject to a risk weight of 150 %

                        CREDIT RISK MITIGATION (CRM) TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS ON THE EXPOSURE

                        NET EXPOSURE AFTER CRM SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                        FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION

                        SUBSTITUTION OF THE EXPOSURE DUE TO CRM

                        (-) FINANCIAL COLLATERAL: SIMPLE METHOD

                        (-) OTHER FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION

                        (-) TOTAL OUTFLOWS

                        TOTAL INFLOWS (+)

                     070

                     080

                     090

                     100

                     110

                     010

                        TOTAL EXPOSURES

                     020

                        of which: SME

                     030

                        of which: Exposures subject to SME-supporting factor

                     040

                        of which: Secured by mortgages on immovable property — Residential property

                     050

                        of which: Exposures under the permanent partial use of the standardised approach

                     060

                        of which: Exposures under the standardised approach with prior supervisory permission to carry out a sequential IRB implementation

                        BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES BY EXPOSURE TYPES:

                     070

                        On balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk

                     080

                        Off balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk

                        Exposures/Transactions subject to counterparty credit risk

                     090

                        Securities Financing Transactions

                     100

                        of which: centrally cleared through a QCCP

                     110

                        Derivatives & Long Settlement Transactions

                     120

                        of which: centrally cleared through a QCCP

                     130

                        From Contractual Cross Product Netting

                        BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES BY RISK WEIGHTS:

                     140

                        0 %

                     150

                        2 %

                     160

                        4 %

                     170

                        10 %

                     180

                        20 %

                     190

                        35 %

                     200

                        50 %

                     210

                        70 %

                     220

                        75 %

                     230

                        100 %

                     240

                        150 %

                     250

                        250 %

                     260

                        370 %

                     270

                        1 250 %

                     280

                        Other risk weights

                        MEMORANDUM ITEMS

                     290

                        Exposures secured by mortgages on commercial immovable property

                     300

                        Exposures in default subject to a risk weight of 100 %

                     310

                        Exposures secured by mortgages on residential property

                     320

                        Exposures in default subject to a risk weight of 150 %

                        CREDIT RISK MITIGATION TECHNIQUES AFFECTING THE EXPOSURE AMOUNT: FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION. FINANCIAL COLLATERAL COMPREHENSIVE METHOD

                        FULLY ADJUSTED EXPOSURE VALUE (E*)

                        BREAKDOWN OF THE FULLY ADJUSTED EXPOSURE VALUE OF OFF-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS BY CONVERSION FACTORS

                        VOLATILITY ADJUSTMENT TO THE EXPOSURE

                        (-) FINANCIAL COLLATERAL: ADJUSTED VALUE (Cvam)

                        0 %

                        20 %

                        50 %

                        100 %

                        (-) OF WHICH: VOLATILITY AND MATURITY ADJUSTMENTS

                     120

                     130

                     140

                     150

                     160

                     170

                     180

                     190

                     010

                        TOTAL EXPOSURES

                     020

                        of which: SME

                     030

                        of which: Exposures subject to SME-supporting factor

                     040

                        of which: Secured by mortgages on immovable property — Residential property

                     050

                        of which: Exposures under the permanent partial use of the standardised approach

                     060

                        of which: Exposures under the standardised approach with prior supervisory permission to carry out a sequential IRB implementation

                        BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES BY EXPOSURE TYPES:

                     070

                        On balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk

                     080

                        Off balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk

                        Exposures/Transactions subject to counterparty credit risk

                     090

                        Securities Financing Transactions

                     100

                        of which: centrally cleared through a QCCP

                     110

                        Derivatives & Long Settlement Transactions

                     120

                        of which: centrally cleared through a QCCP

                     130

                        From Contractual Cross Product Netting

                        BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES BY RISK WEIGHTS:

                     140

                        0 %

                     150

                        2 %

                     160

                        4 %

                     170

                        10 %

                     180

                        20 %

                     190

                        35 %

                     200

                        50 %

                     210

                        70 %

                     220

                        75 %

                     230

                        100 %

                     240

                        150 %

                     250

                        250 %

                     260

                        370 %

                     270

                        1 250 %

                     280

                        Other risk weights

                        MEMORANDUM ITEMS

                     290

                        Exposures secured by mortgages on commercial immovable property

                     300

                        Exposures in default subject to a risk weight of 100 %

                     310

                        Exposures secured by mortgages on residential property

                     320

                        Exposures in default subject to a risk weight of 150 %

                        EXPOSURE VALUE

                        RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT PRE SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR

                        RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT AFTER SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR

                        OF WHICH: ARISING FROM COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISK

                        OF WHICH: WITH A CREDIT ASSESSMENT BY A NOMINATED ECAI

                        OF WHICH: WITH A CREDIT ASSESSMENT DERIVED FROM CENTRAL GOVERNMENT

                     200

                     210

                     215

                     220

                     230

                     240

                     010

                        TOTAL EXPOSURES

                     Cell linked to CA

                     020

                        of which: SME

                     030

                        of which: Exposures subject to SME-supporting factor

                     040

                        of which: Secured by mortgages on immovable property — Residential property

                     050

                        of which: Exposures under the permanent partial use of the standardised approach

                     060

                        of which: Exposures under the standardised approach with prior supervisory permission to carry out a sequential IRB implementation

                        BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES BY EXPOSURE TYPES:

                     070

                        On balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk

                     080

                        Off balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk

                        Exposures/Transactions subject to counterparty credit risk

                     090

                        Securities Financing Transactions

                     100

                        of which: centrally cleared through a QCCP

                     110

                        Derivatives & Long Settlement Transactions

                     120

                        of which: centrally cleared through a QCCP

                     130

                        From Contractual Cross Product Netting

                        BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES BY RISK WEIGHTS:

                     140

                        0 %

                     150

                        2 %

                     160

                        4 %

                     170

                        10 %

                     180

                        20 %

                     190

                        35 %

                     200

                        50 %

                     210

                        70 %

                     220

                        75 %

                     230

                        100 %

                     240

                        150 %

                     250

                        250 %

                     260

                        370 %

                     270

                        1 250 %

                     280

                        Other risk weights

                        MEMORANDUM ITEMS

                     290

                        Exposures secured by mortgages on commercial immovable property

                     300

                        Exposures in default subject to a risk weight of 100 %

                     310

                        Exposures secured by mortgages on residential property

                     320

                        Exposures in default subject to a risk weight of 150 %

            C 08.01 — CREDIT AND COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES: IRB APPROACH TO CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS (CR IRB 1)

            IRB Exposure class:

            Own estimates of LGD and/or conversion factors:

                        INTERNAL RATING SYSTEM

                        ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                        CREDIT RISK MITIGATION (CRM) TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS ON THE EXPOSURE

                        EXPOSURE AFTER CRM SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                        UNFUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION

                        (-) OTHER FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION

                        SUBSTITUTION OF THE EXPOSURE DUE TO CRM

                        PD ASSIGNED TO THE OBLIGOR GRADE OR POOL

                        (%)

                        OF WHICH: LARGE FINANCIAL SECTOR ENTITIES AND UNREGULATED FINANCIAL ENTITIES

                        (-) GUARANTEES

                        (-) CREDIT DERIVATIVES

                        (-) TOTAL OUTFLOWS

                        TOTAL INFLOWS (+)

                        OF WHICH: OFF BALANCE SHEET ITEMS

                     010

                     020

                     030

                     040

                     050

                     060

                     070

                     080

                     090

                     100

                     010

                        TOTAL EXPOSURES

                     015

                        of which: Exposures subject to SME-supporting factor

                        BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES BY EXPOSURE TYPES:

                     020

                        On balance sheet items subject to credit risk

                     030

                        Off balance sheet items subject to credit risk

                        Exposures/Transactions subject to counterparty credit risk

                     040

                        Securities Financing Transactions

                     050

                        Derivatives & Long Settlement Transactions

                     060

                        From Contractual Cross Product Netting

                     070

                        EXPOSURES ASSIGNED TO OBLIGOR GRADES OR POOLS: TOTAL

                     080

                        SPECIALIZED LENDING SLOTTING CRITERIA: TOTAL

                        BREAKDOWN BY RISK WEIGHTS OF TOTAL EXPOSURES UNDER SPECIALIZED LENDING SLOTTING CRITERIA:

                     090

                        RISK WEIGHT: 0 %

                     100

                        50 %

                     110

                        70 %

                     120

                        Of which: in category 1

                     130

                        90 %

                     140

                        115 %

                     150

                        250 %

                     160

                        ALTERNATIVE TREATMENT: SECURED BY REAL ESTATE

                     170

                        EXPOSURES FROM FREE DELIVERIES APPLYING RISK WEIGHTS UNDER THE ALTERNATIVE TREATMENT OR 100 % AND OTHER EXPOSURES SUBJECT TO RISK WEIGHTS

                     180

                        DILUTION RISK: TOTAL PURCHASED RECEIVABLES

                        EXPOSURE VALUE

                        CREDIT RISK MITIGATION TECHNIQUES TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT IN LGD ESTIMATES EXCLUDING DOUBLE DEFAULT TREATMENT

                        OWN ESTIMATES OF LGD'S ARE USED:

                        UNFUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION

                        FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION

                        OF WHICH: OFF BALANCE SHEET ITEMS

                        OF WHICH: ARISING FROM COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISK

                        OF WHICH: LARGE FINANCIAL SECTOR ENTITIES AND UNREGULATED FINANCIAL ENTITIES

                        GUARANTEES

                        CREDIT DERIVATIVES

                        OWN ESTIMATES OF LGD'S ARE USED:

                        OTHER FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION

                        ELIGIBLE FINANCIAL COLLATERAL

                        OTHER ELIGIBLE COLLATERAL

                        REAL ESTATE

                        OTHER PHYSICAL COLLATERAL

                        RECEIVABLES

                     110

                     120

                     130

                     140

                     150

                     160

                     170

                     180

                     190

                     200

                     210

                     010

                        TOTAL EXPOSURES

                     015

                        of which: Exposures subject to SME-supporting factor

                        BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES BY EXPOSURE TYPES:

                     020

                        On balance sheet items subject to credit risk

                     030

                        Off balance sheet items subject to credit risk

                        Exposures/Transactions subject to counterparty credit risk

                     040

                        Securities Financing Transactions

                     050

                        Derivatives & Long Settlement Transactions

                     060

                        From Contractual Cross Product Netting

                     070

                        EXPOSURES ASSIGNED TO OBLIGOR GRADES OR POOLS: TOTAL

                     080

                        SPECIALIZED LENDING SLOTTING CRITERIA: TOTAL

                        BREAKDOWN BY RISK WEIGHTS OF TOTAL EXPOSURES UNDER SPECIALIZED LENDING SLOTTING CRITERIA:

                     090

                        RISK WEIGHT: 0 %

                     100

                        50 %

                     110

                        70 %

                     120

                        Of which: in category 1

                     130

                        90 %

                     140

                        115 %

                     150

                        250 %

                     160

                        ALTERNATIVE TREATMENT: SECURED BY REAL ESTATE

                     170

                        EXPOSURES FROM FREE DELIVERIES APPLYING RISK WEIGHTS UNDER THE ALTERNATIVE TREATMENT OR 100 % AND OTHER EXPOSURES SUBJECT TO RISK WEIGHTS

                     180

                        DILUTION RISK: TOTAL PURCHASED RECEIVABLES

                        SUBJECT TO DOUBLE DEFAULT TREATMENT

                        EXPOSURE WEIGHTED AVERAGE LGD (%)

                        EXPOSURE WEIGHTED AVERAGE LGD (%) FOR LARGE FINANCIAL SECTOR ENTITIES AND UNREGULATED FINANCIAL ENTITIES

                        EXPOSURE-WEIGHTED AVERAGE MATURITY VALUE (DAYS)

                        RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT PRE SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR

                        RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT AFTER SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR

                        MEMORANDUM ITEMS:

                        UNFUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION

                        EXPECTED LOSS AMOUNT

                        (-) VALUE ADJUSTMENTS AND PROVISIONS

                        NUMBER OF OBLIGORS

                        OF WHICH: LARGE FINANCIAL SECTOR ENTITIES AND UNREGULATED FINANCIAL ENTITIES

                     220

                     230

                     240

                     250

                     255

                     260

                     270

                     280

                     290

                     300

                     010

                        TOTAL EXPOSURES

                     Cell linked to CA

                     015

                        of which: Exposures subject to SME-supporting factor

                        BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES BY EXPOSURE TYPES:

                     020

                        On balance sheet items subject to credit risk

                     030

                        Off balance sheet items subject to credit risk

                        Exposures/Transactions subject to counterparty credit risk

                     040

                        Securities Financing Transactions

                     050

                        Derivatives & Long Settlement Transactions

                     060

                        From Contractual Cross Product Netting

                     070

                        EXPOSURES ASSIGNED TO OBLIGOR GRADES OR POOLS: TOTAL

                     080

                        SPECIALIZED LENDING SLOTTING CRITERIA: TOTAL

                        BREAKDOWN BY RISK WEIGHTS OF TOTAL EXPOSURES UNDER SPECIALIZED LENDING SLOTTING CRITERIA:

                     090

                        RISK WEIGHT: 0 %

                     100

                        50 %

                     110

                        70 %

                     120

                        Of which: in category 1

                     130

                        90 %

                     140

                        115 %

                     150

                        250 %

                     160

                        ALTERNATIVE TREATMENT: SECURED BY REAL ESTATE

                     170

                        EXPOSURES FROM FREE DELIVERIES APPLYING RISK WEIGHTS UNDER THE ALTERNATIVE TREATMENT OR 100 % AND OTHER EXPOSURES SUBJECT TO RISK WEIGHTS

                     180

                        DILUTION RISK: TOTAL PURCHASED RECEIVABLES

            C 09.01 — GEOGRAPHICAL BREAKDOWN OF EXPOSURES BY RESIDENCE OF THE OBLIGOR: SA EXPOSURES (CR GB 1)

            Country:

                        ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                        Exposures in default

                        Observed new defaults for the period

                        General credit risk adjustments

                        Specific credit risk adjustments

                        Of which: write off

                        Credit risk adjustments/write-offs for observed new defaults

                        EXPOSURE VALUE

                        RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT PRE SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR

                        RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT AFTER SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR

                     010

                     020

                     040

                     050

                     055

                     060

                     070

                     075

                     080

                     090

                     010

                     Central governments or central banks

                     020

                     Regional governments or local authorities

                     030

                     Public sector entities

                     040

                     Multilateral Development Banks

                     050

                     International Organisations

                     060

                     Institutions

                     070

                     Corporates

                     075

                     of which: SME

                     080

                     Retail

                     085

                     of which: SME

                     090

                     Secured by mortgages on immovable property

                     095

                     of which: SME

                     100

                     Exposures in default

                     110

                     Items associated with particularly high risk

                     120

                     Covered bonds

                     130

                     Claims on institutions and corporates with a short-term credit assessment

                     140

                     Collective investments undertakings (CIU)

                     150

                     Equity exposures

                     160

                     Other exposures

                        Total exposures

            C 09.02 — GEOGRAPHICAL BREAKDOWN OF EXPOSURES BY RESIDENCE OF THE OBLIGOR: IRB EXPOSURES (CR GB 2)

            Country:

                        ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                        Of which: defaulted

                        Observed new defaults for the period

                        General credit risk adjustments

                        Specific credit risk adjustments

                        Of which: write off

                        Credit risk adjustments/write-offs for observed new defaults

                        PD ASSIGNED TO THE OBLIGOR GRADE OR POOL

                        (%)

                     010

                     030

                     040

                     050

                     055

                     060

                     070

                     080

                     010

                     Central governments or central banks

                     020

                     Institutions

                     030

                     Corporates

                     040

                     Of Which: Specialised Lending

                     050

                     Of Which: SME

                     060

                     Retail

                     070

                     Secured by real estate property

                     080

                     SME

                     090

                     Non-SME

                     100

                     Qualifying Revolving

                     110

                     Other Retail

                     120

                     SME

                     130

                     Non-SME

                     140

                     Equity

                        Total exposures

                        EXPOSURE WEIGHTED AVERAGE LGD (%)

                        Of which: defaulted

                        EXPOSURE VALUE

                        RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT PRE SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR

                        Of which: defaulted

                        RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT AFTER SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR

                        EXPECTED LOSS AMOUNT

                     090

                     100

                     105

                     110

                     120

                     125

                     130

                     010

                     Central governments or central banks

                     020

                     Institutions

                     030

                     Corporates

                     040

                     Of Which: Specialised Lending

                     050

                     Of Which: SME

                     060

                     Retail

                     070

                     Secured by real estate property

                     080

                     SME

                     090

                     Non-SME

                     100

                     Qualifying Revolving

                     110

                     Other Retail

                     120

                     SME

                     130

                     Non-SME

                     140

                     Equity

                        Total exposures

            C 09.03 — GEOGRAPHICAL BREAKDOWN OF RELEVANT CREDIT EXPOSURES FOR THE PURPOSE OF CALCULATION OF THE INSTITUTION-SPECIFIC COUNTERCYCLICAL BUFFER (CR GB 3)

            Country:

                     Amount

                     010

                     010

                     Own fund requirements

            C 17.00 — OPERATIONAL RISK: LOSSES AND RECOVERIES BY BUSINESS LINES AND EVENT TYPES IN THE LAST YEAR (OPR Details)

                        MAPPING OF LOSSES TO BUSINESS LINES

                        EVENT TYPES

                        TOTAL EVENT TYPES

                        MEMORANDUM ITEM: THRESHOLD APPLIED IN DATA COLLECTION

                        INTERNAL FRAUD

                        EXTERNAL FRAUD

                        EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES AND WORKPLACE SAFETY

                        CLIENTS, PRODUCTS & BUSINESS PRACTICES

                        DAMAGE TO PHYSICAL ASSETS

                        BUSINESS DISRUPTION AND SYSTEM FAILURES

                        EXECUTION, DELIVERY & PROCESS MANAGEMENT

                        LOWEST

                        HIGHEST

                     Rows

                     010

                     020

                     030

                     040

                     050

                     060

                     070

                     080

                     090

                     100

                     010

                        CORPORATE FINANCE [CF]

                     Number of events

                     020

                     Total loss amount

                     030

                     Maximum single loss

                     040

                     Sum of the five largest losses

                     050

                     Total loss recovery

                     110

                        TRADING AND SALES [TS]

                     Number of events

                     120

                     Total loss amount

                     130

                     Maximum single loss

                     140

                     Sum of the five largest losses

                     150

                     Total loss recovery

                     210

                        RETAIL BROKERAGE [RBr]

                     Number of events

                     220

                     Total loss amount

                     230

                     Maximum single loss

                     240

                     Sum of the five largest losses

                     250

                     Total loss recovery

                     310

                        COMMERCIAL BANKING [CB]

                     Number of events

                     320

                     Total loss amount

                     330

                     Maximum single loss

                     340

                     Sum of the five largest losses

                     350

                     Total loss recovery

                     410

                        RETAIL BANKING [RB]

                     Number of events

                     420

                     Total loss amount

                     430

                     Maximum single loss

                     440

                     Sum of the five largest losses

                     450

                     Total loss recovery

                     510

                        PAYMENT AND SETTLEMENT [PS]

                     Number of events

                     520

                     Total loss amount

                     530

                     Maximum single loss

                     540

                     Sum of the five largest losses

                     550

                     Total loss recovery

                     610

                        AGENCY SERVICES [AS]

                     Number of events

                     620

                     Total loss amount

                     630

                     Maximum single loss

                     640

                     Sum of the five largest losses

                     650

                     Total loss recovery

                     710

                        ASSET MANAGEMENT [AM]

                     Number of events

                     720

                     Total loss amount

                     730

                     Maximum single loss

                     740

                     Sum of the five largest losses

                     750

                     Total loss recovery

                     810

                        CORPORATE ITEMS [CI]

                     Number of events

                     820

                     Total loss amount

                     830

                     Maximum single loss

                     840

                     Sum of the five largest losses

                     850

                     Total loss recovery

                     910

                        TOTAL BUSINESS LINES

                     Number of events. Of which:

                     911

                     ≥ 10 000 and < 20 000

                     912

                     ≥ 20 000 and < 100 000

                     913

                     ≥ 100 000 and < 1 000 000

                     914

                     ≥ 1 000 000

                     920

                     Total loss amount. Of which:

                     921

                     ≥ 10 000 and < 20 000

                     922

                     ≥ 20 000 and < 100 000

                     923

                     ≥ 100 000 and < 1 000 000

                     924

                     ≥ 1 000 000

                     930

                     Maximum single loss

                     940

                     Sum of the five largest losses

                     950

                     Total loss recovery

            C 21.00 — MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACH FOR POSITION RISK IN EQUITIES (MKR SA EQU)

            National market:

                        POSITIONS

                        OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS

                        TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                        ALL POSITIONS

                        NET POSITIONS

                        POSITIONS SUBJECT TO CAPITAL CHARGE

                        LONG

                        SHORT

                        LONG

                        SHORT

                     010

                     020

                     030

                     040

                     050

                     060

                     070

                     010

                        EQUITIES IN TRADING BOOK

                     Cell linked to CA

                     020

                     General risk

                     021

                     Derivatives

                     022

                     Other assets and liabilities

                     030

                     Exchange traded stock-index futures broadly diversified subject to particular approach

                     040

                     Other equities than exchange traded stock-index futures broadly diversified

                     050

                     Specific risk

                     080

                     Particular approach for position risk in CIUs

                     090

                     Additional requirements for options (non-delta risks)

                     100

                     Simplified method

                     110

                     Delta plus approach — additional requirements for gamma risk

                     120

                     Delta plus approach — additional requirements for vega risk

                     130

                     Scenario matrix approach

            C 22.00 — MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACHES FOR FOREIGN EXCHANGE RISK (MKR SA FX)

                        ALL POSITIONS

                        NET POSITIONS

                        POSITIONS SUBJECT TO CAPITAL CHARGE

                        (Including redistribution of unmatched positions in currencies subject to special treatment for matched positions)

                        OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS

                        TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                        LONG

                        SHORT

                        LONG

                        SHORT

                        LONG

                        SHORT

                        MATCHED

                     020

                     030

                     040

                     050

                     060

                     070

                     080

                     090

                     100

                     010

                        TOTAL POSITIONS IN NON-REPORTING CURRENCIES

                     Cell linked to CA

                     020

                     Currencies closely correlated

                     030

                     All other currencies (including CIUs treated as different currencies)

                     040

                     Gold

                     050

                     Additional requirements for options (non-delta risks)

                     060

                     Simplified method

                     070

                     Delta plus approach — additional requirements for gamma risk

                     080

                     Delta plus approach — additional requirements for vega risk

                     090

                     Scenario matrix approach

                        BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL POSITIONS (REPORTING CURRENCY INCLUDED) BY EXPOSURE TYPES

                     100

                     Other assets and liabilities other than off-balance sheet items and derivatives

                     110

                     Off-balance sheet items

                     120

                     Derivatives

                        Memorandum items: CURRENCY POSITIONS

                     130

                     Euro

                     140

                     Lek

                     150

                     Argentine Peso

                     160

                     Australian Dollar

                     170

                     Brazilian Real

                     180

                     Bulgarian Lev

                     190

                     Canadian Dollar

                     200

                     Czech Koruna

                     210

                     Danish Krone

                     220

                     Egyptian Pound

                     230

                     Pound Sterling

                     240

                     Forint

                     250

                     Yen

                     270

                     Lithuanian Litas

                     280

                     Denar

                     290

                     Mexican Peso

                     300

                     Zloty

                     310

                     Rumanian Leu

                     320

                     Russian Ruble

                     330

                     Serbian Dinar

                     340

                     Swedish Krona

                     350

                     Swiss Franc

                     360

                     Turkish Lira

                     370

                     Hryvnia

                     380

                     US Dollar

                     390

                     Iceland Krona

                     400

                     Norwegian Krone

                     410

                     Hong Kong Dollar

                     420

                     New Taiwan Dollar

                     430

                     New Zealand Dollar

                     440

                     Singapore Dollar

                     450

                     Won

                     460

                     Yuan Renminbi

                     470

                     Other

                     480

                     Croatian Kuna

         ANNEX II

               ‘ANNEX II

                  REPORTING ON OWN FUNDS AND OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS

                  Table of Contents

                           PART I: GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

                        54

                           1.

                        STRUCTURE AND CONVENTIONS
                        54

                           1.1.

                        STRUCTURE
                        54

                           1.2.

                        NUMBERING CONVENTION
                        54

                           1.3.

                        SIGN CONVENTION
                        54

                           PART II: TEMPLATE RELATED INSTRUCTIONS

                        54

                           1.

                        SOLVENCY OVERVIEW (CA)
                        54

                           1.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        54

                           1.2.

                        C 01.00 — OWN FUNDS (CA1)
                        55

                           1.2.1.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        55

                           1.3.

                        C 02.00 — OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS (CA2)
                        68

                           1.3.1.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        68

                           1.4.

                        C 03.00 — CAPITAL RATIOS AND CAPITAL LEVELS (CA3)
                        74

                           1.4.1.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        74

                           1.5.

                        C 04.00 — MEMORANDUM ITEMS (CA4)
                        75

                           1.5.1.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        75

                           1.6.

                        TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS AND GRANDFATHERED INSTRUMENTS: INSTRUMENTS NOT CONSTITUING STATE AID (CA 5)
                        88

                           1.6.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        88

                           1.6.2.

                        C 05.01 — TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS (CA5.1)
                        89

                           1.6.2.1.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        89

                           1.6.3.

                        C 05.02 — GRANDFATHERED INSTRUMENTS: INSTRUMENTS NOT CONSTITUING STATE AID (CA5.2)
                        96

                           1.6.3.1.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        96

                           2.

                        C 06.00 — GROUP SOLVENCY: INFORMATION ON AFFILIATES (GS)
                        98

                           2.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        98

                           2.2.

                        DETAILED GROUP SOLVENCY INFORMATION;
                        99

                           2.3.

                        INFORMATION ON THE CONTRIBUTIONS OF INDIVIDUAL ENTITIES TO GROUP SOLVENCY
                        99

                           2.4.

                        C 06.01 — GROUP SOLVENCY: INFORMATION ON AFFILIATES — Total (GS Total)
                        99

                           2.5.

                        C 06.02 — GROUP SOLVENCY: INFORMATION ON AFFILIATES (GS)
                        100

                           3.

                        CREDIT RISK TEMPLATES
                        106

                           3.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        106

                           3.1.1.

                        REPORTING OF CRM TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECT
                        107

                           3.1.2.

                        REPORTING OF COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISK
                        107

                           3.2.

                        C 07.00 — CREDIT AND COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES: STANDARDISED APPROACH TO OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS (CR SA)
                        107

                           3.2.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        107

                           3.2.2.

                        SCOPE OF THE CR SA TEMPLATE
                        107

                           3.2.3.

                        ASSIGNMENT OF EXPOSURES TO EXPOSURE CLASSES UNDER THE STANDARDISED APPROACH
                        108

                           3.2.4.

                        CLARIFICATIONS ON THE SCOPE OF SOME SPECIFIC EXPOSURE CLASSES REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 112 OF CRR
                        111

                           3.2.4.1.

                        EXPOSURE CLASS “INSTITUTIONS”
                        111

                           3.2.4.2.

                        EXPOSURE CLASS “COVERED BONDS”
                        111

                           3.2.4.3.

                        EXPOSURE CLASS “COLLECTIVE INVESTMENT UNDERTAKINGS”
                        111

                           3.2.5.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        112

                           3.3.

                        CREDIT AND COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES: IRB APPROACH TO OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS (CR IRB)
                        118

                           3.3.1.

                        SCOPE OF THE CR IRB TEMPLATE
                        118

                           3.3.2.

                        BREAKDOWN OF THE CR IRB TEMPLATE
                        119

                           3.3.3.

                        C 08.01 — CREDIT AND COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES: IRB APPROACH TO OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS (CR IRB 1)
                        120

                           3.3.3.1.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        120

                           3.3.4.

                        C 08.02 — CREDIT AND COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES: IRB APPROACH TO CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS (BREAKDOWN BY OBLIGOR GRADES OR POOLS (CR IRB 2 TEMPLATE)
                        127

                           3.4.

                        CREDIT AND COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES: INFORMATION WITH GEOGRAPHICAL BREAKDOWN (CR GB)
                        127

                           3.4.1.

                        C 09.01 — GEOGRAPHICAL BREAKDOWN OF EXPOSURES BY RESIDENCE OF THE OBLIGOR: SA EXPOSURES (CR GB 1)
                        128

                           3.4.1.1.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        128

                           3.4.2.

                        C 09.02 — GEOGRAPHICAL BREAKDOWN OF EXPOSURES BY RESIDENCE OF THE OBLIGOR: IRB EXPOSURES (CR GB 2)
                        130

                           3.4.2.1.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        130

                           3.4.3.

                        C 09.03 — BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS FOR CREDIT RISK OF RELEVANT CREDIT EXPOSURES BY COUNTRY (CR GB 3)
                        132

                           3.4.3.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        132

                           3.4.3.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        132

                           3.5.

                        C 10.01 AND C 10.02 — EQUITY EXPOSURES UNDER THE INTERNAL RATINGS BASED APPROACH (CR EQU IRB 1 AND CR EQU IRB 2)
                        133

                           3.5.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        133

                           3.5.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS (APPLICABLE TO BOTH CR EQU IRB 1 AND CR EQU IRB 2)
                        134

                           3.6.

                        C 11.00 — SETTLEMENT/DELIVERY RISK (CR SETT)
                        136

                           3.6.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        136

                           3.6.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        137

                           3.7.

                        C 12.00 — CREDIT RISK: SECURITISATION — STANDARDISED APPROACH TO OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS (CR SEC SA)
                        138

                           3.7.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        138

                           3.7.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        139

                           3.8.

                        C 13.00 — CREDIT RISK — SECURITISATIONS: INTERNAL RATINGS BASED APPROACH TO OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS (CR SEC IRB)
                        145

                           3.8.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        145

                           3.8.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        145

                           3.9.

                        C 14.00 — DETAILED INFORMATION ON SECURITISATIONS (SEC DETAILS)
                        151

                           3.9.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        151

                           3.9.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        152

                           4.

                        OPERATIONAL RISK TEMPLATES
                        160

                           4.1.

                        C 16.00 — OPERATIONAL RISK (OPR)
                        160

                           4.1.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        160

                           4.1.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        160

                           4.2.

                        C 17.00 — OPERATIONAL RISK: GROSS LOSSES BY BUSINESS LINES AND EVENT TYPES IN THE LAST YEAR (OPR DETAILS)
                        163

                           4.2.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        163

                           4.2.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        165

                           5.

                        MARKET RISK TEMPLATES
                        166

                           5.1.

                        C 18.00 — MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACH FOR POSITION RISKS IN TRADED DEBT INSTRUMENTS (MKR SA TDI)
                        167

                           5.1.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        167

                           5.1.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        167

                           5.2.

                        C 19.00 — MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACH FOR SPECIFIC RISK IN SECURITISATIONS (MKR SA SEC)
                        169

                           5.2.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        169

                           5.2.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        169

                           5.3.

                        C 20.00 — MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACH FOR SPECIFIC RISK FOR POSITIONS ASSIGNED TO THE CORRELATION TRADING PORTFOLIO (MKR SA CTP)
                        171

                           5.3.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        171

                           5.3.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        172

                           5.4.

                        C 21.00 — MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACH FOR POSITION RISK IN EQUITIES (MKR SA EQU)
                        174

                           5.4.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        174

                           5.4.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        174

                           5.5.

                        C 22.00 — MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACHES FOR FOREIGN EXCHANGE RISK (MKR SA FX)
                        176

                           5.5.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        176

                           5.5.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        176

                           5.6.

                        C 23.00 — MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACHES FOR COMMODITIES (MKR SA COM)
                        178

                           5.6.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        178

                           5.6.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        178

                           5.7.

                        C 24.00 — MARKET RISK INTERNAL MODEL (MKR IM)
                        179

                           5.7.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        179

                           5.7.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        179

                           5.8.

                        C 25.00 — CREDIT VALUATION ADJUSTMENT RISK (CVA)
                        182

                           5.8.1.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC POSITIONS
                        182

                  PART I: GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

               1.   STRUCTURE AND CONVENTIONS
               1.1.   STRUCTURE

                           1.

                           Overall, the framework consists of five blocks of templates:

                                       (a)

                                       capital adequacy, an overview of regulatory capital; total risk exposure amount;

                                       (b)

                                       group solvency, an overview of the fulfilment of the solvency requirements by all individual entities included in the scope of consolidation of the reporting entity

                                       (c)

                                       credit risk (including counterparty, dilution and settlement risks);

                                       (d)

                                       market risk (including position risk in trading book, foreign exchange risk, commodities risk and CVA risk);

                                       (e)

                                       operational risk.

                           2.

                           For each template legal references are provided. Further detailed information regarding more general aspects of the reporting of each block of templates, instructions concerning specific positions as well as examples and validation rules are included in these Guidelines for implementation of the Common Reporting framework.

                           3.

                           Institutions report only those templates that are relevant depending on the approach used for determining own funds requirements.

                     1.2.   NUMBERING CONVENTION

                           4.

                           The document follows the labelling convention set in the following table, when referring to the columns, rows and cells of the templates. These numerical codes are extensively used in the validation rules.

                           5.

                           The following general notation is followed in the instructions: {Template;Row;Column}.

                           6.

                           In the case of validations inside a template, in which only data points of that template is used, notations do not refer to a template: {Row;Column}.

                           7.

                           In the case of templates with only one column, only rows are referred to. {Template;Row}

                           8.

                           An asterisk sign is used to express that the validation is done for the rows or columns specified before.

                     1.3.   SIGN CONVENTION

                           9.

                           Any amount that increases the own funds or the capital requirements shall be reported as a positive figure. On the contrary, any amount that reduces the total own funds or the capital requirements shall be reported as a negative figure. Where there is a negative sign (-) preceding the label of an item no positive figure is expected to be reported for that item.

                  PART II: TEMPLATE RELATED INSTRUCTIONS

               1.   CAPITAL ADEQUACY OVERVIEW (CA)
               1.1.   GENERAL REMARKS

                           10.

                           CA templates contain information about Pillar 1 numerators (own funds, Tier 1, Common Equity Tier 1), denominator (own funds requirements), and transitional provisions and is structures in five templates:

                                       a)

                                       CA1 template contains the amount of own funds of the institutions, disaggregated in the items needed to get to that amount. The amount of own funds obtained includes the aggregate effect of transitional provisions per type of capital

                                       b)

                                       CA2 template summarizes the total risk exposures amounts as defined in Article 92(3) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 (“CRR”)

                                       c)

                                       CA3 template contains the ratios for which CRR state a minimum level, and some other related data

                                       d)

                                       CA4 template contains memorandums items needed for calculating items in CA1 as well as information with regard to the CRD capital buffers.

                                       e)

                                       CA5 template contains the data needed for calculating the effect of transitional provisions in own funds. CA5 will cease to exist once the transitional provisions will expire.

                           11.

                           The templates shall apply to all reporting entities, irrespective of the accounting standards followed, although some items in the numerator are specific for entities applying IAS/IFRS-type valuation rules. Generally, the information in the denominator is linked to the final results reported in the correspondent templates for the calculation of the total risk exposure amount.

                           12.

                           The total own funds consist of different types of capital: Tier 1 capital (T1), which is the sum of Common Equity Tier 1 capital (CET1), Additional Tier 1 capital (AT1) as well as Tier 2 capital (T2).

                           13.

                           Transitional provisions are treated as follows in CA templates:

                                       a)

                                       The items in CA1 are generally gross of transitional adjustments. This means that figures in CA1 items are calculated according to the final provisions (i.e. as if there were no transitional provisions), with the exception of items summarizing the effect of the transitional provisions. For each type of capital (i.e. CET1; AT1 and T2) there are three different items in which all the adjustments due to transitional provisions are included.

                                       b)

                                       Transitional provisions may also affect the AT1 and the T2 shortfall (i.e. AT1 or T2 the excess of deduction, regulated in articles 36(1) point (j) and 56 point (e) of CRR respectively), and thus the items containing these shortfalls may indirectly reflect the effect of transitional provisions.

                                       c)

                                       Template CA5 is exclusively used for reporting the transitional provisions.

                           14.

                           The treatment of Pillar II requirements can be different within the EU (Article 104(2) CRD IV has to be transposed into national regulation). Only the impact of Pillar II requirements on the solvency ratio or the target ratio shall be included in the solvency reporting of CRR. A detailed reporting of Pillar II requirements is not within the mandate of Article 99 CRR.

                                       a)

                                       The templates CA1, CA2 or CA5 only contain data on Pillar I issues.

                                       b)

                                       The template CA3 contains the impact of additional Pillar II-requirements on the solvency ratio on an aggregated basis. One block focuses on the impact of amounts on the ratios, whereas the other block focuses on the ratio itself. Both blocks of ratios do not have any further link to the templates CA1, CA2 or CA5.

                                       c)

                                       The template CA4 contains one cell regarding additional own funds requirements relating to Pillar II. This cell has no link via validation rules to the capital ratios of the CA3 template and reflects Article 104(2) CRD which explicitly mentions additional own funds requirements as one possibility for Pillar II decisions.

                     1.2.   C 01.00 — OWN FUNDS (CA1)
               1.2.1.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Row

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                           1.   Own funds

                           Articles 4(1)(118) and 72 of CRR
                           The own funds of an institution shall consist of the sum of its Tier 1 capital and Tier 2 capital.

                           015

                           1.1   Tier 1 capital

                           Article 25 of CRR
                           The Tier 1 capital is the sum of Common Equity Tier 1 Capital and Additional Tier 1 capital

                           020

                           1.1.1   Common Equity Tier 1 capital

                           Article 50 of CRR

                           030

                           1.1.1.1   Capital instruments eligible as CET1 capital

                           Articles 26(1) points (a) and (b), 27 to 30, 36(1) point (f) and 42 of CRR

                           040

                           1.1.1.1.1   Paid up capital instruments

                           Articles 26(1) point (a) and 27 to 31 of CRR
                           Capital instruments of mutual, cooperative societies or similar institutions (Articles 27 and 29 of CRR) shall be included.
                           The share premium related to the instruments shall not be included.
                           Capital instruments subscribed by public authorities in emergency situations shall be included if all conditions of Article 31 CRR are fulfilled.

                           045

                           1.1.1.1.1*   Of which: Capital instruments subscribed by public authorities in emergency situations

                           Article 31 of CRR
                           Capital instruments subscribed by public authorities in emergency situations shall be included in CET1 capital if all conditions of Article 31 CRR are fulfilled.

                           050

                           1.1.1.1.2*   Memorandum item: Capital instruments not eligible

                           Article 28(1) points (b), (l) and (m) of CRR
                           Conditions in those points reflect different situations of the capital which are reversible, and thus the amount reported here can be eligible in subsequent periods.
                           The amount to be reported shall not include the share premium related to the instruments

                           060

                           1.1.1.1.3   Share premium

                           Articles 4(1)(124), 26(1) point (b) of CRR
                           Share premium has the same meaning as under the applicable accounting standard.
                           The amount to be reported in this item shall be the part related to the “Paid up capital instruments”.

                           070

                           1.1.1.1.4   (-) Own CET1 instruments

                           Articles 36(1) point (f) and 42 of CRR
                           Own CET1 held by the reporting institution or group at the reporting date. Subject to exceptions in Article 42 of CRR.
                           Holdings on shares included as “Capital instruments not eligible” shall not be reported in this row.
                           The amount to be reported shall include the share premium related to the own shares.
                           Items 1.1.1.1.4 to 1.1.1.1.4.3 do not include actual or contingent obligations to purchase own CET1 instruments. Actual or contingent obligations to purchase own CET1 instruments are reported separately in item 1.1.1.1.5.

                           080

                           1.1.1.1.4.1   (-) Direct holdings of CET1 instruments

                           Articles 36(1) point (f) and 42 of CRR
                           Common Equity Tier 1 instruments included in item 1.1.1.1 held by institutions of the consolidated group.
                           The amount to be reported shall include holdings in the trading book calculated on the basis of the net long position, as stated in Article 42 point (a) of CRR.

                           090

                           1.1.1.1.4.2   (-) Indirect holdings of CET1 instruments

                           Articles 4(1)(114), 36(1) point (f) and 42 of CRR

                           091

                           1.1.1.1.4.3   (-) Synthetic holdings of CET1 instruments

                           Articles 4(1)(126), 36(1) point (f) and 42 of CRR

                           092

                           1.1.1.1.5   (-) Actual or contingent obligations to purchase own CET1 instruments

                           Articles 36(1) point (f) and 42 of CRR
                           According to Article 36(1) point (f) of CRR, “own Common Equity Tier 1 instruments that an institution is under an actual or contingent obligation to purchase by virtue of an existing contractual obligation” shall be deducted.

                           130

                           1.1.1.2   Retained earnings

                           Articles 26(1) point (c) and 26(2) of CRR
                           Retained earnings includes the previous year retained earnings plus the eligible interim or year-end profits

                           140

                           1.1.1.2.1   Previous years retained earnings

                           Articles 4(1)(123) and 26(1) c) of CRR
                           Article 4(1)(123) of CRR defines retained earnings as “Profit and losses brought forward as a result of the final application of profit or loss under the applicable accounting standards”.

                           150

                           1.1.1.2.2   Profit or loss eligible

                           Articles 4(1)(121), 26(2) and 36(1) point (a) of CRR
                           Article 26(2) of CRR allows including as retained earnings interim or year-end profits, with the prior consent of the competent authorities, if some conditions are met.
                           On the other hand, losses shall be deducted from CET1, as stated in article 36(1) point (a) of CRR.

                           160

                           1.1.1.2.2.1   Profit or loss attributable to owners of the parent

                           Articles 26(2) and 36(1) point (a) of CRR
                           The amount to be reported shall be the profit or loss reported in the accounting income statement.

                           170

                           1.1.1.2.2.2   (-) Part of interim or year-end profit not eligible

                           Article 26(2) of CRR
                           This row shall not present any figure if, for the reference period, the institution has reported losses. This is because the losses shall be completely deducted from CET1.
                           If the institution reports profits, it shall be reported the part which is not eligible according to article 26(2) of CRR (i.e. profits not audited and foreseeable charges or dividends)
                           Note that, in case of profits, the amount to be deduced shall be, at least, the interim dividends.

                           180

                           1.1.1.3   Accumulated other comprehensive income

                           Articles 4(1)(100) and 26(1) point (d) of CRR
                           The amount to be reported shall be net of any tax charge foreseeable at the moment of the calculation, and prior to the application of prudential filters. The amount to be reported shall be determined in accordance with Article 13(4) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 241/2014.

                           200

                           1.1.1.4   Other reserves

                           Articles 4(1)(117) and 26(1) point (e) of CRR
                           Other reserves are defined in CRR as “Reserves within the meaning of the applicable accounting standard that are required to be disclosed under that applicable accounting standard, excluding any amounts already included in accumulated other comprehensive income or retained earnings”.
                           The amount to be reported shall be net of any tax charge foreseeable at the moment of the calculation.

                           210

                           1.1.1.5   Funds for general banking risk

                           Articles 4(1)(112) and 26(1) point (f) of CRR
                           Funds for general banking risk are defined in article 38 of Directive 86/635/EEC as “Amounts which a credit institution decides to put aside to cover such risks where that is required by the particular risks associated with banking”
                           The amount to be reported shall be net of any tax charge foreseeable at the moment of the calculation.

                           220

                           1.1.1.6   Transitional adjustments due to grandfathered CET1 Capital instruments

                           Articles 483(1) to (3), and 484 to 487 of CRR
                           Amount of capital instruments transitionally grandfathered as CET1. The amount to be reported is directly obtained from CA5.

                           230

                           1.1.1.7   Minority interest given recognition in CET1 capital

                           Article 4(120) and 84 of CRR
                           Sum of all the amounts of minority interests of subsidiaries that is included in consolidated CET1.

                           240

                           1.1.1.8   Transitional adjustments due to additional minority interests

                           Articles 479 and 480 of CRR
                           Adjustments to the minority interests due to transitional provisions. This item is obtained directly from CA5.

                           250

                           1.1.1.9   Adjustments to CET1 due to prudential filters

                           Articles 32 to 35 of CRR

                           260

                           1.1.1.9.1   (-) Increases in equity resulting from securitised assets

                           Article 32(1) of CRR
                           The amount to be reported is the increase in the equity of the institution resulting from securitised assets, according to the applicable accounting standard.
                           For example, this item includes the future margin income that results in a gain on sale for the institution, or, for originators, the net gains that arise from the capitalisation of future income from the securitised assets that provide credit enhancement to positions in the securitisation.

                           270

                           1.1.1.9.2   Cash flow hedge reserve

                           Article 33(1) point (a) of CRR
                           The amount to be reported could either be positive or negative. It shall be positive if cash flow hedges result in a loss (i.e. if it reduces accounting equity) and vice versa. Thus, the sign shall be contrary to the one used in accounting statements.
                           The amount shall be net of any tax charge foreseeable at the moment of the calculation.

                           280

                           1.1.1.9.3   Cumulative gains and losses due to changes in own credit risk on fair valued liabilities

                           Article 33(1) point (b) of CRR
                           The amount to be reported could either be positive or negative. It shall be positive if there is a loss due to changes in own credit risk (i.e. if it reduces accounting equity) and vice versa. Thus, the sign shall be contrary to the one used in accounting statements.
                           Unaudited profit shall not be included in this item.

                           285

                           1.1.1.9.4   Fair value gains and losses arising from the institution's own credit risk related to derivative liabilities

                           Article 33(1) point (c) and 33(2) of CRR
                           The amount to be reported could either be positive or negative. It shall be positive if there is a loss due to changes in own credit risk and vice versa. Thus, the sign shall be contrary to the one used in accounting statements.
                           Unaudited profit shall not be included in this item.

                           290

                           1.1.1.9.5   (-) Value adjustments due to the requirements for prudent valuation

                           Articles 34 and 105 of CRR
                           Adjustments to the fair value of exposures included in the trading book or non-trading book due to stricter standards for prudent valuation set in Article 105 of CRR

                           300

                           1.1.1.10   (-) Goodwill

                           Articles 4(1)(113), 36(1) point (b) and 37 of CRR

                           310

                           1.1.1.10.1   (-) Goodwill accounted for as intangible asset

                           Articles 4(1)(113) and 36(1) point (b) of CRR
                           Goodwill has the same meaning as under the applicable accounting standard.
                           The amount to be reported here shall be the same that is reported in the balance sheet.

                           320

                           1.1.1.10.2   (-) Goodwill included in the valuation of significant investments

                           Article 37 point (b) and 43 of CRR

                           330

                           1.1.1.10.3   Deferred tax liabilities associated to goodwill

                           Article 37 point (a) of CRR
                           Amount of deferred tax liabilities that would be extinguished if the goodwill became impaired or was derecognised under the relevant accounting standard

                           340

                           1.1.1.11   (-) Other intangible assets

                           Articles 4(1)(115), 36(1) point (b) and 37 point (a) of CRR
                           Other intangible assets are the intangibles assets under the applicable accounting standard, minus the goodwill, also according to the applicable accounting standard.

                           350

                           1.1.1.11.1   (-) Other intangible assets before deduction of deferred tax liabilities

                           Articles 4(1)(115) and 36(1) point (b) of CRR
                           Other intangible assets are the intangibles assets under the applicable accounting standard, minus the goodwill, also according to the applicable accounting standard.
                           The amount to be reported here shall correspond to the amount reported in the balance sheet of intangible assets others than goodwill.

                           360

                           1.1.1.11.2   Deferred tax liabilities associated to other intangible assets

                           Article 37 point (a) of CRR
                           Amount of deferred tax liabilities that would be extinguished if the intangibles assets other than goodwill became impaired or was derecognised under the relevant accounting standard

                           370

                           1.1.1.12   (-) Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and do not arise from temporary differences net of associated tax liabilities

                           Articles 36(1) point (c) and 38 of CRR

                           380

                           1.1.1.13   (-) IRB shortfall of credit risk adjustments to expected losses

                           Articles 36(1) point (d), 40, 158 and 159 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported shall not be reduced by a rise in the level of deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability, or other additional tax effect, that could occur if provisions were to rise to the level of expected losses (Article 40 of CRR)

                           390

                           1.1.1.14   (-) Defined benefit pension fund assets

                           Articles 4(1)(109), 36(1) point (e) and 41 of CRR

                           400

                           1.1.1.14.1   (-) Defined benefit pension fund assets

                           Articles 4(1)(109), 36(1) point (e) of CRR
                           Defined benefit pension fund assets are defined as “the assets of a defined pension fund or plan, as applicable, calculated after they have been reduced by the amount of obligations under the same fund or plan”
                           The amount to be reported here shall correspond to the amount reported in the balance sheet (if reported separately).

                           410

                           1.1.1.14.2   Deferred tax liabilities associated to defined benefit pension fund assets

                           Articles 4(1)(108) and (109), and 41(1) point (a) of CRR
                           Amount of deferred tax liabilities that would be extinguished if the defined benefit pension fund assets became impaired or were derecognised under the relevant accounting standard.

                           420

                           1.1.1.14.3   Defined benefit pension fund assets which the institution has an unrestricted ability to use

                           Articles 4(1)(109) and 41(1) point (b) of CRR
                           This item shall only present any amount if there is a prior consent of the competent authority to reduce the amount of defined benefit pension fund assets to be deducted.
                           The assets included in this row shall receive a risk weight for credit risk requirements.

                           430

                           1.1.1.15   (-) Reciprocal cross holdings in CET1 Capital

                           Articles 4(1)(122), 36(1) point (g) and 44 of CRR
                           Holdings in CET1 instruments of financial sector entities (as defined in Article 4(27) of CRR) where there is a reciprocal cross holding that the competent authority considers to have been designed to inflate artificially the own funds of the institution
                           The amount to be reported shall be calculated on the basis of the gross long positions, and shall include Tier 1 own-fund insurance items.

                           440

                           1.1.1.16   (-) Excess of deduction from AT1 items over AT1 Capital

                           Article 36(1) point (j) of CRR
                           The amount to be reported is directly taken from CA 1 item “Excess of deduction from AT1 items over AT1 Capital.” The amount has to be deducted from CET1.

                           450

                           1.1.1.17   (-) Qualifying holdings outside the financial sector which can alternatively be subject to a 1 250 % risk weight

                           Articles 4(1)(36), 36(1) point (k) (i) and 89 to 91 of CRR
                           Qualifying holdings are defined as “direct or indirect holding in an undertaking which represents 10 % or more of the capital or of the voting rights or which makes it possible to exercise a significant influence over the management of that undertaking”.
                           According to Article 36(1) point (k) (i) of CRR they can, alternatively, be deducted from CET1 (using this item), or subject to a risk weight of 1 250 %.

                           460

                           1.1.1.18   (-) Securitisation positions which can alternatively be subject to a 1 250 % risk weight

                           Articles 36(1) point (k) (ii), 243(1) point (b), 244(1) point (b), 258 and 266(3) of CRR
                           Securitisation positions which are subject to a 1 250 % risk weight, but alternatively, are allowed to be deducted from CET1 (Article 36(1) point (k) (ii) of CRR). In the latter case, they shall be reported in this item.

                           470

                           1.1.1.19   (-) Free deliveries which can alternatively be subject to a 1 250 % risk weight

                           Articles 36(1) point (k) (iii) and 379(3) of CRR
                           Free deliveries are subject to a 1 250 % risk weight after 5 days post second contractual payment or delivery leg until the extinction of the transaction, according to the own funds requirements for settlement risk. Alternatively, they are allowed to be deducted from CET1 (Article 36(1) point (k) (iii) of CRR). In the latter case, they shall be reported in this item.

                           471

                           1.1.1.20   (-) Positions in a basket for which an institution cannot determine the risk weight under the IRB approach, and can alternatively be subject to a 1 250 % risk weight

                           Articles 36(1) point (k) (iv) and 153(8) of CRR
                           According to Article 36(1) point (k) (iv) of CRR they can, alternatively, be deducted from CET1 (using this item), or subject to a risk weight of 1 250 %.

                           472

                           1.1.1.21   (-) Equity exposures under an internal models approach which can alternatively be subject to a 1 250 % risk weight

                           Articles 36(1) point (k) (v) and 155(4) of CRR
                           According to Article 36(1) point (k) (v) of CRR they can, alternatively, be deducted from CET1 (using this item), or subject to a risk weight of 1 250 %.

                           480

                           1.1.1.22   (-) CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(27), 36(1) point (h); 43 to 46, 49 (2) and (3) and 79 of CRR
                           Part of holdings by the institution of instruments of financial sector entities (as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where the institution does not have a significant investment that has to be deducted from CET1
                           See alternatives to deduction when consolidation is applied (Article 49(2) and (3))

                           490

                           1.1.1.23   (-) Deductible deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences

                           Articles 36(1) point (c); 38 and 48(1) point (a) of CRR
                           Part of deferred tax assets that rely in future profitability and arise from temporary differences (net of the part of associated deferred tax liabilities allocated to deferred tax assets that arise from temporary differences, according to article 38(5) point (b) of CRR) which has to be deducted, applying the 10 % threshold in article 48(1) point (a) of CRR.

                           500

                           1.1.1.24   (-) CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(27); 36(1) point (i); 43, 45; 47; 48(1) point (b); 49(1) to (3) and 79 of CRR
                           Part of holdings by the institution of CET1 instruments of financial sector entities (as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where the institution has a significant investment that has to be deducted, applying the 10 % threshold in Article 48(1) point (b) of CRR.
                           See alternatives to deduction when consolidation is applied (article 49(1), (2) and (3)).

                           510

                           1.1.1.25   (-) Amount exceeding the 17,65 % threshold

                           Article 48(1) of CRR
                           Part of deferred tax assets that rely in future profitability and arise from temporary differences, and direct and indirect holdings by the institution of the CET1 instruments of financial sector entities (as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where the institution has a significant investment that has to be deducted, applying the 17,65 % threshold in Article 48(1) of CRR.

                           520

                           1.1.1.26   Other transitional adjustments to CET1 Capital

                           Articles 469 to 472, 478 and 481 of CRR
                           Adjustments to deductions due to transitional provisions. The amount to be reported is directly obtained from CA5.

                           524

                           1.1.1.27   Additional deductions of CET1 Capital due to Article 3 CRR

                           Article 3 CRR

                           529

                           1.1.1.28   CET1 capital elements or deductions — other

                           This row is invented to provide flexibility solely for reporting purposes. It shall only be populated in the rare cases that there is no final decision on the reporting of specific capital items/deductions in the current CA1 template. As a consequence, this row shall only be populated if a CET1 capital element respective a deduction of a CET1 element cannot be assigned to one of the rows 020 to 524.
                           This cell shall not be used to assign capital items/deductions which are not covered by the CRR into the calculation of solvency ratios (e.g. an assignment of national capital items/deductions which are outside the scope of the CRR).

                           530

                           1.1.2   ADDITIONAL TIER 1 CAPITAL

                           Article 61 of CRR

                           540

                           1.1.2.1   Capital instruments eligible as AT1 Capital

                           Articles 51 point (a), 52 to 54, 56 point (a) and 57 of CRR

                           550

                           1.1.2.1.1   Paid up capital instruments

                           Articles 51 point (a) and 52 to 54 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported shall not include the share premium related to the instruments

                           560

                           1.1.2.1.2 (*)   Memorandum item: Capital instruments not eligible

                           Article 52(1) points (c), (e) and (f) of CRR
                           Conditions in those points reflect different situations of the capital which are reversible, and thus the amount reported here can be eligible in subsequent periods.
                           The amount to be reported shall not include the share premium related to the instruments

                           570

                           1.1.2.1.3   Share premium

                           Article 51 point (b) of CRR
                           Share premium has the same meaning as under the applicable accounting standard.
                           The amount to be reported in this item shall be the part related to the “Paid up capital instruments”.

                           580

                           1.1.2.1.4   (-) Own AT1 instruments

                           Articles 52(1) point (b), 56 point (a) and 57 of CRR
                           Own AT1 instruments held by the reporting institution or group at the reporting date. Subject to exceptions in article 57 of CRR.
                           Holdings on shares included as “Capital instruments not eligible” shall not be reported in this row.
                           The amount to be reported shall include the share premium related to the own shares.
                           Items 1.1.2.1.4 to 1.1.2.1.4.3 do not include actual or contingent obligations to purchase own CET1 instruments. Actual or contingent obligations to purchase own AT1 instruments are reported separately in item 1.1.2.1.5.

                           590

                           1.1.2.1.4.1   (-) Direct holdings of AT1 instruments

                           Articles 4(1)(114) 52 (1) point (b), 56 point (a) and 57 of CRR
                           Additional Tier 1 instruments included in item 1.1.2.1.1 held by institutions of the consolidated group.

                           620

                           1.1.2.1.4.2   (-) Indirect holdings of AT1 instruments

                           Articles 52(1) point (b) (ii), 56 point (a) and 57of CRR

                           621

                           1.1.2.1.4.3   (-) Synthetic holdings of AT1 instruments

                           Articles 4(1)(126), 52(1) point (b), 56 point (a) and 57 of CRR

                           622

                           1.1.2.1.5   (-) Actual or contingent obligations to purchase own AT1 instruments

                           Articles 56 point (a) and 57 of CRR
                           According to Article 56 point (a) of CRR, “own Additional Tier 1 instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase as a result of existing contractual obligations” shall be deducted.

                           660

                           1.1.2.2   Transitional adjustments due to grandfathered AT1 Capital instruments

                           Articles 483(4) and (5), 484 to 487, 489 and 491 of CRR
                           Amount of capital instruments transitionally grandfathered as AT1. The amount to be reported is directly obtained from CA5.

                           670

                           1.1.2.3   Instruments issued by subsidiaries that are given recognition in AT1 Capital

                           Articles 83, 85 and 86 of CRR
                           Sum of all the amounts of qualifying T1 capital of subsidiaries that is included in consolidated AT1.
                           Qualifying AT1 capital issued by a special purpose entity (Article 83 of CRR) shall be included.

                           680

                           1.1.2.4   Transitional adjustments due to additional recognition in AT1 Capital of instruments issued by subsidiaries

                           Article 480 of CRR
                           Adjustments to the qualifying T1 capital included in consolidated AT1 capital due to transitional provisions. This item is obtained directly from CA5.

                           690

                           1.1.2.5   (-) Reciprocal cross holdings in AT1 Capital

                           Articles 4(1)(122), 56 point (b) and 58 of CRR
                           Holdings in AT1 instruments of financial sector entities (as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where there is a reciprocal cross holding that the competent authority considers to have been designed to inflate artificially the own funds of the institution
                           The amount to be reported shall be calculated on the basis of the gross long positions, and shall include Additional Tier 1 own-fund insurance items.

                           700

                           1.1.2.6   (-) AT1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(27), 56 point (c); 59, 60 and 79 of CRR
                           Part of holdings by the institution of instruments of financial sector entities (as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where the institution does not have a significant investment that has to be deducted from AT1

                           710

                           1.1.2.7   (-) AT1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(27), 56 point (d), 59 and 79 of CRR
                           Holdings by the institution of AT1 instruments of financial sector entities (as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where the institution has a significant investment are completely deducted

                           720

                           1.1.2.8   (-) Excess of deduction from T2 items over T2 Capital

                           Article 56 point (e) of CRR
                           The amount to be reported is directly taken from CA 1 item “Excess of deduction from T2 items over T2 Capital (deducted in AT1)”.

                           730

                           1.1.2.9   Other transitional adjustments to AT1 Capital

                           Articles 474, 475, 478 and 481 of CRR
                           Adjustments due to transitional provisions. The amount to be reported is directly obtained from CA5.

                           740

                           1.1.2.10   Excess of deduction from AT1 items over AT1 Capital (deducted in CET1)

                           Article 36(1) point (j) of CRR
                           Additional Tier 1 cannot be negative, but it is possible that AT1 deductions are greater than AT1 Capital plus related share premium. When this happens, AT1 has to be equal to zero, and the excess of AT1 deductions has to be deducted from CET1.
                           With this item, it is achieved that the sum of items 1.1.2.1 to 1.1.2.12 is never lower than zero. Then, if this item shows a positive figure, item 1.1.1.16 shall be the inverse of that figure.

                           744

                           1.1.2.11   Additional deductions of AT1 Capital due to Article 3 CRR

                           Article 3 CRR

                           748

                           1.1.2.12   AT1 capital elements or deductions — other

                           This row is invented to provide flexibility solely for reporting purposes. It shall only be populated in the rare cases that there is no final decision on the reporting of specific capital items/deductions in the current CA1 template. As a consequence, this row shall only be populated if an AT1 capital element respective a deduction of an AT1 element cannot be assigned to one of the rows 530 to 744.
                           This cell shall not be used to assign capital items/deductions which are not covered by the CRR into the calculation of solvency ratios (e.g. an assignment of national capital items/deductions which are outside the scope of the CRR)!

                           750

                           1.2   TIER 2 CAPITAL

                           Article 71 of CRR

                           760

                           1.2.1   Capital instruments and subordinated loans eligible as T2 Capital

                           Articles 62 point (a), 63 to 65, 66 point (a), and 67 of CRR

                           770

                           1.2.1.1   Paid up capital instruments and subordinated loans

                           Articles 62 point (a), 63 and 65 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported shall not include the share premium related to the instruments

                           780

                           1.2.1.2 (*)   Memorandum item: Capital instruments and subordinated loans not eligible

                           Article 63 points (c), (e) and (f); and article 64 of CRR
                           Conditions in those points reflect different situations of the capital which are reversible, and thus the amount reported here can be eligible in subsequent periods.
                           The amount to be reported shall not include the share premium related to the instruments

                           790

                           1.2.1.3   Share premium

                           Articles 62 point (b) and 65 of CRR
                           Share premium has the same meaning as under the applicable accounting standard.
                           The amount to be reported in this item shall be the part related to the “Paid up capital instruments”.

                           800

                           1.2.1.4   (-) Own T2 instruments

                           Article 63 point (b) (i), 66 point (a), and 67 of CRR
                           Own T2 instruments held by the reporting institution or group at the reporting date. Subject to exceptions in article 67 of CRR.
                           Holdings on shares included as “Capital instruments not eligible” shall not be reported in this row.
                           The amount to be reported shall include the share premium related to the own shares.
                           Items 1.2.1.4 to 1.2.1.4.3 do not include actual or contingent obligations to purchase own T2 instruments. Actual or contingent obligations to purchase own T2 instruments are reported separately in item 1.2.1.5.

                           810

                           1.2.1.4.1   (-) Direct holdings of T2 instruments

                           Articles 63 point (b), 66 point (a) and 67 of CRR
                           Tier 2 instruments included in item 1.2.1.1 held by institutions of the consolidated group.

                           840

                           1.2.1.4.2   (-) Indirect holdings of T2 instruments

                           Articles 4(1)(114), 63 point (b), 66 point (a) and 67 of CRR

                           841

                           1.2.1.4.3   (-) Synthetic holdings of T2 instruments

                           Articles 4(1)(126), 63 point (b), 66 point (a) and 67 of CRR

                           842

                           1.2.1.5   (-) Actual or contingent obligations to purchase own T2 instruments

                           Articles 66 point (a) and 67 of CRR
                           According to Article 66 point (a) of CRR, “own Tier 2 instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase as a result of existing contractual obligations” shall be deducted.

                           880

                           1.2.2   Transitional adjustments due to grandfathered T2 Capital instruments and subordinated loans

                           Articles 483(6) and (7), 484, 486, 488, 490 and 491 of CRR
                           Amount of capital instruments transitionally grandfathered as T2. The amount to be reported is directly obtained from CA5.

                           890

                           1.2.3   Instruments issued by subsidiaries that are given recognition in T2 Capital

                           Articles 83, 87 and 88 of CRR
                           Sum of all the amounts of qualifying own funds of subsidiaries that is included in consolidated T2.
                           Qualifying Tier 2 capital issued by a special purpose entity (Article 83 of CRR) shall be included.

                           900

                           1.2.4   Transitional adjustments due to additional recognition in T2 Capital of instruments issued by subsidiaries

                           Article 480 of CRR
                           Adjustments to the qualifying own funds included in consolidated T2 capital due to transitional provisions. This item is obtained directly from CA5.

                           910

                           1.2.5   IRB Excess of provisions over expected losses eligible

                           Article 62 point (d) of CRR
                           For institutions calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts in accordance with IRB approach, this item contains the positive amounts resulting from comparing the provisions and expected losses which are eligible as T2 capital.

                           920

                           1.2.6   SA General credit risk adjustments

                           Article 62 point (c) of CRR
                           For institutions calculating risk-weighted exposure amounts in accordance with standard approach, this item contains the general credit risk adjustments eligible as T2 capital.

                           930

                           1.2.7   (-) Reciprocal cross holdings in T2 Capital

                           Articles 4(1)(122), 66 point (b) and 68 of CRR
                           Holdings in T2 instruments of financial sector entities (as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where there is a reciprocal cross holding that the competent authority considers to have been designed to inflate artificially the own funds of the institution.
                           The amount to be reported shall be calculated on the basis of the gross long positions, and shall include Tier 2 and Tier 3 own-fund insurance items.

                           940

                           1.2.8   (-) T2 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(27), 66 point (c), 68 to 70 and 79 of CRR
                           Part of holdings by the institution of instruments of financial sector entities (as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where the institution does not have a significant investment that has to be deducted from T2.

                           950

                           1.2.9   (-) T2 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(27), 66 point (d), 68, 69 and 79 of CRR
                           Holdings by the institution of T2 instruments of financial sector entities (as defined in Article 4(1)(27) of CRR) where the institution has a significant investment shall be completely deducted.

                           960

                           1.2.10   Other transitional adjustments to T2 Capital

                           Articles 476 to 478 and 481 of CRR
                           Adjustments due to transitional provisions. The amount to be reported shall be directly obtained from CA5.

                           970

                           1.2.11   Excess of deduction from T2 items over T2 Capital (deducted in AT1)

                           Article 56 point (e) of CRR
                           Tier 2 cannot be negative, but it is possible that T2 deductions are greater than T2 Capital plus related share premium. When this happens, T2 shall be equal to zero, and the excess of T2 deductions shall be deducted from AT1.
                           With this item, the sum of items 1.2.1 to 1.2.13 is never lower than zero. If this item shows a positive figure, item 1.1.2.8 shall be the inverse of that figure.

                           974

                           1.2.12   (-) Additional deductions of T2 Capital due to Article 3 CRR

                           Article 3 CRR

                           978

                           1.2.13   T2 capital elements or deductions — other

                           This row is invented to provide flexibility solely for reporting purposes. It shall only be populated in the rare cases that there is no final decision on the reporting of specific capital items/deductions in the current CA1 template. As a consequence, this row shall only be populated if a T2 capital element respective a deduction of a T2 element cannot be assigned to one of the rows 750 to 974.
                           This cell shall not be used to assign capital items/deductions which are not covered by the CRR into the calculation of solvency ratios (e.g. an assignment of national capital items/deductions which are outside the scope of the CRR).

                     1.3.   C 02.00 — OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS (CA2)
               1.3.1.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Row

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                           1.   TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                           Articles 92(3), 95, 96 and 98 of CRR

                           020

                           1*   Of which: Investment firms under Article 95 paragraph 2 and Article 98 of CRR

                           For investment firms under Article 95(2) and Article 98 of CRR

                           030

                           1**   Of which: Investment firms under Article 96 paragraph 2 and Article 97 of CRR

                           For investment firms under Article 96(2) and Article 97 of CRR

                           040

                           1.1   RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNTS FOR CREDIT, COUNTERPARTY CREDIT AND DILUTION RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES

                           Article 92(3) points (a) and (f) of CRR

                           050

                           1.1.1   Standardised approach (SA)

                           CR SA and SEC SA templates at the level of total exposures.

                           060

                           1.1.1.1   SA exposure classes excluding securitisations positions

                           CR SA template at the level of total exposures. The SA exposure classes are those mentioned in Article 112 of CRR excluding securitisation positions.

                           070

                           1.1.1.1.01   Central governments or central banks

                           See CR SA template

                           080

                           1.1.1.1.02   Regional governments or local authorities

                           See CR SA template

                           090

                           1.1.1.1.03   Public sector entities

                           See CR SA template

                           100

                           1.1.1.1.04   Multilateral Development Banks

                           See CR SA template

                           110

                           1.1.1.1.05   International Organisations

                           See CR SA template

                           120

                           1.1.1.1.06   Institutions

                           See CR SA template

                           130

                           1.1.1.1.07   Corporates

                           See CR SA template

                           140

                           1.1.1.1.08   Retail

                           See CR SA template

                           150

                           1.1.1.1.09   Secured by mortgages on immovable property

                           See CR SA template

                           160

                           1.1.1.1.10   Exposures in default

                           See CR SA template

                           170

                           1.1.1.1.11   Items associated with particular high risk

                           See CR SA template

                           180

                           1.1.1.1.12   Covered bonds

                           See CR SA template

                           190

                           1.1.1.1.13   Claims on institutions and corporate with a short-term credit assessment

                           See CR SA template

                           200

                           1.1.1.1.14   Collective investments undertakings (CIU)

                           See CR SA template

                           210

                           1.1.1.1.15   Equity

                           See CR SA template

                           211

                           1.1.1.1.16   Other items

                           See CR SA template

                           220

                           1.1.1.2   Securitisations positions SA

                           CR SEC SA template at the level of total securitisation types

                           230

                           1.1.1.2.*   Of which: resecuritisation

                           CR SEC SA template at the level of total securitisation types

                           240

                           1.1.2   Internal ratings based Approach (IRB)

                           250

                           1.1.2.1   IRB approaches when neither own estimates of LGD nor Conversion Factors are used

                           CR IRB template at the level of total exposures (when own estimates of LGD and/or CCF are not used)

                           260

                           1.1.2.1.01   Central governments and central banks

                           See CR IRB template

                           270

                           1.1.2.1.02   Institutions

                           See CR IRB template

                           280

                           1.1.2.1.03   Corporates — SME

                           See CR IRB template

                           290

                           1.1.2.1.04   Corporates — Specialised Lending

                           See CR IRB template

                           300

                           1.1.2.1.05   Corporates — Other

                           See CR IRB template

                           310

                           1.1.2.2   IRB approaches when own estimates of LGD and/or Conversion Factor are used

                           CR IRB template at the level of total exposures (when own estimates of LGD and/or CCF are used)

                           320

                           1.1.2.2.01   Central governments and central banks

                           See CR IRB template

                           330

                           1.1.2.2.02   Institutions

                           See CR IRB template

                           340

                           1.1.2.2.03   Corporates — SME

                           See CR IRB template

                           350

                           1.1.2.2.04   Corporates — Specialised Lending

                           See CR IRB template

                           360

                           1.1.2.2.05   Corporates — Other

                           See CR IRB template

                           370

                           1.1.2.2.06   Retail — secure by real estate SME

                           See CR IRB template

                           380

                           1.1.2.2.07   Retail — secure by real estate non-SME

                           See CR IRB template

                           390

                           1.1.2.2.08   Retail — Qualifying revolving

                           See CR IRB template

                           400

                           1.1.2.2.09   Retail — Other SME

                           See CR IRB template

                           410

                           1.1.2.2.10   Retail — Other non-SME

                           See CR IRB template

                           420

                           1.1.2.3   Equity IRB

                           See CR EQU IRB template

                           430

                           1.1.2.4   Securitisations positions IRB

                           CR SEC IRB template at the level of total securitisation types

                           440

                           1.1.2.4*   Of which: resecuritisation

                           CR SEC IRB template at the level of total securitisation types

                           450

                           1.1.2.5   Other non credit-obligation assets

                           The amount to be reported is the risk weighted exposure amount as calculated according to Article 156 of CRR.

                           460

                           1.1.3   Risk exposure amount for contributions to the default fund of a CCP

                           Articles 307 to 309 of CRR

                           490

                           1.2   TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT FOR SETTLEMENT/DELIVERY

                           Articles 92(3) point (c) (ii) and 92(4) point (b) of CRR

                           500

                           1.2.1   Settlement/delivery risk in the non-Trading book

                           See CR SETT template

                           510

                           1.2.2   Settlement/delivery risk in the Trading book

                           See CR SETT template

                           520

                           1.3   TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT FOR POSITION, FOREIGN EXCHANGE AND COMMODITIES RISKS

                           Articles 92(3) points (b) (i) and (c) (i) and (iii), and 92(4) point (b) of CRR

                           530

                           1.3.1   Risk exposure amount for position, foreign exchange and commodities risks under standardised approaches (SA)

                           540

                           1.3.1.1   Traded debt instruments

                           MKR SA TDI template at the level of total currencies.

                           550

                           1.3.1.2   Equity

                           MKR SA EQU template at the level of total national markets.

                           560

                           1.3.1.3   Foreign Exchange

                           See MKR SA FX template

                           570

                           1.3.1.4   Commodities

                           See MKR SA COM template

                           580

                           1.3.2   Risk exposure amount for positions, foreign exchange and commodity risks under internal models (IM)

                           See MKR IM template

                           590

                           1.4   TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT FOR OPERATIONAL RISK (OpR)

                           Article 92(3) point (e) and 92(4) point (b) of CRR
                           For investment firms under Article 95(2), Article 96(2) and Article 98 of CRR this element shall be zero.

                           600

                           1.4.1   OpR Basic Indicator approach (BIA)

                           See OPR template

                           610

                           1.4.2   OpR Standardised (TSA)/Alternative Standardised (ASA) approaches

                           See OPR template

                           620

                           1.4.3   OpR Advanced measurement approaches (AMA)

                           See OPR template

                           630

                           1.5   ADDITIONAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT DUE TO FIXED OVERHEADS

                           Articles 95(2), 96(2), 97 and 98(1) point (a) of CRR
                           Only for investment firms under Article 95(2), Article 96(2) and Article 98 of CRR. See also Article 97 of CRR
                           Investment firms under Article 96 of CRR shall report the amount referred to in Article 97 multiplied by 12.5.
                           Investment firms under Article 95 of CRR shall report:

                                       —

                                       If the amount referred to in article 95(2) point (a) of CRR is greater than the amount referred to in article 95(2) point (b) of CRR, the amount to be reported is zero.

                                       —

                                       If the amount referred to in article 95(2) point (b) of CRR is greater than the amount referred to in article 95(2) point (a) of CRR, the amount to be reported is the result of subtracting the latter amount from the former.

                           640

                           1.6   TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT FOR CREDIT VALUATION ADJUSTMENT

                           Article 92(3) point (d) of CRR See CVA template.

                           650

                           1.6.1   Advanced method

                           Own funds requirements for credit valuation adjustment risk according to Article 383 of CRR. See CVA template.

                           660

                           1.6.2   Standardised method

                           Own funds requirements for credit valuation adjustment risk according to Article 384 of CRR. See CVA template.

                           670

                           1.6.3   Based on OEM

                           Own funds requirements for credit valuation adjustment risk according to Article 385 of CRR. See CVA template.

                           680

                           1.7   TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT RELATED TO LARGE EXPOSURES IN THE TRADING BOOK

                           Articles 92(3) point (b) (ii) and 395 to 401 of CRR

                           690

                           1.8   OTHER RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNTS

                           Articles 3, 458 and 459 of CRR and risk exposure amounts which cannot be assigned to one of the items from 1.1 to 1.7.
                           Institutions shall report the amounts needed to comply with the following:

                                       Stricter prudential requirements imposed by the Commission, in accordance with Article 458 and 459 of CRR

                                       Additional risk exposure amounts due to Article 3 CRR

                                 This item does not have a link to a details template.

                           710

                           1.8.2   Of which: Additional stricter prudential requirements based on Art 458

                           Article 458 of CRR

                           720

                           1.8.2*   Of which: requirements for large exposures

                           Article 458 of CRR

                           730

                           1.8.2**   Of which: due to modified risk weights for targeting asset bubbles in the residential and commercial property

                           Article 458 of CRR

                           740

                           1.8.2***   Of which: Of which: due to intra financial sector exposures

                           Article 458 of CRR

                           750

                           1.8.3   Of which: Additional stricter prudential requirements based on Art 459

                           Article 459 of CRR

                           760

                           1.8.4   Of which: Additional risk exposure amount due to Article 3 CRR

                           Article 3 CRR
                           The additional risk exposure amount has to be reported. shall only include the additional amounts (e.g. if an exposure of 100 has a risk-weight of 20 % and the institutions applies a risk weight of 50 % based on article 3 CRR, the amount to be reported is 30).

                     1.4.   C 03.00 — CAPITAL RATIOS AND CAPITAL LEVELS (CA3)
               1.4.1.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Rows

                           010

                           1   CET1 Capital ratio

                           Article 92(2) point (a) of CRR
                           The CET1 capital ratio is the CET1 capital of the institution expressed as a percentage of the total risk exposure amount.

                           020

                           2   Surplus(+)/Deficit(–) of CET1 capital

                           This item shows, in absolute figures, the amount of CET1 capital surplus or deficit relating to the requirement set in Article 92(1) point (a) of CRR (4,5 %), i.e. without taking into account the capital buffers and transitional provisions on the ratio.

                           030

                           3   T1 Capital ratio

                           Article 92(2) point (b) of CRR
                           The T1 capital ratio is the T1 capital of the institution expressed as a percentage of the total risk exposure amount.

                           040

                           4   Surplus(+)/Deficit(–) of T1 capital

                           This item shows, in absolute figures, the amount of T1 capital surplus or deficit relating to the requirement set in Article 92(1) point (b) of CRR (6 %), i.e. without taking into account the capital buffers and transitional provisions on the ratio.

                           050

                           5   Total capital ratio

                           Article 92(2) point (c) of CRR
                           The total capital ratio is the own funds of the institution expressed as a percentage of the total risk exposure amount.

                           060

                           6   Surplus(+)/Deficit(–) of total capital

                           This item shows, in absolute figures, the amount of own funds surplus or deficit relating to the requirement set in Article 92(1) point (c) of CRR (8 %), i.e. without taking into account the capital buffers and transitional provisions on the ratio.

                           070

                              CET1 capital ratio including Pillar II adjustments

                           Article 92(2) point (a) of CRR and Article 104(2) CRD IV
                           This cell only has to be populated if a decision of a competent authority has an impact on the CET1 capital ratio.

                           080

                              Target CET1 capital ratio due to Pillar II adjustments

                           Article 104(2) CRD IV
                           This cell only has to be populated if a competent authority decides that an institution has to meet a higher target CET1capital ratio.

                           090

                              T1 capital ratio including Pillar II adjustments

                           Article 92(2) point (b) of CRR and Article 104(2) CRD IV
                           This cell only has to be populated if a decision of a competent authority has an impact on the T1 capital ratio.

                           100

                              Target T1 capital ratio due to Pillar II adjustments

                           Article 104(2) CRD IV
                           This cell only has to be populated if a competent authority decides that an institution has to meet a higher target T1 capital ratio.

                           110

                              Total capital ratio including Pillar II adjustments

                           Article 92(2) point (c) of CRR and Article 104(2) CRD IV
                           This cell only has to be populated if a decision of a competent authority has an impact on the total capital ratio.

                           120

                              Target Total capital ratio due to Pillar II adjustments

                           Article 104(2) CRD IV
                           This cell only has to be populated if a competent authority decides that an institution has to meet a higher target total capital ratio.

                     1.5.   C 04.00 — MEMORANDUM ITEMS (CA4)
               1.5.1.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Rows

                           010

                           1.   Total deferred tax assets

                           The amount reported in this item shall be equal to the amount reported in the latest verified/audited accounting balance sheet.

                           020

                           1.1   Deferred tax assets that do not rely on future profitability

                           Article 39 of CRR
                           Deferred tax assets that do not rely on future profitability, and thus are subject to the application of a risk weight.

                           030

                           1.2   Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and do not arise from temporary differences

                           Articles 36(1) point (c) and 38 of CRR
                           Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability, but do not arise from temporary differences, and thus are not subject to any threshold (i.e. are completely deducted from CET1).

                           040

                           1.3   Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences

                           Articles 36(1) point (c); 38 and 48(1) point (a) of CRR
                           Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences, and thus, their deduction from CET1 is subject to 10 % and 17,65 % thresholds in Article 48 of CRR.

                           050

                           2   Total deferred tax liabilities

                           The amount reported in this item shall be equal to the amount reported in the latest verified/audited accounting balance sheet.

                           060

                           2.1   Deferred tax liabilities non deductible from deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability

                           Article 38(3) and (4) of CRR
                           Deferred tax liabilities for which conditions in Article 38(3) and (4) of CRR are not met. Hence, this item shall include the deferred tax liabilities that reduce the amount of goodwill, other intangible assets or defined benefit pension fund assets required to be deducted, which are reported, respectively, in CA1 items 1.1.1.10.3, 1.1.1.11.2 and 1.1.1.14.2.

                           070

                           2.2   Deferred tax liabilities deductible from deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability

                           Article 38 of CRR

                           080

                           2.2.1   Deductible deferred tax liabilities associated with deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and do not arise from temporary differences

                           Article 38(3), (4) and (5) of CRR
                           Deferred tax liabilities which may reduce the amount of deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability, according to Article 38(3) and (4) of CRR, and are not allocated to deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences, according to Article 38(5) of CRR

                           090

                           2.2.2   Deductible deferred tax liabilities associated with deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences

                           Article 38(3), (4) and (5) of CRR
                           Deferred tax liabilities which may reduce the amount of deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability, according to Article 38(3) and (4) of CRR, and are allocated to deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences, according to Article 38(5) of CRR

                           100

                           3.   IRB excess (+) or shortfall (–) of credit risk adjustments, additional value adjustments and other own funds reductions to expected losses for non defaulted exposures

                           Articles 36(1) point (d), 62 point (d), 158 and 159 of CRR
                           This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions.

                           110

                           3.1   Total credit risk adjustments, additional value adjustments and other own funds reductions eligible for inclusion in the calculation of the expected loss amount

                           Article 159 of CRR
                           This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions.

                           120

                           3.1.1   General credit risk adjustments

                           Article 159 of CRR
                           This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions.

                           130

                           3.1.2   Specific credit risk adjustments

                           Article 159 of CRR
                           This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions.

                           131

                           3.1.3   Additional value adjustments and other own funds reductions

                           Articles 34, 110 and 159 of CRR
                           This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions.

                           140

                           3.2   Total expected losses eligible

                           Articles 158(5), (6) and (10), and 159 of CRR
                           This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions. Only the expected loss related to non defaulted exposures shall be reported.

                           145

                           4   IRB excess (+) or shortfall (–) of specific credit risk adjustments to expected losses for defaulted exposures

                           Articles 36(1) point (d), 62 point (d), 158 and 159 of CRR
                           This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions.

                           150

                           4.1   Specific credit risk adjustments and positions treated similarily

                           Article 159 of CRR
                           This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions.

                           155

                           4.2   Total expected losses eligible

                           Articles 158(5), (6) and (10), and 159 of CRR
                           This item shall only be reported by IRB institutions. Only the expected loss related to defaulted exposures shall be reported.

                           160

                           5   Risk weighted exposure amounts for calculating the cap to the excess of provision eligible as T2

                           Article 62 point (d) of CRR
                           For IRB institutions, according to Article 62 point (d) of CRR, the excess amount of provisions (to expected losses) eligible for inclusion in Tier 2 capital is capped at 0,6 % of risk-weighted exposure amounts calculated with the IRB approach.
                           The amount to be reported in this item is the risk weighted exposure amounts (i.e. not multiplied by 0,6 %) which is the base for calculating the cap.

                           170

                           6   Total gross provisions eligible for inclusion in T2 capital

                           Article 62 point (c) of CRR
                           This item includes the general credit risk adjustments that are eligible for inclusion in T2 capital, before cap.
                           The amount to be reported shall be gross of tax effects.

                           180

                           7   Risk weighted exposure amounts for calculating the cap to the provision eligible as T2

                           Article 62 point (c) of CRR
                           According to Article 62 point (c) of CRR, the credit risk adjustments eligible for inclusion in Tier 2 capital is capped at 1,25 % of risk-weighted exposure amounts.
                           The amount to be reported in this item is the risk weighted exposure amounts (i.e. not multiplied by 1,25 %) which is the base for calculating the cap.

                           190

                           8   Threshold non deductible of holdings in financial sector entities where an institution does not have a significant investment

                           Article 46(1) point (a) of CRR
                           This item contains the threshold up to which holdings in a financial sector entity where an institution does not have a significant investment are not deducted. The amount results from adding up all items which are the base of the threshold and multiplying the sum thus obtained by 10 %.

                           200

                           9   10 % CET1 threshold

                           Article 48(1) points (a) and (b) of CRR
                           This item contains the 10 % threshold for holdings in financial sector entities where an institution has a significant investment, and for deferred tax assets that are dependent on future profitability and arise from temporary differences.
                           The amount results from adding up all items which are the base of the threshold and multiplying the sum thus obtained by 10 %.

                           210

                           10   17,65 % CET1 threshold

                           Article 48(1) of CRR
                           This item contains the 17,65 % threshold for holdings in financial sector entities where an institution has a significant investment, and for deferred tax assets that are dependent on future profitability and arise from temporary differences, to be applied after the 10 % threshold.
                           The threshold is calculated so that the amount of the two items that is recognised must not exceed 15 % of the Common Equity Tier 1 capital, calculated after all deductions, not including any adjustment due to transitional provisions.

                           225

                           11.1   Eligible capital for the purposes of qualifying holdings outside the financial sector

                           Article 4(1)(71)(a)

                           226

                           11.2   Eligible capital for the purposes of large exposures

                           Article 4(1)(71)(b)

                           230

                           12   Holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment, net of short positions

                           Articles 44 to 46 and 49 of CRR

                           240

                           12.1   Direct holdings of CET1 capital Direct holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 44, 45, 46 and 49 of CRR

                           250

                           12.1.1   Gross direct holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 44, 46 and 49 of CRR
                           Direct holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment, excluding:

                                       a)

                                       Underwriting positions held for 5 working days or fewer;

                                       b)

                                       The amounts relating to the investments for which any alternative in article 49 is applied; and

                                       c)

                                       Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 36(1) point (g) of CRR

                           260

                           12.1.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above

                           Article 45 of CRR
                           Article 45 of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year.

                           270

                           12.2   Indirect holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(114), 44 and 45 of CRR

                           280

                           12.2.1   Gross indirect holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(114), 44 and 45 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported is the indirect holdings in the trading book of the capital instruments of financial sector entities that take the form of holdings of index securities. It is obtained by calculating the underlying exposure to the capital instruments of the financial sector entities in the indices.
                           Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 36(1) point (g) of CRR shall not be included

                           290

                           12.2.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above

                           Articles 4(1)(114) and 45 of CRR
                           Article 45 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year.

                           291

                           12.3.1   Synthetic holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(126), 44 and 45 of CRR

                           292

                           12.3.2   Gross synthetic holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(126), 44 and 45 of CRR

                           293

                           12.3.3   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above

                           Articles 4(1)(126) and 45 of CRR

                           300

                           13   Holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment, net of short positions

                           Articles 58 to 60 of CRR

                           310

                           13.1   Direct holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 58, 59 and 60(2) of CRR

                           320

                           13.1.1   Gross direct holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 58 and 60(2) of CRR
                           Direct holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment, excluding:

                                       a)

                                       Underwriting positions held for 5 working days or fewer; and

                                       b)

                                       Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 56 point (b) of CRR

                           330

                           13.1.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above

                           Article 59 of CRR
                           Article 59 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year.

                           340

                           13.2   Indirect holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(114), 58 and 59 of CRR

                           350

                           13.2.1   Gross indirect holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(114), 58 and 59 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported is the indirect holdings in the trading book of the capital instruments of financial sector entities that take the form of holdings of index securities. It is obtained by calculating the underlying exposure to the capital instruments of the financial sector entities in the indices.
                           Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 56 point (b) of CRR shall not be included

                           360

                           13.2.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above

                           Articles 4(1)(114) and 59 of CRR
                           Article 59 (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year.

                           361

                           13.3   Synthetic holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(126), 58 and 59 of CRR

                           362

                           13.3.1   Gross synthetic holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(126), 58 and 59 of CRR

                           363

                           13.3.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above

                           Articles 4(1)(126) and 59 of CRR

                           370

                           14.   Holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment, net of short positions

                           Articles 68 to 70 of CRR

                           380

                           14.1   Direct holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 68, 69 and 70(2) of CRR

                           390

                           14.1.1   Gross direct holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 68 and 70(2) of CRR
                           Direct holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment, excluding:

                                       a)

                                       Underwriting positions held for 5 working days or fewer; and

                                       b)

                                       Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 66 point (b) of CRR

                           400

                           14.1.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above

                           Article 69 of CRR
                           Article 69 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year.

                           410

                           14.2   Indirect holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Article 4(1)(114), 68 and 69 of CRR

                           420

                           14.2.1   Gross indirect holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(114), 68 and 69 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported is the indirect holdings in the trading book of the capital instruments of financial sector entities that take the form of holdings of index securities. It is obtained by calculating the underlying exposure to the capital instruments of the financial sector entities in the indices.
                           Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 66 point (b) of CRR shall not be included

                           430

                           14.2.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above

                           Articles 4(1)(114) and 69 of CRR
                           Article 69 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year.

                           431

                           14.3   Synthetic holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(126), 68 and 69 of CRR

                           432

                           14.3.1   Gross synthetic holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(126), 68 and 69 of CRR

                           433

                           14.3.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above

                           Articles 4(1)(126) and 69 of CRR

                           440

                           15   Holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment, net of short positions

                           Articles 44, 45, 47 and 49 of CRR

                           450

                           15.1   Direct holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 44, 45, 47 and 49 of CRR

                           460

                           15.1.1   Gross direct holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 44, 45, 47 and 49 of CRR
                           Direct holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment, excluding:

                                       a)

                                       Underwriting positions held for 5 working days or fewer;

                                       b)

                                       The amounts relating to the investments for which any alternative in article 49 is applied; and

                                       c)

                                       Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 36(1) point (g) of CRR

                           470

                           15.1.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above

                           Article 45 of CRR
                           Article 45 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year.

                           480

                           15.2   Indirect holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(114), 44 and 45 of CRR

                           490

                           15.2.1   Gross indirect holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(114), 44 and 45 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported shall be the indirect holdings in the trading book of the capital instruments of financial sector entities that take the form of holdings of index securities. It shall be obtained by calculating the underlying exposure to the capital instruments of the financial sector entities in the indices.
                           Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 36(1) point (g) of CRR shall not be included.

                           500

                           15.2.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above

                           Articles 4(1)(114) and 45 of CRR
                           Article 45 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year.

                           501

                           15.3   Synthetic holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(126), 44 and 45 of CRR

                           502

                           15.3.1   Gross synthetic holdings of CET1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(126), 44 and 45 of CRR

                           503

                           15.3.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above

                           Articles 4(1)(126) and 45 of CRR

                           510

                           16   Holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment, net of short positions

                           Articles 58 and 59 of CRR

                           520

                           16.1   Direct holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 58 and 59 of CRR

                           530

                           16.1.1   Gross direct holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Article 58 of CRR
                           Direct holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment, excluding:

                                       a)

                                       Underwriting positions held for 5 working days or fewer (Article 56 point (d); and

                                       b)

                                       Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 56 point (b) of CRR

                           540

                           16.1.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above

                           Article 59 of CRR
                           Article 59 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year.

                           550

                           16.2   Indirect holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(114), 58 and 59 of CRR

                           560

                           16.2.1   Gross indirect holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(114), 58 and 59 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported shall be the indirect holdings in the trading book of the capital instruments of financial sector entities that take the form of holdings of index securities. It shall be obtained by calculating the underlying exposure to the capital instruments of the financial sector entities in the indices.
                           Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 56 point (b) of CRR shall not be included.

                           570

                           16.2.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above

                           Article 4(1)(114) and 59 of CRR
                           Article 59 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year.

                           571

                           16.3   Synthetic holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(126), 58 and 59 of CRR

                           572

                           16.3.1   Gross synthetic holdings of AT1 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(126), 58 and 59 of CRR

                           573

                           16.3.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above

                           Articles 4(1)(126) and 59 of CRR

                           580

                           17   Holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment, net of short positions

                           Articles 68 and 69 of CRR

                           590

                           17.1   Direct holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 68 and 69 of CRR

                           600

                           17.1.1   Gross direct holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Article 68 of CRR
                           Direct holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment, excluding:

                                       a)

                                       Underwriting positions held for 5 working days or fewer (Article 66 point (d); and

                                       b)

                                       Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 66 point (b) of CRR

                           610

                           17.1.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the direct gross holdings included above

                           Article 69 of CRR
                           Article 69 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year.

                           620

                           17.2   Indirect holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(114), 68 and 69 of CRR

                           630

                           17.2.1   Gross indirect holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(114), 68 and 69 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported shall be the indirect holdings in the trading book of the capital instruments of financial sector entities that take the form of holdings of index securities. It shall be obtained by calculating the underlying exposure to the capital instruments of the financial sector entities in the indices.
                           Holdings which are treated as reciprocal cross holdings according to article 66 point (b) of CRR shall not be included

                           640

                           17.2.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the indirect gross holdings included above

                           Articles 4(1)(114), 69 of CRR
                           Article 69 point (a) of CRR allows offsetting short positions in the same underlying exposure provided the maturity of the short position matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year.

                           641

                           17.3   Synthetic holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(126), 68 and 69 of CRR

                           642

                           17.3.1   Gross synthetic holdings of T2 capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 4(1)(126), 68 and 69 of CRR

                           643

                           17.3.2   (-) Permitted offsetting short positions in relation to the synthetic gross holdings included above

                           Articles 4(1)(126) and 69 of CRR

                           650

                           18   Risk weighted exposures of CET1 holdings in financial sector entities which are not deducted from the institution's CET1 capital

                           Article 46(4), 48(4) and 49(4) of CRR

                           660

                           19   Risk weighted exposures of AT1 holdings in financial sector entities which are not deducted from the institution's AT1 capital

                           Article 60(4) of CRR

                           670

                           20   Risk weighted exposures of T2 holdings in financial sector entities which are not deducted from the institution's T2 capital

                           Article 70(4) of CRR

                           680

                           21   Holdings on CET1 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment temporary waived

                           Article 79 of CRR
                           A competent authority may waive on a temporary basis the provisions on deductions from CET1 due to holdings on instruments of a specific financial sector entity, when it deems those holdings to be for the purposes of a financial assistance operation designed to reorganise and save that entity.
                           Note that these instruments shall also be reported on item 12.1.

                           690

                           22   Holdings on CET1 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment temporary waived

                           Article 79 of CRR
                           A competent authority may waive on a temporary basis the provisions on deductions from CET1 due to holdings on instruments of a specific financial sector entity, when it deems those holdings to be for the purposes of a financial assistance operation designed to reorganise and save that entity.
                           Note that these instruments shall also be reported on item 15.1.

                           700

                           23   Holdings on AT1 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment temporary waived

                           Article 79 of CRR
                           A competent authority may waive on a temporary basis the provisions on deductions from AT1 due to holdings on instruments of a specific financial sector entity, when it deems those holdings to be for the purposes of a financial assistance operation designed to reorganise and save that entity.
                           Note that these instruments shall also be reported on item 13.1.

                           710

                           24   Holdings on AT1 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment temporary waived

                           Article 79 of CRR
                           A competent authority may waive on a temporary basis the provisions on deductions from AT1 due to holdings on instruments of a specific financial sector entity, when it deems those holdings to be for the purposes of a financial assistance operation designed to reorganise and save that entity.
                           Note that these instruments shall also be reported on item 16.1.

                           720

                           25   Holdings on T2 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment temporary waived

                           Article 79 of CRR
                           A competent authority may waive on a temporary basis the provisions on deductions from T2 due to holdings on instruments of a specific financial sector entity, when it deems those holdings to be for the purposes of a financial assistance operation designed to reorganise and save that entity.
                           Note that these instruments shall also be reported on item 14.1.

                           730

                           26   Holdings on T2 Capital Instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment temporary waived

                           Article 79 of CRR
                           A competent authority may waive on a temporary basis the provisions on deductions from T2 due to holdings on instruments of a specific financial sector entity, when it deems those holdings to be for the purposes of a financial assistance operation designed to reorganise and save that entity.
                           Note that these instruments shall also be reported on item 17.1.

                           740

                           27   Combined buffer requirement

                           Article 128 point (6) of CRD

                           750

                              Capital conservation buffer

                           Articles 128 point (1) and 129 of CRD
                           According to Article 129(1) the capital conservation buffer is an additional amount of Common Equity Tier 1 capital. Due to the fact that the capital conservation buffer rate of 2,5 % is stable, an amount shall be reported in this cell.

                           760

                              Conservation buffer due to macro-prudential or systemic risk identified at the level of a Member State

                           Article 458(2) point d (iv) of CRR
                           In this cell the amount of the conservation buffer due to macro-prudential or systemic risk identified at the level of a Member State, which can be requested according to Article 458 CRR in addition to the capital conservation buffer shall be reported.

                           770

                              Institution specific countercyclical capital buffer

                           Articles 128 point (2), 130, 135-140 of CRD

                           780

                              Systemic risk buffer

                           Articles 128 point (5), 133 and 134 of CRD

                           790

                              Systemically important institution buffer

                           Article 131 of CRD
                           Institutions shall report the amount of the Systemically important institution buffer which is applicable on a consolidated basis.

                           800

                              Global Systemically Important Institution buffer

                           Articles 128 point (3) and 131 of CRD

                           810

                              Other Systemically Important Institution buffer

                           Articles 128 point (4) and 131 of CRD

                           820

                           28   Own funds requirements related to Pillar II adjustments

                           Article 104(2) of CRD.
                           If a competent authority decides that an institution has to calculate additional own funds requirements for Pillar II reasons, those additional own funds requirements shall be reported in this cell.

                           830

                           29   Initial capital

                           Articles 12, 28 to 31of CRD and Article 93 of CRR

                           840

                           30   Own funds based on Fixed Overheads

                           Articles 96(2) point (b), 97 and 98(1) point (a) of CRR

                           850

                           31   Non-domestic original exposures

                           Information necessary to calculate the threshold for reporting of the CR GB template according to Article 5(a)(4) of ITS. The calculation of the threshold shall be done at the basis of the original exposure pre conversion factor.
                           Exposures shall be deemed to be domestic where they are exposures to counterparties located in the Member State where the institution is located.

                           860

                           32   Total original exposures

                           Information necessary to calculate the threshold for reporting of the CR GB template according to Article 5(a)(4) of ITS. The calculation of the threshold shall be done at the basis of the original exposure pre conversion factor.
                           Exposures shall be deemed to be domestic where they are exposures to counterparties located in the Member State where the institution is located.

                           870

                              Adjustments to total own funds

                           Article 500(4) of CRR

                           880

                              Own funds fully adjusted for Basel I floor

                           Article 500(1) point (b) and (4) of CRR

                           890

                              Own funds requirements for Basel I floor

                           Article 500(1) point (b) of CRR

                           900

                              Own funds requirements for Basel I floor — SA alternative

                           Article 500(2) and (3) of CRR

                     1.6.   TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS AND GRANDFATHERED INSTRUMENTS: INSTRUMENTS NOT CONSTITUTING STATE AID (CA 5)
               1.6.1.   General remarks

                           15.

                           CA5 summarizes the calculation of own funds elements and deductions subject to the transitional provisions laid down in Articles 465 to 491 of CRR.

                           16.

                           CA5 is structured as follows:

                                       a.

                                       Template 5.1 summarizes the total adjustments which need to be made to the different components of own funds (reported in CA1 according to the final provisions) as a consequence of the application of the transitional provisions. The elements of this table are presented as “adjustments” to the different capital components in CA1, in order to reflect in own funds components the effects of the transitional provisions.

                                       b.

                                       Template 5.2 provides further details on the calculation of those grandfathered instruments which do not constitute state aid.

                           17.

                           Institutions shall report in the first four columns the adjustments to Common Equity Tier 1 capital, Additional Tier 1 capital and Tier 2 capital as well as the amount to be treated as risk weighted assets. Institutions are also required to report the applicable percentage in column 050 and the eligible amount without the recognition of transitional provisions in column 060.

                           18.

                           Institutions shall only report elements in CA5 during the period where transitional provisions in accordance with Part Ten of CRR apply.

                           19.

                           Some of the transitional provisions require a deduction from Tier 1. If this is the case the residual amount of a deduction or deductions is applied to Tier 1 and there is insufficient AT1 to absorb this amount then the excess shall be deducted from CET1.

                     1.6.2.   C 05.01 — Transitional provisions (CA5.1)

                           20.

                           Institutions shall report in Table 5.1 the transitional provisions to own funds components as laid down in Articles 465 to 491 of CRR, compared to applying the final provisions laid down in Title II of Part Two of CRR.

                           21.

                           Institutions shall report in rows 020 to 060 information in relation with the transitional provisions of grandfathered instruments. The figures to be reported in columns 010 to 030 of row 060 of CA 5.1 can be derived from the respective sections of CA 5.2.

                           22.

                           Institutions shall report in rows 070 to 092 information in relation with the transitional provisions of minority interests and additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 instruments issued by subsidiaries (in accordance with Articles 479 and 480 of CRR).

                           23.

                           In rows 100 onwards institutions shall report information in relation with the transitional provisions of unrealized gains and losses, deductions as well as additional filters and deductions.

                           24.

                           There might be cases where the transitional deductions of CET1, AT1 or T2 capital exceed the CET1, AT1 or T2 capital of an institution. This effect — if it results from transitional provisions — shall be shown in the CA1 template using the respective cells. As a consequence, the adjustments in the columns of the CA5 template do not include any spill-over effects in the case of insufficient capital available.

                     1.6.2.1.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           010

                              Adjustments to CET1

                           020

                              Adjustments to AT1

                           030

                              Adjustments to T2

                           040

                              Adjustments included in RWAs

                           Column 050 includes the relevant residual amount, i.e. prior the application of provisions of Chapter 2 or 3 of Part Three of CRR.
                           Whereas columns 010 to 030 have a direct link to the CA1 template, the adjustments included in RWA do not have a direct link to the relevant templates for credit risk. If there are adjustments stemming from the transitional provisions to the RWA, those adjustments shall be included directly in the CR SA, CR IRB or CR EQU IRB. Additionally, those effects shall be reported in column 040 of CA5.1. As a consequence, those amounts are only memorandum items.

                           050

                              Applicable percentage

                           060

                              Eligible amount without transitional provisions

                           Column 060 includes the amount of each instrument prior the application of transitional provisions. I.e. the basis amount relevant to calculate the adjustments.

                           Rows

                           010

                           1.   Total adjustments

                           This row reflects the overall effect of transitional adjustments in the different types of capital, plus the risk weighted amounts arising from these adjustments

                           020

                           1.1   Grandfathered instruments

                           Articles 483 to 491 of CRR
                           This row reflects the overall effect of instruments transitionally grandfathered in the different types of capital.

                           030

                           1.1.1   Grandfathered instruments: Instruments constituting state aid

                           Article 483 CRR

                           040

                           1.1.1.1   Instruments that qualified as own funds according to 2006/48/EC

                           Article 483(1) (2), (4) and (6) of CRR

                           050

                           1.1.1.2   Instruments issued by institutions that are incorporated in a Member State that is subject to an Economic Adjustment Programme

                           Article 483(1), (3), (5), (7) and (8) of CRR

                           060

                           1.1.2   Instruments not constituting state aid

                           The amounts to be reported shall be obtained from column 060 of table CA 5.2.

                           070

                           1.2   Minority interests and equivalents

                           Articles 479 and 480 of CRR
                           This row reflects the effects of transitional provisions in the minority interests eligible as CET1; the qualifying T1 instruments eligible as consolidated AT1; and the qualifying own funds eligible as consolidated T2.

                           080

                           1.2.1   Capital instruments and items that do not qualify as minority interests

                           Articles 479 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row shall be the amount qualifying as consolidated reserves in accordance with prior regulation.

                           090

                           1.2.2   Transitional recognition in consolidated own funds of minority interests

                           Articles 84 and 480 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row shall be the eligible amount without transitional provisions.

                           091

                           1.2.3   Transitional recognition in consolidated own funds of qualifying Additional Tier 1 capital

                           Article 85 and 480 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row shall be the eligible amount without transitional provisions.

                           092

                           1.2.4   Transitional recognition in consolidated own funds of qualifying Tier 2 capital

                           Article 87 and 480 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row shall be the eligible amount without transitional provisions.

                           100

                           1.3   Other transitional adjustments

                           Articles 467 to 478 and 481 of CRR
                           This row reflects the overall effect of transitional adjustments in the deduction to different types of capital, unrealised gains and losses, additional filters and deductions plus the risk weighted amounts arising from these adjustments.

                           110

                           1.3.1   Unrealised gains and losses

                           Articles 467 and 468 of CRR
                           This row reflects the overall effect of transitional provisions on unrealized gains and losses measured at fair value.

                           120

                           1.3.1.1   Unrealised gains

                           Article 468(1) of CRR

                           130

                           1.3.1.2   Unrealised losses

                           Article 467(1) of CRR

                           133

                           1.3.1.3   Unrealised gains on exposures to central governments classified in the “Available for sale” category of EU-endorsed IAS39

                           Article 468 of CRR

                           136

                           1.3.1.4   Unrealised loss on exposures to central governments classified in the “Available for sale” category of EU-endorsed IAS39

                           Article 467 of CRR

                           138

                           1.3.1.5   Fair value gains and losses arising from the institution's own credit risk related to derivative liabilities

                           Article 468 of CRR

                           140

                           1.3.2   Deductions

                           Articles 36(1), 469 to 478 of CRR
                           This row reflects the overall effect of transitional provisions on deductions.

                           150

                           1.3.2.1.   Losses for the current financial year

                           Articles 36(1) point (a), 469 (1), 472 (3) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row shall be the original deduction according to Article 36(1)(a) of CRR.
                           Where firms have only been required to deduct material losses:

                                       —

                                       where the total interim net loss was “material”, the full residual amount would be deducted from Tier 1, or

                                       —

                                       where the whole total interim net loss was not “material”, no deduction of residual amount would be made.

                           160

                           1.3.2.2.   Intangible assets

                           Articles 36(1) point (b), 469 (1), 472 (4) and 478 of CRR
                           When determining the amount of intangible assets to be deducted, institutions shall take into account the provisions of Article 37 of CRR.
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row shall be the original deduction Article 36(1)(b) of CRR.

                           170

                           1.3.2.3.   Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability and do not arise from temporary differences

                           Articles 36(1) point (c), 469 (1), 472 (5) and 478 of CRR
                           When determining the amount of the above-mentioned deferred tax assets (DTA) to be deducted, institutions shall take into account the provisions of Article 38 of CRR relating to the reduction of DTA by deferred tax liabilities.
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Total amount according to Article 469(1) c) of CRR.

                           180

                           1.3.2.4.   IRB shortfall of provisions to expected losses

                           Articles 36(1) point (d), 469 (1), 472 (6) and 478 of CRR
                           When determining the amount of the above-mentioned IRB shortfall of provisions to expected losses to be deducted, institutions shall take into account the provisions of Article 40 of CRR.
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction Article 36(1)(d) of CRR

                           190

                           1.3.2.5.   Defined benefit pension fund assets

                           Articles 33(1) point (e), 469 (1), 472 (7), 473 and 478 of CRR
                           When determining the amount of the above-mentioned defined benefit pension fund assets to be deducted, institutions shall take into account the provisions of Article 41 of CRR.
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction Article 36(1)(e) of CRR

                           194

                           1.3.2.5.*   of which: Introduction of amendments to IAS 19 — positive item

                           Article 473 of CRR

                           198

                           1.3.2.5.**   of which: Introduction of amendments to IAS 19 — negative item

                           Article 473 of CRR

                           200

                           1.3.2.6.   Own instruments

                           Articles 36(1) point (f), 469 (1), 472 (8) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction Article 36(1)(f) of CRR

                           210

                           1.3.2.6.1   Own CET1 instruments

                           Articles 36(1) point (f), 469 (1), 472 (8) and 478 of CRR
                           When determining the amount of the above-mentioned Own Common Equity Tier 1 instruments to be deducted, institutions shall take into account the provisions of Article 42 of CRR.
                           Given that the treatment of the “residual amount” differs depending upon the nature of the instrument, institutions shall break down holdings in own Common Equity instruments according to “direct” and “indirect” holdings.
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction Article 36(1)(f) of CRR.

                           211

                           1.3.2.6.1**   of which: Direct holdings

                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Total amount of direct holdings, including instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase by virtue of an existing or contingent contractual obligation, Article 469(1)(b), 472 (8) (a) of CRR.

                           212

                           1.3.2.6.1*   of which: Indirect holdings

                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Total amount of indirect holdings, including instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase by virtue of an existing or contingent contractual obligation, Article 469(1)(b), 472 (8) (b) of CRR.

                           220

                           1.3.2.6.2   Own AT1 instruments

                           Articles 56 point (a), 474, 475(2) and 478 of CRR
                           When determining the amount of the above-mentioned holdings to be deducted, institutions shall take into account the provisions of Article 57 of CRR.
                           Given that the treatment of the “residual amount” differs depending upon the nature of the instrument (Article 475(2) of CRR), institutions shall break down the above-mentioned holdings according to “direct” and “indirect” own Additional Tier 1 holdings.
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction Article 56 (a) of CRR.

                           221

                           1.3.2.6.2**   of which: Direct holdings

                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Total amount of direct holdings, including instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase by virtue of an existing or contingent contractual obligation, Articles 474 (b) and 475 (2) (a) of CRR.

                           222

                           1.3.2.6.2*   of which: Indirect holdings

                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Total amount of indirect holdings, including instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase by virtue of an existing or contingent contractual obligation, Article 474 (b), 475 (2) (b) of CRR.

                           230

                           1.3.2.6.3   Own T2 instruments

                           Articles 66 point (a), 476, 477(2) and 478 of CRR
                           When determining the amount of the holdings to be deducted, institutions shall take into account the provisions of Article 67 of CRR.
                           Given that the treatment of the “residual amount” differs depending upon the nature of the instrument (Article 477(2) of CRR), institutions shall break down the above-mentioned holdings according to “direct” and “indirect” own Tier 2 holdings.
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction Article 66 (a) of CRR.

                           231

                              of which: Direct holdings

                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Total amount of direct holdings, including instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase by virtue of an existing or contingent contractual obligation, Articles 476 (b) and 477 (2) (a) of CRR

                           232

                              of which: Indirect holdings

                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Total amount of indirect holdings, including instruments that an institution could be obliged to purchase by virtue of an existing or contingent contractual obligation, Articles 476 (b) and 477 (2) (b) of CRR

                           240

                           1.3.2.7.   Reciprocal cross holdings

                           Given that the treatment of the “residual amount” differs depending whether the holding of Common Equity Tier 1, Additional Tier 1 or Tier 2 in the financial sector entity is to be considered being significant or not (Articles 472(9), 475 (3) and 477 (3) of CRR), institutions shall break down reciprocal cross holdings according to significant investments and non-significant investments.

                           250

                           1.3.2.7.1   Reciprocal cross holdings in CET1 Capital

                           Articles 36(1) point (g), 469 (1), 472(9) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction Article 36(1)(g) of CRR

                           260

                           1.3.2.7.1.1   Reciprocal cross holdings in CET1 Capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 36(1) point (g), 469 (1), 472(9) point (a) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Residual amount according to Article 469(1)(b) of CRR

                           270

                           1.3.2.7.1.2   Reciprocal cross holdings in CET1 Capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 36(1) point (g), 469 (1), 472(9) point (b) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Residual amount according to Article 469(1)(b) of CRR

                           280

                           1.3.2.7.2   Reciprocal cross holdings in AT1 Capital

                           Articles 56 point (b), 474, 475(3) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction Article 56 (b) of CRR

                           290

                           1.3.2.7.2.1   Reciprocal cross holdings in AT1 Capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 56 point (b), 474, 475(3) point (a) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Residual amount according to Article 475(3) of CRR

                           300

                           1.3.2.7.2.2   Reciprocal cross holdings in AT1 Capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 56 point (b), 474, 475(3) point (b) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Residual amount according to Article 475(3) of CRR

                           310

                           1.3.2.7.3   Reciprocal cross holdings in T2 Capital

                           Articles 66 point (b), 476, 477(3) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction Article 66 (b) of CRR

                           320

                           1.3.2.7.3.1   Reciprocal cross holdings in T2 Capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 66 point (b), 476, 477(3) point (a) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Residual amount according to Article 477(3) of CRR

                           330

                           1.3.2.7.3.2   Reciprocal cross holdings in T2 Capital of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 66 point (b), 476, 477(3) point (b) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Residual amount according to Article 477(3) of CRR

                           340

                           1.3.2.8.   Own funds instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           350

                           1.3.2.8.1   CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 36(1) point (h), 469 (1), 472(10) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction Article 36(1)(h) of CRR

                           360

                           1.3.2.8.2   AT1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 56 point (c), 474, 475(4) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction Article 56 (c) of CRR

                           370

                           1.3.2.8.3   T2 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment

                           Articles 66 point (c), 476, 477(4) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction Article 66 (c) of CRR

                           380

                           1.3.2.9   Deferred tax assets that are dependent on future profitability and arise from temporary differences and CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Article 470(2) and (3) of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Article 470(1) of CRR

                           390

                           1.3.2.10   Own funds instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           400

                           1.3.2.10.1   CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 36(1) point (i), 469 (1), 472(11) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction Article 36(1)(i) of CRR

                           410

                           1.3.2.10.2   AT1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 56 point (d), 474, 475(4) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction Article 56 (d) of CRR

                           420

                           1.3.2.10.2   T2 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment

                           Articles 66 point (d), 476, 477(4) and 478 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported in column 060 of this row: Original deduction Article 66 (d) of CRR

                           425

                           1.3.2.11   Exemption from deduction of Equity Holdings in Insurance Companies from CET 1 Items

                           Article 471 of CRR

                           430

                           1.3.3   Additional filters and deductions

                           Article 481 of CRR
                           This row reflects the overall effect of transitional provisions on additional filters and deductions.
                           In accordance with Article 481 of CRR, institutions shall report in item 1.3.3 information relating to the filters and deductions required under the national transposition measures for Articles 57 and 66 of Directive 2006/48/EC and for Articles 13 and 16 of Directive 2006/49/EC, and which are not required in accordance with Part Two.

                     1.6.3.   C 05.02 — Grandfathered instruments: instruments not constituing state aid (CA5.2)

                           25.

                           Institutions shall report information in relation with the transitional provisions of grandfathered instruments not constituting state aid (Article 484 to 491 of CRR).

                     1.6.3.1.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           010

                              Amount of instruments plus related share premium

                           Article 484(3) to (5) of CRR
                           Instruments which are eligible for each respective row, including their related share premiums.

                           020

                              Base for calculating the limit

                           Articles 486(2) to (4) of CRR

                           030

                              Applicable percentage

                           Article 486(5) of CRR

                           040

                              Limit

                           Article 486(2) to (5) of CRR

                           050

                              (-) Amount that exceeds the limits for grandfathering

                           Article 486(2) to (5) of CRR

                           060

                              Total grandfathered amount

                           The amount to be reported shall be equal to the amounts reported in the respective columns in row 060 of CA 5.1.

                           Rows

                           010

                           1.   Instruments that qualified for point (a) of Article 57 of 2006/48/EC

                           Article 484(3) of CRR
                           The amount to be reported shall include the related share premium accounts.

                           020

                           2.   Instruments that qualified for point (ca) of Article 57 and Article 154(8) and (9) of 2006/48/EC, subject to the limit of Article 489

                           Article 484(4) of CRR

                           030

                           2.1   Total instruments without a call or an incentive to redeem

                           Article 489 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported shall include the related share premium accounts.

                           040

                           2.2   Grandfathered instruments with a call and incentive to redeem

                           Article 489 of CRR

                           050

                           2.2.1   Instruments with a call exercisable after the reporting date, and which meet the conditions in Article 49 of CRR after the date of effective maturity

                           Articles 489(3), and 491 point (a) of CRR
                           The amount to be reported shall include the related share premium accounts.

                           060

                           2.2.2   Instruments with a call exercisable after the reporting date, and which do not meet the conditions in Article 49 of CRR after the date of effective maturity

                           Articles 489(5), and 491 point (a) of CRR
                           The amount to be reported shall include the related share premium accounts.

                           070

                           2.2.3   Instruments with a call exercisable prior to or on 20 July 2011, and which do not meet the conditions in Article 49 of CRR after the date of effective maturity

                           Articles 489(6) and 491 point (c) of CRR
                           The amount to be reported shall include the related share premium accounts

                           080

                           2.3   Excess on the limit of CET1 grandfathered instruments

                           Article 487(1) of CRR
                           The excess on the limit of CET1 grandfathered instruments may be treated as instruments which can be grandfathered as AT1 instruments.

                           090

                           3.   Items that qualified for points e), f), g) or h) of Article 57 of 2006/48/EC, subject to the limit of Article 490

                           Article 484(5) of CRR

                           100

                           3.1   Total items without an incentive to redeem

                           Article 490 of CRR

                           110

                           3.2   Grandfathered items with an incentive to redeem

                           Article 490 of CRR

                           120

                           3.2.1   Items with a call exercisable after the reporting date, and which meet the conditions in Article 63 of CRR after the date of effective maturity

                           Articles 490(3), and 491 point (a) of CRR
                           The amount to be reported shall include the related share premium accounts.

                           130

                           3.2.2   Items with a call exercisable after the reporting date, and which do not meet the conditions in Article 63 of CRR after the date of effective maturity

                           Articles 490(5), and 491 point (a) of CRR
                           The amount to be reported shall include the related share premium accounts.

                           140

                           3.2.3   Items with a call exercisable prior to or on 20 July 2011, and which do not meet the conditions in Article 63 of CRR after the date of effective maturity

                           Articles 490(6) and 491 point (c) of CRR
                           The amount to be reported shall include the related share premium accounts.

                           150

                           3.3   Excess on the limit of AT1 grandfathered instruments

                           Article 487(2) of CRR
                           The excess on the limit of AT1 grandfathered instruments may be treated as instruments which can be grandfathered as T2 instruments.

                     2.   GROUP SOLVENCY: INFORMATION ON AFFILIATES (GS)
               2.1.   GENERAL REMARKS

                           26.

                           Templates C 06.01 and C 06.02 shall be reported if own funds requirements are calculated on a consolidated basis. This template consists of four parts in order to gather different information on all individual entities (including the reporting institution) included in the scope of consolidation.

                                       a)

                                       Entities within the scope of consolidation;

                                       b)

                                       Detailed group solvency information;

                                       c)

                                       Information on the contribution of individual entities to group solvency;

                                       d)

                                       Information on capital buffers;

                           27.

                           Institutions waived according to Article 7 of CRR shall only report the columns 010 to 060 and 250 to 400.

                     2.2.   DETAILED GROUP SOLVENCY INFORMATION

                           28.

                           The second part of this template (detailed group solvency information) in columns 070 to 210 is designed to gather information on credit and other regulated financial institutions which are effectively subject to particular solvency requirements on individual basis. It provides, for each of those entities within the scope of the reporting, the own funds requirements for each risk category and the own funds for solvency purposes.

                           29.

                           In the case of proportional consolidation of participations, the figures related to own funds requirements and own funds shall reflect the respective proportional amounts.

                     2.3.   INFORMATION ON THE CONTRIBUTIONS OF INDIVIDUAL ENTITIES TO GROUP SOLVENCY

                           30.

                           The objective of the third part of this template (information on the contributions of all entities within CRR scope of consolidation to group solvency), including those that are not subject to particular solvency requirements on an individual basis, in columns 250 to 400, is to identify which entities within the group generate the risks and raise own funds from the market, based on data that are readily available or can easily be reprocessed, without having to reconstruct the capital ratio on a solo or sub-consolidated basis. At the entity level, both risk and own fund figures are contributions to the group figures and not elements of a solvency ratio on a solo basis and as such must not be compared to each other.

                           31.

                           The third part also includes the amounts of minority interests, qualifying AT1, and qualifying T2 eligible in the consolidated own funds.

                           32.

                           As this third part of the template refers to “contributions”, the figures to be reported herein shall defer, when applicable, from the figures reported in the columns referring to detailed group solvency information.

                           33.

                           The principle is to delete the cross-exposures within the same groups in a homogeneous way both in terms of risks or own funds, in order to cover the amounts reported in the group's consolidated CA template by adding the amounts reported for each entity in “Group Solvency” template. In cases where the 1 % threshold is not exceeded a direct link to the CA template is not possible.

                           34.

                           The institutions shall define the most appropriate breakdown method between the entities to take into account the possible diversification effects for market risk and operational risk.

                           35.

                           It is possible for one consolidated group to be included within another consolidated group. This means that the entities within a subgroup shall be reported entity-by-entity in the GS of the entire group, even if the sub-group itself is subject to reporting requirements. If the subgroup is subject to reporting requirements, it shall also report the GS template on an entity-by-entity basis, although those details are included in the GS template of a higher consolidated group.

                           36.

                           An institution shall report data of the contribution of an entity when its contribution to the total risk exposure amount exceeds 1 % of the total risk exposure amount of the group or when its contribution to the total own funds exceeds 1 % of the total own funds of the group. This threshold does not apply in the case of subsidiaries or subgroups that provide own funds (in the form of minority interests or qualifying AT1 or T2 instruments included in own funds) to the group.

                     2.4.   C 06.01 — GROUP SOLVENCY: INFORMATION ON AFFILIATES — TOTAL (GS TOTAL)

                           Columns

                           Instructions

                           250-400

                              ENTITIES WITHIN SCOPE OF CONSOLIDATION

                           See instructions for C 06.02

                           410-480

                              CAPITAL BUFFERS

                           See instructions for C 06.02

                           Rows

                           Instructions

                           010

                              TOTAL

                           The Total shall represent the sum of the values reported in all rows of template C 06.02.

                     2.5.   C 06.02 — GROUP SOLVENCY: INFORMATION ON AFFILIATES (GS)

                           Columns

                           Instructions

                           010-060

                              ENTITIES WITHIN SCOPE OF CONSOLIDATION

                           This template is designed to gather information on all entities on an entity-by-entity-basis within the scope of consolidation according to Chapter 2 of Title II of Part One of CRR.

                           010

                              NAME

                           Name of the entity within the scope of consolidation.

                           020

                              CODE

                           This code is a row identifier and shall be unique for each row in the table.
                           Code assigned to the entity within the scope of consolidation.
                           The actual composition of the code depends on the national reporting system.

                           025

                              LEI CODE

                           LEI code stands for Legal Entity Identification code which is a reference code proposed by the Financial Stability Board (FSB) and endorsed by the G20, aimed at achieving a unique and worldwide identification of parties to financial transactions.
                           Until the global LEI system is fully operational, pre-LEI codes are being assigned to counterparties by a Local Operational Unit that has been endorsed by Regulatory Oversight Committee (ROC, detailed information may be found at the following website: www.leiroc.org)).
                           Where a Legal Entity Identification code (LEI code) exists for a given counterparty, it shall be used to identify that counterparty.

                           030

                              INSTITUTION OR EQUIVALENT (YES/NO)

                           “YES” shall be reported in case the entity is subject to own funds requirements according to CRD or provisions at least equivalent to Basel provisions.
                           “NO” shall be reported otherwise.
                           Minority interests:
                           81(1) point (a) (ii) and 82(1) point (a) (ii)
                           To the effects of minority interests and AT1 and T2 instruments issued by subsidiaries, the subsidiaries whose instruments can be eligible shall be institutions or undertakings subject by virtue of applicable national law to the requirements of CRR.

                           040

                              SCOPE OF DATA: solo fully consolidated (SF) OR solo partially consolidated (SP)

                           “SF” shall be reported for individual subsidiaries fully consolidated.
                           “SP” shall be reported for individual subsidiaries partially consolidated.

                           050

                              COUNTRY CODE

                           Institutions shall report the two-letter country code according to ISO 3166-2.

                           060

                              SHARE OF HOLDING (%)

                           This percentage refers to the actual share of capital the parent undertaking holds in subsidiaries. In case of full consolidation of a direct subsidiary, the actual share is e.g. 70 %. In accordance with Article 4(16) of CRR, the share of holding of a subsidiary of a subsidiary to be reported results from a multiplication of the shares between the subsidiaries concerned.

                           070-240

                              INFORMATION ON ENTITIES SUBJECT TO OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENT

                           The section of detailed information (i.e. columns 070 to 240) shall gather information only on those entities and subgroups which, being within the scope of consolidation (Chapter 2 of Title II of Part One of CRR), are effectively subject to solvency requirements according to CRR or provisions at least equivalent to Basel provisions (i.e, reported yes in column 030).
                           Information shall be included about all individual institutions of a consolidated group that are subject to own funds requirements, regardless where they are located.
                           The information reported in this part shall be according to the local solvency rules where the institution is operating (therefore for this template it is not necessary to do a double calculation on an individual basis according to the parent institution's rules). When local solvency rules differ from CRR and a comparable breakdown is not given, the information shall be completed where data is available in the respective granularity. Therefore, this part is a factual template that summarises the calculations that the individual institutions of a group shall carry out, bearing in mind that some of those institutions may be subject to different solvency rules.

                              Reporting of fixed overheads of investment firms:

                           Investment firms shall include own funds requirements related to fixed overheads in their calculation of capital ratio according to Articles 95, 96, 97 and 98 of CRR.
                           The part of the total risk exposure amount related to fixed overheads shall be reported in column 100 of part 2 of this template.

                           070

                              TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                           The sum of the columns 080 to 110 shall be reported.

                           080

                              CREDIT; COUNTERPARTY CREDIT; DILUTION RISKS, FREE DELIVERIES AND SETTLEMENT/DELIVERY RISK

                           The amount to be reported in this column corresponds to the sum of risk weighted exposure amounts that are equal or equivalent to the ones that must be reported in row 040 “RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNTS FOR CREDIT, COUNTERPARTY CREDIT AND DILUTION RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES” and the amounts of own funds requirements that are equal or equivalent to the ones that must be reported in row 490 “TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT FOR SETTLEMENT/DELIVERY RISKS” of the template CA2.

                           090

                              POSITION, FX AND COMMODITY RISKS

                           The amount to be reported in this column corresponds to the amount of own funds requirements that are equal or equivalent to the ones that must be reported in row 520 “TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT FOR POSITION, FOREIGN EXCHANGE AND COMMODITIES RISKS” of the template CA2.

                           100

                              OPERATIONAL RISK

                           The amount to be reported in this column corresponds to the risk exposure amount that is equal or equivalent to the one that shall be reported in row 590 “TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT FOR OPERATIONAL RISKS (OpR)” of the template CA2.
                           Fixed overheads shall be included in this column including the row 630 “ADDITIONAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT DUE TO FIXED OVERHEADS” of the template CA2.

                           110

                              OTHER RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNTS

                           The amount to be reported in this column corresponds to the risk exposure amount not especially listed above. It is the sum of the amounts of rows 640, 680 and 690 of the template CA2.

                           120-240

                              DETAILED INFORMATION ON GROUP SOLVENCY OWN FUNDS

                           The information reported in the following columns shall be according to the local solvency rules where the entity or subgroup is operating.

                           120

                              OWN FUNDS

                           The amount to be reported in this column corresponds to the amount of own funds that are equal or equivalent to the ones that must be reported in row 010 “OWN FUNDS” of the template CA1.

                           130

                              OF WHICH: QUALIFYING OWN FUNDS

                           Article 82 of CRR
                           This column shall only be provided for the subsidiaries reported on an individual basis that are fully consolidated, which are institutions.
                           Qualifying holdings are, for the subsidiaries specified above, the instruments (plus related retained earnings, share premium accounts and other reserves) owned by persons other than the undertakings included in the CRR consolidation.
                           The amount to be reported shall include the effects of any transitional provision. It shall be the eligible amount on the date of reporting.

                           140

                              RELATED OWN FUNDS INSTRUMENTS, RELATED RETAINED EARNINGS, SHARE PREMIUM ACCOUNTS AND OTHER RESERVES

                           Article 87(1)(b) of CRR

                           150

                              TOTAL TIER 1 CAPITAL

                           Article 25 of CRR

                           160

                              OF WHICH: QUALIFYING TIER 1 CAPITAL

                           Article 82 of CRR
                           This column shall only be provided for the subsidiaries reported on an individual basis that are fully consolidated, which are institutions.
                           Qualifying holdings are, for the subsidiaries specified above, the instruments (plus related retained earnings and share premium accounts) owned by persons other than the undertakings included in the CRR consolidation.
                           The amount to be reported shall include the effects of any transitional provision. It shall be the eligible amount on the date of reporting.

                           170

                              RELATED T1 INSTRUMENTS, RELATED RETAINED EARNINGS AND SHARE PREMIUM ACCOUNTS

                           Article 85(1)(b) of CRR

                           180

                              COMMON EQUITY TIER 1 CAPITAL

                           Article 50 of CRR

                           190

                              OF WHICH: MINORITY INTERESTS

                           Article 81 of CRR
                           This column shall only be reported for subsidiaries fully consolidated which are institutions, except subsidiaries referred to in article 84(3) of CRR. Each subsidiary shall be considered on a sub-consolidated basis for the purpose of all the calculations required in article 84 of CRR, if relevant, in accordance with article 84(2), otherwise on a solo basis.
                           To the effects of CRR and this template, minority interests are, for the subsidiaries specified above, the CET1 instruments (plus related retained earnings and share premium accounts) owned by persons other than the undertakings included in the CRR consolidation.
                           The amount to be reported shall include the effects of any transitional provision. It shall be the eligible amount on the date of reporting.

                           200

                              RELATED OWN FUNDS INSTRUMENTS, RELATED RETAINED EARNINGS, SHARE PREMIUM ACCOUNTS AND OTHER RESERVES

                           Article 84(1)(b) of CRR

                           210

                              ADDITIONAL TIER 1 CAPITAL

                           Article 61 of CRR

                           220

                              OF WHICH: QUALIFYING ADDITIONAL TIER 1 CAPITAL

                           Articles 82 and 83 of CRR
                           This column shall only be provided for the subsidiaries reported on an individual basis that are fully consolidated which are institutions, except subsidiaries referred to in Article 85(2) of CRR. Each subsidiary shall be considered on a sub-consolidated basis for the purpose of all the calculations required in article 85 of CRR, if relevant, in accordance with article 85(2), otherwise on a solo basis.
                           To the effects of CRR and this template, minority interests are, for the subsidiaries specified above, the AT1 instruments (plus related retained earnings and share premium accounts) owned by persons other than the undertakings included in the CRR consolidation.
                           The amount to be reported shall include the effects of any transitional provision. It shall be the eligible amount on the date of reporting.

                           230

                              TIER 2 CAPITAL

                           Article 71 of CRR

                           240

                              OF WHICH: QUALIFYING TIER 2 CAPITAL

                           Articles 82 and 83 of CRR
                           This column shall only be provided for the subsidiaries reported on an individual basis that are fully consolidated, which are institutions, except subsidiaries referred to in Article 87(2) of CRR. Each subsidiary shall be considered on a sub-consolidated basis for the purpose of all the calculations required in article 87 of CRR, if relevant, in accordance with article 87(2) of CRR, otherwise on a solo basis.
                           To the effects of CRR and this template, minority interests are, for the subsidiaries specified above, the T2 instruments (plus related retained earnings and share premium accounts) owned by persons other than the undertakings included in the CRR consolidation.
                           The amount to be reported shall include the effects of any transitional provision, i.e. it has to be the eligible amount in the date of reporting.

                           250-400

                              INFORMATION ON THE CONTRIBUTION OF ENTITIES TO SOLVENCY OF THE GROUP

                           250-290

                              CONTRIBUTION TO RISKS

                           The information reported in the following columns shall be according to the solvency rules applicable to the reporting institution.

                           250

                              TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                           The sum of the columns 260 to 290 shall be reported.

                           260

                              CREDIT; COUNTERPARTY CREDIT; DILUTION RISKS, FREE DELIVERIES AND SETTLEMENT/DELIVERY RISK

                           The amount to be reported shall be the risk weighted exposure amounts for credit risk and own funds requirements of settlement/delivery risk as per CRR, excluding any amount related to transactions with other entities included in the Group consolidated solvency ratio computation.

                           270

                              POSITION, FX AND COMMODITY RISKS

                           Risk exposure amounts for market risks are to be computed at each entity level following CRR. Entities shall report the contribution to the total risk exposure amounts for position, FX and commodity risk of the group. The sum of amounts reported here corresponds to the amount reported in row 520 “TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNTS FOR POSITION, FOREIGN EXCHANGE AND COMMODITY RISKS” of the consolidated report.

                           280

                              OPERATIONAL RISK

                           In case of AMA, the reported risk exposure amounts for operational risk include the effect of diversification.
                           Fixed overheads shall be included in this column.

                           290

                              OTHER RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNTS

                           The amount to be reported in this column corresponds to the risk exposure amount not especially listed above.

                           300-400

                              CONTRIBUTION TO OWN FUNDS

                           This part of the template does not intend to impose that institutions perform a full computation of the total capital ratio at the level of each entity.
                           Columns 300 to 350 shall be reported for those consolidated entities which contribute to own funds by minority interest, whereas columns 360 to 400 shall be reported by all other consolidated entities which contribute to the consolidated own funds.
                           Own funds brought to an entity by the rest of entities included within the scope of the reporting entity shall not to be taken into account, only the net contribution to the group own funds shall be reported in this column, that is mainly the own funds raised from third parties and accumulated reserves.
                           The information reported in the following columns shall be according to the solvency rules applicable to the reporting institution.

                           300-350

                              QUALIFYING OWN FUNDS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED OWN FUNDS

                           The amount to be reported as “QUALIFYING OWN FUNDS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED OWN FUNDS” shall be the amount as derived from Title II of Part Two of CRR, excluding any fund brought in by other group entities.

                           300

                              QUALIFYING OWN FUNDS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED OWN FUNDS

                           Article 87 of CRR

                           310

                              QUALIFYING TIER 1 INSTRUMENTS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED TIER 1 CAPITAL

                           Article 85 of CRR

                           320

                              MINORITY INTERESTS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED COMMON EQUITY TIER 1 CAPITAL

                           Article 84 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported is the amount of minority interests of a subsidiary that is included in consolidated CET1 according to the CRR.

                           330

                              QUALIFYING TIER 1 INSTRUMENTS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED ADDITIONAL TIER 1 CAPITAL

                           Article 86 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported is the amount of qualifying T1 capital of a subsidiary that is included in consolidated AT1 according to the CRR.

                           340

                              QUALIFYING OWN FUNDS INSTRUMENTS INCLUDED IN CONSOLIDATED TIER 2 CAPITAL

                           Article 89 of CRR
                           The amount to be reported is the amount of qualifying own funds of a subsidiary that is included in consolidated T2 according to the CRR.

                           350

                              MEMORANDUM ITEM: GOODWILL (-)/(+) NEGATIVE GOODWILL

                           360-400

                              CONSOLIDATED OWN FUNDS

                           Article 18 CRR
                           The amount to be reported as “CONSOLIDATED OWN FUNDS” is the amount as derived from the balance sheet, excluding any fund brought in by other group entities.

                           360

                              CONSOLIDATED OWN FUNDS

                           370

                              OF WHICH: COMMON EQUITY TIER 1

                           380

                              OF WHICH: ADDITIONAL TIER 1

                           390

                              OF WHICH: CONRIBUTIONS TO CONSOLIDATED RESULT

                           The contribution of each entity to the consolidated result (profit or loss (-)) is reported. This includes the results attributable to minority interests.

                           400

                              OF WHICH: (-) GOODWILL/(+) NEGATIVE GOODWILL

                           Goodwill or negative goodwill of the reporting entity on the subsidiary is reported here.

                           410-480

                              CAPITAL BUFFERS

                           The structure of the reporting of capital buffers for the GS template follows the general structure of the template CA4, using the same reporting concepts. When reporting the capital buffers for the GS template, the relevant amounts shall be reported following the calculating of the buffer requirements, that means depending whether the requirements shall be calculated on consolidated, sub-consolidated or individual level.

                           410

                              COMBINED BUFFER REQUIREMENTS

                           Article 128 point (2) of CRD

                           420

                              CAPITAL CONSERVATION BUFFER

                           Article 128 point (1) and 129 of CRD
                           According to Article 129(1) the capital conservation buffer is an additional amount of Common Equity Tier 1 capital. Due to the fact that the capital conservation buffer rate of 2,5 % is stable, an amount shall be reported in this cell.

                           430

                              INSTITUTION SPECIFIC COUNTERCYCLICAL CAPITAL BUFFER

                           Article 128 point (7), Article 130 and 135-140 of CRD
                           In this cell the concrete amount of the countercyclical buffer shall be reported.

                           440

                              CONSERVATION BUFFER DUE TO MACRO-PRUDENTIAL OR SYSTEMIC RISK IDENTIFIED AT THE LEVEL OF A MEMBER STATE

                           Article 458(2) point d (iv) of CRR
                           In this cell the amount of the conservation buffer due to macro-prudential or systemic risk identified at the level of a Member State, which can be requested according to Article 458 of CRR in addition to the capital conservation buffer shall be reported.

                           450

                              SYSTEMIC RISK BUFFER

                           Article 133 and 134 of CRD
                           In this cell the amount of the systemic risk buffer shall be reported.

                           460

                              SYSTEMICAL IMPORTANT INSTITUTION BUFFER

                           Article 128 point (4) of CRD
                           In this cell the amount of the Systemically important institution buffer shall be reported.

                           470

                              GLOBAL SYSTEMICALLY IMPORTANT INSTITUTION BUFFER

                           Article 131 of CRD
                           In this cell the amount of the Global Systemically Important Institution buffer shall be reported.

                           480

                              OTHER SYSTEMICALLY IMPORTANT INSTITUTION BUFFER

                           Article 131 of CRD
                           In this cell the amount of the Other Systemically Important Institution buffer shall be reported.

                     3.   CREDIT RISK TEMPLATES
               3.1.   GENERAL REMARKS

                           37.

                           There are different sets of templates for the Standardised approach and the IRB approach for credit risk. Additionally, separate templates for the geographical breakdown of positions subject to credit risk shall be reported if the relevant threshold as set out in Article 5(a)(4) is exceeded.

                     3.1.1.   Reporting of CRM techniques with substitution effect

                           38.

                           Article 235 of CRR describes the computation procedure of the exposure which is fully protected by unfunded protection.

                           39.

                           Article 236 of CRR describes the computation procedure of exposure which is fully protected by unfunded protection in the case of full protection/partial protection — equal seniority.

                           40.

                           Articles 196, 197 and 200 of CRR regulate the funded credit protection.

                           41.

                           Reporting of exposures to obligors (immediate counterparties) and protection providers which are assigned to the same exposure class shall be done as an inflow as well as an outflow to the same exposure class.

                           42.

                           The exposure type does not change because of unfunded credit protection.

                           43.

                           If an exposure is secured by an unfunded credit protection, the secured part is assigned as an outflow e.g. in the exposure class of the obligor and as an inflow in the exposure class of the protection provider. However, the type of the exposure does not change due to the change of the exposure class.

                           44.

                           The substitution effect in the COREP reporting framework shall reflect the risk weighting treatment effectively applicable to the covered part of the exposure. As such, the covered part of the exposure is risk weighted according to the SA approach and shall be reported in the CR SA template.

                     3.1.2.   Reporting of Counterparty Credit Risk

                           45.

                           Exposures stemming from Counterparty Credit Risk positions shall be reported in templates CR SA or CR IRB independent from whether they are Banking Book items or Trading Book items.

                     3.2.   C 07.00 — CREDIT AND COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES: STANDARDISED APPROACH TO CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS (CR SA)
               3.2.1.   General remarks

                           46.

                           The CR SA templates provide the necessary information on the calculation of own funds requirements for credit risk according to the standardised approach. In particular, they provide detailed information on:

                                       a)

                                       the distribution of the exposure values according to the different, exposure types, risk weights and exposure classes;

                                       b)

                                       the amount and type of credit risk mitigation techniques used for mitigating the risks.

                     3.2.2.   Scope of the CR SA template

                           47.

                           According to Article 112 of CRR each SA exposure shall be assigned to one of the 16 SA exposure classes in order to calculate the own funds requirements.

                           48.

                           The information in CR SA is requested for the total exposure classes and individually for each of the exposure classes as defined for the standardised approach. The total figures as well as the information of each exposure class are reported in a separate dimension.

                           49.

                           However the following positions are not within the scope of CR SA:

                                       a)

                                       Exposures assigned to exposure class “items representing securitisation positions” according to Article 112 (m) of CRR which shall be reported in the CR SEC templates.

                                       b)

                                       Exposures deducted from own funds.

                           50.

                           The scope of the CR SA template covers the following own funds requirements:

                                       a)

                                       Credit risk in accordance with Chapter 2 (Standardised Approach) of Title II of Part Three of CRR in the banking book, among which Counterparty credit risk in accordance with Chapter 6 (Counterparty credit risk) of Title II of Part Three of CRR in the banking book;

                                       b)

                                       Counterparty credit risk in accordance with Chapter 6 (Counterparty credit risk) of Title II of Part Three of CRR in the trading book;

                                       c)

                                       Settlement risk arising from free deliveries in accordance with Article 379 of CRR in respect of all the business activities.

                           51.

                           The scope of the template are all exposures for which the own funds requirements are calculated according to part 3 title II chapter 2 of CRR in conjunction with part 3 title II chapter 4 and 6 of CRR. Institutions that apply Article 94(1) of CRR also need to report their trading book positions in this template when they apply part 3 title II chapter 2 of CRR to calculate the own funds requirements thereof (part 3 title II chapter 2 and 6 and title V of CRR). Therefore the template provides not only detailed information on the type of the exposure (e.g. on balance sheet/off balance sheet items), but also information on the allocation of risk weights within the respective exposure class.

                           52.

                           In addition CR SA includes memorandum items in rows 290 to 320 in order to collect further information about exposures secured by mortgages on immovable property and exposures in default.

                           53.

                           These memorandum items shall only be reported for the following exposure classes:

                                       a)

                                       Central governments or central banks (Article 112 point (a) of CRR)

                                       b)

                                       Regional governments or local authorities (Article 112 point (b) of CRR)

                                       c)

                                       Public sector entities (Article 112 point (c) of CRR)

                                       d)

                                       Institutions (Article 112 point (f) of CRR)

                                       e)

                                       Corporates (Article 112 point (g) of CRR)

                                       f)

                                       Retail (Article 112 point (h) of CRR).

                           54.

                           The reporting of the memorandum items affect neither the calculation of the risk weighted exposure amounts of the exposure classes according to Article 112 points a) to c) and f) to h) of CRR nor of the exposure classes according to Article 112 points i) and j) of CRR reported in CR SA.

                           55.

                           The memorandum rows provide additional information about the obligor structure of the exposure classes “in default” or “secured by immovable property”. Exposures shall be reported in these rows wherethe obligors would have been reported in the exposure classes “Central governments or central banks”, “Regional governments or local authorities”, “Public sector entities”, “Institutions”, “Corporates” and “Retail” of CR SA, if those exposures were not assigned to the exposure classes “in default” or “secured by immovable property”. However the figures reported are the same as used to calculate the risk weighted exposure amounts in the exposure classes “in default” or “secured by immovable property”.

                           56.

                           E.g. if an exposure, the risk exposure amounts of which are calculated subject to Article 127 of CRR and the value adjustments are less than 20 %, then this information is reported in CR SA, row 320 in the total and in the exposure class “in default”. If this exposure, before it defaulted, was an exposure to an institution then this information shall also be reported in row 320 of exposure class “institutions”.

                     3.2.3.   Assignment of exposures to exposure classes under the Standardised Approach

                           57.

                           In order to ensure a consistent categorisation of exposures into the different exposure classes as defined in Article 112 of CRR the following sequential approach shall be applied:

                                       a)

                                       In the first step the Original exposure pre conversion factors is classified into the corresponding (original) exposure class as referred to in Article 112 of CRR, without prejudice to the specific treatment (risk weight) that each specific exposure shall receive within the assigned exposure class.

                                       b)

                                       In a second step the exposures may be redistributed to other exposure classes due to the application of credit risk mitigation (CRM) techniques with substitution effects on the exposure (e.g. guarantees, credit derivatives, financial collateral simple method) via inflows and outflows.

                           58.

                           The following criteria apply for the classification of the Original exposure pre conversion factors into the different exposure classes (first step) without prejudice to the subsequent redistribution caused by the use of CRM techniques with substitution effects on the exposure or to the treatment (risk weight) that each specific exposure shall receive within the assigned exposure class.

                           59.

                           For the purpose of classifying the original exposure pre conversion factor in the first step, the CRM techniques associated to the exposure shall not be considered (note that they shall be considered explicitly in the second phase) unless a protection effect is intrinsically part of the definition of an exposure class as it is the case in the exposure class mentioned in Article 112 point (i) of CRR (exposures secured by mortgages on immovable property).

                           60.

                           Article 112 of CRR does not provide criteria for disjoining the exposure classes. This might imply that one exposure could potentially be classified in different exposure classes if no prioritisation in the assessment criteria for the classification is provided. The most obvious case arises between exposures to institutions and corporate with a short-term credit assessment (Article 112 point (n) of CRR) and exposures to institutions (Article 112 point (f) of CRR)/exposures to corporates (Article 112 point (g) of CRR). In this case it is clear that there is an implicit prioritisation in the CRR since it shall be assessed first if a certain exposure fit for being assigned to Short-term exposures to institutions and corporate and only afterwards do the same process for exposures to institutions and exposures to corporates. Otherwise it is obvious that the exposure class mentioned in Article 112 point (n) of CRR shall never be assigned an exposure. The example provided is one of the most obvious examples but not the only one. It is worth noting that the criteria used for establishing the exposure classes under the standardised approach are different (institutional categorisation, term of the exposure, past due status, etc.) which is the underlying reason for non disjoint groupings.

                           61.

                           For a homogeneous and comparable reporting it is necessary to specify prioritisation assessment criteria for the assignment of the Original exposure pre conversion factor by exposure classes, without prejudice to the specific treatment (risk weight) that each specific exposure shall receive within the assigned exposure class. The prioritisation criteria presented below using a decision tree scheme are based on the assessment of the conditions explicitly laid down in the CRR for an exposure to fit in a certain exposure class and, if it is the case, on any decision on the part of the reporting institutions or the supervisor on the applicability of certain exposure classes. As such, the outcome of the exposure assignment process for reporting purposes would be in line with CRR provisions. This does not preclude institutions to apply other internal assignment procedures that may also be consistent with all relevant CRR provisions and its interpretations issued by the appropriate fora.

                           62.

                           An exposure class shall be given priority to others in the assessment ranking in the decision tree (i.e. it shall be first assessed if an exposure can be assigned to it, without prejudice to the outcome of that assessment) if otherwise no exposures would potentially be assigned to it. This would be the case when in the absence of prioritisation criteria one exposure class would be a subset of others. As such the criteria graphically depicted in the following decision tree would work on a sequential process.

                           63.

                           With this background the assessment ranking in the decision tree mentioned below would follow the following order:

                                       1.

                                       Securitisation positions;

                                       2.

                                       Items associated with particular high risk;

                                       3.

                                       Equity exposures

                                       4.

                                       Exposures in default;

                                       5.

                                       Exposures in the form of units or shares in collective investment undertakings (“CIU”)/Exposures in the form of covered bonds (disjoint exposure classes);

                                       6.

                                       Exposures secured by mortgages on immovable property;

                                       7.

                                       Other items;

                                       8.

                                       Exposures to institutions and corporates with a short-term credit assessment;

                                       9.

                                       All other exposure classes (disjoint exposure classes) which include Exposures to central governments or central banks; Exposures to regional governments or local authorities; Exposures to public sector entities; Exposures to multilateral development banks; Exposures to international organisations; Exposures to institutions; Exposures to corporate and Retail exposures.

                           64.

                           In the case of exposures in the form of units or shares in collective investment undertakings and where the look through approach (Article 132(3) to (5) of CRR) is used, the underlying individual exposures shall be considered and classified into their corresponding risk weight line according to their treatment, but all the individual exposures shall be classified within the exposure class of exposures in the form of units or shares in collective investment undertakings (“CIU”).

                           65.

                           In the case of “nth” to default credit derivatives specified in Article 134(6) of CRR, if they are rated, they shall be directly classified as securitisation positions. If they are not rated, they shall be considered in the “Other items” exposure class. In this latter case the nominal amount of the contract shall be reported as the Original exposure pre conversion factors in the line for “Other risk weights” (the risk weight used shall be that specified by the sum indicated under Article 134(6) of CRR.

                           66.

                           In a second step, as a consequence of credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects, exposures shall be reallocated to the exposure class of the protection provider.
                           DECISION TREE ON HOW TO ASSIGN THE ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS TO THE EXPOSURE CLASSES OF THE STANDARDISED APPROACH ACCORDING TO CRR

                                       Original exposure pre conversion factors

                                       Does it fit for being assigned to the exposure class of Article 112 (m)?

                                    YES

                                       Securitisation positions

                                 NO

                                       Does it fit for being assigned to the exposure class of Article 112point (k)?

                                    YES

                                       Items associated with particular high risk (also see Article 128)

                                 NO

                                       Does it fit for being assigned to the exposure class of Article 112 point (p)?

                                    YES

                                       Equity exposures (also see Article 133)

                                 NO

                                       Does it fit for being assigned to the exposure class of Article 112 point (j)?

                                    YES

                                       Exposures in default

                                 NO

                                       Does it fit for being assigned to the exposure classes of Article 112 points (l) and (o)?

                                    YES

                                       Exposures in the form of units or shares in collective investment undertakings (CIU)
                                       Exposures in the form of covered bonds (also see Article 129)
                                       These two exposure classes are disjoint among themselves (see comments on the look-through approach in the answer above). Therefore the assignment to one of them is straightforward.

                                 NO

                                       Does it fit for being assigned to the exposure class of Article 112 point (i)?

                                    YES

                                       Exposures secured by mortgages on immovable property (also see Article 124)

                                 NO

                                       Does it fit for being assigned to the exposure class of Article 112 point (q)?

                                    YES

                                       Other items

                                 NO

                                       Does it fit for being assigned to the exposure class of Article 112 point (n)?

                                    YES

                                       Exposures to institutions and corporates with a short-term credit assessment

                                 NO

                                       The exposure classes below are disjoint among themselves. Therefore the assignment to one of them is straightforward.
                                       Exposures to central governments or central banks
                                       Exposures to regional governments or local authorities
                                       Exposures to public sector entities
                                       Exposures to multilateral development banks
                                       Exposures to international organisations
                                       Exposures to institutions
                                       Exposures to corporates
                                       Retail exposures

                     3.2.4.   Clarifications on the scope of some specific exposure classes referred to in Article 112 of CRR
               3.2.4.1.   Exposure Class “Institutions”

                           67.

                           Reporting of intra-group exposures according to Article 113(6) to (7) of CRR shall be done as follows:

                           68.

                           Exposures which fulfil the requirements of Article 113(7) of CRR shall be reported in the respective exposure classes where they would be reported if they were no intra-group exposures.

                           69.

                           According Article 113(6) and (7) of CRR “an institution may, subject to the prior approval of the competent authorities, decide not to apply the requirements of paragraph 1 of this Article to the exposures of that institution to a counterparty which is its parent undertaking, its subsidiary, a subsidiary of its parent undertaking or an undertaking linked by a relationship within the meaning of Article 12(1) of Directive 83/349/EEC.” This means that intra-group counterparties are not necessarily institutions but also undertakings which are assigned to other exposure classes, e.g. ancillary services undertakings or undertakings within the meaning of Article 12(1) of Directive 83/349/EEC. Therefore intra-group exposures shall be reported in the corresponding exposure class.

                     3.2.4.2.   Exposure Class “Covered Bonds”

                           70.

                           The assignment of SA exposures to the exposure class “covered bonds” shall be done as follows:

                           71.

                           Bonds as defined in Article 52(4) of Directive 2009/65/EC shall fulfil the requirements of Article 129(1) to (2) of CRR to be classified in the exposure class “Covered Bonds”. The fulfilment of those requirements has to be checked in each case. Nevertheless, bonds according to Article 52(4) of Directive 2009/65/EC and issued before 31 December 2007, are also assigned to the exposure class “Covered Bonds” because of Article 129(6) of CRR.

                     3.2.4.3.   Exposure class “Collective Investment Undertakings”

                           72.

                           Where the possibility according to Article 132(5) of CRR is used, exposures in the form of units or shares in CIUs shall be reported as on balance sheet items according to Article 111(1) sentence 1 of CRR.

                     3.2.5.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           010

                              ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                           Exposure value without taking into account value adjustments and provisions, conversion factors and the effect of credit risk mitigation techniques with the following qualifications stemming from Article 111(2) of CRR:
                           For Derivative instruments, repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions, long settlement transactions and margin lending transactions subject to part 3 title II chapter 6 of CRR or subject to Article 92(3) point (f) of CRR, the original exposure shall correspond to the Exposure Value for Counterparty Credit Risk calculated according to the methods laid down in part 3 title II chapter 6 of CRR.
                           Exposure values for leases are subject to Article 134(7) of CRR.
                           In case of on-balance sheet netting laid down in Article 219 of CRR the exposure values shall be reported according to the received cash collateral.
                           In the case of master netting agreements covering repurchase transactions and/or securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions and/or other capital market driven transactions subject to part 3 title II chapter 6 of CRR, the effect of Funded Credit Protection in the form of master netting agreements as under Article 220(4) of CRR shall be included in column 010. Therefore, in the case of master netting agreements covering repurchase transactions subject to the provisions in part 3 title II chapter 6 of CRR, E* as calculated under Articles 220 and 221 of CRR shall be reported in column 010 of the CR SA template.

                           030

                              (-) Value adjustments and provision associated with the original exposure

                           Article 24 and 110 of CRR
                           Value adjustments and provisions for credit losses made in accordance with the accounting framework to which the reporting entity is subject to.

                           040

                              Exposure net of value adjustments and provisions

                           Sum of columns 010 and 030.

                           050-100

                              CREDIT RISK MITIGATION (CRM) TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS ON THE EXPOSURE

                           Credit risk mitigation techniques as defined in Article 4(57) of CRR that reduce the credit risk of an exposure or exposures via the substitution of exposures as defined below in Substitution of the exposure due to CRM.
                           If collateral has an effect on the exposure value (e.g. if used for credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects on the exposure) it shall be capped at the exposure value.
                           Items to be reported here:

                                       —

                                       collateral, incorporated according to Financial Collateral Simple Method;

                                       —

                                       eligible unfunded credit protection.

                                 Please also see instructions of point 4.1.1.

                           050-060

                              Unfunded credit protection: adjusted values (Ga)

                           Article 235 of CRR
                           Article 239(3) of CRR defines the adjusted value Ga of an unfunded credit protection.

                           050

                              Guarantees

                                       —

                                       Article 203 of CRR

                                       —

                                       Unfunded Credit Protection as defined in Article 4(59) of CRR different from Credit Derivatives.

                           060

                              Credit derivatives

                           Article 204 of CRR.

                           070-080

                              Funded credit protection

                           These columns refer to funded credit protection according to Article 4(58) of CRR and Articles 196, 197 and 200 of CRR. The amounts shall not include master netting agreements (already included in Original Exposure pre conversion factors).
                           Credit Linked Notes and on-balance sheet netting positions resulting from eligible on-balance sheet netting agreements according to Articles 218 and 219 of CRR shall be treated as cash collateral.

                           070

                              Financial collateral: simple method

                           Article 222(1) to (2) of CRR.

                           080

                              Other funded credit protection

                           Article 232 of CRR.

                           090-100

                              SUBSTITUTION OF THE EXPOSURE DUE TO CRM

                           Articles 222(3), Article 235(1) to (2) and Article 236 of CRR.
                           Outflows correspond to the covered part of the Original Exposure pre conversion factors, that is deducted from the obligor's exposure class and subsequently assigned to the protection provider's exposure class. This amount shall be considered as an Inflow into the protection provider's exposure class.
                           Inflows and outflows within the same exposure classes shall also be reported.
                           Exposures stemming from possible in- and outflows from and to other templates shall be taken into account.

                           110

                              NET EXPOSURE AFTER CRM SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                           Amount of the exposure net of value adjustments after taking into account outflows and inflows due to CREDIT RISK MITIGATION (CRM) TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS ON THE EXPOSURE

                           120-140

                              CREDIT RISK MITIGATION TECHNIQUES AFFECTING THE EXPOSURE AMOUNT. FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION, FINANCIAL COLLATERAL COMPREHENSIVE METHOD

                           Articles 223, 224, 225, 226, 227 and 228 of CRR. It also includes credit linked notes (Article 218 of CRR)
                           Credit Linked Notes and on-balance sheet netting positions resulting from eligible on-balance sheet netting agreements according to Articles 218 and 219 of CRR are treated as cash collateral.
                           The effect of the collateralization of the Financial Collateral Comprehensive Method applied to an exposure, which is secured by eligible financial collateral, is calculated according to Articles 223, 224, 225, 226, 227 and 228 of CRR.

                           120

                              Volatility adjustment to the exposure

                           Article 223(2) to (3) of CRR.
                           The amount to be reported is given by the impact of the volatility adjustment to the exposure (EVA-E) = E*He

                           130

                              (-) Financial collateral adjusted value (Cvam)

                           Article 239(2) of CRR.
                           For trading book operations includes financial collateral and commodities eligible for trading book exposures according to Article 299(2) points (c) to (f) of CRR.
                           The amount to be reported corresponds to Cvam = C*(1-Hc-Hfx)*(t-t*)/(T-t*). For a definition of C, Hc, Hfx, t, T and t* see part 3 title II chapter 4 section 4 and 5 of CRR.

                           140

                              (-) Of which: Volatility and maturity adjustments

                           Article 223(1) of CRR and Article 239(2) of CRR.
                           The amount to be reported is the joint impact of volatility and maturity adjustments (Cvam-C) = C*[(1-Hc-Hfx)*(t-t*)/(T-t*)-1], where the impact of volatility adjustment is (Cva-C) = C*[(1- Hc-Hfx)-1] and the impact of maturity adjustments is (Cvam-Cva) = C*(1-Hc-Hfx)*[(t-t*)/(T-t*)-1]

                           150

                              Fully adjusted exposure value (E*)

                           Article 220(4), Article 223(2) to (5) and Article 228(1) of CRR.

                           160-190

                              Breakdown of the fully adjusted exposure value of off-balance sheet items by conversion factors

                           Article 111(1) and Article 4(56) of CRR. See also Article 222(3) and Article 228(1) of CRR.

                           200

                              Exposure value

                           Part 3 title II chapter 4 section 4 of CRR.
                           Exposure value after taking into account value adjustments, all credit risk mitigants and credit conversion factors that is to be assigned to risk weights according to Article 113 and part 3 title II chapter 2 section 2 of CRR.

                           210

                              Of which: Arising from Counterparty Credit Risk

                           For Derivative instruments, repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions, long settlement transactions and margin lending transactions subject to part 3 title II chapter 6 of CRR, the exposure value for Counterparty Credit Risk calculated according to the methods laid down in part 3 title II chapter 6 sections 2, 3, 4, 5 of CRR.

                           215

                              Risk weighted exposure amount pre SME-supporting factor

                           Article 113(1) to (5) of CRR without taking into account the SME-supporting factor according to Article 501 of CRR.

                           220

                              Risk weighted exposure amount after SME-supporting factor

                           Article 113(1) to (5) of CRR taking into account the SME-supporting factor according to Article 500 of CRR.

                           230

                              Of which: with a credit assessment by a nominated ECAI

                           240

                              Of which: with a credit assessment derived from central government

                           rows

                           Instructions

                           010

                              Total exposures

                           020

                              of which: SME

                           All exposures to SME shall be reported here.

                           030

                              of which: Exposures subject to the SME-supporting factor

                           Only exposures which meet the requirements of Article 501 CRR shall be reported here.

                           040

                              of which: Secured by mortgages on immovable property — Residential property

                           Article 125 of CRR.
                           Only reported in exposure class “Secured by mortgages on immovable property”

                           050

                              of which: Exposures under the permanent partial use of the standardised approach

                           Exposures treated under Article 150(1) of the CRR

                           060

                              of which: Exposures under the standardised approach with prior supervisory permission to carry out a sequential IRB implementation

                           Exposures treated under Article 148(1) of the CRR

                           070-130

                              BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES BY EXPOSURE TYPES

                           Reporting institution's “banking book” positions shall be broken-down, following the criteria provided below, into on-balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk, off-balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk and exposures subject to counterparty credit risk.
                           Reporting institution's “trading book” counterparty credit risk positions according to Article 92(3) point (f) and Article 299(2) of CRR are assigned to the exposures subject to counterparty credit risk. Institutions that apply Article 94(1) of CRR also break down their “trading book” positions following the criteria provided below, into on-balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk, off-balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk and exposures subject to counterparty credit risk.

                           070

                              On balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk

                           Assets referred to in Article 24 of CRR not included in any other category.
                           Exposures, which are on-balance sheet items and which are included as Securities Financing Transactions, Derivatives & Long Settlement Transactions or from Contractual Cross Product Netting shall be reported in rows 090, 110 and 130, and therefore shall not be reported in this row.
                           Free deliveries according to Article 379(1) of CRR (if not deducted) do not constitute an on-balance sheet item, but nevertheless shall be reported in this row.
                           Exposures arising from assets posted to a CCP according to Article 4(90) of CRR and default fund exposures according to Article 4(89) of CRR shall be included if not reported in row 030.

                           080

                              Off balance sheet exposures subject to credit risk

                           Off-balance sheet positions comprise those items listed in Annex I of CRR.
                           Exposures, which are off-balance sheet items and which are included as Securities Financing Transactions, Derivatives & Long Settlement Transactions or from Contractual Cross Product Netting shall be reported in rows 040, 060 and, therefore, not reported in this row.
                           Exposures arising from assets posted to a CCP according to Article 4(90) of CRR and default fund exposures according to Article 4(89) of CRR shall be included if they are considered as off-balance sheet items.

                           090-130

                              Exposures/Transactions subject to counterparty credit risk

                           090

                              Securities Financing Transactions

                           Securities Financing Transactions (SFT), as defined in paragraph 17 of the Basel Committee document “The Application of Basel II to Trading Activities and the Treatment of Double Default Effects”, includes: (i) Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements defined in Article 4(82) of CRR as well as securities or commodities lending and borrowing transactions; (ii) margin lending transactions as defined in Article 272(3) of CRR.

                           100

                              Of which: centrally cleared through a QCCP

                           Article 306 of CRR for qualifying CCPs according to Articles 4(88) in conjunction with Article 301(2) of CRR.
                           Trade exposures to a CCP according to Article 4(91) of CRR

                           110

                              Derivatives and Long Settlement Transactions

                           Derivatives comprise those contract listed in Annex II of CRR.
                           Long Settlement Transactions as defined in Article 272(2) of CRR.
                           Derivatives and Long Settlement Transactions which are included in a Cross Product Netting and therefore reported in row 130, shall not be reported in this row.

                           120

                              Of which: centrally cleared through a QCCP

                           Article 306 of CRR for qualifying CCPs according to Articles 4(88) in conjunction with Article 301(2) of CRR
                           Trade exposures to a CCP according to Article 4(91) of CRR

                           130

                              From Contractual Cross Product Netting

                           Exposures that due to the existence of a contractual cross product netting (as defined in Article 272(11) of CRR) cannot be assigned to either Derivatives & Long Settlement Transactions or Securities Financing Transactions, shall be included in this row.

                           140-280

                              BREAKDOWN OF EXPOSURES BY RISK WEIGHTS

                           140

                              0 %

                           150

                              2 %

                           Article 306(1) of CRR

                           160

                              4 %

                           Article 305(3) of CRR

                           170

                              10 %

                           180

                              20 %

                           190

                              35 %

                           200

                              50 %

                           210

                              70 %

                           Article 232(3) point (c) of CRR.

                           220

                              75 %

                           230

                              100 %

                           240

                              150 %

                           250

                              250 %

                           Article 133(2) of CRR

                           260

                              370 %

                           Article 471 of CRR

                           270

                              1 250 %

                           Article 133(2) of CRR

                           280

                              Other risk weights

                           This row is not available for exposure classes Government, Corporates, Institutions and Retail.
                           For reporting those exposures not subject to the risk weights listed in the template.
                           Article 113(1) to (5) of CRR.
                           Unrated nth to default credit derivatives under the Standardized Approach (Article 134(6) of CRR) shall be reported in this row under the exposure class “Other items”.
                           See also Article 124(2) and Article 152(2) point (b) of CRR.

                           290-320

                              Memorandum Items

                           See also the explanation of the purpose of the memorandum items in the general section of the CR SA.

                           290

                              Exposures secured by mortgages on commercial immovable property

                           Article 112 point (i) of CRR
                           This is a memorandum item only. Independent from the calculation of risk exposure amounts of exposures secured by commercial immovable property according to Article 124 and 126 of CRR the exposures shall be broken down and reported in this row based on the criteria whether the exposures are secured by commercial real estate.

                           300

                              Exposures in default subject to a risk weight of 100 %

                           Article 112 point (j) of CRR.
                           Exposures included in the exposure class “exposures in default” which shall be included in this exposure class if they were not in default.

                           310

                              Exposures secured by mortgages on residential property

                           Article 112 point (i) of CRR.
                           This is a memorandum item only. Independent from the calculation of risk exposure amounts of exposures secured by mortgages on residential property according to Article 124 and 125 of CRR the exposures shall be broken down and reported in this row based on the criteria whether the exposures are secured by real estate property.

                           320

                              Exposures in default subject to a risk weight of 150 %

                           Article 112 point (j) of CRR.
                           Exposures included in the exposure class “exposures in default” which shall be included in this exposure class if they were not in default.

                     3.3.   CREDIT AND COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES: IRB APPROACH TO OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS (CR IRB)
               3.3.1.   Scope of the CR IRB template

                           73.

                           The scope of the CR IRB template covers own funds requirements for:

                                       i.

                                       Credit risk in the banking book, among which:

                                                   —

                                                   Counterparty credit risk in the banking book;

                                                   —

                                                   Dilution risk for purchased receivables;

                                       ii.

                                       Counterparty credit risk in the trading book;

                                       iii.

                                       Free deliveries resulting from all business activities..

                           74.

                           The scope of the template refers to the exposures for which the risk weighted exposure amounts are calculated according to Articles 151 to 157 Part Three Title II Chapter 3 CRR (IRB approach).

                           75.

                           The CR IRB template does not cover the following data:

                                       i.

                                       Equity exposures, which are reported in the CR EQU IRB template;

                                       ii.

                                       Securitisation positions, which are reported in the CR SEC SA, CR SEC IRB and/or CR SEC Details templates;

                                       iii.

                                       “Other non-obligation assets”, according to Article 147(2) point (g) CRR. The risk weight for this exposure class has to be set at 100 % at any time except for cash in hand, equivalent cash items and exposures that are residual values of leased assets, according to Article 156 CRR. The risk weighted exposure amounts for this exposure class are reported directly in the CA-Template;

                                       iv.

                                       Credit valuation adjustment risk, which is reported on the CVA Risk template;

                                 The CR IRB template does not require a geographical breakdown of IRB exposures by residence of the counterparty. This breakdown is reported in the template CR GB.

                           76.

                           In order to clarify whether the institution uses its own estimates for LGD and/or credit conversion factors the following information shall be provided for each reported exposure class:

                              “NO”= in case the supervisory estimates of LGD and credit conversion factors are used (Foundation IRB)

                              “YES”= in case own estimates of LGD and credit conversion factors are used (Advanced IRB)
                           In any case, for the reporting of the retail portfolios “YES” has to be reported.
                           In case an institution uses own estimates of LGDs to calculate risk weighted exposure amounts for a part of its IRB exposures as well as uses supervisory LGDs to calculate risk weighted exposure amounts for the other part of its IRB exposures, an CR IRB Total for F-IRB positions and one CR IRB Total for A-IRB positions has to be reported.

                     3.3.2.   Breakdown of the CR IRB template

                           77.

                           The CR IRB consists of two templates. CR IRB 1 provides a general overview of IRB exposures and the different methods to calculate total risk exposure amounts as well as a breakdown of total exposures by exposure types. CR IRB 2 provides a breakdown of total exposures assigned to obligor grades or pools. The templates CR IRB 1 and CR IRB 2 shall be reported separately for the following exposure and sub-exposure classes:

                                       1)

                                       Total
                                       (The Total template must be reported for the Foundation IRB and, separately for the Advanced IRB approach.)

                                       2)

                                       Central banks and central governments
                                       (Article 147(2)(a) CRR)

                                       3)

                                       Institutions
                                       (Article 147(2) point (b) CRR)

                                       4.1)

                                       Corporate — SME
                                       (Article 147(2) point (c) CRR

                                       4.2)

                                       Corporate — Specialised lending
                                       (Article 147(8) CRR)

                                       4.3)

                                       Corporate — Other
                                       (All corporates according to Article 147(2) point (c), not reported under 4.1 and 4.2).

                                       5.1)

                                       Retail — Secured by immovable property SME
                                       (Exposures reflecting Article 147(2) point (d) in conjunction with Article 154(3) CRR which are secured by immovable property).

                                       5.2)

                                       Retail — Secured by immovable property non-SME
                                       (Exposures reflecting Article 147(2) point (d) CRR which are secured by immovable property and not reported under 5.1).

                                       5.3)

                                       Retail — Qualifying revolving
                                       (Article 147(2) point (d) in conjunction with Article 154(4) CRR).

                                       5.4)

                                       Retail — Other SME
                                       (Article 147(2) point (d) not reported under 5.1 and 5.3).

                                       5.5)

                                       Retail — Other non — SME
                                       (Article 147(2) point (d) CRR which were not reported under 5.2 and 5.3).

                     3.3.3.   C 08.01 — Credit and counterparty credit risks and free deliveries: IRB Approach to Capital Requirements (CR IRB 1)
               3.3.3.1.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           Instructions

                           010

                              INTERNAL RATING SYSTEM/PD ASSIGNED TO THE OBLIGOR GRADE OR POOL (%)

                           The PD assigned to the obligor grade or pool to be reported shall be based on the provisions laid down in Article 180 of CRR. For each individual grade or pool, the PD assigned to the specific obligor grade or pool shall be reported. For figures corresponding to an aggregation of obligor grades or pools (e.g. total exposures) the exposure weighted average of the PDs assigned to the obligor grades or pools included in the aggregation shall be provided. The exposure value (column 110) shall be used for the calculation of the exposure-weighted average PD.
                           For each individual grade or pool the PD assigned to the specific obligor grade or pool shall be reported. All reported risk parameters shall be derived from the risk parameters used in the internal rating system approved by the respective competent authority.
                           It is neither intended nor desirable to have a supervisory master scale. If the reporting institution applies a unique rating system or is able to report according to an internal master scale, this scale is used.
                           Otherwise, the different rating systems shall be merged and ordered according to the following criteria: Obligor grades of the different rating systems shall be pooled and ordered from the lower PD assigned to each obligor grade to the higher. Where the institution uses a large number of grades or pools, a reduced number of grades or pools to be reported may be agreed with the competent authorities.
                           Institutions shall contact their competent authority in advance, if they want to report a different number of grades in comparison with the internal number of grades.
                           For the purposes of weighting the average PD the exposure value reported in column 110 is used. All exposures, including defaulted exposures are to be considered for the purpose of the calculation of the exposure weighted average PD (e.g. for “total exposure”). Defaulted exposures are those assigned to the last rating grade/s with a PD of 100 %.

                           020

                              ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                           Institutions report the exposure value before taking into account any value adjustments, provisions, effects due to credit risk mitigation techniques or credit conversion factors.
                           The original exposure value shall be reported in accordance with Article 24 of CRR and Article 166(1) and (2) and (4) to (7) of CRR.
                           The effect resulting from Article 166(3) of CRR (effect of on balance sheet netting of loans and deposits) is reported separately as Funded Credit Protection and therefore shall not reduce the Original Exposure.

                           030

                              OF WHICH: LARGE FINANCIAL SECTOR ENTITIES AND UNREGULATED FINANCIAL ENTITIES

                           Breakdown of the original exposure pre conversion factor for all exposures defined according to Article 142(4) and (5) CRR subject to the higher correlation according to Article 153(2) CRR.

                           040-080

                              CREDIT RISK MITIGATION (CRM) TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS ON THE EXPOSURE

                           Credit risk mitigation techniques as defined in Article 4(57) of CRR that reduce the credit risk of an exposure or exposures via the substitution of exposures as defined below in “SUBSTITUTION OF THE EXPOSURE DUE TO CRM”.

                           040-050

                              UNFUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION

                           Unfunded credit protection: Values as they are defined in Article 4(59) of CRR.
                           If collateral has an effect on the exposure (e.g. if used for credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects on the exposure) it shall be capped at the exposure value.

                           040

                              GUARANTEES:

                           When own estimates of LGD are not used, the Adjusted Value (Ga) as defined in Article 236 of CRR shall be provided.
                           When Own estimates of LGD are used, (Article 183 of CRR, except paragraph 3), the relevant value used in the internal model shall be reported.
                           Guarantees shall be reported in column 040 when the adjustment is not made in the LGD. When the adjustment is made in the LGD, the amount of the guarantee shall be reported in column 150.
                           Regarding exposures subject to the double default treatment, the value of unfunded credit protection is re-ported in column 220.

                           050

                              CREDIT DERIVATIVES:

                           When own estimates of LGD are not used, the Adjusted Value (Ga) as defined in Article 216 of CRR shall be provided.
                           When own estimates of LGD are used (Article 183 of CRR), the relevant value used in the internal modelling shall be reported.
                           When the adjustment is made in the LGD, the amount of the credit derivatives shall be reported in column 160
                           Regarding exposures subject to the double default treatment the value of unfunded credit protection shall be reported in column 220.

                           060

                              OTHER FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION

                           If collateral has an effect on the exposure (e.g. if used for credit risk mitigation techniques with substitution effects of the exposure), it shall be capped at the exposure value.
                           When own estimates of LGD are not used, Article 232 of CRR shall be applied.
                           When own estimates of LGD are used, those credit risk mitigants that comply with the criteria in Article 212 of the CRR shall be reported. The relevant value used in the internal model shall be reported.
                           To be reported in column 060 when the adjustment is not made in the LGD. When an adjustment is made in the LGD the amount shall be reported in column 170.

                           070-080

                              SUBSTITUTION OF THE EXPOSURE DUE TO CRM

                           Outflows correspond to the covered part of the Original Exposure pre conversion factors, that is deducted from the obligor's exposure class and, when relevant, obligor grade or pool, and subsequently assigned to the protection provider's exposure class and, when relevant, obligor grade or pool. This amount shall be considered as an Inflow into the protection provider's exposure class and, when relevant, obligor grades or pools.
                           Inflows and outflows within the same exposure classes and, when relevant, obligor grades or pools shall also be considered.
                           Exposures stemming from possible in- and outflows from and to other templates shall be taken into account.

                           090

                              EXPOSURE AFTER CRM SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                           Exposure assigned in the corresponding obligor grade or pool and exposure class after taking into account outflows and inflows due to CRM techniques with substitution effects on the exposure.

                           100, 120

                              Of which: Off Balance Sheet Items

                           See CR-SA instructions

                           110

                              EXPOSURE VALUE

                           The value in accordance with Article 166 of CRR and Article 230(1) sentence 2 of CRR are reported.
                           For the instruments as defined in Annex I, the credit conversion factors (Article 166(8) to (10) of CRR) irrespective the approach chosen by the institution, are applied.
                           For rows 040-060 (securities financing transactions, derivatives and long settlement transactions and exposures from contractual cross-product netting) subject to part 3 title II chapter 6 of CRR, the Exposure Value is the same as the value for Counterparty Credit Risk calculated according to the methods laid down in part 3 title II chapter 6 sections 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 of CRR. These values are reported in this column and not column 130 “Of which: arising from counterparty credit risk”.

                           130

                              Of which: Arising from counterparty Credit Risk

                           See CR SA instructions.

                           140

                              OF WHICH: LARGE FINANCIAL SECTOR ENTITIES AND UNREGULATED FINANCIAL ENTITIES

                           Breakdown of the exposure value for all exposures defined according to Article 142(4) and (5) CRR subject to the higher correlation according to Article 153(2) CRR.

                           150-210

                              CREDIT RISK MITIGATION TECHNIQUES TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT IN LGD ESTIMATES EXCLUDING DOUBLE DEFAULT TREATMENT

                           CRM techniques that have an impact on LGDs as a result of the application of the substitution effect of CRM techniques shall not be included in these columns.
                           Where own estimates of LGD are not used: Articles 228(2), 230 (1) and (2), 231 of the CRR
                           Where own estimates of LGD are used:

                                       —

                                       Regarding unfunded credit protection, for exposures to central government and central banks, institutions and corporates: Article 161 paragraph 3 of the CRR. For retail exposures Article 164 paragraph 2 of the CRR.

                                       —

                                       Regarding funded credit protection collateral taken into account in the LGD estimates according to Article 181(1) points (e) and (f) of the CRR.

                           150

                              GUARANTEES

                           See instructions to column 040.

                           160

                              CREDIT DERIVATIVES

                           See instructions to column 050.

                           170

                              OWN ESTIMATES OF LGDS ARE USED: OTHER FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION

                           The relevant value used in the internal modelling of the institution.
                           Those credit risk mitigants that comply with the criteria in Article 212 of the CRR.

                           180

                              ELIGIBLE FINANCIAL COLLATERAL

                           For trading book operations includes financial instruments and commodities eligible for trading book exposures according to Article 299 paragaph 2 point. (c) to (f) of CRR Credit linked Notes and on -balance sheet netting according to Part 3 Title II Chapter 4 Section 4 of CRR are treated as cash collateral.
                           When own estimates of LGD are not used: values in accordance with Article 193(1) to (4) and Article 194(1) of CRR. The adjusted value (Cvam) as set out in Article 223(2) of CRR is reported.
                           When own estimates of LGD are used: financial collateral taken into account in the LGD estimates according to Article 181(1) points (e) and (f) of CRR. The amount to be reported shall be the estimated market value of the collateral.

                           190-210

                              OTHER ELIGIBLE COLLATERAL

                           Where own estimates of LGD are not used: Article 199(1) to (8) of CRR and Article 229 of CRR.
                           Where own estimates of LGD are used: other collateral taken into account in the LGD estimates according to Article 181(1) points (e) and (f) of CRR.

                           190

                              REAL ESTATE

                           Where own estimates of LGD are not used, values in accordance with Article 199(2) to (4) of CRR shall be reported. Leasing of real estate property is also included (see Article 199(7) of CRR). See also Article 229 of CRR.
                           When own estimates of LGD are used the amount to be reported shall be the estimated market value.

                           200

                              OTHER PHYSICAL COLLATERAL

                           Where own estimates of LGD are not used, values in accordance with Article 199(6) and (8) of CRR shall be reported. Leasing of property different from real estate is also included (see Article 199(7) of CRR). See also Article 229(3) of CRR.
                           Where own estimates of LGD are used the amount to be reported shall be the estimated market value of collateral.

                           210

                              RECEIVABLES

                           When own estimates of LGD are not used, values in accordance with Articles 199(5), 229 (2) of CRR are reported.
                           When own estimates of LGD are used, the amount to be reported shall be the estimated market value of collateral.

                           220

                              SUBJECT TO DOUBLE DEFAULT TREATMENT: UNFUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION

                           Guarantees and credit derivatives covering exposures subject to the double default treatment reflecting Articles 202 and 217 (1) of CRR. See also columns 040 “Guarantees” and 050 “Credit derivatives”.

                           230

                              EXPOSURE WEIGHTED AVERAGE LGD (%)

                           All the impact of CRM techniques on LGD values as specified in Part 3 Title II Chapters 3 and 4 of CRR shall be considered. In the case of exposures subject to the double default treatment the LGD to be reported shall correspond to the one selected according to Article 161(4) of CRR.
                           For defaulted exposures, provisions laid down in Article 181(1) point (h) of CRR shall be considered.
                           The definition of exposure value as in Column 110 shall be used for the calculation of the exposure-weighted averages.
                           All effects shall be considered (so the floor applicable to mortgages shall be included in the reporting).
                           For institutions applying the IRB approach but not using their own estimates of LGD the risk mitigation effects of financial collateral are reflected in E*, the fully adjusted value of the exposure, and then reflected in LGD* according to Article 228(2) CRR.
                           The exposure weighted average LGD associated to each PD “obligor grade or pool” shall result from the average of the prudential LGDs, assigned to the exposures of that PD grade/pool, weighted by the respective exposure value of Column 110.
                           If own estimates of LGD are applied Article 175 and Article 181(1) and (2) of CRR shall be considered.
                           In the case of exposures subject to the double default treatment the LGD to be reported shall correspond to the one selected according to Article 161(4) of CRR.
                           The calculation of the exposure weighted average LGD shall be derived from the risk parameters really used in the internal rating system approved by the respective competent authority.
                           Data shall not be reported for specialized lending exposures referred to in Article 153(5).
                           Exposure and the respective LGD's for large regulated financial sector entities and unregulated financial entities shall not be included in the calculation of column 230, they shall only be included in the calculation of column 240.

                           240

                              EXPOSURE WEIGHTED AVERAGE LGD (%) FOR LARGE FINANCIAL SECTOR ENTITIES AND UNREGULATED FINANCIAL ENTITIES

                           Exposure weighted average LGD (%) for all exposures defined according to Article 142(4) and (5) CRR subject to the higher correlation according to Article 153(2) CRR.

                           250

                              EXPOSURE-WEIGHTED AVERAGE MATURITY VALUE (DAYS)

                           The value reported reflects Article 162 of CRR. The exposure value (Column 110) shall be used for the calculation of the exposure-weighted averages. The average maturity is reported in days.
                           This data shall not be reported for the exposure values for which the maturity is not an element in the calculation of risk weighted exposure amounts. This means that this column shall not be filled in for the exposure class “retail”.

                           255

                              RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT PRE SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR

                           For Central governments and Central Banks, Corporate and Institutions see Article 153(1) and (3) of CRR. For Retail see Article 154(1) of CRR.
                           The SME-supporting factor according to Article 501 of CRR shall not be taken into account.

                           260

                              RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT AFTER SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR

                           For Central governments and Central Banks, Corporate and Institutions see Article 153(1) and (3) of CRR. For Retail see Article 154(1) of CRR.
                           The SME-supporting factor according to Article 501 of CRR shall be taken into account.

                           270

                              OF WHICH: LARGE FINANCIAL SECTOR ENTITIES AND UNREGULATED FINANCIAL ENTITIES

                           Breakdown of the risk weighted exposure amount after SME supporting factor for all exposures defined according to Article 142(4) and (5) CRR subject to the higher correlation according to Article 153(2) CRR.

                           280

                              EXPECTED LOSS AMOUNT

                           For the definition of Expected Loss see Article 5(3) of CRR and, for calculation see Article 158 of CRR. The expected loss amount to be reported shall be based on the risk parameters really used in the internal rating system approved by the respective competent authority.

                           290

                              (-) VALUE ADJUSTMENTS AND PROVISIONS

                           Value Adjustments as well as specific and general provisions under Article 159 CRR are reported. General provisions shall be reported by assigning the amount pro rata — according to the expected loss of the different obligor grades.

                           300

                              NUMBER OF OBLIGORS

                           Articles 172(1) and (2) of CRR.
                           For all exposure classes except retail, the institution shall report the number of legal entities/obligors which were separately rated, regardless of the number of different loans or exposures granted.
                           Within the exposure class retail the institution shall report the number of exposures which were separately assigned to a certain rating grade or pool. In case Article 172(2) of CRR applies, an obligor may be considered in more than one grade.
                           As this column deals with an element of the structure of the rating systems, it relates to the original exposures pre conversion factor assigned to each obligor grade or pool without taking into account the effect of CRM techniques (in particular redistribution effects).

                           Rows

                           Instructions

                           010

                              TOTAL EXPOSURES

                           015

                              of which: Exposures subject to SME-supporting factor

                           Only exposures which meet the requirements of Article 501 CRR shall be reported here.

                           020-060

                           BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES BY EXPOSURE TYPES:

                           020

                              On balance sheet items subject to credit risk

                           Assets referred to in Article 24 of CRR not included in any other category.
                           Exposures, which are on-balance sheet items and which are included as Securities Financing Transactions, Derivatives & Long Settlement Transactions or from Contractual Cross Product Netting shall be reported in rows 040-060 and, therefore, not reported in this row.
                           Free deliveries according to Article 379(1) of CRR (if not deducted) do not constitute an on-balance sheet item, but nevertheless shall be reported in this row.
                           Exposures arising from assets posted to a CCP according to Article 4(91) of CRR and default fund exposures according to Article 4(89) of CRR shall be included if not reported in row 030.

                           030

                              Off balance sheet items subject to credit risk

                           Off-balance sheet positions comprise those items listed in Annex I of CRR.
                           Exposures, which are off-balance sheet items and which are included as Securities Financing Transactions, Derivatives & Long Settlement Transactions or from Contractual Cross Product Netting shall be reported in rows 040-060 and, therefore, not reported in this row.
                           Exposures arising from assets posted to a CCP according to Article 4(91) of CRR and default fund exposures according to Article 4(89) of CRR shall be included if they are considered as off-balance sheet items.

                           040-060

                              Exposures/Transactions subject to counterparty credit risk

                           040

                              Securities Financing Transactions

                           Securities Financing Transactions (SFT), as defined in paragraph 17 of the Basel Committee document “The Application of Basel II to Trading Activities and the Treatment of Double Default Effects”, includes: (i) Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements defined in Article 4(82) of CRR as well as securities or commodities lending and borrowing transactions and (ii) margin lending transactions as defined in Article 272(3) of CRR.
                           Securities Financing Transactions, which are included in a Cross Product Netting and therefore reported in row 060, shall not be reported in this row.

                           050

                              Derivatives and Long Settlement Transactions

                           Derivatives comprise those contracts listed in Annex II of CRR. Derivatives and Long Settlement Transactions which are included in a Cross Product Netting and therefore reported in row 060 shall not be reported in this row.

                           060

                              From Contractual Cross Product Netting

                           See CR SA instructions

                           070

                              EXPOSURES ASSIGNED TO OBLIGOR GRADES OR POOLS: TOTAL

                           For exposures to corporates, institutions and Central governments and Central Banks see Article 142(1) point (6) and Article 170(1) point (c) of CRR.
                           For retail exposures see Article 170(3) point (b) of CRR. For Exposures arising from purchased receivables see Article 166(6) of CRR.
                           Exposures for dilution risk of purchased receivables shall not be reported by obligor grades or pools and shall be reported in row 180.
                           Where the institution uses a large number of grades or pools, a reduced number of grades or pools to be reported may be agreed with the competent authorities.
                           A master scale is not used. Instead, institutions shall determine the scale to be used themselves.

                           080

                              SPECIALIZED LENDING SLOTTING CRITERIA: TOTAL

                           Article 153(5) of CRR. This only applies to the corporates, institutions and central governments and central banks exposure classes.

                           090-150

                              BREAKDOWN BY RISK WEIGHTS OF TOTAL EXPOSURES UNDER SPECIALIZED LENDING SLOTTING CRITERIA:

                           120

                              Of which: In category 1

                           Article 153(5) table 1 of CRR.

                           160

                              ALTERNATIVE TREATMENT: SECURED BY REAL ESTATE

                           Articles 193(1) and (2), 194 (1) to (7) and 230 (3) of CRR.

                           170

                              EXPOSURES FROM FREE DELIVERIES APPLYING RISK WEIGHTS UNDER THE ALTERNATIVE TREATMENT OR 100 % AND OTHER EXPOSURES SUBJECT TO RISK WEIGHTS

                           Exposures arising from free deliveries for which the alternative treatment referred to in Article 379(2) first subparagraph, last sentence of CRR is used or for which a 100 % risk weight is applied according to a Article 379(2) last subparagraph of CRR. Unrated nth to default credit derivatives under Article 153(8) of CRR and any other exposure subject to risk weights not included in any other row shall be reported in this row.

                           180

                              DILUTION RISK: TOTAL PURCHASED RECEIVABLES

                           See Article 4(53) of CRR for a definition of dilution risk. For calculation of risk weight for dilution risk see Article 157(1) of CRR.
                           According to Article 166(6) of CRR the exposure value of purchased receivables shall be the outstanding amount minus the risk weighted exposure amounts for dilution risk prior to credit risk mitigation.

                     3.3.4.   C 08.02 — Credit and counterparty credit risks and free deliveries: IRB approach to capital requirements (breakdown by obligor grades or pools (CR IRB 2 template)

                           Column

                           Instructions

                           005

                              Obligor grade (row identifier)

                           This is a row identifier and shall be unique for each row on a particular sheet of the table. It shall follow the numerical order 1, 2, 3, etc.

                           010-300

                           Instructions for each of these columns are the same as for the corresponding numbered columns in table CR IRB 1.

                           Row

                           Instructions

                           010-001 — 010-NNN

                           Values reported in these rows must be in ordered from the lower to the higher according to the PD assigned to the obligor grade or pool. PD of obligors in default shall be 100 %. Exposures subject to the alternative treatment for real estate collateral (only available when not using own estimates for the LGD) shall not be assigned according to the PD of the obligor and not reported in this template.

                     3.4.   CREDIT AND COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISKS AND FREE DELIVERIES: INFORMATION WITH GEOGRAPHICAL BREAKDOWN (CR GB)

                           78.

                           Institutions fulfilling the threshold set in Article 5 (a) (4) of this Regulation shall submit information regarding the domestic country as well as any non-domestic country. The threshold is only applicable to Table 1 and Table 2. Exposures to supranational organisations shall be assigned to the geographical area “other countries”.

                           79.

                           The term “residence of the obligor” refers to the country of incorporation of the obligor. This concept can be applied on an immediate-obligor basis and on an ultimate-risk basis. Hence, CRM techniques can change the allocation of an exposure to a country. Exposures to supranational organisations shall not be assigned to the country of residence of the institution but to the geographical area “Other countries” irrespective of the exposure class where the exposure to supranational organisations is assigned.

                           80.

                           Data regarding “original exposure pre conversion factors” shall be reported referring to the country of residence of the immediate obligor. Data regarding “exposure value” and “Risk weighted exposure amounts” shall be reported as of the country of residence of the ultimate obligor.

                     3.4.1.   C 09.01 — Geographical breakdown of exposures by residence of the obligor: SA exposures (CR GB 1)
               3.4.1.1.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           010

                              ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                           Same definition as for column 010 of CR SA template

                           020

                              Exposures in default

                           Original exposure pre conversion factors for those exposures which have been classified as “defaulted exposures”.
                           This “memorandum item” provides additional information about the obligor structure of the exposure class “in default”. Exposures shall be reported where the obligors would have been reported if those exposures were not assigned to the exposure classes “in default”.
                           This information is a “memorandum item” — hence does not affect the calculation of risk weighted exposure amounts of exposure class “in default” according to Article 112 point (j) of CRR.

                           040

                              Observed new defaults for the period

                           The amount of original exposures which have moved into exposure class “Exposures in default” during the 3-month period since the last reporting reference date shall be reported against the exposure class to which the obligor originally belonged.

                           050

                              General credit risk adjustments

                           Credit risk adjustments according to Article 110 of CRR.

                           055

                              Specific credit risk adjustments

                           Credit risk adjustments according to Article 110 of CRR.

                           060

                              Write-offs

                           Write-offs include both reductions of the carrying of impaired financial assets recognised directly in profit or loss [IFRS 7.B5.(d).(i)] and reductions in the amounts of the allowance accounts charged against the impaired financial assets [IFRS 7.B5.(d).(ii)].

                           070

                              Credit risk adjustments/write-offs for observed new defaults

                           Sum of credit risk adjustments and write-offs for those exposures which were classified as “defaulted exposures” during the 3-month period since the last data submission.

                           075

                              Exposure value

                           Same definition as for column 200 of CR SA template

                           080

                              RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT PRE SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR

                           Same definition as for column 215 of CR SA template

                           090

                              RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT AFTER SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR

                           Same definition as for column 220 of CR SA template

                           Rows

                           010

                              Central governments or central banks

                           Article 112 point (a) of CRR.

                           020

                              Regional governments or local authorities

                           Article 112 point (b) of CRR.

                           030

                              Public sector entities

                           Article 112 point (c) of CRR.

                           040

                              Multilateral developments banks

                           Article 112 point (d) of CRR.

                           050

                              International organisations

                           Article 112 point (e) of CRR.

                           060

                              Institutions

                           Article 112 point (f) of CRR.

                           070

                              Corporates

                           Article 112 point (g) of CRR.

                           075

                              of which: SME

                           Same definition as for row 020of CR SA template

                           080

                              Retail

                           Article 112 point (h) of CRR.

                           085

                              of which: SME

                           Same definition as for row 020of CR SA template

                           090

                              Secured by mortgages on immovable property

                           Article 112 point (i) of CRR.

                           095

                              of which: SME

                           Same definition as for row 020 of CR SA template

                           100

                              Exposures in default

                           Article 112 point (j) of CRR.

                           110

                              Items associated with particularly high risk

                           Article 112 point (k) of CRR.

                           120

                              Covered bonds

                           Article 112 point (l) of CRR.

                           130

                              Claims on institutions and corporates with a short-term credit assessment

                           Article 112 point (n) of CRR.

                           140

                              Collective investments undertakings (CIU)

                           Article 112 point (o) of CRR.

                           150

                              Equity exposures

                           Article 112 point (p) of CRR.

                           160

                              Other exposures

                           Article 112 point (q) of CRR.

                     3.4.2.   C 09.02 — Geographical breakdown of exposures by residence of the obligor: IRB exposures (CR GB 2)
               3.4.2.1.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           010

                              ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                           Same definition as for column 020 of CR IRB template

                           030

                              Of which defaulted

                           Original exposure value for those exposures which have been classified as “defaulted exposures” according to CRR article 178.

                           040

                              Observed new defaults for the period

                           The amount of original exposures which have moved into exposure class “Exposures in default” during the 3-month period since the last reporting reference date shall be reported against the exposure class to which the obligor originally belonged.

                           050

                              General credit risk adjustments

                           Credit risk adjustments according to Article 110of CRR.

                           055

                              Specific credit risk adjustments

                           Credit risk adjustments according to Article 110 of CRR.

                           060

                              Write-offs

                           Write-offs include both reductions of the carrying of impaired financial assets recognised directly in profit or loss [IFRS 7.B5.(d).(i)] and reductions in the amounts of the allowance accounts charged against the impaired financial assets [IFRS 7.B5.(d).(ii)].

                           070

                              Credit risk adjustments/write-offs for observed new defaults

                           Sum of credit risk adjustments and write-offs for those exposures which were classified as “defaulted exposures” during the 3-month period since the last data submission.

                           080

                              INTERNAL RATING SYSTEM/PD ASSIGNED TO THE OBLIGOR GRADE OR POOL (%)

                           Same definition as for column 010 of CR IRB template

                           090

                              EXPOSURE WEIGHTED AVERAGE LGD (%)

                           Same definition as for column 230 of CR IRB template. Provisions laid down in Article 181(1) point (h) of CRR shall apply.
                           Data shall not be reported for specialized lending exposures referred to in Article 153(5).

                           100

                              Of which: defaulted

                           Exposure weighted LGD for those exposures which have been classified as “defaulted exposures” according to Article 178 of CRR.

                           105

                              Exposure value

                           Same definition as for column 110 of CR IRB template.

                           110

                              RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT PRE SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR

                           Same definition as for column 255 of CR IRB template

                           120

                              Of which defaulted

                           Risk weighted exposure amount for those exposures which have been classified as “defaulted exposures” according to Article 178 of CRR.

                           125

                              RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT AFTER SME-SUPPORTING FACTOR

                           Same definition as for column 260 of CR IRB template

                           130

                              EXPECTED LOSS AMOUNT

                           Same definition as for column 280 of CR IRB template

                           Rows

                           010

                              Central banks and central governments

                           (Article 147(2)(a) CRR)

                           020

                              Institutions

                           (Article 147(2) point (b) CRR)

                           030

                              Corporates

                           (All corporates according to Article 147(2) point (c).)

                           040

                              Of which: Specialized lending

                           (Article 147(8) a CRR)
                           Data shall not be reported for specialized lending exposures referred to in Article 153(5).

                           050

                              Of which: SME

                           (Article 147(2) point (c) CRR)

                           060

                              Retail

                           All Retail exposures according to Article 147(2) point (d)

                           070

                              Retail — Secured by real estate property

                           Exposures reflecting Article 147(2) point (d) CRR which are secured by real estate.

                           080

                              SME

                           Retail exposures reflecting Article 147(2) point (d) in conjunction with Article 153(3) CRR which are secured by real estate.

                           090

                              non-SME

                           Retail exposures reflecting Article 147(2) point (d) CRR which are secured by real estate.

                           100

                              Retail — Qualifying revolving

                           (Article 147(2) point (d) in conjunction with Article 154(4) CRR).

                           110

                              Other Retail

                           Other retail exposures according to Article 147(2) point (d) not reported in rows 070 — 100.

                           120

                              SME

                           Other retail exposures reflecting Article 147(2) point (d) in conjunction with Article 153(3) CRR.

                           130

                              non-SME

                           Other retail exposures reflecting Article 147(2) point (d) CRR.

                           140

                              Equity

                           Equity exposures reflecting Article 147(2) point (e) CRR.

                     3.4.3.   C 09.03 — Geographical breakdown of relevant credit exposures for the purpose of calculation of the institution-specific countercyclical buffer (CR GB 3)
               3.4.3.1.   General remarks

                           81.

                           According to Article 128 point (7) in connection with Articles 130 and 140 (1) CRD the countercyclical buffer rate is the “weighted average of the countercyclical buffer rates that apply in the jurisdiction where the relevant credit exposures of the institution are located”. The weighted average is calculated as follows:
                           a)   Numerator: Total own funds requirements for credit risk determined in accordance with Part Three, Titles II and IV of CRR that relate to the relevant credit exposures in the territory in question
                           b)   Denominator: Total own funds requirements for credit risk that relate to the relevant credit exposures

                           82.

                           This table is implemented in order to receive more information regarding the elements of the institution specific countercyclical capital buffer. The information requested refers to the own funds requirements for credit exposures, securitisation exposures and trading book exposures relevant for the calculation of the institution specific countercyclical capital buffer (CCB) in accordance with Art 140 CRD (relevant credit exposures), and determined in accordance with Part Three, Title II and Title IV of the CRR.

                           83.

                           The information shall be reported by country. The distribution by country of own fund requirements of relevant credit exposures should be made in accordance with the provisions laid down in the EBA RTS on the method for the identification of the geographical location of the relevant credit exposures EBA/RTS/2013/15. The threshold set in Article 5 (a) (4) of this Regulation is not relevant for the reporting of this breakdown.

                     3.4.3.2.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Rows

                           010

                              Own funds requirements

                           Own funds requirements for relevant credit exposures, trading book exposures and securitisation exposures in accordance with Article 140(4) CRD and determined in accordance with Part Three, Title II and Title IV of the CRR.

                     3.5.   C 10.01 AND C 10.02 — EQUITY EXPOSURES UNDER THE INTERNAL RATINGS BASED APPROACH (CR EQU IRB 1 AND CR EQU IRB 2)
               3.5.1.   General remarks

                           84.

                           The CR EQU IRB template consists of two templates: CR EQU IRB 1 provides a general overview of IRB exposures of the equity exposure class and the different methods to calculate total risk exposure amounts. CR EQU IRB 2 provides a breakdown of total exposures assigned to obligor grades in the context of the PD/LGD approach. “CR EQU IRB” refers to both “CR EQU IRB 1” and “CR EQU IRB 2” templates, as applicable, in the following instructions.

                           85.

                           The CR EQU IRB template provides information on the calculation of risk weighted exposure amounts for credit risk (Article 92(3) point (a) of CRR) according to the IRB method (Part Three, Title II, Chapter 3 of CRR) for equity exposures referred to in Article 147(2) point (e) of CRR.

                           86.

                           According to Article 147(6) of CRR, the following exposures shall be assigned to the equity exposure class:

                                       a)

                                       non-debt exposures conveying a subordinated, residual claim on the assets or income of the issuer; or

                                       b)

                                       debt exposures and other securities, partnerships, derivatives, or other vehicles, the economic substance of which is similar to the exposures specified in point (a).

                           87.

                           Collective investment undertakings treated according to the simple risk weight approach as referred to in Article 152 of CRR shall also be reported in the CR EQU IRB template.

                           88.

                           In accordance with Article 151(1) of CRR, institutions shall provide the CR EQU IRB template when applying one of the three approaches referred to in Article 155 of CRR:

                                       —

                                       the Simple Risk Weight approach,

                                       —

                                       the PD/LGD approach, or

                                       —

                                       the Internal Models approach.

                                 Moreover, institutions applying the IRB approach shall also report in the CR EQU IRB template risk-weighted exposure amounts for those equity exposures which attract a fixed risk-weight treatment (without however being explicitly treated according to the Simple Risk Weight approach or the (temporary or permanent) partial use of the credit risk standardised approach (e.g. equity exposures attracting a risk-weight of 250 % in accordance with Article 48(4) of CRR, respectively a risk-weight of 370 % in accordance with Article 471(2) of CRR))).

                           89.

                           The following equity claims shall not be reported in the CR EQU IRB template:

                                       —

                                       Equity exposures in the trading book (in case where institutions are not exempted from calculating own funds requirements for trading book positions according to Article 94 of CRR).

                                       —

                                       Equity exposures subject to the partial use of the standardised approach (Article 150 of CRR), including:

                                       —

                                       Grandfathered equity exposures according to Article 495(1) of CRR,

                                       —

                                       Equity exposures to entities whose credit obligations are assigned a 0 % risk weight under the Standardised Approach, including those publicly sponsored entities where a 0 % risk weight can be applied (Article 150(1) point (g) of CRR),

                                       —

                                       Equity exposures incurred under legislated programmes to promote specified sectors of the economy that provide significant subsidies for the investment to the institution and involve some form of government oversight and restrictions on the equity investments (Article 150(1) point (h) of CRR).

                                       —

                                       Equity exposures to ancillary services undertakings whose risk weighted exposure amounts may be calculated according to the treatment of “other non credit-obligation assets” (in accordance with Article 155(1) of CRR).

                                       —

                                       Equity claims deducted from own funds in accordance with Articles 46 and 48 of the CRR.

                     3.5.2.   Instructions concerning specific positions (applicable to both CR EQU IRB 1 and CR EQU IRB 2)

                           Columns

                           005

                              OBLIGOR GRADE (ROW IDENTIFIER)

                           The obligor grade is a row identifier and shall be unique for each row in the table. It shall follow the numerical order 1, 2, 3, etc.

                           010

                              INTERNAL RATING SYSTEM

                              PD ASSIGNED TO THE OBLIGOR GRADE (%)

                           Institutions applying the PD/LGD approach report in column 010 the probability of default (PD) calculated in accordance with the provisions referred to in Article 165(1) of CRR.
                           The PD assigned to the obligor grade or pool to be reported shall be in line with the minimum requirements as laid down in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 3, Section 6 of CRR. For each individual grade or pool, the PD assigned to that specific obligor grade or pool shall be reported. All reported risk parameters shall be derived from the risk parameters used in the internal rating system approved by the respective competent authority.
                           For figures corresponding to an aggregation of obligor grades or pools (e.g. “total exposures”) the exposure weighted average of the PDs assigned to the obligor grades or pools included in the aggregation shall be provided. All exposures, including defaulted exposures are to be considered for the purpose of the calculation of the exposure weighted average PD. For the calculation of the exposure-weighted average PD, the exposure value taking into account unfunded credit protection (column 060) shall be used for weighting purposes.

                           020

                              ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                           Institutions report in column 020 the original exposure value (pre conversion factors). According to the provisions laid down in Article 167 of CRR, the exposure value for equity exposures shall be the accounting value remaining after specific credit risk adjustments. The exposure value of off-balance sheet equity exposures shall be its nominal value after specific credit risk adjustments.
                           Institutions also include in column 020 off balance sheet items referred to in Annex I of CRR assigned to the equity exposure class (e.g. “the unpaid portion of partly-paid shares”).
                           Institutions applying the Simple Risk Weight approach or the PD/LGD approach (as referred to in Article 165(1) also consider the offsetting provisions referred to in Article 155(2) of CRR.

                           030-040

                              CREDIT RISK MITIGATION (CRM) TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS ON THE EXPOSURE

                              UNFUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION

                              GUARANTEES

                              CREDIT DERIVATIVES

                           Irrespective of the approach adopted for the calculation of risk weighted exposure amounts for equity exposures, institutions may recognize unfunded credit protection obtained on equity exposures (Article 155(2),(3) and (4) of CRR). Institutions applying the Simple Risk Weight approach or the PD/LGD approach report in columns 030 and 040 the amount of unfunded credit protection under the form of guarantees (column 030) or credit derivatives (column 040) recognised in accordance with the methods set out in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 4 of CRR.

                           050

                              CREDIT RISK MITIGATION (CRM) TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS ON THE EXPOSURE

                              SUBSTITUTION OF THE EXPOSURE DUE TO CRM

                              (-) TOTAL OUTFLOWS

                           Institutions report in column 050 the part of the original exposure pre conversion factors covered by unfunded credit protection recognised in accordance with the methods set out in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 4 of CRR.

                           060

                              EXPOSURE VALUE

                           Institutions applying the Simple Risk Weight approach or the PD/LGD approach report in column 060 the exposure value taking into account substitution effects stemming from unfunded credit protection (Article 155(2) and (3), Article 167 of CRR).
                           As a reminder, in the case of equity off-balance sheet exposures, the exposure value shall be the nominal value after specific credit risk adjustments (Article 167 of CRR).

                           070

                              EXPOSURE WEIGHTED AVERAGE LGD (%)

                           Institutions applying the PD/LGD approach report in column 070 of the CR EQU IRB 2 template the exposure weighted average of the LGDs assigned to the obligor grades or pools included in the aggregation; the same applies for row 020 of the CR EQU IRB template. The exposure value taking into account unfunded credit protection (column 060) shall be used for the calculation of the exposure-weighted average LGD. Institutions shall take into accounts the provisions laid down in Article 165(2) of CRR.

                           080

                              RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                           Institutions report risk-weighted exposure amounts for equity exposures in column 080, calculated in accordance with the provisions laid down in Article 155 of CRR.
                           In case where institutions applying the PD/LGD approach do not have sufficient information to use the definition of default set out in Article 178 of CRR, a scaling factor of 1.5 shall be assigned to the risk weights when calculating risk weighted exposure amounts (Article 155(3) of CRR).
                           With regard to the input parameter M (Maturity) to the risk-weight function, the maturity assigned to equity exposures equals 5 years (Article 165(3) of CRR).

                           090

                              MEMORANDUM ITEM: EXPECTED LOSS AMOUNT

                           Institutions report in column 090 the expected loss amount for equity exposures calculated in accordance with Article 158(4), (7), (8) and (9) of CRR.

                           90.

                           In accordance with Article 155 of CRR, institutions may employ different approaches (Simple Risk Weight approach, PD/LGD approach or Internal Models approach) to different portfolios when they use these different approaches internally. Institutions shall also report in the CR EQU IRB 1 template risk-weighted exposure amounts for those equity exposures which attract a fixed risk-weight treatment (without however being explicitly treated according to the Simple Risk Weight approach or the (temporary or permanent) partial use of the credit risk Standardised approach).

                                       Rows

                                       CR EQU IRB 1 — row 020,

                                          PD/LGD APRROACH: TOTAL

                                       Institutions applying the PD/LGD approach (Article 155(3) of CRR) report the requested information in row 020 of the CR EQU IRB 1 template.

                                       CR EQU IRB 1 — rows 050-090

                                          SIMPLE RISK WEIGHT APPROACH: TOTAL

                                          BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES UNDER THE SIMPLE RISK WEIGHT APRROACH BY RISK WEIGHTS:

                                       Institutions applying the Simple Risk Weight approach (Article 155(2) of CRR) report the requested information according to the characteristics of the underlying exposures in rows 050 to 090.

                                       CR EQU IRB 1 — row 100

                                          INTERNAL MODELS APPROACH

                                       Institutions applying the Internal Models approach (Article 155(4) of CRR) report the requested information in row 100.

                                       CR EQU IRB 1 — row 110

                                          EQUITY EXPOSURES SUBJECT TO RISK WEIGHTS

                                       Institutions applying the IRB approach shall report risk weighted exposure amounts for those equity exposures which attract a fixed risk weight treatment (without however being explicitly treated according to the Simple Risk Weight approach or the (temporary or permanent) partial use of the credit risk standardised approach). As an example,

                                                   —

                                                   the risk weighted exposure amount of equity positions in financial sector entities treated in accordance with Article 48(4) of the CRR, as well as

                                                   —

                                                   equity positions risk-weighted with 370 % in accordance with Article 471(2) CRR

                                             shall be reported in row 110.

                                       CR EQU IRB 2

                                          BREAKDOWN OF TOTAL EXPOSURES UNDER THE PD/LGD APRROACH BY OBLIGOR GRADES:

                                       Institutions applying the PD/LGD approach (Article 155(3) of CRR) report the requested information in the CR EQU IRB 2 template.
                                       In case where institutions using the PD/LGD approach apply a unique rating system or are able to report according to an internal master scale, they report in CR EQU IRB 2 the rating grades or pools associated to this unique rating system/masterscale. In any other case, the different rating systems shall be merged and ordered according to the following criteria: Obligor grades or pools of the different rating systems shall be pooled together and ordered from the lower PD assigned to each obligor grade or pool to the higher.

                     3.6.   C 11.00 — SETTLEMENT/DELIVERY RISK (CR SETT)
               3.6.1.   General remarks

                           91.

                           This template requests information on both trading and non-trading book transactions which are unsettled after their due delivery dates, and their corresponding own funds requirements for settlement risk according to Articles 92(3) point (c) ii) and 378 of CRR.

                           92.

                           Institutions report in the CR SETT template information on the settlement/delivery risk in connection with debt instruments, equities, foreign currencies and commodities held in their trading or non-trading book.

                           93.

                           According to Article 378 of CRR, repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending and securities or commodities borrowing in connection with debt instruments, equities, foreign currencies and commodities are not subject to settlement/delivery risk. Note however that, derivatives and long settlement transactions unsettled after their due delivery dates are nevertheless subject to own funds requirements for settlement/delivery risk as determined in Article 378 of CRR.

                           94.

                           In the case of unsettled transactions after the due delivery date, institutions calculate the price difference to which they are exposed. This is the difference between the agreed settlement price for the debt instrument, equity, foreign currency or commodity in question and its current market value, where the difference could involve a loss for the institution.

                           95.

                           Institutions multiply this difference by the appropriate factor of Table 1 of Article 378 of CRR to determine the corresponding own funds requirements.

                           96.

                           According to Article 92(4) Point (b), the own funds requirements for settlement/delivery risk shall be multiplied by 12.5 to calculate the risk exposure amount.

                           97.

                           Note that own funds requirements for free deliveries as laid down in Article 379 of CRR are not within the scope of the CR SETT template; the latter shall be reported in the credit risk templates (CR SA, CR IRB).

                     3.6.2.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           010

                              UNSETTLED TRANSACTIONS AT SETTLEMENT PRICE

                           In accordance with Article 378 of CRR, institutions report in this column 010 the unsettled transactions after their due delivery date at the respective agreed settlement prices.

                              All unsettled transactions shall be included in this column 010, irrespective of whether or not they are at a gain or at a loss after the due settlement date.

                           020

                              PRICE DIFFERENCE EXPOSURE DUE TO UNSETTLED TRANSACTIONS

                           In accordance with Article 378 of CRR, institutions report in column 020 the price difference between the agreed settlement price and its current market value for the debt instrument, equity, foreign currency or commodity in question, where the difference could involve a loss for the institution.
                           Only unsettled transactions at a loss after the due settlement date shall be reported in column 020

                           030

                              OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS

                           Institutions report in column 030 the own funds requirements calculated in accordance with Article 378 of CRR.

                           040

                              TOTAL SETTLEMENT RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                           In accordance with Article 92(4) point (b) of CRR, institutions multiply their own funds requirements reported in column 030 by 12.5 in order to obtain the settlement risk exposure amount.

                           Rows

                           010

                              Total unsettled transactions in the Non-trading Book

                           Institutions report in row 010 aggregated information in relation with settlement/delivery risk for non-trading book positions (in accordance with Articles 92(3) point (c) ii) and 378 of CRR).
                           Institutions report in 010/010 the aggregated sum of unsettled transactions after their due delivery dates at the respective agreed settlement prices.
                           Institutions report in 010/020 the aggregated information for price difference exposure due to unsettled transactions at a loss.
                           Institutions report in 010/030 the aggregated own funds requirements derived from summing the own funds requirements for unsettled transactions by multiplying the “price difference” reported in column 020 by the appropriate factor based on the number of working days after due settlement date (categories referred to in Table 1 of Article 378 of CRR).

                           020 to 060

                              Transactions unsettled up to 4 days (Factor 0 %)

                              Transactions unsettled between 5 and 15 days (Factor 8 %)

                              Transactions unsettled between 16 and 30 days (Factor 50 %)

                              Transactions unsettled between 31 and 45 days (Factor 75 %)

                              Transactions unsettled for 46 days or more (Factor 100 %)

                           Institutions report the information in relation with settlement/delivery risk for non-trading book positions according to the categories referred to in Table 1 of Article 378 of CRR in rows 020 to 060.
                           No own funds requirements for settlement/delivery risk are required for transactions unsettled less than 5 working days after the due settlement date.

                           070

                              Total unsettled transactions in the Trading Book

                           Institutions report in row 070 aggregated information in relation with settlement/delivery risk for trading book positions (in accordance with Articles 92(3) point (c) ii) and 378 of CRR).
                           Institutions report in 070/010 the aggregated sum of unsettled transactions after their due delivery dates at the respective agreed settlement prices.
                           Institutions report in 070/020 the aggregated information for price difference exposure due to unsettled transactions at a loss.
                           Institutions report in 070/030 the aggregated own funds requirements derived from summing the own funds requirements for unsettled transactions by multiplying the “price difference” reported in column 020 by an appropriate factor based on the number of working days after due settlement date (categories referred to in Table 1 of Article 378 of CRR).

                           080 to 120

                              Transactions unsettled up to 4 days (Factor 0 %)

                              Transactions unsettled between 5 and 15 days (Factor 8 %)

                              Transactions unsettled between 16 and 30 days (Factor 50 %)

                              Transactions unsettled between 31 and 45 days (Factor 75 %)

                              Transactions unsettled for 46 days or more (Factor 100 %)

                           Institutions report the information in relation with settlement/delivery risk for trading book positions according to the categories referred to in Table 1 of Article 378 of CRR in rows 080 to 120.
                           No own funds requirements for settlement/delivery risk are required for transactions unsettled less than 5 working days after the due settlement date.

                     3.7.   C 12.00 — CREDIT RISK: SECURITISATION — STANDARDISED APPROACH TO OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS (CR SEC SA)
               3.7.1.   General remarks

                           98.

                           The information in this template is requested for all securitisations for which a significant risk transfer is recognised and in which the reporting institution is involved in a securitisation treated under the Standardised Approach. The information to be reported is contingent on the role of the institution as for the securitisation. As such, specific reporting items are applicable for originators, sponsors and investors.

                           99.

                           The CR SEC SA template gathers joint information on both traditional and synthetic securitisations held in the banking book, as defined in Article 242(10) and (11) of CRR, respectively.

                     3.7.2.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           010

                              TOTAL AMOUNT OF SECURITISATION EXPOSURES ORIGINATED

                           Originator institutions must report the outstanding amount at the reporting date of all current securitisation exposures originated in the securitisation transaction, irrespective of who holds the positions. As such, on-balance sheet securitisation exposures (e.g. bonds, subordinated loans) as well as off-balance sheet exposures and derivatives (e.g. subordinated credit lines, liquidity facilities, interest rate swaps, credit default swaps, etc.) that have been originated in the securitisation shall be reported.
                           In the case of traditional securitisations where the originator does not hold any position, then the originator shall not consider that securitisation in the reporting of the CR SEC SA or CR SEC IRB templates. For this purpose securitisation positions held by the originator include early amortisation provisions in a securitisation of revolving exposures, as defined under Article 242(12) of CRR.

                           020-040

                              SYNTHETIC SECURITISATIONS: CREDIT PROTECTION TO THE SECURITISED EXPOSURES

                           Following the provisions in Articles 249 and 250 of CRR the credit protection to the securitised exposures shall be as if there was no maturity mismatch.

                           020

                              (-) FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION (CVA)

                           The detailed calculation procedure of the volatility-adjusted value of the collateral (CVA) which is expected to be reported in this column is established in Article 223(2) of CRR.

                           030

                              (-) TOTAL OUTFLOWS: UNFUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION ADJUSTED VALUES (G*)

                           Following the general rule for “inflows” and “outflows” the amounts reported under this column shall appear as “inflows” in the corresponding credit risk template (CR SA or CR IRB) and exposure class relevant for the protection provider (i.e. the third party to which the tranche is transferred by means of unfunded credit protection)
                           The calculation procedure of the “foreign exchange risk”- adjusted nominal amount of the credit protection (G*) is established in Article 233(3) of CRR.

                           040

                              NOTIONAL AMOUNT RETAINED OR REPURCHASED OF CREDIT PROTECTION

                           All tranches which have been retained or bought back, e.g. retained first loss positions, shall be reported with their nominal amount.
                           The effect of supervisory haircuts in the credit protection shall not be taken into account when computing the retained or repurchased amount of credit protection.

                           050

                              SECURITISATION POSITIONS: ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                           Securitisation positions held by the reporting institution, calculated according to Article 246(1)(a), (c) and (e), and (2) of CRR, without applying credit conversion factors and any credit risk adjustments and provisions. Netting only relevant with respect to multiple derivative contracts provided to the same SSPE, covered by eligible netting agreement.
                           Value adjustments and provisions to be reported in this column only refer to securitisation positions. Value adjustments of securitised positions are not considered.
                           In case of early amortization clauses, institutions must specify the amount of “originator's' interest” as defined in Article 256(2) of CRR.
                           In synthetic securitisations, the positions held by the originator in the form of on-balance sheet items and/or investor's interest (early amortisation) shall be the result of the aggregation of columns 010 to 040.

                           060

                              (-) VALUE ADJUSTMENTS AND PROVISIONS

                           Value adjustments and provisions (Article 159 of CRR) for credit losses made in accordance with the accounting framework to which the reporting entity is subject. Value adjustments include any amount recognized in profit or loss for credit losses of financial assets since their initial recognition in the balance sheet (including losses due to credit risk of financial assets measured at fair value that shall not be deducted from the exposure value) plus the discounts on exposures purchased when in default according to Article 166(1) of CRR. Provisions include accumulated amounts of credit losses in off-balance sheet items.

                           070

                              EXPOSURE NET OF VALUE ADJUSTMENTS AND PROVISIONS

                           Securitisation positions according to Article 246(1) and (2) of CRR, without applying conversion factors.
                           This piece of information is related to column 040 of the CR SA Total template.

                           080-110

                              CREDIT RISK MITIGATION (CRM) TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS ON THE EXPOSURE

                           Article 4(57) and Part Three, Title II, Chapter 4 of CRR.
                           This block of columns gathers information on credit risk mitigation techniques that reduce the credit risk of an exposure or exposures via the substitution of exposures (as indicated below for Inflows and Outflows).
                           See CR SA instructions (Reporting of CRM techniques with substitution effect).

                           080

                              (-) UNFUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION: ADJUSTED VALUES (GA)

                           Unfunded credit protection is defined in Article 4(59) and regulated in Article 235 of CRR.
                           See CR SA instructions (Reporting of CRM techniques with substitution effect).

                           090

                              (-) FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION

                           Funded credit protection is defined in Article 4(58) and regulated in Articles 195, 197 and 200 of CRR.
                           Credit linked notes and on-balance sheet netting according to Articles 218-236 of CRR are treated as cash collateral.
                           See CR SA instructions (Reporting of CRM techniques with substitution effect).

                           100-110

                              SUBSTITUTION OF THE EXPOSURE DUE TO CRM:

                           Inflows and outflows within the same exposure classes and, when relevant, risk weights or obligor grades shall also be reported.

                           100

                              (-) TOTAL OUTFLOWS

                           Articles 222(3) and 235 (1) and (2).
                           Outflows correspond to the covered part of the “Exposure net of value adjustments and provisions”, that is deducted from the obligor's exposure class and, when relevant, risk weight or obligor grade, and subsequently assigned to the protection provider's exposure class and, when relevant, risk weight or obligor grade.
                           This amount shall be considered as an Inflow into the protection provider's exposure class and, when relevant, risk weights or obligor grades.
                           This piece of information is related to column 090 [(-) Total Outflows] of the CR SA Total template.

                           110

                              TOTAL INFLOWS

                           Securitisation positions which are debt securities and are eligible financial collateral according to Article 197(1) of CRR and where the Financial Collateral Simple Method is used, shall be reported as inflows in this column.
                           This piece of information is related to column 100 (Total Inflows) of the CR SA Total template.

                           120

                              NET EXPOSURE AFTER CRM SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                           Exposure assigned in the corresponding risk weight and exposure class after taking into account outflows and inflows due to “Credit risk mitigation (CRM) techniques with substitution effects on the exposure”.
                           This piece of information is related to column 110 of the CR SA Total template.

                           130

                              (-) CREDIT RISK MITIGATION TECHNIQUES AFFECTING THE AMOUNT OF THE EXPOSURE: FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION FINANCIAL COLLATERAL COMPREHENSIVE METHOD ADJUSTED VALUE (CVAM)

                           This item also includes credit linked notes (Article 218 of CRR).
                           This piece of information is related to columns 120 and 130 of the CR SA Total template.

                           140

                              FULLY ADJUSTED EXPOSURE VALUE (E*)

                           Securitisation positions according to Article 246 of CRR, therefore without applying the conversion figures laid down in Article 246(1) point (c) of CRR.
                           This piece of information is related to column 150 of the CR SA Total template.

                           150-180

                              BREAKDOWN OF THE FULLY ADJUSTED EXPOSURE VALUE (E*) OF OFF BALANCE SHEET ITEMS ACCORDING TO CONVERSION FACTORS

                           Article 246(1) point (c) of CRR foresees that the exposure value of an off-balance sheet securitisation position shall be its nominal value multiplied by a conversion factor. This conversion figure shall be 100 % unless otherwise specified in the CRR.
                           See columns 160 to 190 of the CR SA Total template.
                           For reporting purposes, fully adjusted exposure values (E*) shall be reported according to the following four mutually exclusive intervals of conversion factors: 0 %, [0 %, 20 %], [20 %, [50 %] and [50 %, 100 %].

                           190

                              EXPOSURE VALUE

                           Securitisation positions according to Article 246 of CRR.
                           This piece of information is related to column 200 of the CR SA Total template.

                           200

                              (-) EXPOSURE VALUE DEDUCTED FROM OWN FUNDS

                           Article 258 of CRR envisages that in case of a securitisation position in respect of which a 1 250 % risk weight is assigned, institutions may, as an alternative to including the position in their calculation of risk-weighted exposure amounts, deduct from own funds the exposure value of the position.

                           210

                              EXPOSURE VALUE SUBJECT TO RISK WEIGHTS

                           Exposure value minus the exposure value deducted from own funds.

                           220-320

                              BREAKDOWN OF EXPOSURE VALUE SUBJECT TO RISK WEIGHTS ACCORDING TO RISK WEIGHTS

                           220-260

                              RATED

                           Article 242(8) of CRR defines rated positions.
                           Exposure values subject to risk weights are broken down according to credit quality steps (CQS) as envisaged for the SA in Article 251 (Table 1) of CRR.

                           270

                              1 250 % (UNRATED)

                           Article 242(7) of CRR defines unrated positions.

                           280

                              LOOK-THROUGH

                           Articles 253, 254 and 256(5) of CRR.
                           The look-through columns comprise all the cases of unrated exposures where the risk weight is obtained from the underlying portfolio of exposures (average risk weight of the pool, highest risk weight of the pool, or the use of a concentration ratio).

                           290

                              LOOK-THROUGH — OF WHICH: SECOND LOSS IN ABCP

                           Exposure value subject to the treatment of securitisation positions in a second loss tranche or better in an ABCP programme is set in 254 of CRR.
                           Article 242(9) of CRR defines Asset-backed commercial paper (ABCP) programme.

                           300

                              LOOK-THROUGH OF WHICH: AVERAGE RISK WEIGHT (%)

                           Exposure value weighted average risk weight shall be provided.

                           310

                              INTERNAL ASSESSMENT APPROACH (IAA)

                           Articles 109(1) and 259 (3) of CRR. Exposure value of securitisation positions under the internal assessment approach.

                           320

                              IAA: AVERAGE RISK WEIGHT (%)

                           Exposure value weighted average risk weight shall be provided.

                           330

                              RISK-WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                           Total risk-weighted exposure amount calculated according to Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5, Section 3 of CRR, prior to adjustments due to maturity mismatches or infringement of due diligence provisions, and excluding any risk weighted exposure amount corresponding to exposures redistributed via outflows to another template.

                           340

                              OF WHICH: SYNTHETIC SECURITISATIONS

                           For synthetic securitisations, the amount to be reported in this column shall ignore any maturity mismatch.

                           350

                              OVERALL EFFECT (ADJUSTMENT) DUE TO INFRINGEMENT OF THE DUE DILIGENCE PROVISIONS

                           Articles 14(2), 406(2) and 407 of CRR require that whenever certain requirements in Articles 405, 406 or 409 of CRR are not met by the institution, Member States shall ensure that the competent authorities impose a proportionate additional risk weight of no less than 250 % of the risk weight (capped at 1 250 %) which would apply to the relevant securitisation positions under Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5, Section 3 of CRR. Such an additional risk weight may not only be imposed to investor institutions, but also to originators, sponsors and original lenders.

                           360

                              ADJUSTMENT TO THE RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT DUE TO MATURITY MISMATCHES

                           For maturity mismatches in synthetic securitisations RW*-RW(SP), as defined in Article 250 of CRR, shall be included, except in the case of tranches subject to a risk weighting of 1 250 % where the amount to be reported is zero. Note that RW(SP) not only includes the risk weighted exposure amounts reported under column 330 but also the risk weighted exposure amounts corresponding to exposures redistributed via outflows to other templates.

                           370-380

                              TOTAL RISK-WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT: BEFORE CAP/AFTER CAP

                           Total risk-weighted exposure amount calculated according to Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5, Section 3 of CRR, before (column 370)/after (column 380) applying the limits specified in Articles 252 -securitisation of items currently in default or associated with particular high risk items- or 256 (4) -additional own funds requirements for securitisations of revolving exposures with early amortisation provisions- of CRR.

                           390

                              MEMORANDUM ITEM: RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT CORRESPONDING TO THE OUTFLOWS FROM THE SA SECURITISATION TO OTHER EXPOSURE CLASSES

                           Risk weighted exposure amount stemming from exposures redistributed to the risk mitigant provider, and therefore computed in the corresponding template, that are considered in the computation of the cap for securitisation positions.

                           100.

                           The CR SEC SA template is divided into three major blocks of rows which gather data on the originated/sponsored/retained or purchased exposures by originators, investors and sponsors. For each of them, the information is broken down by on-balance sheet items and off-balance sheet items and derivatives as well as by securitisations and re-securitisations.

                           101.

                           Total exposures (at reporting date) are also broken down according to the credit quality steps applied at inception (last block of rows). Originators, sponsors as well as investors shall report this information.

                                       Rows

                                       010

                                          TOTAL EXPOSURES

                                       Total exposures refer to the total amount of outstanding securitisations. This row summarizes all the information reported by originators, sponsors and investors in subsequent rows.

                                       020

                                          OF WHICH: RE-SECURITISATIONS

                                       Total amount of outstanding re-securitisations according to definitions in Article 4(1)(63) and (64) of CRR.

                                       030

                                          ORIGINATOR: TOTAL EXPOSURES

                                       This row summarizes information on on-balance items and off-balance sheet items and derivatives and early amortisation of those securitisation positions for which the institution plays the role of originator, as defined by Article 4(1)(13) of CRR.

                                       040-060

                                          ON-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS

                                       Article 246(1) point (a) of CRR states that for those institutions which calculate risk-weighted exposure amounts under the Standardised Approach, the exposure value of an on-balance sheet securitisation position shall be its accounting value after application of specific credit risk adjustments.
                                       On-balance sheet items are broken down by securitisations (row 050) and re-securitisations (row 060).

                                       070-090

                                          OFF-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS AND DERIVATIVES

                                       These rows gather information on off-balance sheet items and derivatives securitisation positions subject to a conversion factor under the securitisation framework. The exposure value of an off-balance sheet securitisation position shall be its nominal value, less any specific credit risk adjustment of that securitisation position, multiplied by a 100 % conversion figure unless otherwise specified.
                                       The exposure value for the counterparty credit risk of a derivative instrument listed in Annex II of CRR, shall be determined in accordance to Part Three, Title II, Chapter 6 of CRR.
                                       For liquidity facilities, credit facilities and servicer cash advances, institutions shall provide the undrawn amount.
                                       For interest rate and currency swaps they shall provide the exposure value (according to Article 246(1) of CRR) as specified in the CR SA Total template.
                                       Off-balance sheet items and derivatives are broken down by securitisations (row 080) and re-securitisations (row 090) as in Article 251 Table 1 of CRR.

                                       100

                                          EARLY AMORTISATION

                                       This row only applies to those originators with revolving exposure securitisations containing early amortisation provisions, as stated in Article 242(13) and (14) of CRR.

                                       110

                                          INVESTOR: TOTAL EXPOSURES

                                       This row summarizes information on on-balance and off-balance sheet items and derivatives of those securitisation positions for which the institution plays the role of investor.
                                       The CRR does not provide an explicit definition for investor. Therefore, in this context it shall be understood as an institution that holds a securitisation position in a securitisation transaction for which it is neither originator nor sponsor.

                                       120-140

                                          ON-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS

                                       The same criteria of classification among securitisations and re-securitisations used for on-balance sheet items for originators shall be applied here.

                                       150-170

                                          OFF-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS AND DERIVATIVES

                                       The same criteria of classification among securitisations and re-securitisations used for off-balance sheet items and derivatives for originators shall be applied here.

                                       180

                                          SPONSOR: TOTAL EXPOSURES

                                       This row summarizes information on on-balance and off-balance sheet items and derivatives of those securitisation positions for which the institution plays the role of a sponsor, as defined by Article 4(14) of CRR. If a sponsor is also securitising it own assets, it shall fill in the originator's rows the information regarding its own securitised assets.

                                       190-210

                                          ON-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS

                                       The same criteria of classification among securitisations and re-securitisations used for on-balance sheet items for originators shall be applied here.

                                       220-240

                                          OFF-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS AND DERIVATIVES

                                       The same criteria of classification among securitisations and re-securitisations used for off-balance sheet items and derivatives for originators shall be applied here.

                                       250-290

                                          BREAKDOWN OF OUTSTANDING POSITIONS ACCORDING TO CQS AT INCEPTION

                                       These rows gather information on outstanding positions (at reporting date) according to credit quality steps (envisaged for the SA in Article 251 (Table 1) of CRR) applied at origination date (inception). In the absence of this information, the earliest CQS-equivalent data available shall be reported.
                                       These rows are only to be reported for columns 190 to 270 and columns 330 to 340.

                     3.8.   C 13.00 — CREDIT RISK — SECURITISATIONS: INTERNAL RATINGS BASED APPROACH TO OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS (CR SEC IRB)
               3.8.1.   General remarks

                           102.

                           The information in this template is requested for all securitisations for which a significant risk transfer is recognised and in which the reporting institution is involved in a securitisation treated under the Internal Ratings Based Approach.

                           103.

                           The information to be reported is contingent on the role of the institution as for the securitisation. As such, specific reporting items are applicable for originators, sponsors and investors.

                           104.

                           The CR SEC IRB template has the same scope as the CR SEC SA, it gathers joint information on both traditional and synthetic securitisations held in the banking book.

                     3.8.2.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           010

                              TOTAL AMOUNT OF SECURITISATION EXPOSURES ORIGINATED

                           For the row total on balance sheet items the amount reported under this column corresponds to the outstanding amount of securitised exposures at the reporting date.
                           See column 010 of CR SEC SA.

                           020-040

                              SYNTHETIC SECURITISATIONS: CREDIT PROTECTION TO THE SECURITISED EXPOSURES

                           Articles 249 and 250 of CRR.
                           Maturity mismatches shall not be taken into account in the adjusted value of the credit risk mitigation techniques involved in the securitisation structure.

                           020

                              (-) FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION (CVA)

                           The detailed calculation procedure of the volatility-adjusted value of the collateral (CVA) which is expected to be reported in this column is established in Article 223(2) of CRR.

                           030

                              (-) TOTAL OUTFLOWS: UNFUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION ADJUSTED VALUES (G*)

                           Following the general rule for “inflows” and “outflows” the amounts reported under column 030 of the CR SEC IRB template shall appear as “inflows” in the corresponding credit risk template (CR SA or CR IRB) and exposure class relevant for the protection provider (i.e. the third party to which the tranche is transferred by means of unfunded credit protection).
                           The calculation procedure of the “foreign exchange risk”- adjusted nominal amount of the credit protection (G*) is established in Article 233(3) of CRR.

                           040

                              NOTIONAL AMOUNT RETAINED OR REPURCHASED OF CREDIT PROTECTION

                           All tranches which have been retained or bought back, e.g. retained first loss positions, shall be reported with their nominal amount.
                           The effect of supervisory haircuts in the credit protection shall not be taken into account when computing the retained or repurchased amount of credit protection.

                           050

                              SECURITISATION POSITIONS: ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                           Securitisation positions held by the reporting institution, calculated according to Article 246(1)(b), (d) and (e), and (2) of CRR, without applying credit conversion factors and gross of value adjustments and provisions. Netting only relevant with respect to multiple derivative contracts provided to the same SSPE, covered by eligible netting agreement.
                           Value adjustments and provisions to be reported in this column only refer to securitisation positions. Value adjustments of securitized positions are not considered.
                           In case of early amortisation clauses, institutions must specify the amount of “originator's' interest” as defined in Article 256(2) of CRR.
                           In synthetic securitisations, the positions held by the originator in the form of on-balance sheet items and/or investor's interest (early amortisation) shall be the result of the aggregation of columns 010 to 040.

                           060-090

                              CREDIT RISK MITIGATION (CRM) TECHNIQUES WITH SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS ON THE EXPOSURE

                           See Article 4(1)(57) and Part Three, Title II, Chapter 4 of CRR.
                           This block of columns gathers information on credit risk mitigation techniques that reduce the credit risk of an exposure or exposures via the substitution of exposures (as indicated below for Inflows and Outflows).

                           060

                              (-) UNFUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION: ADJUSTED VALUES (GA)

                           Unfunded credit protection is defined in Article 4(1)(59) of CRR.
                           Article 236 of CRR describes the computation procedure of GA in the case of full protection/partial protection — equal seniority.
                           This piece of information is related to columns 040 and 050 of the CR IRB template.

                           070

                              (-) FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION

                           Funded credit protection is defined in Article 4(1)(58) of CRR.
                           Since the Financial Collateral Simple Method is not applicable, only funded credit protection according to Article 200 of CRR shall be reported in this column.
                           This piece of information is related to column 060 of the CR IRB template.

                           080-090

                              SUBSTITUTION OF THE EXPOSURE DUE TO CRM:

                           Inflows and outflows within the same exposure classes and, when relevant, risk weights or obligor grades shall also be reported.

                           080

                              (-) TOTAL OUTFLOWS

                           Article 236 of CRR.
                           Outflows correspond to the covered part of the “Exposure net of value adjustments and provisions”, that is deducted from the obligor's exposure class and, when relevant, risk weight or obligor grade, and subsequently assigned to the protection provider's exposure class and, when relevant, risk weight or obligor grade.
                           This amount shall be considered as an Inflow into the protection provider's exposure class and, when relevant, risk weights or obligor grades.
                           This piece of information is related to column 070 of the CR IRB template.

                           090

                              TOTAL INFLOWS

                           This piece of information is related to column 080 of the CR IRB template.

                           100

                              EXPOSURE AFTER CRM SUBSTITUTION EFFECTS PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                           Exposure assigned in the corresponding risk weight and exposure class after taking into account outflows and inflows due to “Credit risk mitigation (CRM) techniques with substitution effects on the exposure”.
                           This piece of information is related to column 090 of the CR IRB template.

                           110

                              (-) CREDIT RISK MITIGATION TECHNIQUES AFFECTING THE AMOUNT OF THE EXPOSURE: FUNDED CREDIT PROTECTION FINANCIAL COLLATERAL COMPREHENSIVE METHOD ADJUSTED VALUE (CVAM)

                           Articles 218 to 222 of CRR. This item also includes credit linked notes (Article 218 of CRR).

                           120

                              FULLY ADJUSTED EXPOSURE VALUE (E*)

                           Securitisation positions according to Article 246 of CRR, therefore without applying the conversion factors laid down in Article 246(1) point (c) of CRR.

                           130-160

                              BREAKDOWN OF THE FULLY ADJUSTED EXPOSURE VALUE (E*) OF OFF BALANCE SHEET ITEMS ACCORDING TO CONVERSION FACTORS

                           Article 246(1) point (c) of CRR foresees that the exposure value of an off-balance sheet securitisation position shall be its nominal value multiplied by a conversion figure. This conversion figure shall be 100 % unless otherwise specified.
                           In this respect, Article 4(1)(56) of CRR defines conversion factor.
                           For reporting purposes, fully adjusted exposure values (E*) shall be reported according to the following four mutually exclusive intervals of conversion factors: 0 %, (0 %, 20 %], (20 %, 50 %] and (50 %, 100 %].

                           170

                              EXPOSURE VALUE

                           Securitisation positions according to Article 246 of CRR.
                           This piece of information is related to column 110 of the CR IRB template.

                           180

                              (-) EXPOSURE VALUE DEDUCTED FROM OWN FUNDS

                           Article 266(3) of CRR foresees that in case of a securitisation position in respect of which a 1 250 % risk weight applies, institutions may, as an alternative to including the position in their calculation of risk-weighted exposure amounts, deduct from own funds the exposure value of the position.

                           190

                              EXPOSURE VALUE SUBJECT TO RISK WEIGHTS

                           200-320

                              RATINGS BASED METHOD (CREDIT QUALITY STEPS)

                           Article 261 of CRR.
                           IRB-Securitisation positions with an inferred rating according to Article 259(2) of CRR shall be reported as positions with a rating.
                           Exposure values subject to risk weights are broken down according to credit quality steps (CQS) as envisaged for the IRB Approach Article 261(1) Table 4 of CRR.

                           330

                              SUPERVISORY FORMULA METHOD

                           For the Supervisory Formula Method (SFM), Article 262 of CRR.
                           The risk weight for a securitisation position shall be the greater of 7 % or the risk weight to be applied in accordance with the formulas provided.

                           340

                              SUPERVSIORY FORMULA METHOD: AVERAGE RISK WEIGHT

                           Credit risk mitigation on securitisation positions may be recognised in accordance with Article 264 of CRR. In this case, the institution shall indicate the “effective risk weight” of the position when full protection has been received, according to what is established in Article 264(2) of CRR (the effective risk weight equals the risk-weighted exposure amount of the position divided by the exposure value of the position, multiplied by 100).
                           When the position benefits from partial protection, the institution must apply the Supervisory Formula Method using the “T” adjusted according to what is established in Article 264(3) of CRR.
                           Weighted average risk weights shall be reported in this column.

                           350

                              LOOK-THROUGH

                           The look-through columns comprise all the cases of unrated exposures where the risk weight is obtained from the underlying portfolio of exposures (highest risk weight of the pool).
                           Article 263(2) and (3) of CRR envisage an exceptional treatment where Kirb cannot be calculated.
                           The undrawn amount of the liquidity facilities shall be reported under “Off balance sheet items and derivatives”.
                           As long as an originator would be under the exceptional treatment where Kirb cannot be calculated, then column 350 would be the right column to use for the reporting of the risk weighting treatment given to the exposure value of a liquidity facility subject to the treatment laid down in Article 263 of CRR.
                           For early amortisations see Articles 256(5) and 265 of CRR.

                           360

                              LOOK-THROUGH: AVERAGE RISK WEIGHT

                           Exposure value weighted average risk weight shall be provided.

                           370

                              INTERNAL ASSESSMENT APPROACH

                           Article 259(3) and (4) of CRR envisages the “Internal Assessment Approach” (IAA) for positions in ABCP programmes.

                           380

                              IAA: AVERAGE RISK WEIGHT

                           Weighted average risk weights shall be reported in this column.

                           390

                              (-) REDUCTION IN RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT DUE TO VALUE ADJUSTMENTS AND PROVISIONS

                           Institutions applying the IRB Approach shall follow Article 266(1) (only applicable for originators, when the exposure has not been deducted from own funds) and (2) of CRR.
                           Value adjustments and provisions (Article 159 of CRR) for credit losses made in accordance with the accounting framework to which the reporting entity is subject. Value adjustments include any amount recognized in profit or loss for credit losses of financial assets since their initial recognition in the balance sheet (including losses due to credit risk of financial assets measured at fair value that shall not be deducted from the exposure value) plus the discounts on exposures purchased when in default according to Article 166(1) of CRR. Provisions include accumulated amounts of credit losses in off-balance sheet items.

                           400

                              RISK-WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                           Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5, Section 3 of CRR prior to adjustments due to maturity mismatches or infringement of due diligence provisions, and excluding any risk weighted exposure amount corresponding to exposures redistributed via outflows to another template.

                           410

                              RWEA OF WHICH: SYNTHETIC SECURITISATIONS

                           For synthetic securitisations with maturity mismatches, the amount to be reported in this column shall ignore any maturity mismatch.

                           420

                              OVERALL EFFECT (ADJUSTMENT) DUE TO INFRINGEMENT OF THE DUE DILIGENCE PROVISIONS

                           Articles 14(2), 406(2) and 407 of CRR foresee that whenever certain requirements are not met by the institution, Member States shall ensure that the competent authorities impose a proportionate additional risk weight of no less than 250 % of the risk weight (capped at 1 250 %) which would apply to the relevant securitisation positions under Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5, Section 3 of CRR.

                           430

                              ADJUSTMENT TO THE RISK-WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT DUE TO MATURITY MISMATCHES

                           For maturity mismatches in synthetic securitisations RW*-RW(SP), as defined in Article 250 of CRR, shall be included, except in the case of tranches subject to a risk weighting of 1 250 % where the amount to be reported is zero. Note that RW(SP) not only includes the risk weighted exposure amounts reported under column 400 but also the risk weighted exposure amounts corresponding to exposures redistributed via outflows to other templates.
                           Negative values shall be reported in this column.

                           440-450

                              TOTAL RISK-WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT: BEFORE CAP/AFTER CAP

                           Total risk-weighted exposure amount calculated according to Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5, Section 3 of CRR, before (col 440)/after (col 450) applying the limits specified in Article 260 of CRR. Additionally Article 265 of CRR (additional own funds requirements for securitisations of revolving exposures with early amortisation provisions) has to be considered.

                           460

                              MEMORANDUM ITEM: RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT CORRESPONDING TO THE OUTFLOWS FROM THE IRB SECURITISATION TO OTHER EXPOSURE CLASSES

                           Risk weighted exposure amount stemming from exposures redistributed to the risk mitigant provider, and therefore computed in the corresponding template, that are considered in the computation of the cap for securitisation positions.

                           105.

                           The CR SEC IRB template is divided into three major blocks of rows which gather data on the originated/sponsored/retained or purchased exposures by originators, investors and sponsors. For each of them, the information is broken down by on-balance sheet items and off-balance sheet items and derivatives, as well as by risk weight groupings of securitisations and re-securitisations.

                           106.

                           Total exposures (at reporting date) are also broken down according to the credit quality steps applied at inception (last block of rows). Originators, sponsors as well as investors shall report this information.

                                       Rows

                                       010

                                          TOTAL EXPOSURES

                                       Total exposures refer to the total amount of outstanding securitisations. This row summarizes all the information reported by originators, sponsors and investors in subsequent rows.

                                       020

                                          OF WHICH: RE-SECURITISATIONS

                                       Total amount of outstanding re-securitisations according to definitions in Article 4(1)(63) and (64) of CRR.

                                       030

                                          ORIGINATOR: TOTAL EXPOSURES

                                       This row summarizes information on on-balance items and off-balance sheet items and derivatives and early amortisation of those securitisation positions for which the institution plays the role of originator, as defined by Article 4(1)(13) of CRR.

                                       040-090

                                          ON-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS

                                       Article 246(1) lit b) of CRR states that for those institutions which calculate risk-weighted exposure amounts under the IRB Approach, the exposure value of an on-balance sheet securitisation position shall be the accounting value without taking into account any credit risk adjustments made.
                                       On-balance sheet items are broken down according to risk weight groupings of securitisations (A-B-C), in rows 050-070, and re-securitisations (D-E), in rows 080-090, as stated in Article 261(1) Table 4 of CRR.

                                       100-150

                                          OFF-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS AND DERIVATIVES

                                       These rows gather information on off-balance sheet items and derivatives securitisation positions subject to a conversion factor under the securitisation framework. The exposure value of an off-balance sheet securitisation position shall be its nominal value, less any specific credit risk adjustment of that securitisation position, multiplied by a 100 % conversion factor unless otherwise specified.
                                       Off-balance sheet securitisation positions arising from a derivative instrument listed in Annex II of CRR, shall be determined in accordance to Part Three, Title II, Chapter 6 of CRR. The exposure value for the counterparty credit risk of a derivative instrument listed in Annex II of CRR, shall be determined in accordance to Part Three, Title II, Chapter 6 of CRR.
                                       For liquidity facilities, credit facilities and servicer cash advances, institutions shall provide the undrawn amount.
                                       For interest rate and currency swaps they shall provide the exposure value (according to Article 246(1) of CRR) as specified in the CR SA Total template.
                                       Off-balance sheet items are broken down according to risk weight groupings of securitisations (A-B-C), in rows 110-130, and re-securitisations (D-E), in rows 140-150, as stated in Article 261(1) Table 4 of CRR.

                                       160

                                          EARLY AMORTISATION

                                       This row only applies to those originators with revolving exposure securitisations containing early amortisation provisions, as stated in Article 242(13) and (14) of CRR.

                                       170

                                          INVESTOR: TOTAL EXPOSURES

                                       This row summarizes information on on-balance and off-balance sheet items and derivatives of those securitisation positions for which the institution plays the role of investor.
                                       The CRR does not provide an explicit definition for investor. Therefore, in this context it shall be understood as an institution that holds a securitisation position in a securitisation transaction for which it is neither originator nor sponsor.

                                       180-230

                                          ON-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS

                                       The same criteria of classification among securitisations (A-B-C) and re-securitisations (D-E) used for on-balance sheet items for originators shall be applied here.

                                       240-290

                                          OFF-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS AND DERIVATIVES

                                       The same criteria of classification among securitisations (A-B-C) and re-securitisations (D-E) used for off-balance sheet items and derivatives for originators shall be applied here.

                                       300

                                          SPONSOR: TOTAL EXPOSURES

                                       This row summarizes information on on-balance and off-balance sheet items and derivatives of those securitisation positions for which the institution plays the role of a sponsor, as defined by Article 4(1)(14) of CRR. If a sponsor is also securitising it own assets, it shall fill in the originator's rows with the information regarding its own securitised assets.

                                       310-360

                                          ON-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS

                                       The same criteria of classification among securitisations (A-B-C) and re-securitisations (D-E) used for on-balance sheet items and derivatives for originators shall be applied here.

                                       370-420

                                          OFF-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS AND DERIVATIVES

                                       The same criteria of classification among securitisations (A-B-C) and re-securitisations (D-E) used for off-balance sheet items and derivatives for originators shall be applied here.

                                       430-540

                                          BREAKDOWN OF OUTSTANDING POSITIONS ACCORDING TO CQS AT INCEPTION

                                       These rows gather information on outstanding positions (at reporting date) according to credit quality steps (envisaged for the IRB in Article 261 Table 4 of CRR) applied at origination date (inception). In the absence of this information, the earliest CQS-equivalent data available shall be reported.
                                       These rows are only to be reported for columns 170 to 320 and columns 400 to 410.

                     3.9.   C 14.00 — DETAILED INFORMATION ON SECURITISATIONS (SEC DETAILS)
               3.9.1.   General remarks

                           107.

                           This template gathers information on a transaction basis (versus the aggregate information reported in CR SEC SA, CR SEC IRB, MKR SA SEC and MKR SA CTP templates) on all securitisations the reporting institution is involved. The main features of each securitisation, such as the nature of the underlying pool and the own funds requirements are requested.

                           108.

                           This template is to be reported for:

                                       a.

                                       Securitisations originated/sponsored by the reporting institution in case it holds at least one position in the securitisation. This means that, regardless of whether there has been a significant risk transfer or not, institutions shall report information on all the positions they hold (either in the banking book or trading book). Positions held include those positions retained due to Article 405 of CRR.

                                       b.

                                       Securitisations originated/sponsored by the reporting institution during the year of report (1), in case it holds no position.

                                       c.

                                       Securitisations, the ultimate underlying of which are financial liabilities originally issued by the reporting institution and (partially) acquired by a securitisation vehicle. This underlying could include covered bonds or other liabilities and shall be identified as such in column 160.

                                       d.

                                       Positions held in securitisations where the reporting institution is neither originator nor sponsor (i.e. investors and original lenders).

                           109.

                           This template shall be reported by consolidated groups and stand alone institutions (2) located in the same country where they are subject to own funds requirements. In case of securitisations involving more than one entity of the same consolidated group, the entity-by-entity detail breakdown shall be provided.

                           110.

                           On account of Article 406(1) of CRR, which establishes that institutions investing in securitisation positions shall acquire a great deal of information on them in order to comply with due diligence requirements the reporting scope of the template is applied to a limited extent to investors. In particular, they shall report columns 010-040; 070-110; 160; 190; 290-400; 420-470.

                           111.

                           Institutions playing the role of original lenders (not performing also the role of originators or sponsors in the same securitisation) shall generally report the template to the same extent as investors.

                     3.9.2.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           005

                              ROW NUMBER

                           The row number is a row identifier and shall be unique for each row in the table. It shall follow the numerical order 1, 2, 3, etc.

                           010

                              INTERNAL CODE

                           Internal (alpha-numerical) code used by the institution to identify the securitisation. The internal code shall be associated to the identifier of the securitisation.

                           020

                              IDENTIFIER OF THE SECURITISATION (Code/Name)

                           Code used for the legal registration of the securitisation or, if not available, the name by which the securitisation is known in the market. When the International Securities Identification Number -ISIN- is available (i.e. for public transactions) the characters that are common to all tranches of the securitisation shall be reported in this column.

                           030

                              IDENTIFIER OF THE ORIGINATOR (Code/Name)

                           The code given by the supervisory authority to the originator or, if not available, the name of the institution itself shall be reported for this column.
                           In the case of multi-seller securitisations the reporting entity shall provide the identifier of all the entities within its consolidated group that are involved (as originator, sponsor or original lender) in the transaction. Whenever the code is not available or is not known by the reporting entity, the name of the institution shall be reported.

                           040

                              SECURITISATION TYPE: (TRADITIONAL/SYNTHETIC)

                           Report the following abbreviations:

                                       —

                                       “T”

                                       for Traditional;

                                       —

                                       “S”

                                       for Synthetic.

                                 The definitions of “traditional securitisation” and “synthetic securitisation” is provided in Article 242(10) and (11) of CRR.

                           050

                              ACCOUNTING TREATMENT: SECURITISED EXPOSURES ARE KEPT OR REMOVED FROM THE BALANCE SHEET?

                           Originators, sponsors and original lenders shall report one of the following abbreviations:

                                       —

                                       “K”

                                       if entirely recognised

                                       —

                                       “P”

                                       if partially derecognised

                                       —

                                       “R”

                                       if entirely derecognised

                                       —

                                       “N”

                                       if not applicable.

                                 This column summarises the accounting treatment of the transaction.
                           In case of synthetic securitisations, originators shall report that securitised exposures are removed from the balance sheet.
                           In case of the securitisations of liabilities originators shall not report this column.
                           Option “P” (partially removed) shall be reported when the securitised assets are recognized in the balance sheet to the extent of the reporting entity' continuing involvement as regulated in IAS 39.30-35.

                           060

                              SOLVENCY TREATMENT: SECURITISATION POSITIONS SUBJECT TO OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS?

                           Originators, only, shall report the following abbreviations:

                                       —

                                       “N”

                                       not subject to own funds requirements;

                                       —

                                       “B”

                                       banking book;

                                       —

                                       “T”

                                       trading book;

                                       —

                                       “A”

                                       partly in both books.

                                 Articles 109, 243 and 244 of CRR.
                           This column summarises the solvency treatment of the securitisation scheme by the originator. It indicates whether own funds requirements are computed according to securitised exposures or securitisation positions (banking book/trading book).
                           If own funds requirements are based on securitised exposures (for not being significant risk transfer) the computation of own funds requirements for credit risk shall be reported in the CR SA template, in case the Standardised Approach is used, or in the CR IRB template, in case the Internal Ratings Based Approach is used by the institution.
                           Conversely, if own funds requirements are based on securitisation positions held in the banking book (for being significant risk transfer) the computation of own funds requirements for credit risk shall be reported in the CR SEC SA template or in the CR SEC IRB template. In the case of securitisation positions held in the trading book the computation of own funds requirements for market risk shall be reported in the MKR SA TDI (standardised general position risk) and in the MKR SA SEC or MKR SA CTP (standardised specific position risk) or in the MKR IM (internal models) templates.
                           In the case of the securitisations of liabilities originators shall not report this column.

                           070

                              SECURITISATION OR RE-SECURITISATION?

                           According to definitions of “securitisation” and “re-securitisation” are provided in Article 4(1)(61) and (62) to (64) of CRR, report the type of underlying using the following abbreviations:

                                       —

                                       “S”

                                       for securitisation;

                                       —

                                       “R”

                                       for re-securitisation.

                           080-100

                              RETENTION

                           Articles 404 to 410 of CRR.

                           080

                              TYPE OF RETENTION APPLIED

                           For each securitisation scheme originated, it shall be reported the relevant type of retention of net economic interest, as envisaged in Article 405 of CRR:

                                       A

                                       —

                                       Vertical slice (securitisation positions): “retention of no less than 5 % of the nominal value of each of the tranches sold or transferred to the investors.”

                                       V

                                       —

                                       Vertical slice (securitised exposures): retention of no less than 5 % of the credit risk of each of the securitised exposures, if the credit risk thus retained with respect to such securitised exposures always ranks pari passu with, or is subordinated to, the credit risk that has been securitised with respect to those same exposures.

                                       B

                                       —

                                       Revolving exposures:“in the case of securitisations of revolving exposures, retention of the originator's interest of no less than 5 % of the nominal value of the securitised exposures”.

                                       C

                                       —

                                       On-balance sheet: “retention of randomly selected exposures, equivalent to no less than 5 % of the nominal amount of the securitised exposures, where such exposures would otherwise have been securitised in the securitisation, provided that the number of potentially securitised exposures is no less than 100 at origination”.

                                       D

                                       —

                                       First loss: “retention of the first loss tranche and, if necessary, other tranches having the same or a more severe risk profile than those transferred or sold to investors and not maturing any earlier than those transferred or sold to investors, so that the retention equals in total no less than 5 % of the nominal value of the securitised exposures”.

                                       E

                                       —

                                       Exempted. This code shall be reported for those securitisations affected by provisions in Article 405(3) of CRR.

                                       N

                                       —

                                       Not applicable. This code shall be reported for those securitisations affected by provisions in Article 404 of CRR.

                                       U

                                       —

                                       In breach or unknown. This code shall be reported when the reporting does not know with certain which type of retention is being applied or in case of non-compliance.

                           090

                              % OF RETENTION AT REPORTING DATE

                           The retention of material net economic interest by the originator, sponsor or original lender of the securitisation shall be no less than 5 % (at origination date).
                           Notwithstanding Article 405(1) of CRR, measurement of retention at origination can typically be interpreted as being when the exposures were first securitised, and not when the exposures were first created (for instance, not when the underlying loans were first extended). Measurement of retention at origination means that 5 % is the retention percentage that is required at the point in time when such retention level was measured and the requirement fulfilled (for instance, when the exposures were first securitised); dynamic re-measurement and readjustment of the retained percentage throughout the life of the transaction is not required.
                           This column shall not be reported in case codes “E” (exempted) or “N” (not applicable) are reported under column 080 (Type of retention applied).

                           100

                              COMPLIANCE WITH THE RETENTION REQUIREMENT?

                           Article 405(1) of CRR.
                           Report the following abbreviations:

                                       Y

                                       —

                                       Yes;

                                       N

                                       —

                                       No.

                                 This column shall not be reported in case codes “E” (exempted) or “N” (not applicable) are reported under column 080 (Type of retention applied).

                           110

                              ROLE OF THE INSTITUTION: (ORIGINATOR/SPONSOR/ORIGINAL LENDER/INVESTOR)

                           Report the following abbreviations:

                                       —

                                       “O”

                                       for Originator;

                                       —

                                       “S”

                                       for Sponsor;

                                       —

                                       “L”

                                       for Original Lender;

                                       —

                                       “I”

                                       for Investor.

                                 See definitions in Article 4(1)(13) (Originator) and Article 4(1)(14) (Sponsor) of CRR. Investors are assumed to be those institutions to which provisions in Articles 406 and 407of CRR apply.

                           120-130

                              NON ABCP PROGRAMS

                           Because of their special character because they comprise of several single securitisation positions, ABCP programs (defined in Article 242(9) of CRR) are exempted from reporting in columns 120 and 130.

                           120

                              ORIGINATION DATE (mm/yyyy)

                           The month and year of the origination date (i.e. cut-off or closing date of the pool) of the securitisation shall be reported according to the following format: “mm/yyyy”.
                           For each securitisation scheme the origination date cannot change between reporting dates. In the particular case of securitisation schemes backed by open pools, the origination date shall be the date of the first issuance of securities.
                           This piece of information shall be reported even when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation.

                           130

                              TOTAL AMOUNT OF SECURITISED EXPOSURES AT ORIGINATION DATE

                           This column gathers the amount (according to original exposures pre conversion factors) of the securitised portfolio at the origination date.
                           In case of securitisation schemes backed by open pools the amount referring to the origination date of the first issuance of securities shall be reported. In the case of traditional securitisations no other assets of the securitisation pool shall be included. In the case of multi-seller securitisation schemes (i.e. with more than one originator) only the amount corresponding to the reporting entity's contribution in the securitised portfolio shall be reported. In the case of the securitisation of liabilities only the amounts issued by the reporting entity shall be reported.
                           This piece of information shall be reported even when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation.

                           140-220

                              SECURITISED EXPOSURES

                           Columns 140 to 220 request information on several features of the securitised portfolio by the reporting entity.

                           140

                              TOTAL AMOUNT

                           Institutions shall report the value of the securitised portfolio at reporting date, i.e. the outstanding amount of the securitised exposures. In the case of traditional securitisations no other assets of the securitisation pool shall be included. In the case of multi-seller securitisation schemes (i.e. with more than one originator) only the amount corresponding to the reporting entity's contribution in the securitised portfolio shall be reported. In the case of securitisation schemes backed by closed pools (i.e. the portfolio of securitised assets cannot be enlarged after the origination date) the amount will progressively be reduced.
                           This piece of information shall be reported even when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation.

                           150

                              INSTITUTION'S SHARE (%)

                           It shall be reported the institution's share (percentage with two decimals) at reporting date in the securitised portfolio. The figure to be reported in this column is, by default, 100 % except for multi-seller securitisation schemes. In that case the reporting entity shall report its current contribution to the securitised portfolio (equivalent to column 140 in relative terms).
                           This piece of information shall be reported even when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation.

                           160

                              TYPE

                           This column gathers information on the type of assets (“1” to “8”) or liabilities (“9” and “10”) of the securitised portfolio. The institution must report one of the following number codes:

                                       1

                                       —

                                       Residential mortgages;

                                       2

                                       —

                                       Commercial mortgages;

                                       3

                                       —

                                       Credit card receivables;

                                       4

                                       —

                                       Leasing;

                                       5

                                       —

                                       Loans to corporates or SMEs (treated as corporates);

                                       6

                                       —

                                       Consumer loans;

                                       7

                                       —

                                       Trade receivables;

                                       8

                                       —

                                       Other assets;

                                       9

                                       —

                                       Covered bonds;

                                       10

                                       —

                                       Other liabilities.

                                 In case the pool of securitised exposures is a mix of the previous types, the institution shall indicate the most important type. In case of re-securitisations, the institution shall refer to the ultimate underlying pool of assets. Type “10” (Other liabilities) includes treasury bonds and credit linked notes.
                           For securitisation schemes backed by closed pools the type cannot change between reporting dates.

                           170

                              APPROACH APPLIED (SA/IRB/MIX)

                           This column gathers information on the approach that at reporting date the institution would apply to the securitised exposures.
                           Report the following abbreviations:

                                       —

                                       “S”

                                       for Standardised Approach;

                                       —

                                       “I”

                                       for Internal Ratings Based Approach;

                                       —

                                       “M”

                                       for a combination of both approaches (SA/IRB).

                                 If under SA, “P” is reported in column 050 then the computation of own funds requirements shall be reported in the CR SEC SA template.
                           If under IRB, “P” is reported in column 050 then the computation of own funds requirements shall be reported in the CR SEC IRB template.
                           If under combination of SA and IRB, “P” is reported in column 050 then the computation of own funds requirements shall be reported in both the CR SEC SA and CR SEC IRB templates.
                           This piece of information shall be reported even when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation. Nevertheless, this column does not apply to securitisations of liabilities. Sponsors shall not report this column.

                           180

                              NUMBER OF EXPOSURES

                           Article 261(1) of CRR.
                           This column is only compulsory for those institutions using the IRB approach to the securitisation positions (and, therefore, reporting “I” in column 170). The institution shall report the effective number of exposures.
                           This column shall not be reported in case of securitisation of liabilities or when the own funds requirements are based on the securitised exposures (in case of securitisation of assets). This column shall not be fulfilled when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation. This column shall not be fulfilled by investors.

                           190

                              COUNTRY

                           Report the code (ISO 3166-1 alpha-2) of the country of origin of the ultimate underlying of the transaction, i.e. the country of the immediate obligor of the original securitised exposures (look through). In case the pool of the securitisation consists of different countries, the institution shall indicate the most important country. If no country exceeds a 20 % threshold based on the amount of assets/liabilities, then “OT” (other) shall be reported.

                           200

                              ELGD (%)

                           The exposure-weighted average loss-given-default (ELGD) shall only be reported by those institutions applying the Supervisory Formula Method (and, therefore, reporting “I” in column 170). The ELGD is to be calculated as indicated in Article 262(1) of CRR.
                           This column shall not be reported in case of securitisation of liabilities or when the own funds requirements are based on the securitised exposures (in case of securitisation of assets). This column shall not be fulfilled either when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation. Sponsors shall not report this column.

                           210

                              (-) VALUE ADJUSTMENTS AND PROVISIONS

                           Value adjustments and provisions (Article 159 of CRR) for credit losses made in accordance with the accounting framework to which the reporting entity is subject. Value adjustments include any amount recognized in profit or loss for credit losses of financial assets since their initial recognition in the balance sheet (including losses due to credit risk of financial assets measured at fair value that shall not be deducted from the exposure value) plus the discounts on exposures purchased when in default according to Article 166(1) of CRR. Provisions include accumulated amounts of credit losses in off-balance sheet items.
                           This column gathers information on the value adjustments and provisions applied to the securitised exposures. This column shall not be reported in case of securitisation of liabilities.
                           This piece of information shall be reported even when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation.
                           Sponsors shall not report this column.

                           220

                              OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS BEFORE SECURITISATION (%)

                           This column gathers information on the own funds requirements of the securitised portfolio in case there had been no securitisation plus the expected losses related to those risks (Kirb), as a percentage (with two decimals) on the total of securitised exposures at origination date. Kirb is defined in Article 242(4) of CRR.
                           This column shall not be reported in case of securitisation of liabilities. In case of the securitisation of assets, this piece of information shall be reported even when the reporting entity does not hold any positions in the securitisation.
                           Sponsors shall not report this column.

                           230-300

                              SECURITISATION STRUCTURE

                           This block of six columns gathers information on the structure of the securitisation according to on/off balance sheet positions, tranches (senior/mezzanine/first loss) and maturity.
                           In the case of multi-seller securitisations, for the first loss tranche only the amount corresponding or attributed to the reporting institution shall be reported.

                           230-250

                              ON-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS

                           This block of columns gathers information on on-balance sheet items broken down by tranches (senior/mezzanine/first loss).

                           230

                              SENIOR

                           All tranches that do not qualify as mezzanine or first loss shall be included in this category.

                           240

                              MEZZANINE

                           See Articles 243(3) (traditional securitisations) and 244 (3) (synthetic securitisations) of CRR.

                           250

                              FIRST LOSS

                           First loss tranche is defined in Article 242(15) of CRR.

                           260-280

                              OFF-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS AND DERIVATIVES

                           This block of columns gathers information on off-balance sheet items and derivatives broken down by tranches (senior/mezzanine/first loss).
                           The same criteria of classification among tranches used for on-balance sheet items shall be applied here.

                           290

                              FIRST FORESEEABLE TERMINATION DATE

                           The likely termination date of the whole securitisation in the light of its contractual clauses and the currently expected financial conditions. Generally, it would be the earliest of the following dates:

                                       (i)

                                       the date when a clean-up call (defined in Article 242(2) of CRR) might first be exercised taking into account the maturity of the underlying exposure(s) as well as their expected pre-payment rate or potential re-negotiation activities;

                                       (ii)

                                       the date on which the originator may first exercise any other call option embedded in the contractual clauses of the securitisation which would result in the total redemption of the securitisation.

                                 The day, month and year of the first foreseeable termination date shall be reported. The exact day shall be reported if this data is available, otherwise the first day of the month shall be reported.

                           300

                              LEGAL FINAL MATURITY DATE

                           The date upon which all principal and interest of the securitisation must be legally repaid (based on the transaction documentation).
                           The day, month and year of the legal final maturity date shall be reported. The exact day shall be reported if this data is available, otherwise the first day of the month shall be reported.

                           310-400

                              SECURITISATION POSITIONS: ORIGINAL EXPOSURE PRE CONVERSION FACTORS

                           This block of columns gathers information on the securitisation positions according to on/off balance sheet positions and the tranches (senior/mezzanine/first loss) at reporting date.

                           310-330

                              ON-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS

                           The same criteria of classification among tranches used for on-balance sheet items shall be applied here.

                           340-360

                              OFF-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS AND DERIVATIVES

                           The same criteria of classification among tranches used for off-balance sheet items shall be applied here.

                           370-400

                              MEMORANDUM ITEMS: OFF-BALANCE SHEET ITEMS AND DERIVATIVES

                           This block of columns gathers additional information on the total off-balance sheet items and derivatives (which are already reported under a different breakdown in columns 340-360).

                           370

                              DIRECT CREDIT SUBSTITUTES (DCS)

                           This column applies to those securitisation positions held by the originator and guaranteed with direct credit substitutes (DCS).
                           According to Annex I of CRR the following full risk off-balance sheet items are regarded as DCS:

                                       —

                                          Guarantees having the character of credit substitutes.

                                       —

                                          Irrevocable standby letters of credit having the character of credit substitutes.

                           380

                              IRS/CRS

                           IRS stands for Interest Rate Swaps, whereas CRS stands for Currency Rate Swaps. These derivatives are listed in Annex II of CRR.

                           390

                              ELIGIBLE LIQUIDITY FACILITIES

                           Liquidity facilities (LF), defined in Article 242(3) of CRR must satisfy a list of six conditions established in Article 255(1) of CRR to be considered as eligible (regardless of the method applied by the institution -SA or IRB-).

                           400

                              OTHER (INCLUDING NON-ELIGIBLE LF)

                           This column is devoted to remaining off-balance sheet items such as non-eligible liquidity facilities (i.e. those LF that do not meet the conditions listed in Article 255(1) of CRR).

                           410

                              EARLY AMORTISATION: CONVERSION FACTOR APPLIED

                           Articles 242(12) and 256(5) (SA) and Article 265(1) (IRB) of CRR envisage a set of conversion factors to be applied to amount of the investors' interest (in order to calculate risk-weighted exposure amounts).
                           This column applies to securitisation schemes with early amortisation clauses (i.e. revolving securitisations).
                           According to Article 256(6) of CRR, the conversion figure to be applied shall be determined by the level of the actual three month average excess spread.
                           In the case of the securitisations of liabilities this column shall not be reported. This piece of information is related to row 100 in CR SEC SA and row 160 in the CR SEC IRB template.

                           420

                              (-) EXPOSURE VALUE DEDUCTED FROM OWN FUNDS

                           This piece of information is closely related to column 200 in the CR SEC SA template and column 180 in the CR SEC IRB template.
                           A negative figure shall be reported in this column.

                           430

                              TOTAL RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT BEFORE CAP

                           This column gathers information on the risk weighted exposure amount before cap applicable to the securitisation positions (i.e. in case of securitisation schemes with significant risk transfer). In case of securitisation schemes without significant risk transfer (i.e. risk weighted exposure amount computed according securitised exposures) no data shall be reported in this column.
                           In the case of the securitisations of liabilities this column shall not be reported.

                           440

                              TOTAL RISK WEIGHTED EXPOSURE AMOUNT AFTER CAP

                           This column gathers information on the risk weighted exposure amount after cap applicable to the securitisation positions (i.e. in case of securitisation schemes with significant risk transfer). In case of securitisation schemes without significant risk transfer (i.e. own funds requirements computed according securitised exposures) no data shall be reported in this column.
                           In the case of the securitisations of liabilities this column shall not be reported.

                           450-510

                              SECURITISATION POSITIONS — TRADING BOOK

                           450

                              CTP OR NON-CTP?

                           Report the following abbreviations:

                                       C

                                       —

                                       Correlation Trading Portfolio (CTP);

                                       N

                                       —

                                       Non-CTP

                           460-470

                              NET POSITIONS — LONG/SHORT

                           See columns 050/060 of MKR SA SEC or MKR SA CTP, respectively.

                           480

                              TOTAL OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS (SA) — SPECIFIC RISK

                           See column 610 of MKR SA SEC, or column 450 of MKR SA CTP, respectively.

                     4.   OPERATIONAL RISK TEMPLATES
               4.1.   C 16.00 — OPERATIONAL RISK (OPR)
               4.1.1.   General Remarks

                           112.

                           This template provides information on the calculation of own funds requirements according to Articles 312 to 324 of CRR for Operational Risk under the Basic Indicator Approach (BIA), the Standardised Approach (TSA), the Alternative Standardised Approach (ASA) and the Advanced Measurement Approaches (AMA). An institution can not apply TSA and ASA for the business lines retail banking and commercial banking at the same time at solo level

                           113.

                           Institutions using the BIA, TSA and/or ASA shall calculate their own funds requirement, based on the information at financial year end. When audited figures are not available, institutions may use business estimates. If audited figures are used, institutions shall report the audited figures which should remain unchanged. Deviations from this “unchanged” principle are possible, for instance if during that period the exceptional circumstances, such as recent acquisitions or disposals of entities or activities, are met.

                           114.

                           If an institution can justify its competent authority that — due to exceptional circumstances such as a merger or a disposal of entities or activities — using a three year average to calculating the relevant indicator would lead to a biased estimation for the own funds requirement for operational risk the competent authority may permit the institution to modify the calculation in a way that would take into account such events. Also the competent authority may on its own initiative, require an institution to modify the calculation. Where an institution has been in operation for less than three years it may use forward looking business estimates in calculating the relevant indicator, provided that it starts using historical data as soon as they are available.

                           115.

                           By columns, this template presents information, for the three most recent years, on the amount of the relevant indicator of the banking activities subject to operational risk and on the amount of loans and advances (the latter only applicable in the case of ASA). Next, information on the amount of own funds requirement for operational risk is reported. If applicable, it must be detailed which part of this amount is due to an allocation mechanism. Regarding AMA, memorandum items are added to present a detail of the effect of the expected loss, diversification and mitigation techniques on own funds requirement for operational risk.

                           116.

                           By rows, information is presented by method of calculation of the operational risk own funds requirement detailing business lines for TSA and ASA.

                           117.

                           This template shall be submitted by all institutions subject to operational risk own funds requirement.

                     4.1.2.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           010-030

                              RELEVANT INDICATOR

                           Institutions using the relevant indicator to calculate the own funds requirement for operational risk (BIA, TSA and ASA) report relevant indicator for the respective years in columns 010 to 030. Moreover, in the case of a combined use of different approaches as referred in Article 314 of CRR, institutions also report, for information purposes, relevant indicator for the activities subject to AMA. It is also the case for all other AMA banks.
                           Hereafter, the term “relevant indicator” refers to “the sum of the elements” at the end of the financial year as defined in Article 316 point 1, Table1 of CRR.
                           If the institution has less than 3 years of data on “relevant indicator” available, the available historical data (audited figures) shall be assigned by priority to the corresponding columns in the table. If, for instance, historical data for only one year is available, it shall be reported in column 030. If it seems reasonable, the forward looking estimates shall then be included in column 020 (estimate of next year) and column 010 (estimate of year +2).
                           Furthermore if there are no historical data on “relevant indicator” available the institution may use forward-looking business estimates.

                           040-060

                              LOANS AND ADVANCES (IN THE CASE OF ASA APPLICATION)

                           These columns shall be used to report the amounts of the loans and advances for business lines “Commercial banking” and “Retail banking”, as referred to in Article 319(1) point (b) of CRR. These amounts shall be used to calculate the alternative relevant indicator that leads to the own funds requirements corresponding to the activities subject to ASA (Article 319(1) point (a) of CRR).
                           For the “commercial banking” business line, securities held in the non-trading book shall also be included.

                           070

                              OWN FUND REQUIREMENT

                           The own fund requirement is calculated according to the approach used, following Articles 312 to 324 of CRR The resulting amount is reported in column 070.

                           071

                              TOTAL OPERATIONAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                           Article 92(4) of CRR. Own funds requirements in column 070 multiplied by 12.5.

                           080

                              OF WHICH: DUE TO AN ALLOCATION MECHANISM

                           Article 18(1) of CRR (related to the inclusion, in the application referred to in Article 312(2) of CRR) of the methodology used for allocating operational risk capital between the different entities of the group and of whether and how diversification effects are intended to be factored in the risk measurement system used by a EU parent credit institution and its subsidiaries or jointly by the subsidiaries of an EU parent financial holding company or EU parent mixed financial holding company.

                           090-120

                              AMA MEMORANDUM ITEMS TO BE REPORTED IF APPLICABLE

                           090

                              OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENT BEFORE ALLEVIATION DUE TO EXPECTED LOSS, DIVERSIFICATION AND RISK MITIGATION TECHNIQUES

                           The own funds requirement reported in column 090 is the one of column 070 but calculated before taking into account the alleviation effects due to expected loss, diversification and risk mitigation techniques (see below).

                           100

                              (-) ALLEVIATION OF OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS DUE TO THE EXPECTED LOSS CAPTURED IN BUSINESS PRACTICES

                           In column 100 the alleviation of own funds requirements due to expected loss captured in internal business practices (as referred to in Article 322(2) point (a) of CRR) is reported.

                           110

                              (-) ALLEVIATION OF OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS DUE TO DIVERSIFICATION

                           The diversification effect in column 110 is the difference between the sum of own funds requirements calculated separately for each operational risk class (i.e. a “perfect dependence” situation) and the diversified own funds requirement calculated by taking into account correlations and dependencies (i.e. assuming less than “perfect dependence” between the risk classes). The “perfect dependence” situation occurs in the “default case”, that is when the institution does not use explicit correlations structure between the risk classes, hence the AMA capital is computed as the sum of the individual operational risk measures of the chosen risk classes. In this case the correlation between the risk classes is assumed of 100 % and the value in the column has to be set to zero. Conversely, when the institution computes an explicit correlations structure between risk classes, it has to include in this column the difference between the AMA capital as stemming from the “default case” and that obtained after applying the correlations structure between the risk classes. The value reflects the “diversification capacity” of the AMA model, that is the ability of the model to capture the not simultaneous occurrence of severe operational risk loss events. In the column 110 the amount by which the assumed correlation structure decreases the AMA capital relative to the assumption of 100 % correlation has to be reported.

                           120

                              (-) ALLEVIATION OF OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENT DUE TO RISK MITIGATION TECHNIQUES (INSURANCE AND OTHER RISK TRANSFER MECHANISMS)

                           In column 120 the impact of insurance and other risk transfer mechanisms according to Article 323(1) to (5) of CRR is reported.

                           Rows

                           010

                              BANKING ACTIVITIES SUBJECT TO BASIC INDICATOR APPROACH (BIA)

                           This row shall present the amounts corresponding to activities subject to the BIA to calculate the own funds requirement for operational risk (Articles 315 and 316 of CRR).

                           020

                              BANKING ACTIVITIES SUBJECT TO STANDARISED (TSA)/ALTERNATIVE STANDARDISED (ASA) APPROACHES

                           The own funds requirement calculated according to the TSA and ASA (Articles 317 to 319 of CRR) shall be reported.

                           030-100

                              SUBJECT TO TSA

                           In the case of using the TSA, relevant indicator for each respective year shall be distributed in rows 030 to 100 amongst the business lines defined in Article 317, Table 2 of CRR. The mapping of activities into business lines shall follow the principles described in Article 318 of CRR.

                           110-120

                              SUBJECT TO ASA

                           Institutions using the ASA (Article 319 of CRR) shall report for the respective years the relevant indicator separately for each business line in the rows 030 to 050 and 080 to 100 and in the rows 110 and 120 for business lines “Commercial banking” and “Retail banking”.
                           Rows 110 and 120 shall present the amount of relevant indicator of activities subject to ASA distinguishing between those corresponding to the business line “Commercial banking” and those corresponding to the business line “Retail banking” (Article 319 of CRR). There can be amounts for the rows corresponding to “Commercial banking” and “Retail banking” under the TSA (rows 060 and 070) as well as under the ASA rows 110 and 120 (e.g. if a subsidiary is subject to TSA whereas the parent entity is subject to ASA).

                           130

                              BANKING ACTIVITIES SUBJECT TO ADVANCED MEASUREMENT APPROACHES AMA

                           The relevant data for AMA institutions (Article 312 point 2 and Article 321 to 323 of CRR) shall be reported.
                           In the case of combined use of different approaches as indicated in Article 314 of CRR, information on relevant indicator for activities subject to AMA shall be reported. It is also the case for all other AMA banks.

                     4.2.   C 17.00 — OPERATIONAL RISK: LOSSES AND RECOVERIES BY BUSINESS LINES AND EVENT TYPES IN THE LAST YEAR (OPR DETAILS)
               4.2.1.   General Remarks

                           118.

                           This template summarises the information on the gross losses and loss recoveries registered by an institution in the last year according to event types and business lines.

                           119.

                           “Gross loss” means a loss stemming from an operational risk event or event type — as referred to in Article 322(3)(b) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 — before recoveries of any type, without prejudice to 122.

                           120.

                           “Recovery” means an independent occurrence related to the original operational risk loss that is separate in time, in which funds or inflows of economic benefits are received from first or third parties, such as insurers or other parties.

                           121.

                           “Rapidly recovered loss events” means operational risk events that lead to losses that are partly or fully recovered within five working days. In case of a rapidly recovered loss event, only the part of the loss that is not fully recovered (i.e. the loss net of the partial rapid recovery) shall be included into the gross loss definition. As a consequence, loss events that lead to losses that are fully recovered within five working days shall not be included into the gross loss definition, as well as into the OPR Details reporting at all.

                           122.

                           “Date of accounting” means the date when a loss or reserve/provision was first recognized in the Profit and Loss statement, against an operational risk loss. This date logically follows the “Date of occurrence” (i.e. the date when the operational risk event happened or first began) and the “Date of discovery” (i.e. the date on which the institution became aware of the operational risk event).

                           123.

                           The Number of events is the number of operational risk events accounted for the first time within the reporting period.

                           124.

                           The Total loss amount is the algebraic sum of the following elements:

                                       i.

                                       The gross loss amounts pertinent to operational risk events “accounted for the first time” within the reporting period (e.g. direct charges, provisions, settlements);

                                       ii.

                                       the gross loss amounts pertinent to positive loss adjustments made within the reporting period (e.g. increase of provisions, linked loss events, additional settlements) of operational risk events “accounted for the first time” in previous reporting periods; and

                                       iii.

                                       the gross loss amounts pertinent to negative loss adjustments made within the reporting period — due to decrease of provisions — of operational risk events “accounted for the first time” in previous reporting periods.

                           125.

                           The Number of events shall conventionally include also the events accounted for the first time in previous reporting periods and not yet reported in previous supervisory reports. The Total loss amount shall conventionally include also the elements as of Paragraph 124 pertinent to previous reporting periods and not yet reported in previous supervisory reports.

                           126.

                           The Maximum single loss is the largest single amount among those included in 124.i or 124.ii above.

                           127.

                           The Sum of the five largest losses is the sum of the five largest amounts among those included in 124.i or 124.ii above.

                           128.

                           The Total loss recovery is the sum of all the recoveries accounted within the reporting period and pertinent to operational risk events accounted for the first time within the reporting period or in previous reporting periods.

                           129.

                           The figures reported in June of the respective year are interim figures, while the final figures are reported in December. Therefore the figures in June have a six-month reference period (i.e. from 1/1 to 30/6 of the calendar year) while the figures in December have a twelve-month reference period (i.e. from 1/1 to 31/12 of the calendar year).

                           130.

                           The information is presented by distributing the losses and recoveries above internal thresholds amongst business lines (as defined in Article 317 of CRR, Table 2 of CRR including the additional business line “Corporate items” as referred to in Article 322(3) point (b) of CRR) and event types (as defined in Article 324 of CRR), being possible that the losses corresponding to one event are distributed amongst several business lines.

                           131.

                           Columns present the different event types and the totals for each business line, together with a memorandum item that shows the lowest internal threshold applied in the data collection of losses, revealing within each business line the lowest and the highest threshold if there is more than one threshold.

                           132.

                           Rows present the business lines, and within each business line, information on the number of events, the total loss amount, the maximum single loss, the sum of the five largest losses and the total loss recovery.

                           133.

                           For the total business lines, data on the number of events and the total loss amount are also requested for certain ranges based on preset thresholds, 10 000, 20 000, 100 000, and 1 000 000. The thresholds are set in Euro amounts and are included for comparability purposes of the reported losses among institutions; therefore they do not necessarily relate with the minimum loss thresholds used for the internal loss data collection, to be reported in another section of the template.

                           134.

                           Where the algebraic sum of the elements of the total loss amount, as indicated in paragraph 124 above, determines a negative value for some business lines/event types combinations, the value of 0 shall be reported in the pertinent cells.

                           135.

                           This template shall be reported by institutions using AMA or TSA/ASA for the calculation of their own funds requirements.

                           136.

                           In order to verify the conditions envisaged by Article 5 point (b) (2) (b), the institutions shall use the latest statistics as available in the Supervisory Disclosure webpage of the EBA to get “the sum of individual balance sheet totals of all institutions within the same Member State”.

                           137.

                           Institutions subject to Article 5(b)(2)(b) of this Regulation may only report the following information for the sum of all event types (column 080) of the OPR Details template:

                                       (a)

                                       number of events (row 910);

                                       (b)

                                       total loss amount (row 920);

                                       (c)

                                       maximum single loss (row 930);

                                       (d)

                                       sum of the five largest losses (row 940) and

                                       (e)

                                       total loss recovery (row 950).

                     4.2.2.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           010-070

                              EVENT TYPES

                           Institutions report the losses in the respective columns 010 to 070 according to the event types as defined in Article 324 of CRR.
                           Institutions that calculate their own funds requirement according to TSA or ASA can report the losses for which the event type is not identified in column 080.

                           080

                              TOTAL EVENT TYPES

                           In column 080, for each business line, institutions report the total “number of events”, the total of “total loss amount” and the total of “total loss recovery” as the simple aggregation of the number of loss events, the total gross loss amounts and the total loss recovery amounts reported in columns 010 to 070. The “maximum single loss” in column 080 is the maximum of the “maximum single gross losses” reported in columns 010 to 070. For the sum of the five largest losses, in column 080 the sum of the five largest losses within one business line is reported.

                           090-100

                              MEMORANDUM ITEM: THRESHOLD APPLIED IN DATA COLLECTION

                           Institutions report in the columns 090 and 100 the minimum loss thresholds they are using for the internal loss data collection in accordance with Article 322(3) point (c) of CRR, last sentence of CRR. If the institution applies only one threshold for in each business line, only the column 090 shall be filled in. In the case where there are different thresholds applied within the same regulatory business line, then the highest applicable threshold (column 100) shall be filled in as well.

                           Rows

                           010-850

                              BUSINESS LINES: CORPORATE FINANCE, TRADING AND SALES, RETAIL BROKERAGE, COMMERCIAL BANKING, RETAIL BANKING, PAYMENT AND SETTLEMENT, AGENCY SERVICES, ASSET MANAGEMENT, CORPORATE ITEMS

                           For each business line as defined in Article 317(4) table 2 of CRR, including the additional business line “Corporate items” as referred to in Article 322(3) point (b) of CRR, and for each event type, the institution shall report, according to the internal thresholds the following information: number of events, total loss amount, maximum single loss, sum of the five largest losses and total loss recovery. For a loss event that affects more than one business line the “total loss amount” is distributed among all the affected business lines.

                           910-950

                              TOTAL BUSINESS LINES

                           For each event type (column 010 to 080), the following information (Article 322(3) points b), c) and e) of CRR on total business lines (rows 910 to 950) has to be reported:
                           —   Number of events (row 910): the number of events above the internal threshold by event types for the total business lines shall be reported. This figure may be lower than the aggregation of the number of events by business lines since the events with multiple impacts (impacts in different business lines) shall be considered as one.
                           —   Number of events. Of which, ≥ 10 000 and < 20 000, ≥ 20 000 and < 100 000, ≥ 100 000 and < 1 000 000, ≥ 1 000 000 (rows 911 to 914): the number of internal events included in the ranges defined in the pertinent rows shall be reported.
                           —   Total loss amount (row 920): the total loss amount is the simple aggregation of the total loss amount for each business line.
                           —   Total loss amount, Of which, ≥ 10 000 and < 20 000, ≥ 20 000 and < 100 000, ≥ 100 000 and < 1 000 000, ≥ 1 000 000 (rows 921 to 924): the total loss amount included in the ranges defined in the pertinent rows shall be reported.
                           —   Maximum single loss (row 930): the maximum single loss is the maximum loss over the internal threshold for each event type and amongst all business lines. These figures may be higher than the highest single loss recorded in each business line if an event impacts different business lines.
                           —   Sum of the five largest losses (row 940): the sum of the five largest gross losses for each event type and amongst all business lines is reported. This sum may be higher than the highest sum of the five largest losses recorded in each business line. This sum has to be reported regardless the number of losses.
                           —   Total loss recovery (row 950): the total loss recovery is the simple aggregation of the total loss recovery for each business line.

                           910-950/080

                              TOTAL BUSINESS LINES — TOTAL EVENT TYPES

                           —   Number of events: for each row from 910 to 914, the number of events is equal to the horizontal aggregation of the number of events in the corresponding row, given that in those figures the events with impacts in different business lines shall have already been considered as one event. The number in row 910 shall not necessarily be equal to the vertical aggregation of the number of events which are included in column 080, given that one event can have an impact in different business lines simultaneously.
                           —   Total loss amount: for each row from 920 to 924, the total loss amount is equal to both the horizontal aggregation of total loss amounts by event type in the corresponding row. The total loss amount in row 920 is equal to the vertical aggregation of total loss amounts by business line in column 080.
                           —   Maximum single loss: as previously mentioned, when an event has impact in different business lines, it may be that the amount for “Maximum single loss” in “Total Business lines” for that particular event type is higher than the amounts of “Maximum single loss” in each business line. Hence, the amount in this cell shall be equal to the highest of the values of “Maximum single loss” in “Total Business lines”, which may not necessarily be equal to the highest value of “Maximum single loss” across business lines in column 080.
                           —   Sum of the five largest losses: it is the sum of the five largest losses in the whole matrix, which means that it may not necessarily be equal to neither the maximum value of “sum of the five largest losses” in “Total Business lines” nor the maximum value of “sum of the five largest losses” in column 080.
                           —   Total loss recovery: it is equal to both the horizontal aggregation of total loss recoveries by event type in row 950 and the vertical aggregation of total loss recoveries by business line in column 080.

                     5.   MARKET RISK TEMPLATES

                           138.

                           These instructions refer to the templates reporting of the calculation of own funds requirements according to the standardised approach for foreign exchange risk (MKR SA FX), commodities risk (MKR SA COM) interest rate risk (MKR SA TDI, MKR SA SEC, MKR SA CTP) and equity risk (MKR SA EQU). Additionally, instructions for the template reporting of the calculation of own funds requirements according to the internal models approach (MKR IM) are included in this part.

                           139.

                           The position risk on a traded debt instrument or equity (or debt or equity derivative) shall be divided into two components in order to calculate the capital required against it. The first shall be its specific-risk component — this is the risk of a price change in the instrument concerned due to factors related to its issuer or, in the case of a derivative, the issuer of the underlying instrument. The second component shall cover its general risk — this is the risk of a price change in the instrument due (in the case of a traded debt instrument or debt derivative) to a change in the level of interest rates or (in the case of an equity or equity derivative) to a broad equity- market movement unrelated to any specific attributes of individual securities. The general treatment of specific instruments and netting procedures can be found in Articles 326 to 333 of CRR.

                     5.1.   C 18.00 — MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACH FOR POSITION RISKS IN TRADED DEBT INSTRUMENTS (MKR SA TDI)
               5.1.1.   General Remarks

                           140.

                           This template captures the positions and the related own funds requirements for position risks on traded debt instruments under the standardised approach (Articles 102 and 105 (1) of CRR). The different risks and methods available under the CRR are considered by rows. The specific risk associated with exposures included in MKR SA SEC and MKR SA CTP only has to be reported in the Total template of the MKR SA TDI. The own funds requirements reported in those templates shall be transferred to cell {325;060} (securitisations) and {330;060} (CTP) respectively..

                           141.

                           The template has to be filled out separately for the “Total”, plus a pre-defined list of following currencies: EUR, ALL, BGN, CZK, DKK, EGP, GBP, HRK, HUF, ISK, JPY, LTL, MKD, NOK, PLN, RON, RUB, RSD, SEK, CHF, TRY, UAH, USD and one residual template for all other currencies.

                     5.1.2.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           010-020

                              ALL POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)

                           Articles 102 and 105 (1) of CRR. These are gross positions not netted by instruments but excluding underwriting positions subscribed or sub-underwritten by third parties (Article 345 second sentence of CRR). Regarding the distinction between Long and Short positions, also applicable to these gross positions, see Article 328(2) of CRR.

                           030-040

                              NET POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)

                           Articles 327 to 329 and 334 of CRR. Regarding the distinction between Long and Short positions see Article 328(2) of CRR.

                           050

                              POSITIONS SUBJECT TO CAPITAL CHARGE

                           Those net positions that, according to the different approaches considered in Part 3 Title IV Chapter 2 of CRR, receive a capital charge.

                           060

                              OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS

                           The capital charge for any relevant position according to Part 3 Title IV Chapter 2 of CRR.

                           070

                              TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                           Article 92(4) lit. b of CRR. Result of the multiplication of the own funds requirements by 12.5.

                           Rows

                           010-350

                              TRADED DEBT INSTRUMENTS IN TRADING BOOK

                           Positions in traded debt instruments in Trading Book and their correspondent own funds requirements for position risk according to Article 92(3) point (b) (i) CRR and Part 3 Title IV Chapter 2 of CRR are reported depending on risk category, maturity and approach used.

                           011

                              GENERAL RISK

                           012

                              Derivatives

                           Derivatives included in the calculation of interest rate risk of trading book positions taking into account Articles 328 to 331, if applicable.

                           013

                              Other assets and liabilities

                           Instruments other than derivatives included in the calculation of interest rate risk of trading book positions.

                           020-200

                              MATURITY BASED APPROACH

                           Positions in traded debt instruments subject to the maturity-based approach according to Article 339(1) to (8) of CRR and the correspondent own funds requirements set up in Article 339(9) of CRR. The position shall be split by zones 1, 2 and 3 and these by the maturity of the instruments.

                           210-240

                              GENERAL RISK. DURATION BASED APPROACH

                           Positions in traded debt instruments subject to the duration-based approach according to Article 340(1) to (6) of CRR and the correspondent own funds requirements set up in Article 340(7) of CRR. The position shall be split by zones 1, 2 and 3.

                           250

                              SPECIFIC RISK

                           Sum of amounts reported in rows 251, 325 and 330.
                           Positions in traded debt instruments subject to the specific risk capital charge and their correspondent capital charge according to Article 92(3) lit. b and 335, 336 (1) to (3), 337 and 338 of CRR. Be also aware of last sentence in Article 327(1) of CRR.

                           251-321

                              Own funds requirement for non-securitisation debt instruments

                           Sum of the amounts reported in rows 260 to 321.
                           The own funds requirement of the n-th to default credit derivatives which are not rated externally has to be computed by summing up the risk weights of the reference entities (Article 332(1) point (e) para 1 and 2 CRR — “look-through”). N-th-to-default credit derivatives which are rated externally (Article 332(1) point (e) para 3 CRR) shall be reported separately in line 321.
                           Reporting of positions subject to Article 336(3) CRR:
                           There is a special treatment for bonds which qualify for a 10 % risk weight in the banking book according to Article 129(3) CRR (covered bonds). The specific own funds requirements is half of the percentage of the second category of table 1 of Article 336 CRR. Those positions have to be assigned to rows 280-300 according to the residual term to final maturity.
                           If the general risk of interest rate positions is hedged by a credit derivative, Articles 346 and 347 shall be applied.

                           325

                              Own funds requirement for securitisation instruments

                           Total own funds requirements reported in column 610 of template MKR SA SEC. It shall only be reported on Total level of the MKR SA TDI.

                           330

                              Own funds requirement for the correlation trading portfolio

                           Total own funds requirements reported in column 450 of template MKR SA CTP. It shall only be reported on Total level of the MKR SA TDI.

                           340

                              PARTICULAR APPROACH FOR POSITION RISK IN CIUs

                           Articles 348 to 350 of CRR. Applicable when positions in CIUs or the underlying instruments are not treated in accordance with the methods set out in Part 3 Title IV Chapter 5 of CRR. It includes, if it is the case, the effects of applicable caps in the own funds requirements.
                           If the particular approach according to Article 348 sentence 1 of CRR is applied, the amount to be reported is 32 % of the net position of the CIU exposure in question. If the particular approach according to Article 348 sentence 2 of CRR is applied, the amount to be reported is the lower of 32 % of the net position of the relevant CIU exposure and the difference between 40 % of this net position and the own funds requirements that arise from the foreign exchange risk associated with this CIU exposure.

                           350-390

                              ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR OPTIONS (NON-DELTA RISKS)

                           Article 329(3) of CRR.
                           The additional requirements for options related to non-delta risks shall be reported in the method used for its calculation.

                     5.2.   C 19.00 — MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACH FOR SPECIFIC RISK IN SECURITISATIONS (MKR SA SEC)
               5.2.1.   General Remarks

                           142.

                           This template requests information on positions (all/net and long/short) and the related own funds requirements for the specific risk component of position risk in securitisations/re-securitisations held in the trading book (not eligible for correlation trading portfolio) under the standardised approach.

                           143.

                           The MKR SA SEC template determines the own funds requirement only for the specific risk of securitisation positions according to Articles 335 in connection with 337 CRR. If securitisation positions of the trading book are hedged by credit derivatives, Articles 346 and 347 CRR apply. There is only one template for all positions of the trading book, irrespective of the fact whether the institution uses the Standardised Approach or the Internal Ratings Based Approach to determine the risk weight for each of the positions according to Part Three Title II Chapter 5 of CRR. The reporting of the own funds requirements of the general risk of these positions is conducted in the MKR SA TDI or the MKR IM template.

                           144.

                           Positions which receive a risk weight of 1 250 % can alternatively be deducted from CET1 (see 243(1) point (b), 244(1) point (b) and 258 of CRR). If this is the case, those positions have to be reported in row 460 of CA1.

                     5.2.2.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           010-020

                              ALL POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)

                           Articles 102 and 105 (1) of CRR in connection with Article 337 of CRR (securitisation positions). Regarding the distinction between Long and Short positions, also applicable to these gross positions, see Article 328(2) of CRR.

                           030-040

                              (-) POSITIONS DEDUCTED FROM OWN FUNDS (LONG AND SHORT)

                           Article 258 of CRR.

                           050-060

                              NET POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)

                           Articles 327 to 329 and 334 of CRR. Regarding the distinction between Long and Short positions see Article 328(2) of CRR.

                           070-520

                              BREAKDOWN OF THE NET POSITIONS ACCORDING TO RISK WEIGHTS

                           Articles 251 (Table 1) and 261 (1) (Table 4) of CRR. The breakdown has to be done separately for long and short positions.

                           230-240 and 460-470

                              1 250 %

                           Articles 251 (Table 1) and 261 (1) (Table 4) of CRR.

                           250-260 and 480-490

                              SUPERVISORY FORMULA METHOD

                           Article 337(2) of CRR in connection with Article 262 of CRR.
                           These columns shall be reported when the institutions uses the alternative Supervisory Formula Approach (SFA), which determines the own funds requirements as a function of the characteristics of the collateral pool and contractual properties of the tranche.

                           270 and 500

                              LOOK THROUGH

                           SA: Articles 253, 254 and 256 (5) of CRR. The look-through columns comprise all the cases of unrated exposures where the risk weight is obtained from the underlying portfolio of exposures (average risk weight of the pool, highest risk weight of the pool, or the use of a concentration ratio).
                           IRB: Articles 263(2) and (3) of CRR. For early amortisations see Article 265(1) and 256 (5) of CRR.

                           280-290/510-520

                              INTERNAL ASSESSMENT APPROACH

                           Article 109(1) sentence 2 and Article 259(3) and (4) of CRR.
                           These columns shall be reported when the institution uses the internal assessment approach for determining capital charges for liquidity facilities and credit enhancements that banks (including third-party banks) extend to ABCP conduits. The IAA, based on ECAI's methodologies, is applicable only to exposures to ABCP conduits that have an internal rating equivalent of investment-grade at inception.

                           530-540

                              OVERALL EFFECT (ADJUSTMENT) DUE TO INFRINGEMENT OF THE DUE DILIGENCE PROVISIONS

                           Article 337(3) of CRR in connection with Article 407 of CRR. Article 14(2) of CRR

                           550-570

                              BEFORE CAP — WEIGHTED NET LONG/SHORT POSITIONS AND SUM OF WEIGHTED NET LONG AND SHORT POSITIONS

                           Article 337 of CRR without taking into account the discretion of Article 335 of CRR, that allows an institution to cap the product of the weight and the net position at the maximum possible default-risk related loss.

                           580-600

                              AFTER CAP — WEIGHTED NET LONG/SHORT POSITIONS AND SUM OF WEIGHTED NET LONG AND SHORT POSITIONS

                           Article 337 of CRR taking into account the discretion of Article 335 of CRR.

                           610

                              TOTAL OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS

                           According to Article 337(4) of CRR for a transitional period ending 31 December 2014, the institution shall sum separately its weighted net long positions (column 580) and its weighted net short positions (column 590). The larger of those sums (after cap) shall constitute the own funds requirement. From 2015 onwards according to Article 337(4) of CRR, the institution shall sum its weighted net positions, regardless whether they are long or short (column 600), in order to calculate the own funds requirements.

                           Rows

                           010

                              TOTAL EXPOSURES

                           Total amount of outstanding securitisations (held in the trading book) reported by the institution playing the role/s of originator and/or investor and/or sponsor.

                           040,070 and 100

                              SECURITISATIONS

                           Article 4(61) and (62) of CRR.

                           020,050, 080 and110

                              RE-SECURITISATIONS

                           Article 4(63) of CRR.

                           030-050

                              ORIGINATOR

                           Article 4(13) of CRR

                           060-080

                              INVESTOR

                           Credit institution that holds a securitisation positions in a securitisation transaction for which it is neither originator nor sponsor

                           090-110

                              SPONSOR

                           Article 4(14) of CRR. If a sponsor is also securitising it own assets, it shall fill in the originator's rows with the information regarding its own securitised assets

                           120-210

                              BREAKDOWN OF THE TOTAL SUM OF WEIGHTED NET LONG AND NET SHORT POSITIONS BY UNDERLYING TYPES

                           Article 337(4), last sentence of CRR.
                           The breakdown of the underlying assets follows the classification used in the SEC Details template (Column “Type”):

                                       —

                                       —

                                       1

                                       —

                                       residential mortgages;

                                       —

                                       —

                                       2

                                       —

                                       commercial mortgages;

                                       —

                                       —

                                       3

                                       —

                                       credit card receivables;

                                       —

                                       —

                                       4

                                       —

                                       leasing;

                                       —

                                       —

                                       5

                                       —

                                       loans to corporates or SMEs (treated as corporates);

                                       —

                                       —

                                       6

                                       —

                                       consumer loans;

                                       —

                                       —

                                       7

                                       —

                                       trade receivables;

                                       —

                                       —

                                       8

                                       —

                                       other assets;

                                       —

                                       —

                                       9

                                       —

                                       covered bonds;

                                       —

                                       —

                                       10

                                       —

                                       other liabilities.

                                 For each securitisation, in case the pool consists of different types of assets, the institution shall consider the most important type.

                     5.3.   C 20.00 — MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACH FOR SPECIFIC RISK FOR POSITIONS ASSIGNED TO THE CORRELATION TRADING PORTFOLIO (MKR SA CTP)
               5.3.1.   General Remarks

                           145.

                           This template requests information on positions of the CTP (comprising securitisations, nth-to-default credit derivatives and other CTP positions included according to Article 338(3)) and the corresponding own funds requirements under the standardised approach.

                           146.

                           The MKR SA CTP template determines the own funds requirement only for the specific risk of positions assigned to the Correlation Trading Portfolio according to Articles 335 in connection with 338 (2) and (3) of CRR. If CTP- positions of the trading book are hedged by credit derivatives, Articles 346 and 347 CRR apply. There is only one template for all CTP-positions of the trading book, irrespective of the fact whether the institution uses the Standardised Approach or the Internal Ratings Based Approach to determine the risk weight for each of the positions according to Part Three Title II Chapter 5 of CRR. The reporting of the own funds requirements of the general risk of these positions is conducted in the MKR SA TDI or the MKR IM template.

                           147.

                           This structure of the template separates securitisation positions, n-th to default credit derivatives and other CTP-positions. As a result, securitisation positions shall always be reported in rows 030, 060 or 090 (depending on the role of the institution in the securitisation). N-th to default credit derivatives shall always be reported in line 110. The “other CTP-positions” are neither securitisation positions nor n-th to default credit derivatives (see definition in Article 338(3) CRR), but they are explicitly “linked” (because of the hedging intent) to one of these two positions. That is why they are assigned either under the sub-heading “securitisation” or “n-th to default credit derivative”.

                           148.

                           Positions which receive a risk weight of 1 250 % can alternatively be deducted from CET1 (see 243(1) point (b), 244(1) point (b) and 258 of CRR). If this is the case, those positions have to be reported in row 460 of CA1.

                     5.3.2.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           010-020

                              ALL POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)

                           Articles 102 and 105 (1) of CRR in connection with positions assigned to the Correlation Trading Portfolio according to Article 338(2) and (3) of CRR. Regarding the distinction between Long and Short positions, also applicable to these gross positions, see Article 328(2) of CRR.

                           030-040

                              (-) POSITIONS DEDUCTED FROM OWN FUNDS (LONG AND SHORT)

                           Article 258 of CRR.

                           050-060

                              NET POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)

                           Articles 327 to 329 and 334 of CRR. Regarding the distinction between Long and Short positions see Article 328(2) of CRR.

                           070-400

                              BREAKDOWN OF THE NET POSITIONS ACCORDING TO RISK WEIGHTS (SA AND IRB)

                           Articles 251 (Table 1) and 261 (1) (Table 4) of CRR.

                           160 and 330

                              OTHER

                           Other risk weights not explicitly mentioned in the previous columns.
                           For n-th-to-default credit derivatives only those which are not externally rated. Externally rated n-th to default credit derivatives are either to be reported in the MKR SA TDI template (row 321) or — if they are incorporated into the CTP — shall be assigned to the column of the respective risk weight.

                           170 -180 and 360-370

                              1 250 %

                           Articles 251 (Table 1) and 261 (1) (Table 4) of CRR.

                           190 -200 and 340-350

                              SUPERVISORY FORMULA METHOD

                           Article 337(2) of CRR in connection with Article 262 of CRR.

                           210/380

                              LOOK THROUGH

                           SA: Articles 253, 254 and 256 (5) of CRR. The look-through columns comprise all the cases of unrated exposures where the risk weight is obtained from the underlying portfolio of exposures (average risk weight of the pool, highest risk weight of the pool, or the use of a concentration ratio).
                           IRB: Articles 263(2) and (3) of CRR. For early amortisations see Article 265(1) and 256 (5) of CRR.

                           220-230 and 390-400

                              INTERNAL ASSESSMENT APPROACH

                           Article 259(3) and (4) of CRR.

                           410-420

                              BEFORE CAP — WEIGHTED NET LONG/SHORT POSITIONS

                           Article 338 without taking into account the discretion of Article 335 of CRR.

                           430-440

                              AFTER CAP — WEIGHTED NET LONG/SHORT POSITIONS

                           Article 338 taking into account the discretion of Article 335 of CRR.

                           450

                              TOTAL OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS

                           The own funds requirement is determined as the larger of either (i) the specific risk charge that would apply just to the net long positions (column 430) or (ii) the specific risk charge that would apply just to the net short positions (column 440).

                           Rows

                           010

                              TOTAL EXPOSURES

                           Total amount of outstanding positions (held in the correlation trading portfolio) reported by the institution playing the role/s of originator, investor or sponsor.

                           020-040

                              ORIGINATOR

                           Article 4(13) of CRR

                           050-070

                              INVESTOR

                           Credit institution that holds a securitisation positions in a securitisation transaction for which it is neither originator nor sponsor

                           080-100

                              SPONSOR

                           Article 4(14) of CRR. If a sponsor is also securitising it own assets, it shall fill in the originator's rows with the information regarding its own securitised assets

                           030, 060 and 090

                              SECURITISATIONS

                           The correlation trading portfolio comprises securitisations, n-th-to-default credit derivatives and possibly other hedging positions that meet the criteria set in Article 338(2) and (3) of CRR.
                           Derivatives of securitisation exposures that provide a pro-rata share as well as positions hedging CTP positions shall be included in row “Other CTP positions”.

                           110

                              N-TH-TO-DEFAULT CREDIT DERIVATIVES

                           N-th to default credit derivatives that are hedged by n-th-to-default credit derivatives according to Article 347 CRR shall both be reported here.
                           The positions originator, investor and sponsor do not fit for n-th to default credit derivatives. As a consequence, the breakdown as for securitisation positions cannot be provided for n-th to default credit derivatives..

                           040, 070, 100 and 120

                              OTHER CTP POSITIONS

                           The positions in:

                                       —

                                       Derivatives of securitisation exposures that provide a pro-rata share as well as positions hedging CTP positions shall be included in row “Other CTP positions”;

                                       —

                                       CTP positions hedged by credit derivatives according to Article 346 CRR;

                                       —

                                       Other positions that satisfy Article 338(3) of CRR;

                                 are included.

                     5.4.   C 21.00 — MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACH FOR POSITION RISK IN EQUITIES (MKR SA EQU)
               5.4.1.   General Remarks

                           149.

                           This template requests information on the positions and the corresponding own funds requirements for position risk in equities held in the trading book and treated under the standardised approach.

                           150.

                           The template has to be filled out separately for the “Total”, plus a static, pre-defined list of following markets: Bulgaria, Croatia, Czech Republic, Denmark, Egypt, Hungary, Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway, Poland, Romania, Sweden, United Kingdom, Albania, Japan, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, Russian Federation, Serbia, Switzerland, Turkey, Ukraine, USA, Euro Area plus one residual template for all other markets. For the purpose of this reporting requirement the term “market” shall be read as “country”.

                     5.4.2.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           010-020

                              ALL POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)

                           Articles 102 and 105 (1) of CRR. These are gross positions not netted by instruments but excluding underwriting positions subscribed or sub-underwritten by third parties (Article 345 second sentence of CRR).

                           030-040

                              NET POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)

                           Articles 327, 329, 332, 341 and 345 of CRR.

                           050

                              POSITIONS SUBJECT TO CAPITAL CHARGE

                           Those net positions that, according to the different approaches considered in Part 3 Title IV Chapter 2 of CRR, receive a capital charge. The capital charge has to be calculated for each national market separately.

                           060

                              OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS

                           The capital charge for any relevant position according to Part 3 Title IV Chapter 2 of CRR.

                           070

                              TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                           Article 92(4) lit. b of CRR. Result of the multiplication of the own funds requirements by 12.5.

                           Rows

                           010-130

                              EQUITIES IN TRADING BOOK

                           Own funds requirements for position risk according to Article 92(3) point (b) (i) CRR and Part 3 Title IV Chapter 2 Section 3 of CRR.

                           020-040

                              GENERAL RISK

                           Positions in equities subject to general risk (Article 343 of CRR) and their correspondent own funds requirement according to Part 3 Title IV Chapter 2 Section 3 of CRR.
                           Both breakdowns (021/022 as well as 030/040) are a breakdown related to all positions subject to general risk.
                           Rows 021 and 022 requests information on the breakdown according to instruments. Only the breakdown in rows 030 and 040 is used as a basis for the calculation of own funds requirements.

                           021

                              Derivatives

                           Derivatives included in the calculation of equity risk of trading book positions taking into account Articles 329 and 332, if applicable.

                           022

                              Other assets and liabilities

                           Instruments other than derivatives included in the calculation of equity risk of trading book positions.

                           030

                              Exchange traded stock-index futures broadly diversified and subject to a particular approach

                           Exchange traded stock-index futures broadly diversified and subject to a particular approach according to Article 344(1) and (4) of CRR. These positions are only subject to general risk and, accordingly, must not be reported in row (050).

                           040

                              Other equities than exchange traded stock-index futures broadly diversified

                           Other positions in equities subject to specific risk and the correspondent own funds requirements according to Article 343 and 344 (3) of CRR.

                           050

                              SPECIFIC RISK

                           Positions in equities subject to specific risk and the correspondent own funds requirement according to Articles 342 and 344 (4) CRR.

                           080

                              PARTICULAR APPROACH FOR POSITION RISK IN CIUs

                           The CRR does not explicitly assign those positions to either the interest rate risk or the equity risk. For reporting purposes, those positions shall be reported in the MKR SA EQU template.
                           Positions in CIUs if capital requirements are calculated according to Article 348(1) CRR. Applicable when positions in CIUs or the underlying instruments are not treated in accordance with the methods set out in Part 3 Title IV Chapter 5 (reference to the “Use of internal models to calculate own funds requirements”) of CRR.
                           If the particular approach according to Article 348(1) sentence 1 of CRR is applied, the amount to be reported is 32 % of the net position of the CIU exposure in question. If the particular approach according to Article 348(1) sentence 2 of CRR is applied, the amount to be reported is the lower of 32 % of the net position of the relevant CIU exposure and the difference between 40 % of this net position and the own funds requirements that arise from the foreign exchange risk associated with this CIU exposure.
                           If the specific methods of Article 350 CRR are applicable, the reporting of those positions shall follow the underlying investments. As a consequence, those positions would be reported in the relevant rows of either the MKR SA TDI or the MKR SA EQU template.

                           090-130

                              ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR OPTIONS (NON-DELTA RISKS)

                           Article 329(2) and (3) of CRR.
                           The additional requirements for options related to non-delta risks shall be reported in the method used for its calculation.

                     5.5.   C 22.00 — MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACHES FOR FOREIGN EXCHANGE RISK (MKR SA FX)
               5.5.1.   General Remarks

                           151.

                           Institutions shall report information on the positions in each currency (reporting currency included) and the corresponding own funds requirements for foreign exchange treated under the standardised approach. The position is calculated for each currency (including euro), gold, and positions to CIUs. Rows 100 to 470 of this template shall be reported even if institutions are not required to calculate own funds requirements for foreign exchange risk according to Article 351 of CRR.

                           152.

                           The memorandum items of the template shall be filled out separately for All currencies of the Member States of the European Union and the following currencies: USD, CHF, JPY, RUB, TRY, AUD, CAD, RSD, ALL, UAH, MKD, EGP, ARS, BRL, MXN, HKD, ICK, TWD, NZD, NOK, SGD, KRW, CNY and all other currencies.

                     5.5.2.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           020-030

                              ALL POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)

                           Gross positions due to assets, amounts to be received and similar items referred to in Article 352(1) of CRR. According to Article 352(2) and subject to permission from competent authorities, positions taken to hedge against the adverse effect of the exchange rate on their ratios in accordance with Article 92(1) and positions related to items that are already deducted in the calculation of own funds shall not be reported.

                           040-050

                              NET POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)

                           Articles 352(3) and (4), first and second sentences, and 353 of CRR.
                           The net positions are calculated by each currency, accordingly there may be simultaneous long and short positions.

                           060-080

                              POSITIONS SUBJECT TO CAPITAL CHARGE

                           Articles 352(4), third sentence, 353 and 354 of CRR.

                           060-070

                              POSITIONS SUBJECT TO CAPITAL CHARGE (LONG AND SHORT)

                           The long and short net positions for each currency are calculated by deducting the total of short positions from the total of long positions.
                           Long net positions for each operation in a currency are added to obtain the long net position in that currency.
                           Short net positions for each operation in a currency are added to obtain the short net position in that currency.
                           Unmatched positions are added to positions subject to capital charges for other currencies (row 030) in column (060) or (070) depending on their short or long arrangement.

                           080

                              POSITIONS SUBJECT TO CAPITAL CHARGE (MATCHED)

                           Matched positions for closely correlated currencies

                              RISK CAPITAL CHARGE (%)

                           As defined in Articles 351 and 354, the risk capital charges in percentage.

                           090

                              OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS

                           The capital charge for any relevant position according to Part 3 Title IV Chapter 3 of CRR.

                           100

                              TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                           Article 92(4) lit. b of CRR. Result of the multiplication of the own funds requirements by 12.5.

                           Rows

                           010

                              TOTAL POSITIONS IN NON REPORTING CURRENCIES

                           Positions in non-reporting currencies and their correspondent own funds requirements according to Article 92(3) point (c) (i) and Article 352(2) and (4) of CRR (for conversion into the reporting currency).

                           020

                              CURRENCIES CLOSELY CORRELATED

                           Positions and their correspondent own funds requirements for currencies referred to in Article 354 of CRR.

                           030

                              ALL OTHER CURRENCIES (including CIU's treated as different currencies)

                           Positions and their correspondent own funds requirements for currencies subject to the general procedure referred to in Articles 351 and 352 (2) and (4) of CRR.
                           Reporting of CIU's treated as separate currencies according to Article 353 CRR:
                           There are two different treatments of CIU's treated as separate currencies for calculating the capital requirements:

                                       1.

                                       The modified gold method, if the direction of the CIU's investment is not available (those CIU's shall be added to an institution's overall net foreign-exchange position)

                                       2.

                                       If the direction of the CIU's investment is available, those CIU's shall be added to the total open foreign exchange position (long or short, depending on the direction of the CIU)

                                 The reporting of those CIU's follows the calculation of the capital requirements accordingly.

                           040

                              GOLD

                           Positions and their correspondent own funds requirements for currencies subject to the general procedure referred to in Articles 351 and 352 (2) and (4) of CRR.

                           050-090

                              ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR OPTIONS (NON-DELTA RISKS)

                           Article 352(5) and (6) of CRR.
                           The additional requirements for options related to non-delta risks shall be reported in the method used for its calculation.

                           100-120

                              Breakdown of total positions (reporting currency included) by exposure types

                           Total positions shall be broken down according to derivatives, other assets and liabilities and off-balance sheet items.

                           100

                              Other assets and liabilities other than off-balance sheet items and derivatives

                           Positions not included in row 110 or 120 shall be included here.

                           110

                              Off-balance sheet items

                           Items included in Annex I of CRR except those included as Securities Financing Transactions & Long Settlement Transactions or from Contractual Cross Product Netting.

                           120

                              Derivatives

                           Positions valued according to Articles 352 CRR.

                           130-480

                              MEMORANDUM ITEMS: CURRENCY POSITIONS

                           The memorandum items of the template shall be filled out separately for All currencies of the Member States of the European Union and the following currencies: USD, CHF, JPY, RUB, TRY, AUD, CAD, RSD, ALL, UAH, MKD, EGP, ARS, BRL, MXN, HKD, ICK, TWD, NZD, NOK, SGD, KRW, CNY and all other currencies.

                     5.6.   C 23.00 — MARKET RISK: STANDARDISED APPROACHES FOR COMMODITIES (MKR SA COM)
               5.6.1.   General Remarks

                           153.

                           This template request information on the positions in commodities and the corresponding own funds requirements treated under the standardised approach.

                     5.6.2.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           010-020

                              All POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)

                           Gross long/short positions considered positions in the same commodity according to Article 357(1) and (4) of CRR (see also Article 359(1) of CRR).

                           030-040

                              NET POSITIONS (LONG AND SHORT)

                           As defined in Article 357(3) of CRR.

                           050

                              POSITIONS SUBJECT TO CAPITAL CHARGE

                           Those net positions that, according to the different approaches considered in Part 3 Title IV Chapter 4 of CRR, receive a capital charge.

                           060

                              OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS

                           The capital charge for any relevant position according to Part 3 Title IV Chapter 4 of CRR.

                           070

                              TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                           Article 92(4) lit. b of CRR. Result of the multiplication of the own funds requirements * 12.5.

                           Rows

                           010

                              TOTAL POSITIONS IN COMMODITIES

                           Positions in commodities and their correspondent own funds requirements for market risk according to Article 92(3) point (c) (iii) CRR and Part 3 Title IV Chapter 4 of CRR.

                           020-060

                              POSITIONS BY CATEGORY OF COMMODITY

                           For reporting purposes commodities are grouped in the four main groups of commodities referred to in Table 2 of Article 361 CRR.

                           070

                              MATURITY LADDER APPROACH

                           Positions in commodities subject to the Maturity Ladder approach as referred to in Article 359 of CRR.

                           080

                              EXTENDED MATURITY LADDER APPROACH

                           Positions in commodities subject to the Extended Maturity Ladder approach as referred to in Article 361 of CRR

                           090

                              SIMPLIFIED APPROACH

                           Positions in commodities subject to the Simplified approach as referred to in Article 360 of CRR.

                           100-140

                              ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR OPTIONS (NON-DELTA RISKS)

                           Article 358(4) of CRR.
                           The additional requirements for options related to non-delta risks shall be reported in the method used for its calculation

                     5.7.   C 24.00 — MARKET RISK INTERNAL MODEL (MKR IM)
               5.7.1.   General Remarks

                           154.

                           This template provides a breakdown of VaR and stressed VaR (sVaR) figures according to the different market risks (debt, equity, FX, commodities) and other information relevant for the calculation of the own funds requirements.

                           155.

                           Generally the reporting depends on the structure of the model of the institutions whether they report the figures for general and specific risk separately or together. The same holds true for the decomposition of the VAR/Stress-Var into the risk categories (interest rate risk, equity risk, commodities risk and foreign exchange risk). An institution can resign to report the decompositions mentioned above if it proves that a reporting of these figures would be unduly burdensome.

                     5.7.2.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           030-040

                              VaR

                           It means the maximum potential loss that would result from a price change with a given probability over a specified time horizon.

                           030

                              Multiplication factor (mc) × Average of previous 60 working days VaR (VaRavg)

                           Articles 364(1) point (a) (ii) and 365 (1) of CRR.

                           040

                              Previous day VaR (VaRt-1)

                           Articles 364(1) point (a) (i) and 365 (1) of CRR.

                           050-060

                              Stressed VaR

                           It means the maximum potential loss that would result from a price change with a given probability over a specified time horizon obtained by using input calibrated to historical data from a continuous 12-months period of financial stress relevant to the institution's portfolio.

                           050

                              Multiplication factor (ms) × Average of previous 60 working days (SVaRavg)

                           Articles 364(1) point (b) (ii) and 365 (1) of CRR.

                           060

                              Latest available (SVaRt-1)

                           Articles 364(1) point (b) (i) and 365 (1) of CRR.

                           070-080

                              INCREMENTAL DEFAULT AND MIGRATION RISK CAPITAL CHARGE

                           It means the maximum potential loss that would result from a price change linked to default and migration risks calculated accordingly to Article 364(2) point (b) in connection with Part Three Title IV Chapter 5 Section 4 of CRR.

                           070

                              12 weeks average measure

                           Article 364(2) point (b) (ii) in connection with Part Three Title IV Chapter 5 Section 4 of CRR.

                           080

                              Last Measure

                           Article 364(2) point (b) (i) in connection with Part Three Title IV Chapter 5 Section 4 of CRR.

                           090-110

                              ALL PRICE RISKS CAPITAL CHARGE FOR CTP

                           090

                              FLOOR

                           Article 364(3) point (c) of CRR.
                           = 8 % of the capital charge that would be calculated in accordance with Article 338(1) of CRR for all positions in the “all price risks” capital charge.

                           100-110

                              12 WEEKS AVERAGE MEASURE AND LAST MEASURE

                           Article 364(3) point (b).

                           110

                              LAST MEASURE

                           Article 364(3) point (a)

                           120

                              OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS

                           Referred to in Article 364 of CRR of all risk factors taking into account correlation effects, if applicable, plus incremental default and migration risk and all price of risks for CTP but excluding the Securitization capital charges for Securitization and nth-to-default credit derivative according Article 364(2) of CRR.

                           130

                              TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                           Article 92(4) lit. b of CRR. Result of the multiplication of the own funds requirements * 12.5.

                           140

                              Number of overshootings (during previous 250 working days)

                           Referred to in Article 366 of CRR.

                           150-160

                              VaR Multiplication Factor (mc) and SVaR Multiplication Factor (ms)

                           As referred to in Article 366 of CRR.

                           170-180

                              ASSUMED CHARGE FOR CTP FLOOR — WEIGHTED NET LONG/SHORT POSITIONS AFTER CAP

                           The amounts reported and serving as the basis to calculate the floor capital charge for all price risks according to Article 364(3) point (c) of CRR take into account the discretion of Article 335 of CRR which says that the institution may cap the product of the weight and the net position at the maximum possible default-risk related loss.

                           Rows

                           010

                              TOTAL POSITIONS

                           Corresponds to the part of position, foreign exchange and commodities risk referred to in Article 363(1) of CRR linked to the risk factors specified in Article 367(2) of CRR.
                           Concerning the columns 030 to 060 (VAR and Stress-VAR) the figures in the total row is not equal to the decomposition of the figures for the VAR/Stress-VAR of the relevant risk components. Hence the decomposition are memorandum items.

                           020

                              TRADED DEBT INSTRUMENTS

                           Corresponds to the part of position risk referred to in 363 (1) of CRR linked to the interest rates risk factors as specified in Article 367(2) of CRR.

                           030

                              TDI — GENERAL RISK

                           General risk defined in Article 362 of CRR.

                           040

                              TDI — SPECIFIC RISK

                           Specific risk defined in Article 362 of CRR.

                           050

                              EQUITIES

                           Corresponds to the part of position risk referred to in 363 (1) of CRR linked to the equity risk factors as specified in Article 367(2) of CRR.

                           060

                              EQUITIES — GENERAL RISK

                           General risk defined in Article 362 of CRR.

                           070

                              EQUITIES — SPECIFIC RISK

                           Specific risk defined in Article 362 of CRR.

                           080

                              FOREIGN EXCHANGE RISK

                           Articles 363(1) and 367 (2) of CRR.

                           090

                              COMMODITY RISK

                           Articles 363(1) and 367 (2) of CRR.

                           100

                              TOTAL AMOUNT FOR GENERAL RISK

                           Market risk caused by general market movements of traded debt instruments, equities, foreign exchange and commodities. VAR for general risk of all risk factors (taking into account correlation effects if applicable).

                           110

                              TOTAL AMOUNT FOR SPECIFIC RISK

                           Specific risk component of traded debt instruments and equities. VAR for specific risk of equities and traded debt instruments of trading book (taking into account correlation effects if applicable).

                     5.8.   C 25.00 — CREDIT VALUATION ADJUSTMENT RISK (CVA)
               5.8.1.   Instructions concerning specific positions

                           Columns

                           010

                              Exposure value

                           Article 271 of CRR in accordance with article 382 of CRR
                           Total EAD from all transactions subject to CVA charge

                           020

                              Of which: OTC derivatives

                           Article 271 of CRR in accordance with Article 382(1) of CRR
                           The part of the total counterparty credit risk exposure solely due to OTC derivatives. The information is not required from IMM institutions holding OTC derivatives and SFTs in the same netting set

                           030

                              Of which: SFT

                           Article 271 of CRR in accordance with Article 382(2) of CRR
                           The part of the total counterparty credit risk exposure solely due to SFT derivatives. The information is not required from IMM institutions holding OTC derivatives and SFTs in the same netting set

                           040

                              MULTIPLICATION FACTOR (mc) × AVERAGE OF PREVIOUS 60 WORKING DAYS (VaRavg)

                           Article 383 of CRR in accordance with Article 363(1)(d) of CRR
                           VaR calculation based on internal models for market risk

                           050

                              PREVIOUS DAY (VaRt-1)

                           See instructions referring to column 040

                           060

                              MULTIPLICATION FACTOR (ms) × AVERAGE OF PREVIOUS 60 WORKING DAYS (SVaRavg)

                           See instructions referring to column 040

                           070

                              LATEST AVAILABLE (SVaRt-1)

                           See instructions referring to column 040

                           080

                              OWN FUNDS REQUIREMENTS

                           Article 92(3) d) of CRR
                           Own funds requirements for CVA Risk calculated via the chosen method

                           090

                              TOTAL RISK EXPOSURE AMOUNT

                           Article 92(4) b) of CRR
                           Own funds requirements multiplied by 12,5.

                              Memorandum items

                           100

                              Number of counterparties

                           Article 382 of CRR
                           Number of counterparties included in calculation of own funds for CVA risk
                           Counterparties are a subset of obligors. They only exist in case of derivatives transactions or SFTs where they are simply the other contracting party.

                           110

                              Of which: proxy was used to determine credit spread

                           number of counterparties where the credit spread was determined using a proxy instead of directly observed market data

                           120

                              INCURRED CVA

                           Accounting provisions due to decreased credit worthiness of derivatives counterparties

                           130

                              SINGLE NAME CDS

                           Article 386(1) lit. a of CRR
                           Total notional amounts of single name CDS used as hedge for CVA risk

                           140

                              INDEX CDS

                           Article 386(1) lit. b) of CRR
                           Total notional amounts of index CDS used as hedge for CVA risk

                           Rows

                           010

                              CVA risk total

                           Sum of rows 020-040 as applicable

                           020

                              According to Advanced method

                           Advanced CVA risk method as prescribed by Article 383 of CRR

                           030

                              According to Standardised method

                           Standardised CVA risk method as prescribed by Article 384 of CRR

                           040

                              Based on OEM

                           Amounts subject to the application of Article 385 of CRR’

            (1)  The data requested to the institutions in this template shall be reported on an accumulated basis for the natural year or report (i.e. since 1st of January of the current year).

            (2)  “Stand alone institutions” are neither part of a group, nor consolidate themselves in the same country where they are subject to own funds requirements.

         ANNEX III
         1.   Balance Sheet Statement [Statement of Financial Position]

         1.3   Equity

                           References

                        Breakdown in table

                        Carrying amount

                     010

                     010

                        Capital

                        IAS 1.54(r), BAD art 22

                     46

                     020

                     Paid up capital

                        IAS 1.78(e)

                     030

                     Unpaid capital which has been called up

                        IAS 1.78(e); Annex V.Part 2.14

                     040

                        Share premium

                        IAS 1.78(e); CRR art 4(1)(124)

                     46

                     050

                        Equity instruments issued other than capital

                        Annex V.Part 2.15-16

                     46

                     060

                     Equity component of compound financial instruments

                        IAS 32.28-29; Annex V.Part 2.15

                     070

                     Other equity instruments issued

                        Annex V.Part 2.16

                     080

                        Other equity

                        IFRS 2.10; Annex V.Part 2.17

                     090

                        Accumulated other comprehensive income

                        CRR art 4(1)(100)

                     46

                     095

                     Items that will not be reclassified to profit or loss

                        IAS 1.82A(a)

                     100

                        Tangible assets

                        IAS 16.39-41

                     110

                        Intangible assets

                        IAS 38.85-87

                     120

                        Actuarial gains or (-) losses on defined benefit pension plans

                        IAS 1.7

                     122

                        Non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale

                        IFRS 5.38, IG Example 12

                     124

                        Share of other recognised income and expense of investments in subsidaries, joint ventures and associates

                        IAS 1.82(h); IAS 28.11

                     128

                     Items that may be reclassified to profit or loss

                        IAS 1.82A(a)

                     130

                        Hedge of net investments in foreign operations [effective portion]

                        IAS 39.102(a)

                     140

                        Foreign currency translation

                        IAS 21.52(b); IAS 21.32, 38-49

                     150

                        Hedging derivatives. Cash flow hedges [effective portion]

                        IFRS 7.23(c); IAS 39.95-101

                     160

                        Available-for-sale financial assets

                        IFRS 7.20(a)(ii); IAS 39.55(b)

                     170

                        Non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale

                        IFRS 5.38, IG Example 12

                     180

                        Share of other recognised income and expense of investments in subsidaries, joint ventures and associates

                        IAS 1.82(h); IAS 28.11

                     190

                        Retained earnings

                        CRR art 4(1)(123)

                     200

                        Revaluation reserves

                        IFRS 1.30, D5-D8; Annex V.Part 2.18

                     210

                        Other reserves

                        IAS 1.54; IAS 1.78(e)

                     220

                     Reserves or accumulated losses of investments in subsidaries, joint ventures and associates

                        IAS 28.11; Annex V.Part 2.19

                     230

                     Other

                        Annex V.Part 2.19

                     240

                        (-) Treasury shares

                        IAS 1.79(a)(vi); IAS 32.33-34, AG 14, AG 36; Annex V.Part 2.20

                     46

                     250

                        Profit or loss attributable to owners of the parent

                        IAS 27.28; IAS 1.81B (b)(ii)

                     2

                     260

                        (-) Interim dividends

                        IAS 32.35

                     270

                        Minority interests [Non-controlling interests]

                        IAS 27.4; IAS 1.54(q); IAS 27.27

                     280

                     Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income

                        IAS 27.27-28; CRR art 4(1)(100)

                     46

                     290

                     Other items

                        IAS 27.27-28

                     46

                     300

                        TOTAL EQUITY

                        IAS 1.9(c), IG 6

                     46

                     310

                        TOTAL EQUITY AND TOTAL LIABILITIES

                        IAS 1.IG6

               16.   Breakdown of selected statement of profit or loss items

         16.1   Interest income and expenses by instrument and counterparty sector

                        Current period

                           References

                        Income

                        Expenses

                        Annex V.Part 2.95

                        Annex V.Part 2.95

                     010

                     020

                     010

                        Derivatives -Trading

                        IAS 39.9; Annex V.Part 2.96

                     020

                        Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.26

                     030

                     Central banks

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(a)

                     040

                     General governments

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(b)

                     050

                     Credit institutions

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(c)

                     060

                     Other financial corporations

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(d)

                     070

                     Non-financial corporations

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(e)

                     080

                        Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.27

                     090

                     Central banks

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(a)

                     100

                     General governments

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(b)

                     110

                     Credit institutions

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(c)

                     120

                     Other financial corporations

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(d)

                     130

                     Non-financial corporations

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(e)

                     140

                     Households

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(f)

                     150

                        Other assets

                        Annex V.Part 1.51

                     160

                        Deposits

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.9

                     170

                     Central banks

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(a)

                     180

                     General governments

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(b)

                     190

                     Credit institutions

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(c)

                     200

                     Other financial corporations

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(d)

                     210

                     Non-financial corporations

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(e)

                     220

                     Households

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(f)

                     230

                        Debt securities issued

                        Annex V.Part 1.31

                     240

                        Other financial liabilities

                        Annex V.Part 1.32-34

                     250

                        Derivatives — Hedge accounting, interest rate risk

                        Annex V.Part 2.95

                     260

                        Other Liabilities

                        Annex V.Part 2.10

                     270

                        INTEREST

                        IAS 18.35(b); IAS 1.97

               16.2   Gains or losses on derecognition of financial assets and liabilities not measured at fair value through profit or loss by instrument

                           References

                        Current period

                     010

                     010

                        Equity instruments

                        IAS 32.11

                     020

                        Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.26

                     030

                        Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.27

                     040

                        Deposits

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.9

                     050

                        Debt securities issued

                        Annex V.Part 1.31

                     060

                        Other financial liabilities

                        Annex V.Part 1.32-34

                     070

                        GAINS OR (-) LOSSES ON DERECOGNITION OF FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES NOT MEASURED AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS, NET

                        IFRS 7.20(a)(v-vii); IAS 39.55(a)

               16.3   Gains or losses on financial assets and liabilities held for trading by instrument

                           References

                        Current period

                     010

                     010

                        Derivatives

                        IAS 39.9

                     020

                        Equity instruments

                        IAS 32.11

                     030

                        Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.26

                     040

                        Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.27

                     050

                        Short positions

                        IAS 39 AG 15(b)

                     060

                        Deposits

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.9

                     070

                        Debt securities issued

                        Annex V.Part 1.31

                     080

                        Other financial liabilities

                        Annex V.Part 1.32-34

                     090

                        GAINS OR (-) LOSSES ON FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES HELD FOR TRADING, NET

                        IFRS 7.20(a)(i)

               16.4.   Gains or losses on financial assets and liabilities held for trading by risk

                           References

                        Current period

                     010

                     010

                        Interest rate instruments and related derivatives

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(a)

                     020

                        Equity instruments and related derivatives

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(b)

                     030

                        Foreign exchange trading and derivatives related with foreign exchange and gold

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(c)

                     040

                        Credit risk instruments and related derivatives

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(d)

                     050

                        Derivatives related with commodities

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(e)

                     060

                        Other

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(f)

                     070

                        GAINS OR (-) LOSSES ON FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES HELD FOR TRADING, NET

                        IFRS 7.20(a)(i)

               16.5   Gains or losses on financial assets and liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss by instrument

                           References

                        Current period

                        Accumulated changes in fair value due to credit risk

                        Annex V.Part 2.100

                     010

                     020

                     010

                        Equity instruments

                        IAS 32.11

                     020

                        Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.26

                     030

                        Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.27

                     040

                        Deposits

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.9

                     050

                        Debt securities issued

                        Annex V.Part 1.31

                     060

                        Other financial liabilities

                        Annex V.Part 1.32-34

                     070

                        GAINS OR (-) LOSSES ON FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES DESIGNATED AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS, NET

                        IFRS 7.20(a)(i)

               16.6   Gains or losses from hedge accounting

                           References

                        Current period

                     010

                     010

                        Fair value changes of the hedging instrument [including discontinuation]

                        IFRS 7.24(a)(i)

                     020

                        Fair value changes of the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk

                        IFRS 7.24(a)(ii)

                     030

                        Ineffectiveness in profit or loss from cash flow hedges

                        IFRS 7.24(b)

                     040

                        Ineffectiveness in profit or loss from hedges of net investments in foreign operations

                        IFRS 7.24(c)

                     050

                        GAINS OR (-) LOSSES FROM HEDGE ACCOUNTING, NET

                        IFRS 7.24

               16.7   Impairment on financial and non-financial assets

                        Current period

                           References

                        Additions

                     Annex V.Part 2.102

                        Reversals

                     Annex V.Part 2.102

                        Total

                        Accumulated impairment

                     010

                     020

                     030

                     040

                     010

                        Impairment or (-) reversal of impairment on financial assets not measured at fair value through profit or loss

                        IFRS 7.20(e)

                     020

                     Financial assets measured at cost

                        IFRS 7.20(e); IAS 39.66

                     030

                     Available-for-sale financial assets

                        IFRS 7.20(e); IAS 39.67-70

                     040

                     Loans and receivables

                        IFRS 7.20(e); IAS 39.63-65

                     050

                     Held-to-maturity investments

                        IFRS 7.20(e); IAS 39.63-65

                     060

                        Impairment or (-) reversal of impairment of investments in subsidaries, joint ventures and associates

                        IAS 28.40-43

                     070

                     Subsidiaries

                        IFRS 10 Appendix A

                     080

                     Joint ventures

                        IAS 28.3

                     090

                     Associates

                        IAS 28.3

                     100

                        Impairment or (-) reversal of impairment on non-financial assets

                        IAS 36.126(a),(b)

                     110

                     Property, plant and equipment

                        IAS 16.73(e)(v-vi)

                     120

                     Investment properties

                        IAS 40.79(d)(v)

                     130

                     Goodwill

                        IAS 36.10b; IAS 36.88-99, 124; IFRS 3 Appendix B67(d)(v)

                     140

                     Other intangible assets

                        IAS 38.118(e)(iv)(v)

                     145

                     Other

                        IAS 36.126(a),(b)

                     150

                        TOTAL

                     160

                     Interest income on impaired financial assets accrued

                        IFRS 7.20(d); IAS 39.AG 93

               20.   Geographical breakdown

         20.1   Geographical breakdown of assets by location of the activities

                           References

                        Carrying amount

                        Domestic activities

                        Non-domestic activities

                        Annex V.Part 2.107

                        Annex V.Part 2.107

                     010

                     020

                     010

                        Cash, cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits

                        IAS 1.54 (i)

                     020

                     Cash on hand

                        Annex V.Part 2.1

                     030

                     Cash balances at central banks

                        Annex V.Part 2.2

                     040

                     Other demand deposits

                        Annex V.Part 2.3

                     050

                        Financial assets held for trading

                        IFRS 7.8(a)(ii); IAS 39.9, AG 14

                     060

                     Derivatives

                        IAS 39.9

                     070

                     Equity instruments

                        IAS 32.11

                     080

                     Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                     090

                     Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                     100

                        Financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss

                        IFRS 7.8(a)(i); IAS 39.9

                     110

                     Equity instruments

                        IAS 32.11

                     120

                     Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                     130

                     Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                     140

                        Available-for-sale financial assets

                        IFRS 7.8(d); IAS 39.9

                     150

                     Equity instruments

                        IAS 32.11

                     160

                     Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                     170

                     Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                     180

                        Loans and receivables

                        IFRS 7.8(c); IAS 39.9, AG16, AG26; Annex V.Part 1.16

                     190

                     Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                     200

                     Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                     210

                        Held-to-maturity investments

                        IFRS 7.8(b); IAS 39.9, AG16, AG26

                     220

                     Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                     230

                     Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                     240

                        Derivatives — Hedge accounting

                        IFRS 7.22(b); IAS 39.9

                     250

                        Fair value changes of the hedged items in portfolio hedge of interest rate risk

                        IAS 39.89A(a)

                     260

                        Tangible assets

                     270

                        Intangible assets

                        IAS 1.54(c); CRR art 4(1)(115)

                     280

                        Investments in subsidaries, joint ventures and associates

                        IAS 1.54(e); Annex V.Part 2.4

                     290

                        Tax assets

                        IAS 1.54(n-o)

                     300

                        Other assets

                        Annex V.Part 2.5

                     310

                        Non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale

                        IAS 1.54(j); IFRS 5.38

                     320

                        ASSETS

                        IAS 1.9(a), IG 6

               46.   Statement of changes in equity

                        Sources of equity changes

                           References

                        Capital

                        Share premium

                        Equity instruments issued other than Capital

                        Other equity

                        Accumulated other comprehensive income

                        Retained earnings

                        Revaluation reserves

                        IAS 1.106, 54(r)

                        IAS 1.106, 78(e)

                        IAS 1.106, Annex V.Part 2.15-16

                        IAS 1.106; Annex V.Part 2.17

                        IAS 1.106

                        CRR art 4(1)(123)

                        IFRS 1.30 D5-D8

                     010

                     020

                     030

                     040

                     050

                     060

                     070

                     010

                        Opening balance [before restatement]

                     020

                     Effects of corrections of errors

                        IAS 1.106.(b); IAS 8.42

                     030

                     Effects of changes in accounting policies

                        IAS 1.106.(b); IAS 1.IG6; IAS 8.22

                     040

                        Opening balance [current period]

                     050

                     Issuance of ordinary shares

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     060

                     Issuance of preference shares

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     070

                     Issuance of other equity instruments

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     080

                     Exercise or expiration of other equity instruments issued

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     090

                     Conversion of debt to equity

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     100

                     Capital reduction

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     110

                     Dividends

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii); IAS 32.35; IAS 1.IG6

                     120

                     Purchase of treasury shares

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii); IAS 32.33

                     130

                     Sale or cancellation of treasury shares

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii); IAS 32.33

                     140

                     Reclassification of financial instruments from equity to liability

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     150

                     Reclassification of financial instruments from liability to equity

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     160

                     Transfers among components of equity

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     170

                     Equity increase or (-) decrease resulting from business combinations

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     180

                     Share based payments

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii); IFRS 2.10

                     190

                     Other increase or (-) decrease in equity

                        IAS 1.106.(d)

                     200

                     Total comprehensive income for the year

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(i)-(ii); IAS 1.81A.(c); IAS 1.IG6

                     210

                        Closing balance [current period]

                        Sources of equity changes

                           References

                        Other reserves

                        (-) Treasury shares

                        Profit or (-) loss atributable to owners of the parent

                        (-) Interim dividends

                        Minority interests

                        Total

                        Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income

                        Other items

                        IAS 1.106, 54(c)

                        IAS 1.106; IAS 32.34, 33; Annex V.Part 2.20

                        IAS 1.106(a), 83 (a)(ii)

                        IAS 1.106; IAS 32.35

                        IAS 1.54(q), 106(a); IAS 27.27-28

                        IAS 1.54(q), 106(a); IAS 27.27-28

                        IAS 1.9(c), IG6

                     080

                     090

                     100

                     110

                     120

                     130

                     140

                     010

                        Opening balance [before restatement]

                     020

                     Effects of corrections of errors

                        IAS 1.106.(b); IAS 8.42

                     030

                     Effects of changes in accounting policies

                        IAS 1.106.(b); IAS 1.IG6; IAS 8.22

                     040

                        Opening balance [current period]

                     050

                     Issuance of ordinary shares

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     060

                     Issuance of preference shares

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     070

                     Issuance of other equity instruments

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     080

                     Exercise or expiration of other equity instruments issued

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     090

                     Conversion of debt to equity

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     100

                     Capital reduction

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     110

                     Dividends

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii); IAS 32.35; IAS 1.IG6

                     120

                     Purchase of treasury shares

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii); IAS 32.33

                     130

                     Sale or cancellation of treasury shares

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii); IAS 32.33

                     140

                     Reclassification of financial instruments from equity to liability

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     150

                     Reclassification of financial instruments from liability to equity

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     160

                     Transfers among components of equity

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     170

                     Equity increase or (-) decrease resulting from business combinations

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     180

                     Share based payments

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii); IFRS 2.10

                     190

                     Other increase or (-) decrease in equity

                        IAS 1.106.(d)

                     200

                     Total comprehensive income for the year

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(i)-(ii); IAS 1.81A.(c); IAS 1.IG6

                     210

                        Closing balance [current period]

         ANNEX IV
         1.   Balance Sheet Statement [Statement of Financial Position]

         1.3   Equity

                           References National GAAP based on BAD

                           References National GAAP compatible IFRS

                        Breakdown in table

                        Carrying amount

                     010

                     010

                        Capital

                        BAD art 4.Liabilities(9), BAD art 22

                        IAS 1.54(r), BAD art 22

                     46

                     020

                     Paid up capital

                        BAD art 4.Liabilities(9)

                        IAS 1.78(e)

                     030

                     Unpaid capital which has been called up

                        BAD art 4.Liabilities(9)

                        IAS 1.78(e); Annex V.Part 2.14

                     040

                        Share premium

                        BAD art 4.Liabilities(10); CRR art 4(124)

                        IAS 1.78(e); CRR art 4(124)

                     46

                     050

                        Equity instruments issued other than capital

                        Annex V.Part 2.15-16

                        Annex V.Part 2.15-16

                     46

                     060

                     Equity component of compound financial instruments

                        4th Directive art 42a(5a); Annex V.Part 2.15

                        IAS 32.28-29; Annex V.Part 2.15

                     070

                     Other equity instruments issued

                        Annex V.Part 2.16

                        Annex V.Part 2.16

                     080

                        Other equity

                        Annex V.Part 2.17

                        IFRS 2.10; Annex V.Part 2.17

                     090

                        Accumulated other comprehensive income

                        CRR art 4(100)

                        CRR art 4(100)

                     46

                     095

                     Items that will not be reclassified to profit or loss

                        IAS 1.82A(a)

                     100

                        Tangible assets

                        IAS 16.39-41

                     110

                        Intangible assets

                        IAS 38.85-87

                     120

                        Actuarial gains or (-) losses on defined benefit pension plans

                        IAS 1.7

                     122

                        Non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale

                        IFRS 5.38, IG Example 12

                     124

                        Share of other recognised income and expense of investments in subsidaries, joint ventures and associates

                        IAS 1.82(h); IAS 28.11

                     128

                     Items that may be reclassified to profit or loss

                        IAS 1.82A(b)

                     130

                        Hedge of net investments in foreign operations [effective portion]

                        4th Directive art 42a(1), (5a)

                        IAS 39.102(a)

                     140

                        Foreign currency translation

                        BAD art 39(6)

                        IAS 21.52(b); IAS 21.32, 38-49

                     150

                        Hedging derivatives. Cash flow hedges [effective portion]

                        4th Directive art 42a(1), (5a)

                        IFRS 7.23(c); IAS 39.95-101

                     160

                        Available-for-sale financial assets

                        4th Directive art 42a(1), (5a)

                        IFRS 7.20(a)(ii); IAS 39.55(b)

                     170

                        Non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale

                        IFRS 5.38, IG Example 12

                     180

                        Share of other recognised income and expense of investments in subsidaries, joint ventures and associates

                        IAS 1.82(h); IAS 28.11

                     190

                        Retained earnings

                        BAD art 4.Liabilities(13); CRR art 4(123)

                        CRR art 4(123)

                     200

                        Revaluation reserves

                        BAD art 4.Liabilities(12)

                        IFRS 1.30, D5-D8; Annex V.Part 2.18

                     201

                     Tangible assets

                        4th Directive art 33(1)(c)

                     202

                     Equity instruments

                        4th Directive art 33(1)(c)

                     203

                     Debt securities

                        4th Directive art 33(1)(c)

                     204

                     Other

                        4th Directive art 33(1)(c)

                     205

                        Fair value reserves

                        4th Directive art 42a(1)

                     206

                     Hedge of net investments in foreign operations

                        4th Directive art 42a(1); art 42c(1)(b)

                     207

                     Hedging derivatives.Cash flow hedges

                        4th Directive art 42a(1); art 42c(1)(a); CRR article 30(a)

                     208

                     Hedging derivatives. Other hedges

                        4th Directive art 42a(1); art 42c(1)(a)

                     209

                     Non-trading non-derivative financial assets measured at fair value to equity

                        4th Directive art 42a(1); art 42c (2)

                     210

                        Other reserves

                        BAD art 4 Liabilities(11)-(13)

                        IAS 1.54; IAS 1.78(e)

                     215

                     Funds for general banking risks [if presented within equity]

                        BAD art 38.1; CRR art 4(112); Annex V.Part 1.38

                     220

                     Reserves or accumulated losses of investments in subsidaries, joint ventures and associates

                        4th Directive art 59.4;Annex V.Part 2.19

                        IAS 28.11; Annex V.Part 2.19

                     230

                     Other

                        Annex V.Part 2.19

                        Annex V.Part 2.19

                     235

                        First consolidation differences

                        7th Directive 19(1)(c)

                     240

                        (-) Treasury shares

                        4th Directive.Assets C (III)(7), D (III)(2); Annex V.Part 2.20

                        IAS 1.79(a)(vi); IAS 32.33-34, AG 14, AG 36; Annex V.Part 2.20

                     46

                     250

                        Profit or loss attributable to owners of the parent

                        BAD art 4.Liabilities(14)

                        IAS 27.28; IAS 1.81B (b)(ii)

                     2

                     260

                        (-) Interim dividends

                        CRR Article 26(2b)

                        IAS 32.35

                     270

                        Minority interests [Non-controlling interests]

                        7th Directive art 21

                        IAS 27.4; IAS 1.54(q); IAS 27.27

                     280

                     Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income

                        CRR art 4(100)

                        IAS 27.27-28; CRR art 4(100)

                     46

                     290

                     Other items

                        IAS 27.27-28

                     46

                     300

                        TOTAL EQUITY

                        IAS 1.9(c), IG 6

                     46

                     310

                        TOTAL EQUITY AND TOTAL LIABILITIES

                        BAD art 4.Liabilities

                        IAS 1.IG6

               16.   Breakdown of selected statement of profit or loss items

         16.1   Interest income and expenses by instrument and counterparty sector

                           References National GAAP based on BAD

                           References National GAAP compatible IFRS

                        Current period

                        Income

                        Expenses

                        Annex V.Part 2.95

                        Annex V.Part 2.95

                     010

                     020

                     010

                        Derivatives -Trading

                        CRR Annex II; Annex V.Part 2.96

                        IAS 39.9; Annex V.Part 2.96

                     020

                        Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.26

                        Annex V.Part 1.26

                     030

                     Central banks

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(a)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(a)

                     040

                     General governments

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(b)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(b)

                     050

                     Credit institutions

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(c)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(c)

                     060

                     Other financial corporations

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(d)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(d)

                     070

                     Non-financial corporations

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(e)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(e)

                     080

                        Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.27

                        Annex V.Part 1.27

                     090

                     Central banks

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(a)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(a)

                     100

                     General governments

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(b)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(b)

                     110

                     Credit institutions

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(c)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(c)

                     120

                     Other financial corporations

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(d)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(d)

                     130

                     Non-financial corporations

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(e)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(e)

                     140

                     Households

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(f)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(f)

                     150

                        Other assets

                        Annex V.Part 1.51

                        Annex V.Part 1.51

                     160

                        Deposits

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.9

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.9

                     170

                     Central banks

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(a)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(a)

                     180

                     General governments

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(b)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(b)

                     190

                     Credit institutions

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(c)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(c)

                     200

                     Other financial corporations

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(d)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(d)

                     210

                     Non-financial corporations

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(e)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(e)

                     220

                     Households

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(f)

                        Annex V.Part 1.35(f)

                     230

                        Debt securities issued

                        Annex V.Part 1.31

                        Annex V.Part 1.31

                     240

                        Other financial liabilities

                        Annex V.Part 1.32-34

                        Annex V.Part 1.32-34

                     250

                        Derivatives — Hedge accounting, interest rate risk

                        Annex V.Part 2.95

                        Annex V.Part 2.95

                     260

                        Other Liabilities

                        Annex V.Part 2.10

                        Annex V.Part 2.10

                     270

                        INTEREST

                        BAD art 27.Vertical layout(1), (2)

                        IAS 18.35(b); IAS 1.97

               16.2   Gains or losses on derecognition of financial assets and liabilities not measured at fair value through profit or loss by instrument

                           References National GAAP based on BAD

                           References National GAAP compatible IFRS

                        Current period

                     010

                     010

                        Equity instruments

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.4-5

                        IAS 32.11

                     020

                        Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.26

                        Annex V.Part 1.26

                     030

                        Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.27

                        Annex V.Part 1.27

                     040

                        Deposits

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.9

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.9

                     050

                        Debt securities issued

                        Annex V.Part 1.31

                        Annex V.Part 1.31

                     060

                        Other financial liabilities

                        Annex V.Part 1.32-34

                        Annex V.Part 1.32-34

                     070

                        GAINS OR (-) LOSSES ON DERECOGNITION OF FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES NOT MEASURED AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS, NET

                        BAD art 27.Vertical layout(6)

                        IFRS 7.20(a)(v-vii); IAS 39.55(a)

               16.3   Gains or losses on financial assets and liabilities held for trading by instrument

                           References National GAAP based on BAD

                           References National GAAP compatible IFRS

                        Current period

                     010

                     010

                        Derivatives

                        CRR Annex II

                        IAS 39.9

                     020

                        Equity instruments

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.4-5

                        IAS 32.11

                     030

                        Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.26

                        Annex V.Part 1.26

                     040

                        Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.27

                        Annex V.Part 1.27

                     050

                        Short positions

                        IAS 39 AG 15(b)

                     060

                        Deposits

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.9

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.9

                     070

                        Debt securities issued

                        Annex V.Part 1.31

                        Annex V.Part 1.31

                     080

                        Other financial liabilities

                        Annex V.Part 1.32-34

                        Annex V.Part 1.32-34

                     090

                        GAINS OR (-) LOSSES ON FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES HELD FOR TRADING, NET

                        BAD art 27.Vertical layout(6)

                        IFRS 7.20(a)(i)

                     100

                        Derivatives

                        CRR Annex II

                     110

                        Equity instruments

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.4-5

                     120

                        Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.26

                     130

                        Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.27

                     140

                        Short positions

                     150

                        Deposits

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.9

                     160

                        Debt securities issued

                        Annex V.Part 1.31

                     170

                        Other financial liabilities

                        Annex V.Part 1.32-34

                     180

                        GAINS OR (-) LOSSES ON TRADING FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES, NET

                        BAD art 27.Vertical layout(6)

               16.4   Gains or losses on financial assets and liabilities held for trading by risk

                           References National GAAP based on BAD

                           References National GAAP compatible IFRS

                        Current period

                     010

                     010

                        Interest rate instruments and related derivatives

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(a)

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(a)

                     020

                        Equity instruments and related derivatives

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(b)

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(b)

                     030

                        Foreign exchange trading and derivatives related with foreign exchange and gold

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(c)

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(c)

                     040

                        Credit risk instruments and related derivatives

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(d)

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(d)

                     050

                        Derivatives related with commodities

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(e)

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(e)

                     060

                        Other

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(f)

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(f)

                     070

                        GAINS OR (-) LOSSES ON FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES HELD FOR TRADING, NET

                        BAD art 27.Vertical layout(6)

                        IFRS 7.20(a)(i)

                     080

                        Interest rate instruments and related derivatives

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(a)

                     090

                        Equity instruments and related derivatives

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(b)

                     100

                        Foreign exchange trading and derivatives related with foreign exchange and gold

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(c)

                     110

                        Credit risk instruments and related derivatives

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(d)

                     120

                        Derivatives related with commodities

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(e)

                     130

                        Other

                        Annex V.Part 2.99(f)

                     140

                        GAINS OR (-) LOSSES ON TRADING FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES, NET

                        BAD art 27.Vertical layout(6)

               16.5   Gains or losses on financial assets and liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss by instrument

                           References National GAAP based on BAD

                           References National GAAP compatible IFRS

                        Current period

                        Changes in fair value due to credit risk

                        Annex V.Part 2.100

                     010

                     020

                     010

                        Equity instruments

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.4-5

                        IAS 32.11

                     020

                        Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.26

                        Annex V.Part 1.26

                     030

                        Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.27

                        Annex V.Part 1.27

                     040

                        Deposits

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.9

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.9

                     050

                        Debt securities issued

                        Annex V.Part 1.31

                        Annex V.Part 1.31

                     060

                        Other financial liabilities

                        Annex V.Part 1.32-34

                        Annex V.Part 1.32-34

                     070

                        GAINS OR (-) LOSSES ON FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES DESIGNATED AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS, NET

                        BAD art 27.Vertical layout(6)

                        IFRS 7.20(a)(i)

                     080

                        Equity instruments

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.4-5

                     090

                        Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.26

                     100

                        Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.27

                     110

                        Deposits

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.9

                     120

                        Debt securities issued

                        Annex V.Part 1.31

                     130

                        Other financial liabilities

                        Annex V.Part 1.32-34

                     140

                        GAINS OR (-) LOSSES ON NON-TRADING FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES, NET

                        BAD art 27.Vertical layout(6)

               16.6   Gains or losses from hedge accounting

                           References National GAAP based on BAD

                           References National GAAP compatible IFRS

                        Current period

                     010

                     010

                        Fair value changes of the hedging instrument [including discontinuation]

                        4th Directive art 42a(1), (5a); art 42c(1)(a)

                        IFRS 7.24(a)(i)

                     020

                        Fair value changes of the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk

                        4th Directive art 42a(1), (5a); art 42c(1)(a)

                        IFRS 7.24(a)(ii)

                     030

                        Ineffectiveness in profit or loss from cash flow hedges

                        4th Directive art 42a(1), (5a); art 42c(1)(a)

                        IFRS 7.24(b)

                     040

                        Ineffectiveness in profit or loss from hedges of net investments in foreign operations

                        4th Directive art 42a(1), (5a); art 42c(1)(a)

                        IFRS 7.24(c)

                     050

                        GAINS OR (-) LOSSES FROM HEDGE ACCOUNTING, NET

                        4th Directive art 42a(1), (5a), art 42c(1)(a)

                        IFRS 7.24

               16.7   Impairment on financial and non-financial assets

                           References National GAAP based on BAD

                           References National GAAP compatible IFRS

                        Current period

                        Additions

                     Annex V.Part 2.102

                        Reversals

                     Annex V.Part 2.102

                        Total

                        Accumulated impairment

                     010

                     020

                     030

                     040

                     010

                        Impairment or (-) reversal of impairment on financial assets not measured at fair value through profit or loss

                        BAD art 35-37

                        IFRS 7.20(e)

                     020

                     Financial assets measured at cost

                        IFRS 7.20(e); IAS 39.66

                     030

                     Available-for-sale financial assets

                        IFRS 7.20(e); IAS 39.67-70

                     040

                     Loans and receivables

                        IFRS 7.20(e); IAS 39.63-65

                     050

                     Held-to-maturity investments

                        IFRS 7.20(e); IAS 39.63-65

                     060

                        Impairment or (-) reversal of impairment of investments in subsidaries, joint ventures and associates

                        BAD art 27.Vertical layout(13)-(14)

                        IAS 28.40-43

                     070

                     Subsidiaries

                        IFRS 10 Appendix A

                     080

                     Joint ventures

                        IAS 28.3

                     090

                     Associates

                        4th Directive art 17

                        IAS 28.3

                     100

                        Impairment or (-) reversal of impairment on non-financial assets

                        IAS 36.126(a),(b)

                     110

                     Property, plant and equipment

                        BAD art 27.Vertical layout(9)

                        IAS 16.73(e)(v-vi)

                     120

                     Investment properties

                        BAD art 27.Vertical layout(9)

                        IAS 40.79(d)(v)

                     130

                     Goodwill

                        BAD art 27.Vertical layout(9)

                        IAS 36.10b; IAS 36.88-99, 124; IFRS 3 Appendix B67(d)(v)

                     140

                     Other intangible assets

                        BAD art 27.Vertical layout(9)

                        IAS 38.118(e)(iv)(v)

                     145

                     Other

                        IAS 36.126(a),(b)

                     150

                        TOTAL

                     160

                     Interest income on impaired financial assets accrued

                        IFRS 7.20(d); IAS 39.AG 93

               20.   Geographical breakdown

         20.1   Geographical breakdown of assets by location of the activities

                           References National GAAP based on BAD

                           References National GAAP compatible IFRS

                        Carrying amount

                        Domestic activitivies

                        Non-domestic activities

                        Annex V.Part 2.107

                        Annex V.Part 2.107

                     010

                     020

                     010

                        Cash, cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits

                        BAD art 4.Assets(1)

                        IAS 1.54 (i)

                     020

                     Cash on hand

                        Annex V.Part 2.1

                        Annex V.Part 2.1

                     030

                     Cash balances at central banks

                        BAD art 13(2); Annex V.Part 2.2

                        Annex V.Part 2.2

                     040

                     Other demand deposits

                        Annex V.Part 2.3

                     050

                        Financial assets held for trading

                        4th Directive art 42a(1), (5a); IAS 39.9

                        IFRS 7.8(a)(ii); IAS 39.9, AG 14

                     060

                     Derivatives

                        CRR Annex II

                        IAS 39.9

                     070

                     Equity instruments

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.4-5

                        IAS 32.11

                     080

                     Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                     090

                     Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                     091

                        Trading financial assets

                        Annex V.Part 1.15

                     092

                     Derivatives

                        CRR Annex II; Annex V.Part 1.15

                     093

                     Equity instruments

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.4-5

                     094

                     Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                     095

                     Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                     100

                        Financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss

                        4th Directive art 42a(1), (5a); IAS 39.9

                        IFRS 7.8(a)(i); IAS 39.9

                     110

                     Equity instruments

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.4-5

                        IAS 32.11

                     120

                     Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                     130

                     Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                     140

                        Available-for-sale financial assets

                        4th Directive art 42a(1), (5a); IAS 39.9

                        IFRS 7.8(d); IAS 39.9

                     150

                     Equity instruments

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.4-5

                        IAS 32.11

                     160

                     Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                     170

                     Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                     171

                        Non-trading non-derivative financial assets measured at fair value through profit or loss

                        4th Directive art 42a(1), (4)

                     172

                     Equity instruments

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.4-5

                     173

                     Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                     174

                     Loan and advances

                        4th Directive art 42a(1), (4)(b); Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                     175

                        Non-trading non-derivative financial assets measured at fair value to equity

                        4th Directive art 42a(1); art 42c (2)

                     176

                     Equity instruments

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.4-5

                     177

                     Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                     178

                     Loan and advances

                        4th Directive art 42a(1), (4)(b); Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                     180

                        Loans and receivables

                        4th Directive art 42a(4)(b),(5a); IAS 39.9

                        IFRS 7.8(c); IAS 39.9, AG16, AG26; Annex V.Part 1.16

                     190

                     Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                     200

                     Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                     210

                        Held-to-maturity investments

                        4th Directive art 42a(4)(a),(5a); IAS 39.9

                        IFRS 7.8(b); IAS 39.9, AG16, AG26

                     220

                     Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                     230

                     Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                     231

                        Non-trading debt instruments measured at a cost-based method

                        BAD art 37.1; art 42a(4)(b); Annex V.Part1.16

                     232

                     Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                     233

                     Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                     234

                        Other non-trading non-derivative financial assets

                        BAD art 35-37; Annex V.Part 1.17

                     235

                     Equity instruments

                        ECB/2008/32 Annex 2.Part 2.4-5

                     236

                     Debt securities

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 26

                     237

                     Loans and advances

                        Annex V.Part 1.24, 27

                     240

                        Derivatives — Hedge accounting

                        4th Directive art 42a(1), (5a); art 42c(1)(a); IAS 39.9; Annex V.Part 1.19

                        IFRS 7.22(b); IAS 39.9

                     250

                        Fair value changes of the hedged items in portfolio hedge of interest rate risk

                        4th Directive art 42a(5), (5a); IAS 39.89A (a)

                        IAS 39.89A(a)

                     260

                        Tangible assets

                        BAD art 4.Assets(10)

                     270

                        Intangible assets

                        BAD art 4.Assets(9); CRR art 4(115)

                        IAS 1.54(c); CRR art 4(115)

                     280

                        Investments in subsidaries, joint ventures and associates

                        BAD art 4.Assets(7)-(8); 4th Directive art 17; Annex V.Part 2.4

                        IAS 1.54(e); Annex V.Part 2.4

                     290

                        Tax assets

                        IAS 1.54(n-o)

                     300

                        Other assets

                        Annex V.Part 2.5

                        Annex V.Part 2.5

                     310

                        Non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale

                        IAS 1.54(j); IFRS 5.38

                     320

                        ASSETS

                        BAD art 4 Assets

                        IAS 1.9(a), IG 6

               46.   Statement of changes in equity

                        Sources of equity changes

                        Capital

                        Share premium

                        Equity instruments issued other than Capital

                        Other equity

                        Accumulated other comprehensive income

                        Retained earnings

                        Revaluation reserves

                        Fair value reserves

                           References National GAAP compatible IFRS

                        IAS 1.106, 54(r)

                        IAS 1.106, 78(e)

                        IAS 1.106, Annex V.Part 2.15-16

                        IAS 1.106; Annex V.Part 2.17

                        IAS 1.106

                        CRR art 4(123)

                        IFRS 1.30 D5-D8

                           References National GAAP based on BAD

                        BAD art 4.Liabilities(9), BAD art 22

                        BAD art 4.Liabilities(10); CRR art 4(124)

                        Annex V.Part 2.15-17

                        Annex V.Part 2.17

                        4th Directive art 42a(1), (5a)

                        BAD art 4 Liabilities (13); CRR art 4(123)

                        BAD art 4.Liabilities(12)

                     010

                     020

                     030

                     040

                     050

                     060

                     070

                     075

                     010

                        Opening balance [before restatement]

                     020

                     Effects of corrections of errors

                        IAS 1.106.(b); IAS 8.42

                     030

                     Effects of changes in accounting policies

                        IAS 1.106.(b); IAS 1.IG6; IAS 8.22

                     040

                        Opening balance [current period]

                     050

                     Issuance of ordinary shares

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     060

                     Issuance of preference shares

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     070

                     Issuance of other equity instruments

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     080

                     Exercise or expiration of other equity instruments issued

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     090

                     Conversion of debt to equity

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     100

                     Capital reduction

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     110

                     Dividends

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii); IAS 32.35; IAS 1.IG6

                     120

                     Purchase of treasury shares

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii); IAS 32.33

                     130

                     Sale or cancellation of treasury shares

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii); IAS 32.33

                     140

                     Reclassification of financial instruments from equity to liability

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     150

                     Reclassification of financial instruments from liability to equity

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     160

                     Transfers among components of equity

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     170

                     Equity increase or (-) decrease resulting from business combinations

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     180

                     Share based payments

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii); IFRS 2.10

                     190

                     Other increase or (-) decrease in equity

                        IAS 1.106.(d)

                     200

                     Total comprehensive income for the year

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(i)-(ii); IAS 1.81A.(c); IAS 1.IG6

                     210

                        Closing balance [current period]

                        Sources of equity changes

                        Other reserves

                        First consolidation differences

                        (-) Treasury shares

                        Profit or (-) loss atributable to owners of the parent

                        (-) Interim dividends

                        Minority interests

                        Total

                        Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income

                        Other items

                           References National GAAP compatible IFRS

                        IAS 1.106, 54(c)

                        IAS 1.106; IAS 32.34, 33; Annex V.Part 2.20

                        IAS 1.106(a), 83 (a)(ii)

                        IAS 1.106; IAS 32.35

                        IAS 1.54(q), 106(a); IAS 27.27-28

                        IAS 1.54(q), 106(a); IAS 27.27-28

                        IAS 1.9(c), IG6

                           References National GAAP based on BAD

                        7th Directive 19(1)(c)

                        4th Directive.Assets C (III)(7), D (III)(2); Annex V.Part 2.20

                        BAD art 4.Liabilities(14)

                        CRR Article 26(2b)

                        7th Directive art 21

                        7th Directive art 21

                     080

                     085

                     090

                     100

                     110

                     120

                     130

                     140

                     010

                        Opening balance [before restatement]

                     020

                     Effects of corrections of errors

                        IAS 1.106.(b); IAS 8.42

                     030

                     Effects of changes in accounting policies

                        IAS 1.106.(b); IAS 1.IG6; IAS 8.22

                     040

                        Opening balance [current period]

                     050

                     Issuance of ordinary shares

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     060

                     Issuance of preference shares

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     070

                     Issuance of other equity instruments

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     080

                     Exercise or expiration of other equity instruments issued

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     090

                     Conversion of debt to equity

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     100

                     Capital reduction

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     110

                     Dividends

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii); IAS 32.35; IAS 1.IG6

                     120

                     Purchase of treasury shares

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii); IAS 32.33

                     130

                     Sale or cancellation of treasury shares

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii); IAS 32.33

                     140

                     Reclassification of financial instruments from equity to liability

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     150

                     Reclassification of financial instruments from liability to equity

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     160

                     Transfers among components of equity

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     170

                     Equity increase or (-) decrease resulting from business combinations

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii)

                     180

                     Share based payments

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(iii); IFRS 2.10

                     190

                     Other increase or (-) decrease in equity

                        IAS 1.106.(d)

                     200

                     Total comprehensive income for the year

                        IAS 1.106.(d).(i)-(ii); IAS 1.81A.(c); IAS 1.IG6

                     210

                        Closing balance [current period]

         ANNEX V

               ‘ANNEX V

                  REPORTING ON FINANCIAL INFORMATION

                  Table of contents

                           GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

                        224

                           1.

                        References
                        224

                           2.

                        Convention
                        225

                           3.

                        Consolidation
                        226

                           4.

                        Accounting portfolios
                        226

                           4.1.

                        Assets
                        226

                           4.2.

                        Liabilities
                        227

                           5.

                        Financial instruments
                        227

                           5.1.

                        Financial assets
                        227

                           5.2.

                        Financial liabilities
                        228

                           6.

                        Counterparty breakdown
                        228

                           TEMPLATE RELATED INSTRUCTIONS

                        229

                           1.

                        Balance sheet
                        229

                           1.1.

                        Assets (1.1)
                        229

                           1.2.

                        Liabilities (1.2)
                        229

                           1.3.

                        Equity (1.3)
                        230

                           2.

                        Statement of profit or loss (2)
                        230

                           3.

                        Statement of comprehensive income (3)
                        232

                           4.

                        Breakdown of financial assets by instrument and by counterparty sector (4)
                        232

                           5.

                        Breakdown of loans and advances by product (5)
                        232

                           6.

                        Breakdown of loans and advances to non-financial corporations by NACE codes (6)
                        233

                           7.

                        Financial assets subject to impairment that are past due or impaired (7)
                        234

                           8.

                        Breakdown of financial liabilities (8)
                        234

                           9.

                        Loan commitments, financial guarantees and other commitments (9)
                        234

                           10.

                        Derivatives (10 and 11)
                        236

                           10.1.

                        Classification of derivatives by type of risk
                        236

                           10.2.

                        Amounts to be reported for derivatives
                        237

                           10.3.

                        Derivatives classified as “economic hedges”
                        238

                           10.4.

                        Breakdown of derivatives by counterparty sector
                        238

                           11.

                        Movements in allowances for credit losses and impairment of equity instruments (12)
                        239

                           12.

                        Collateral and guarantees received (13)
                        239

                           12.1.

                        Breakdown of loans and advances by collateral and guarantees (13.1)
                        239

                           12.2.

                        Collateral obtained by taking possession during the period [held at the reporting date] (13.2)
                        239

                           12.3.

                        Collateral obtained by taking possession [tangible assets] accumulated (13.3)
                        240

                           13.

                        Fair value hierarchy: Financial instruments at fair value (14)
                        240

                           14.

                        Derecognition and financial liabilities associated with transferred financial assets (15)
                        240

                           15.

                        Breakdown of selected statement of profit or loss items (16)
                        241

                           15.1.

                        Interest income and expenses by instrument and counterparty sector (16.1)
                        241

                           15.2.

                        Gains or losses on de-recognition of financial assets and liabilities not measured at fair value through profit or loss by instrument (16.2)
                        241

                           15.3.

                        Gains or losses on financial assets and liabilities held for trading by instrument (16.3)
                        241

                           15.4.

                        Gains or losses on financial assets and liabilities held for trading by risk (16.4)
                        241

                           15.5.

                        Gains or losses on financial assets and liabilities designated at fair value to profit or loss by instrument (16.5)
                        242

                           15.6.

                        Gains or losses from hedge accounting (16.6)
                        242

                           15.7.

                        Impairment on financial and non-financial assets (16.7)
                        242

                           16.

                        Reconciliation between accounting and CRR scope of consolidation (17)
                        242

                           17.

                        Geographical breakdown (20)
                        242

                           18.

                        Tangible and intangible assets: assets subject to operating lease (21)
                        243

                           19.

                        Asset management, custody and other service functions (22)
                        243

                           19.1.

                        Fee and commission income and expenses by activity (22.1)
                        243

                           19.2.

                        Assets involved in the services provided (22.2)
                        244

                           20.

                        Interests in unconsolidated structured entities (30)
                        245

                           21.

                        Related parties (31)
                        245

                           21.1.

                        Related parties: amounts payable to and amounts receivable from (31.1)
                        245

                           21.2.

                        Related parties: expenses and income generated by transactions with (31.2)
                        245

                           22.

                        Group structure (40)
                        246

                           22.1.

                        Group structure: “entity-by-entity” (40.1)
                        246

                           22.2.

                        Group structure: “instrument-by-instrument” (40.2)
                        247

                           23.

                        Fair value (41)
                        247

                           23.1.

                        Fair value hierarchy: financial instruments at amortised cost (41.1)
                        247

                           23.2.

                        Use of fair value option (41.2)
                        247

                           23.3.

                        Hybrid financial instruments not designated at fair value through profit or loss (41.3)
                        247

                           24.

                        Tangible and intangible assets: carrying amount by measurement method (42)
                        247

                           25.

                        Provisions (43)
                        247

                           26.

                        Defined benefit plans and employee benefits (44)
                        248

                           26.1.

                        Components of net defined benefit plan assets and liabilities (44.1)
                        248

                           26.2.

                        Movements in defined benefit obligations (44.2)
                        248

                           26.3.

                        Memo items [related to staff expenses] (44.3)
                        248

                           27.

                        Breakdown of selected items of statement of profit or loss (45)
                        248

                           27.1.

                        Gains or losses on de-recognition of non-financial assets other than held-for-sale (45.2)
                        248

                           27.2.

                        Other operating income and expenses (45.3)
                        248

                           28.

                        Statement of changes in equity (46)
                        249

                           29.

                        Non-performing exposures (18)
                        249

                           30.

                        Forborne exposures (19)
                        251

                           MAPPING OF EXPOSURE CLASSES AND COUNTERPARTY SECTORS

                        255

                  PART 1

               GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
               1.   REFERENCES

                           1.

                           This Annex contains additional instructions for the financial information templates (“FINREP”) in Annexes III and IV to this Regulation. This Annex complements the instructions included in the form of references in the templates in Annexes III and IV.

                           2.

                           The data points identified in the templates shall be drawn up in accordance with the recognition, offsetting and valuation rules of the relevant accounting framework, as defined in Article 4(1)(77) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 (“CRR”).

                           3.

                           Institutions shall only submit those parts of the templates related to:

                                       (a)

                                       assets, liabilities, equity, income and expenses that are recognised by the institution;

                                       (b)

                                       off-balance sheet exposures and activities in which the institution is involved;

                                       (c)

                                       transactions performed by the institution;

                                       (d)

                                       valuation rules, including methods for the estimation of allowances for credit risk, applied by the institution.

                           4.

                           For the purposes of Annexes III and IV as well as this Annex, the following abbreviations shall apply:
                           (a)   “IAS regulation”: Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002;
                           (b)   “IAS” or “IFRS”: “International Accounting Standards”, as defined in Article 2 of the IAS regulation that has been adopted by the Commission;
                           (c)   “ECB BSI Regulation” or “ECB/2008/32”: Regulation (EC) No 25/2009 of the European Central Bank (1);
                           (d)   “NACE Regulation”: Regulation (EC) No 1893/2006 of the European Parliament and of the Council (2);
                           (e)   “BAD”: Council Directive 86/635/EEC (3);
                           (f)   “4th Directive”: Fourth Council Directive 78/660/EEC (4);
                           (g)   “National GAAP”: national generally accepted accounting principles developed under BAD;
                           (h)   “SME”: micro, small and medium-sized enterprises defined in Commission Recommendation C(2003)1422 (5);
                           (i)   “ISIN code”: the International Securities Identification Number assigned to securities, composed of 12 alphanumeric characters, which uniquely identifies a securities issue;
                           (j)   “LEI code”: the global Legal Entity Identifier assigned to entities, which uniquely identifies a party to a financial transaction.

                     2.   CONVENTION

                           5.

                           For the purposes of Annexes III and IV, a data point shadowed in grey shall mean that this data point is not requested or that it is not possible to report it. In Annex IV, a row or a column with references shadowed in black means that the related data points should not be submitted by those institutions that follow those references in that row or column.

                           6.

                           Templates in Annexes III and IV include implicit validation rules which are laid down in the templates themselves through the use of conventions.

                           7.

                           The use of brackets in the label of an item in a template means that this item is to be subtracted to obtain a total, but it does not mean that it shall be reported as negative.

                           8.

                           Items that shall be reported in negative are identified in the compiling templates by including “(-)” at the beginning of their label such as in “(-) Treasury shares”.

                           9.

                           In the “Data Point Model” (“DPM”) for financial information reporting templates of Annexes III and IV, every data point (cell) has a “base item” to which the “credit/debit” attribute is allocated. This allocation ensures that all entities who report data points follow the “sign convention” and allows to know the “credit/debit” attribute that corresponds to each data point.

                           10.

                           Schematically, this convention works as in Table 1.

                              Table 1

                              Credit/debit convention, positive and negative signs

                                       Element

                                       Credit / Debit

                                       Balance / Movement

                                       Figure reported

                                       Assets

                                       Debit

                                       Balance on assets

                                       Positive (“Normal”, no sign needed)

                                       Increase on assets

                                       Positive (“Normal”, no sign needed)

                                       Negative balance on assets

                                       Negative (Minus “–” sign needed)

                                       Decrease on assets

                                       Negative (Minus “–” sign needed)

                                       Expenses

                                       Balance on expenses

                                       Positive (“Normal”, no sign needed)

                                       Increase on expenses

                                       Positive (“Normal”, no sign needed)

                                       Negative balance (including reversals) on expenses

                                       Negative (Minus “–” sign needed)

                                       Decrease on expenses

                                       Negative (Minus “–” sign needed)

                                       Liabilities

                                       Credit

                                       Balance on liabilities

                                       Positive (“Normal”, no sign needed)

                                       Increase on liabilities

                                       Positive (“Normal”, no sign needed)

                                       Negative balance on liabilities

                                       Negative (Minus “–” sign needed)

                                       Decrease on liabilities

                                       Negative (Minus “–” sign needed)

                                       Equity

                                       Balance on equity

                                       Positive (“Normal”, no sign needed)

                                       Increase on equity

                                       Positive (“Normal”, no sign needed)

                                       Negative balance on equity

                                       Negative (Minus “–” sign needed)

                                       Decrease on equity

                                       Negative (Minus “–” sign needed)

                                       Income

                                       Balance on income

                                       Positive (“Normal”, no sign needed)

                                       Increase on income

                                       Positive (“Normal”, no sign needed)

                                       Negative balance (including reversals) on income

                                       Negative (Minus “–” sign needed)

                                       Decrease on income

                                       Negative (Minus “–” sign needed)

                     3.   CONSOLIDATION

                           11.

                           Unless specified otherwise in this Annex, FINREP templates shall be prepared using the prudential scope of consolidation in accordance with Part 1, Title II, Chapter 2, Section 2, of CRR. Institutions shall account for their subsidiaries and joint ventures using the same methods as for prudential consolidation:

                                       (a)

                                       institutions may be permitted or required to apply the equity method to investments in insurance and non-financial subsidiaries in accordance with Article 18(5)of CRR;

                                       (b)

                                       institutions may be permitted to use the proportional consolidation method for financial subsidiaries in accordance with Article 18(2) of CRR;

                                       (c)

                                       institutions may be required to use the proportional consolidation method for investment in joint ventures in accordance with Article 18(4) of CRR.

                     4.   ACCOUNTING PORTFOLIOS
               4.1.   Assets

                           12.

                           “Accounting portfolios” shall mean financial instruments aggregated by valuation rules. These aggregations do not include investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates, balances receivable on demand classified as “Cash, cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits” as well as those financial instruments classified as “Held for sale” presented in the items “Non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale” and “Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale”.

                           13.

                           The following accounting portfolios based on IFRS shall be used for financial assets:

                                       (a)

                                       “Financial assets held for trading”;

                                       (b)

                                       “Financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss”;

                                       (c)

                                       “Available-for-sale financial assets”;

                                       (d)

                                       “Loans and Receivables”;

                                       (e)

                                       “Held-to-maturity investments”.

                           14.

                           The following accounting portfolios based on National GAAP shall be used for financial assets:

                                       (a)

                                       “Trading financial assets”;

                                       (b)

                                       “Non-trading non-derivative financial assets measured at fair value through profit or loss”;

                                       (c)

                                       “Non-trading non-derivative financial assets measured at fair value to equity”;

                                       (d)

                                       “Non-trading debt instruments measured at a cost-based method”; and

                                       (e)

                                       “Other non-trading non-derivative financial assets”.

                           15.

                           “Trading financial assets” has the same meaning as under the relevant National GAAP based on BAD. Under National GAAP based on BAD, derivatives that are not held for hedge accounting shall be reported in this item without regarding the method applied to measure these contracts. Institutions shall include derivatives contracts in the balance sheet only when these contracts are recognised in accordance with the relevant accounting framework.

                           16.

                           For financial assets, “cost-based methods” include those valuation rules by which the financial asset is measured at cost plus interest accrued less impairment losses.

                           17.

                           Under National GAAP based on BAD, “Other non-trading non-derivative financial assets” shall include financial assets that do not qualify for inclusion in other accounting portfolios. This accounting portfolio includes, among others, financial assets that are measured at the lower of their amount at initial recognition or their fair value (so-called “Lower Of Cost Or Market” or “LOCOM”).

                           18.

                           Under National GAAP based on BAD, institutions that are permitted or required to apply certain valuation rules for financial instruments in IFRS shall submit, to the extent that they are applied, the relevant accounting portfolios.

                           19.

                           “Derivatives — Hedge accounting” shall include derivatives held for hedge accounting under the relevant accounting framework.

                     4.2.   Liabilities

                           20.

                           The following accounting portfolios based on IFRS shall be used for financial liabilities:

                                       (a)

                                       “Financial liabilities held for trading”;

                                       (b)

                                       “Financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss”;

                                       (c)

                                       “Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost”.

                           21.

                           The following accounting portfolios based on National GAAP shall be used for financial liabilities:

                                       (a)

                                       “Trading financial liabilities”; and

                                       (b)

                                       “Non-trading non-derivative financial liabilities measured at a cost-based method”.

                           22.

                           Under National GAAP, institutions that are permitted or required to apply certain valuation rules for financial instruments in IFRS shall submit, to the extent that they are applied, the relevant accounting portfolios.

                           23.

                           Both under IFRS and National GAAP, “Derivatives — Hedge accounting” shall include derivatives held for hedge accounting under the relevant accounting framework.

                     5.   FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
               5.1.   Financial assets

                           24.

                           The carrying amount shall mean the amount to be reported in the asset side of the balance sheet. The carrying amount of financial assets shall include accrued interest.

                           25.

                           Financial assets shall be distributed among the following classes of instruments: “Cash on hand”, “Derivatives”, “Equity instruments”, “Debt securities”, and “Loan and advances”.

                           26.

                           “Debt securities” are debt instruments held by the institution issued as securities that are not loans in accordance with the ECB BSI Regulation.

                           27.

                           “Loans and advances” are debt instruments held by the institutions that are not securities; this item includes “loans” in accordance with the ECB BSI Regulation as well as advances that cannot be classified as “loans” according to the ECB BSI Regulation. “Advances that are not loans” are further characterized in paragraph 41(g) of Part 1 of this Annex. Consequently, “debt instruments” shall include “loans and advances” and “debt securities”.

                     5.2.   Financial liabilities

                           28.

                           The carrying amount shall mean the amount to be reported in the liability side of the balance sheet. The carrying amount of financial liabilities shall include accrued interest.

                           29.

                           Financial liabilities shall be distributed among the following classes of instruments: “Derivatives”, “Short positions”, “Deposits”, “Debt securities issued” and “Other financial liabilities”.

                           30.

                           “Deposits” are defined in the same way as in the ECB BSI Regulation.

                           31.

                           “Debt securities issued” are debt instruments issued as securities by the institution that are not deposits in accordance with the ECB BSI Regulation.

                           32.

                           “Other financial liabilities” include all financial liabilities other than derivatives, short positions, deposits and debt securities issued.

                           33.

                           Under IFRS or compatible National GAAP, “Other financial liabilities” may include financial guarantees when they are measured either at fair value through profit or loss [IAS 39.47(a)] or at the amount initially recognised less cumulative amortization [IAS 39.47(c)(ii)]. Loan commitments shall be reported as “Other financial liabilities” where they are designated as financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss [IAS 39.4(a)] or they are commitments to provide a loan at a below-market interest rate [IAS 39.4(b), 47(d)]. Provisions arising from these contracts [IAS 39.47(c)(i), (d)(i)] are reported as provisions for “Commitments and guarantees given”.

                           34.

                           “Other financial liabilities” may also include dividends to be paid, amounts payable in respect of suspense and transit items, and amounts payable in respect of future settlements of transactions in securities or foreign exchange transactions (payables for transactions recognised before the payment date).

                     6.   COUNTERPARTY BREAKDOWN

                           35.

                           Where a breakdown by counterparty is required the following counterparty sectors shall be used:

                                       (a)

                                       central banks;

                                       (b)

                                       general governments: central governments, state or regional governments, and local governments, including administrative bodies and non-commercial undertakings, but excluding public companies and private companies held by these administrations that have a commercial activity (which shall be reported under “non-financial corporations”); social security funds; and international organisations, such as the European Community, the International Monetary Fund and the Bank for International Settlements;

                                       (c)

                                       credit institutions: any institution covered by the definition in Article 4(1)(1) of CRR (“undertaking the business of which is to take deposits or other repayable funds from the public and to grant credits for its own account”) and multilateral development banks;

                                       (d)

                                       other financial corporations: all financial corporations and quasi-corporations other than credit institutions such as investment firms, investment funds, insurance companies, pension funds, collective investment undertakings, and clearing houses as well as remaining financial intermediaries and financial auxiliaries;

                                       (e)

                                       non-financial corporations: corporations and quasi-corporations not engaged in financial intermediation but principally in the production of market goods and non-financial services according to the ECB BSI Regulation;

                                       (f)

                                       Households: individuals or groups of individuals as consumers, and producers of goods and non-financial services exclusively for their own final consumption, and as producers of market goods and non-financial and financial services provided that their activities are not those of quasi-corporations. Non-profit institutions which serve households and which are principally engaged in the production of non-market goods and services intended for particular groups of households are included.

                           36.

                           The counterparty sector allocation is based exclusively on the nature of the immediate counterparty. The classification of the exposures incurred jointly by more than one obligor shall be done on the basis of the characteristics of the obligor that was the more relevant, or determinant, for the institution to grant the exposure. Among other classifications, the distribution of jointly incurred exposures by counterparty sector, country of residence and NACE codes should be driven by the characteristics of the more relevant or determinant obligor.

                  PART 2

               TEMPLATE RELATED INSTRUCTIONS
               1.   BALANCE SHEET
               1.1.   Assets (1.1)

                           1.

                           “Cash on hand” includes holdings of national and foreign banknotes and coins in circulation that are commonly used to make payments.

                           2.

                           “Cash balances at central banks” include balances receivable on demand at central banks.

                           3.

                           “Other demand deposits” include balances receivable on demand with credit institutions.

                           4.

                           “Investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates” include the investments in associates, joint ventures and subsidiaries which are not fully or proportionally consolidated. The carrying amount of investments accounted for using the equity method includes related goodwill.

                           5.

                           Assets that are not financial assets and that due to their nature could not be classified in specific balance sheet items shall be reported in “Other assets”. Other assets may include gold, silver and other commodities, even when they are held with trading intent.

                           6.

                           “Non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale” has the same meaning as under IFRS 5.

                     1.2.   Liabilities (1.2)

                           7.

                           Provisions for “Pensions and other post employment defined benefit obligations” include the amount of net defined benefit liabilities.

                           8.

                           Under IFRS or compatible National GAAP, provisions for “Other long-term employee benefits” include the amount of the deficits in the long-term employment benefit plans listed in IAS 19.153. The accrued expense from short term employee benefits [IAS 19.11(a)], defined contribution plans [IAS 19.51(a)] and termination benefits [IAS 19.169(a)] shall be included in “Other liabilities”.

                           9.

                           “Share capital repayable on demand” includes the capital instruments issued by the institution that do not meet the criteria to be classified in equity. Institutions shall include in this item the cooperative shares that do not meet the criteria to be classified in equity.

                           10.

                           Liabilities that are not financial liabilities and that due to their nature could not be classified in specific balance sheet items shall be reported in “Other liabilities”.

                           11.

                           “Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale” has the same meaning as under IFRS 5.

                           12.

                           “Funds for general banking risks” are amounts that have been assigned in accordance with Article 38 of the BAD. When recognised, they shall appear separately either as liabilities under “provisions” or within equity under “other reserves”.

                     1.3.   Equity (1.3)

                           13.

                           Under IFRS or compatible National GAAP, equity instruments that are financial instruments include those contracts under the scope of IAS 32.

                           14.

                           “Unpaid capital which has been called up” includes the carrying amount of capital issued by the institution that has been called-up to the subscribers but not paid at the reference date.

                           15.

                           “Equity component of compound financial instruments” includes the equity component of compound financial instruments (that is, financial instruments that contain both a liability and an equity component) issued by the institution, when segregated in accordance with the relevant accounting framework (including compound financial instruments with multiple embedded derivatives whose values are interdependent).

                           16.

                           “Other equity instruments issued” includes equity instruments that are financial instruments other than “Capital” and “Equity component of compound financial instruments”.

                           17.

                           “Other equity” shall comprise all equity instruments that are not financial instruments including, among others, equity-settled share-based payment transactions [IFRS 2.10].

                           18.

                           Under IFRS or compatible National GAAP, “Revaluation reserves” includes the amount of reserves resulting from first-time adoption to IAS, or compatible National GAAP, that have not been released to other type of reserves.

                           19.

                           “Other reserves” are split between “Reserves or accumulated losses of investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates” and “Other”. “Reserves or accumulated losses of investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates” include the accumulated amount of income and expenses generated by the aforementioned investments through profit or loss in past years. “Other” includes reserves different from those separately disclosed in other items and may include legal reserve and statutory reserve.

                           20.

                           “Treasury shares” cover all financial instruments that have the characteristics of own equity instruments which have been reacquired by the institution.

                     2.   STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS (2)

                           21.

                           Interest income and interest expense from financial instruments held for trading, and from financial instruments designated at fair value through profit or loss, shall be reported either separately from other gains and losses under items “interest income” and “interest expense” (“clean price”) or as part of gains or losses from these categories of instruments (“dirty price”).

                           22.

                           Institutions shall report the following items broken down by accounting portfolios:

                                       (a)

                                       “Interest income”;

                                       (b)

                                       “Interest expense”;

                                       (c)

                                       “Dividend income”;

                                       (d)

                                       “Gains or losses on de-recognition of financial assets and liabilities not measured at fair value through profit or loss, net”;

                                       (e)

                                       “Impairment or (-) reversal of impairment on financial assets not measured at fair value through profit or loss”.

                           23.

                           “Interest income. Derivatives — Hedge accounting, interest rate risk” and “Interest expenses. Derivatives — Hedge accounting, interest rate risk” include the amounts related to those derivatives classified in the category “hedge accounting” which cover interest rate risk. They shall be reported as interest income and expenses on a gross basis to present correct interest income and expenses from the hedged items to which they are linked.

                           24.

                           The amounts related to those derivatives classified in the category “held for trading” which are hedging instruments from an economic but not accounting point of view may be reported as interest income and expenses to present correct interest income and expenses from the financial instruments that are hedged. These amounts shall be included as a part of the items “Interest income. Financial assets held for trading” and “Interest expenses. Financial liabilities held for trading”.

                           25.

                           “Interest income — other assets” includes amounts of interest income not included in the other items. This item may include interest income related to cash, cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits and to non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale as well as net interest income from net defined benefit asset.

                           26.

                           “Interest expenses — other liabilities” includes amounts of interest expenses not included in the other items. This item may include interest expenses related to liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale, expenses derived from increases in the carrying amount of a provision reflecting the passage of time or net interest expenses from net defined benefit liabilities.

                           27.

                           “Profit or loss from non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale not qualifying as discontinued operations” includes profit or loss generated by non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale not qualifying as discontinued operations.

                           28.

                           Dividend income from financial assets held for trading and from financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss shall be reported either as “dividend income” separately from other gains and losses from these categories or as part of gains or losses from these categories of instruments. Dividend income from subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures which are outside the scope of consolidation shall be reported within “Share of the profit or (-) loss of investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates” and, according to IAS 28.10, the carrying amount of the investment shall be reduced for those accounted for under the equity method. Under IFRS, the gains or losses on de-recognition of investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates shall be reported within “Share of the profit or (-) loss of investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates”.

                           29.

                           Under IFRS or compatible National GAAP, impairment on “Financial assets at cost” includes impairment losses arising from the application of the impairment rules in IAS 39.66.

                           30.

                           For “Gains or (-) losses from hedge accounting, net” institutions shall report fair value changes on hedging instruments and hedged items, including the result of ineffectiveness from cash flow hedges and from hedges of net investment in foreign operations.

                     3.   STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (3)

                           31.

                           Under IFRS or compatible National GAAP, “Income tax relating to items that will not be reclassified” and “Income tax relating to items that may be reclassified to profit or (-) loss” [IAS 1.91 (b), IG6] shall be reported as separate line items.

                     4.   BREAKDOWN OF FINANCIAL ASSETS BY INSTRUMENT AND BY COUNTERPARTY SECTOR (4)

                           32.

                           Financial assets shall be broken down by instrument and — where required — by counterparty.

                           33.

                           Under IFRS or compatible National GAAP, equity instruments shall be reported with a specific breakdown (“of which”) to identify instruments measured at cost and specific counterparty sectors only. Under National GAAP based on BAD, equity instruments shall be reported with a specific breakdown (“of which”) to identify unquoted and specific counterparty sectors only.

                           34.

                           For available-for-sale financial assets institutions shall report the fair value of impaired assets and unimpaired assets respectively, and the cumulative amount of impairment losses recognised in profit or loss as at the reporting date. The sum of fair value of unimpaired assets and fair value of impaired assets shall be the carrying amount of these assets.

                           35.

                           Under IFRS or compatible National GAAP, for financial assets classified as “Loans and receivables” or as “Held-to-maturity”, the gross carrying amount of unimpaired assets and of impaired assets shall be reported. The allowances shall be broken down to “Specific allowances for financial assets, individually estimated”, “Specific allowances for financial assets, collectively estimated” and “Collective allowances for incurred but not reported losses”. Under National GAAP based on BAD, for financial assets classified as “non-trading non-derivative financial asset measured at a cost-based method”, the gross carrying amount of unimpaired assets and of impaired assets shall be reported.

                           36.

                           “Specific allowances for financial assets, individually estimated” shall include cumulative amount of impairment related to financial assets which have been assessed individually.

                           37.

                           “Specific allowances for financial assets, collectively estimated” shall include the cumulative amount of collective impairment calculated on insignificant loans which are impaired on individual basis and for which the institution decides to use a statistical approach (portfolio basis). This approach does not preclude performing individual impairment evaluation of loans that are individually insignificant and thus to report them as specific allowances for financial assets, individually estimated.

                           38.

                           “Collective allowances for incurred but not reported losses” shall include the cumulative amount of collective impairment determined on financial assets which are not impaired on individual basis. For “allowances for incurred but not reported losses”, IAS 39.59(f), AG87 and AG90 may be followed.

                           39.

                           The sum of unimpaired assets and impaired assets net of all the allowances shall be equal to the carrying amount.

                           40.

                           Template 4.5 includes the carrying amount of “Loans and advances” and “Debt securities” that fall within the definition of “subordinated debt” in paragraph 54 of this Part.

                     5.   BREAKDOWN OF LOANS AND ADVANCES BY PRODUCT (5)

                           41.

                           The “carrying amount” of loans and advances shall be reported by type of product net of allowances due to impairment. Balances receivable on demand classified as “Cash, cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits” shall also be reported in this template independently of the “accounting portfolio” in which they are included shall be allocated to the following products:

                                       (a)

                                       “on demand (call) and short notice (current account)” include balances receivable on demand (call), at short notice, current accounts and similar balances which may include loans that are overnight deposits for the borrower, regardless of their legal form. It also includes “overdrafts” that are debit balances on current account balances;

                                       (b)

                                       “Credit card debt” includes credit granted either via delayed debit cards or via credit cards [ECB BSI Regulation];

                                       (c)

                                       “Trade receivables” include loans to other debtors granted on the basis of bills or other documents that give the right to receive the proceeds of transactions for the sale of goods or provision of services. This item includes all factoring transactions (both with and without recourse);

                                       (d)

                                       “Finance leases” include the carrying amount of finance lease receivables. Under IFRS or compatible National GAAP, “finance lease receivables” are as defined in IAS 17;

                                       (e)

                                       “Reverse repurchase loans” include finance granted in exchange for securities bought under repurchase agreements or borrowed under securities lending agreements;

                                       (f)

                                       “Other term loans” include debit balances with contractually fixed maturities or terms that are not included in other items;

                                       (g)

                                       “Advances that are not loans” include advances that cannot be classified as “loans” according to the ECB BSI Regulation. This item includes, among others, gross amounts receivable in respect of suspense items (such as funds that are awaiting investment, transfer, or settlement) and transit items (such as cheques and other forms of payment that have been sent for collection);

                                       (h)

                                       “Mortgage loans [Loans collateralized by immovable property]” include loans formally secured by immovable property collateral independently of their loan/collateral ratio (commonly referred as “loan-to-value”);

                                       (i)

                                       “Other collateralized loans” include loans formally backed by collateral, independently of their loan/collateral ratio (so-called “loan-to-value”), other than “Loans collateralised by immovable property”, “Finance leases” and “Reverse repurchase loans”. This collateral includes pledges of securities, cash, and other collateral;

                                       (j)

                                       “Credit for consumption” includes loans granted mainly for the personal consumption of goods and services [ECB BSI Regulation];

                                       (k)

                                       “Lending for house purchase” includes credit extended to households for the purpose of investing in houses for own use and rental, including building and refurbishments [ECB BSI Regulation];

                                       (l)

                                       “Project finance loans” include loans that are recovered solely from the income of the projects financed by them.

                     6.   BREAKDOWN OF LOANS AND ADVANCES TO NON-FINANCIAL CORPORATIONS BY NACE CODES (6)

                           42.

                           Gross carrying amount of loans and advances to non-financial corporations shall be classified by sector of economic activities using codes in NACE Regulation (“NACE Codes”) on the basis of the principal activity of the counterparty.

                           43.

                           The classification of the exposures incurred jointly by more than one obligor shall be done in accordance with paragraph 36 of Part 1.

                           44.

                           Reporting of NACE codes shall be done with the first level of disaggregation (by “section”).

                           45.

                           For debt instruments at amortised cost or at fair value through other comprehensive income, “Gross carrying amount” shall mean the carrying amount excluding “Accumulated impairment”. For debt instruments at fair value through profit and loss, “Gross carrying amount” shall mean the carrying amount excluding “Accumulated changes in fair value due to credit risk”.

                           46.

                           “Accumulated impairment” shall be reported for financial assets at amortised cost or at fair value through other comprehensive income. “Accumulated changes in fair value due to credit risk” figures shall be reported for financial assets at fair value through profit or loss. “Accumulated impairment” shall include specific allowances for financial assets, individually and collectively estimated as defined in paragraphs 36 and 37 as well as “Collective allowances for incurred but not reported losses” as defined in paragraph 38, but do not include “Accumulated write-offs” amounts as defined in paragraph 49.

                     7.   FINANCIAL ASSETS SUBJECT TO IMPAIRMENT THAT ARE PAST DUE OR IMPAIRED (7)

                           47.

                           Debt instruments that are past due but not impaired at the reporting reference date shall be reported in the accounting portfolios subject to impairment. According to IFRS or compatible National GAAP, these accounting portfolios comprise the categories “Available for sale”, “Loans and receivables”, and “Held-to-maturity”. According to National GAAP based on BAD, these accounting portfolios comprise also “Non-trading debt instruments measured at a cost-based method” and “Other non-trading non-derivative financial assets”.

                           48.

                           Assets qualify as past due when counterparties have failed to make a payment when contractually due. The whole amounts of such assets shall be reported and broken down according to the number of days of the oldest past due instalment. The past due analysis shall not include any impaired assets. The carrying amount of impaired financial assets shall be reported separately from the past due assets.

                           49.

                           The column “Accumulated write-offs” includes the cumulative amount of principal and past due interest of any debt instrument that the institution is no longer recognising because they are considered uncollectible, independently of the portfolio in which they were included. These amounts shall be reported until the total extinguishment of all the institution's rights (by expiry of the statute-of–limitations period, forgiveness or other causes) or until recovery.

                           50.

                           “Write-offs” could be caused both by reductions of the carrying amount of financial assets recognised directly in profit or loss as well as by reductions in the amounts of the allowance accounts for credit losses taken against the carrying amount of financial assets.

                     8.   BREAKDOWN OF FINANCIAL LIABILITIES (8)

                           51.

                           As “Deposits” are defined in the same way as in the ECB BSI Regulation, regulated savings deposits shall be classified in accordance with the ECB BSI Regulation and distributed according to the counterparty. In particular, non-transferable sight savings deposits, which although legally redeemable at demand are subject to significant penalties and restrictions and have features that are very close to overnight deposits, are classified as deposits redeemable at notice.

                           52.

                           “Debt securities issued” shall be disaggregated into the following type of products:

                                       (a)

                                       “Certificates of deposits” are securities that enable the holders to withdraw funds from an account;

                                       (b)

                                       “Asset backed securities” according to Article 4(1)(61) of CRR;

                                       (c)

                                       “Covered Bonds” according to Article 129(1) of CRR;

                                       (d)

                                       “Hybrid contracts” comprise contracts with embedded derivatives;

                                       (e)

                                       “Other debt securities issued” includes debt securities not recorded in the previous lines and distinguishes convertible and non-convertible instruments.

                           53.

                           “Subordinated financial liabilities” issued are treated in the same way as other financial liabilities incurred. Subordinated liabilities issued in the form of securities are classified as “Debt securities issued”, whereas subordinated liabilities in the form of deposits are classified as “Deposits”.

                           54.

                           Template 8.2 includes the carrying amount of “Deposits” and “Debt securities issued” that meet the definition of subordinated debt classified by accounting portfolios. “Subordinated debt” instruments provide a subsidiary claim on the issuing institution that can only be exercised after all claims with a higher status have been satisfied [ECB BSI Regulation].

                     9.   LOAN COMMITMENTS, FINANCIAL GUARANTEES AND OTHER COMMITMENTS (9)

                           55.

                           Off-balance sheet exposures include the off-balance sheet items listed in Annex I of CRR. Off-balance sheet exposures shall be broken down in loan commitments given, financial guarantees given, and other commitments given.

                           56.

                           Information on loan commitments, financial guarantees, and other commitments given and received include both revocable and irrevocable commitments.

                           57.

                           “Loan commitments” are firm commitments to provide credit under pre-specified terms and conditions, except those that are derivatives because they can be settled net in cash or by delivering or issuing another financial instrument. The following items of Annex I of CRR shall be classified as “Loan commitments”:

                                       (a)

                                       “Forward deposits”.

                                       (b)

                                       “Undrawn credit facilities” which comprise agreements to “lend” or provide “acceptance facilities” under pre-specified terms and conditions.

                           58.

                           “Financial guarantees” are contracts that require the issuer to make specified payments to reimburse the holder of a loss it incurs, because a specified debtor fails to make payment when due in accordance with the original or modified terms of a debt instrument. Under IFRS or compatible National GAAP, these contracts meet the IAS 39.9 and IFRS 4.A definition of financial guarantee contracts. The following items of Annex I of CRR shall be classified as “financial guarantees”:

                                       (a)

                                       “Guarantees having the character of credit substitute”;

                                       (b)

                                       “Credit derivatives” that meet the definition of financial guarantee;

                                       (c)

                                       “Irrevocable standby letters of credit having the character of credit substitutes”;

                           59.

                           “Other commitments” includes the following items of Annex I of CRR:

                                       (a)

                                       “Unpaid portion of partly-paid shares and securities”;

                                       (b)

                                       “Documentary credits issued or confirmed”;

                                       (c)

                                       Trade finance Off-balance sheet items;

                                       (d)

                                       “Documentary credits in which underlying shipment acts as collateral and other self-liquidating transactions”;

                                       (e)

                                       “Warranties and indemnities” (including tender and performance bonds) and “guarantees not having the character of credit substitutes”;

                                       (f)

                                       “Shipping guarantees, customs and tax bonds”;

                                       (g)

                                       Note issuance facilities (NIFs) and revolving underwritings facilities (RUFs);

                                       (h)

                                       “Undrawn credit facilities” which comprise agreements to “lend” or provide “acceptance facilities” when the terms and conditions are not pre-specified;

                                       (i)

                                       “Undrawn credit facilities” which comprise agreements to “purchase securities” or “provide guarantees”;

                                       (j)

                                       “Undrawn credit facilities for tender and performance guarantees”;

                                       (k)

                                       “Other off-balance sheet items” in Annex I of CRR.

                           60.

                           Under IFRS or compatible National GAAP, the following item are recognised in the balance sheet and, consequently, should not be reported as off-balance sheet exposures:

                                       (a)

                                       “Credit derivatives” that do not meet the definition of financial guarantees are “derivatives” under IAS 39;

                                       (b)

                                       “Acceptances” are obligations by an institution to pay on maturity the face value of a bill of exchange, normally covering the sale of goods. Consequently, they are classified as “trade receivables” on the balance sheet;

                                       (c)

                                       “Endorsements on bills” that do not meet the criteria for de-recognition under IAS 39;

                                       (d)

                                       “Transactions with recourse” that do not meet the criteria for de-recognition under IAS 39;

                                       (e)

                                       “Assets purchased under outright forward purchase agreements” are “derivatives” under IAS 39;

                                       (f)

                                       “Asset sale and repurchase agreements as defined in Article 12(3) and (5) of Directive 86/635/EEC”. In these contracts, the transferee has the option, but not the obligation, to return the assets at a price agreed in advance on a date specified (or to be specified). Therefore, these contracts meet the definition of derivatives under IAS 39.9.

                           61.

                           “of which: defaulted” shall include the nominal amount of those loan commitments, financial guarantees and other commitments given whose counterparty has incurred in default according to Article 178 of CRR.

                           62.

                           For off-balance sheet exposures, the “Nominal amount” is the amount that best represents the institution's maximum exposure to credit risk without taking account of any collateral held or other credit enhancements. In particular, for financial guarantees given, the nominal amount is the maximum amount the entity could have to pay if the guarantee is called on. For loan commitments, the nominal amount is the undrawn amount that the institution has committed to lend. Nominal amounts are exposure values before applying conversion factors and credit risk mitigation techniques.

                           63.

                           In template 9.2, for loan commitments received, the nominal amount is the total undrawn amount that the counterparty has committed to lend to the institution. For other commitments received the nominal amount is the total amount committed by the other party in the transaction. For financial guarantees received, the “maximum amount of the guarantee that can be considered” is the maximum amount the counterparty could have to pay if the guarantee is called on. When a financial guarantee received has been issued by more than one guarantor, the guaranteed amount shall be reported only once in this template; the guaranteed amount shall be allocated to guarantor that is more relevant for the mitigation of credit risk.

                     10.   DERIVATIVES (10 AND 11)

                           64.

                           The carrying amount and the notional amount of the derivatives held for trading and the derivatives held for hedge accounting shall be reported broken down by type of underlying risk, type of market (over-the-counter versus organised markets) and type of product.

                           65.

                           Institutions shall report the derivatives held for hedge accounting broken down by type of hedge.

                           66.

                           Derivatives included in hybrid instruments which have been separated from the host contract shall be reported in templates 10 and 11 according to the nature of the derivative. The amount of the host contract is not included in these templates. However, if the hybrid instrument is measured at fair value through profit or loss, the contract as a whole shall be included in the category of held for trading or financial instruments designated at fair value through profit or loss (and, thus, the embedded derivatives are not reported in 10 and 11).

                     10.1.   Classification of derivatives by type of risk

                           67.

                           All derivatives shall be classified into the following risk categories:
                           (a)   Interest rate: Interest rate derivatives are contracts related to an interest-bearing financial instrument whose cash flows are determined by referencing interest rates or another interest rate contract such as an option on a futures contract to purchase a Treasury bill. This category is restricted to those deals where all the legs are exposed to only one currency's interest rate. Thus it excludes contracts involving the exchange of one or more foreign currencies such as cross-currency swaps and currency options, and other contracts whose predominant risk characteristic is foreign exchange risk, which are to be reported as foreign exchange contracts. Interest rate contracts include forward rate agreements, single-currency interest rate swaps, interest rate futures, interest rate options (including caps, floors, collars and corridors), interest rate swaptions and interest rate warrants.
                           (b)   Equity: Equity derivatives are contracts that have a return, or a portion of their return, linked to the price of a particular equity or to an index of equity prices.
                           (c)   Foreign exchange and gold: These derivatives include contracts involving the exchange of currencies in the forward market and the exposure to gold. They therefore cover outright forwards, foreign exchange swaps, currency swaps (including cross-currency interest rate swaps), currency futures, currency options, currency swaptions and currency warrant. Foreign exchange derivatives include all deals involving exposure to more than one currency, whether in interest rates or exchange rates. Gold contracts include all deals involving exposure to that commodity.
                           (d)   Credit: Credit derivatives are contracts that do not meet the definition of financial guarantees and in which the payout is linked primarily to some measure of the creditworthiness of a particular reference credit. The contracts specify an exchange of payments in which at least one of the two legs is determined by the performance of the reference credit. Payouts can be triggered by a number of events, including a default, a rating downgrade or a stipulated change in the credit spread of the reference asset.
                           (e)   Commodity: These derivatives are contracts that have a return, or a portion of their return, linked to the price of, or to a price index of, a commodity such as a precious metal (other than gold), petroleum, lumber or agricultural products.
                           (f)   Other: These derivatives are any other derivative contracts, which do not involve an exposure to foreign exchange, interest rate, equity, commodity or credit risk such as climatic derivatives or insurance derivatives.

                           68.

                           When a derivative is influenced by more than one type of underlying risk, the instrument shall be allocated to the most sensitive type of risk. For multi-exposure derivatives, in cases of uncertainty, the deals shall be allocated according to the following order of precedence:
                           (a)   Commodities: All derivatives transactions involving a commodity or commodity index exposure, whether or not they involve a joint exposure in commodities and any other risk category which may include foreign exchange, interest rate or equity, shall be reported in this category.
                           (b)   Equities: With the exception of contracts with a joint exposure to commodities and equities, which are to be reported as commodities, all derivatives transactions with a link to the performance of equities or equity indices shall be reported in the equity category. Equity deals with exposure to foreign exchange or interest rates should be included in this category.
                           (c)   Foreign exchange and gold: This category includes all derivatives transactions (with the exception of those already reported in the commodity or equity categories) with exposure to more than one currency, be it pertaining either to interest-bearing financial instruments or exchange rates.

                     10.2.   Amounts to be reported for derivatives

                           69.

                           The “carrying amount” for all derivatives (hedging or trading) is the fair value. Derivatives with a positive fair value (above zero) are “financial assets” and derivatives with a negative fair value (below zero) are “financial liabilities”. The “carrying amount” shall be reported separately for derivatives with a positive fair value (“financial assets”) and for those with a negative fair value (“financial liabilities”). At the date of initial recognition, a derivative is classified as “financial asset” or “financial liability” according to its initial fair value. After initial recognition, as the fair value of a derivative increases or decreases, the terms of the exchange may become either favourable to the institution (and the derivative is classified as “financial asset”) or unfavourable (and the derivative is classified as “financial liability”).

                           70.

                           The “Notional amount” is the gross nominal of all deals concluded and not yet settled at the reference date. In particular, the following shall be taken account to determine the notional amount:

                                       (a)

                                       For contracts with variable nominal or notional principal amounts, the basis for reporting is the nominal or notional principal amounts at the reference date;

                                       (b)

                                       The notional amount value to be reported for a derivative contract with a multiplier component is the contract effective notional amount or par value;

                                       (c)

                                       Swaps: The notional amount of a swap is the underlying principal amount upon which the exchange of interest, foreign exchange or other income or expense is based;

                                       (d)

                                       Equity and commodity-linked contracts: The notional amount to be reported for an equity or commodity contract is the quantity of the commodity or equity product contracted for purchase or sale multiplied by the contract price of a unit. The notional amount to be reported for commodity contracts with multiple exchanges of principal is the contractual amount multiplied by the number of remaining exchanges of principal in the contract;

                                       (e)

                                       Credit derivatives: The contract amount to be reported for credit derivatives is the nominal value of the relevant reference credit;

                                       (f)

                                       Digital options have a predefined payoff which can be either a monetary amount or a number of contracts of an underlying. The notional amount for digital options is defined as either the predefined monetary amount or the fair value of the underlying at the reference date.

                           71.

                           The column “Notional amount” of derivatives includes, for each line item, the sum of the notional amounts of all contracts in which the institution is counterparty, independently of whether the derivatives are considered assets or liabilities on the face of the balance sheet. All notional amounts shall be reported regardless whether the fair value of derivatives is positive, negative or equal to zero. Netting among the notional amounts is not allowed.

                           72.

                           The “Notional amount” shall be reported by “total” and by “of which: sold” for the line items: “OTC options”, “Organised market options”, “Commodity” and “Other”. The item “of which sold” includes the notional amounts (strike price) of the contracts in which the counterparties (option holders) of the institution (option writer) have the right to exercise the option and for the items related to credit risk derivatives, the notional amounts of the contracts in which the institution (protection seller) has sold (gives) protection to their counterparties (protection buyers).

                     10.3.   Derivatives classified as “economic hedges”

                           73.

                           Derivatives that are not effective hedging instruments in accordance with IAS 39 should be included in the “held for trading” portfolio. This applies also to derivatives held for hedging purposes not meeting the requirements in IAS 39 to be effective hedging instruments as well as to derivatives linked to unquoted equity instruments whose fair value cannot be measured reliably.

                           74.

                           Derivatives “held for trading” that meet the definition of “economic hedges” shall be reported separately for each type of risk. The item “economic hedges” includes those derivatives that are classified as “held for trading” but they are not part of the trading book as defined in Article 4(1)(86) of CRR. This item does not include derivatives for proprietary trading.

                     10.4.   Breakdown of derivatives by counterparty sector

                           75.

                           The carrying amount and the total notional amount of derivatives held for trading, and also of derivatives held for hedge accounting, which are traded in the OTC market, shall be reported by counterparty using the following categories:

                                       (a)

                                       “credit institutions”,

                                       (b)

                                       “other financial corporations”, and

                                       (c)

                                       “rest” comprising all other counterparties.

                           76.

                           All OTC derivatives, without regarding the type of risk to which they are related, shall be broken down by these counterparties. Counterparty breakdown for credit risk derivatives refers to the sector where the counterparty of the institution in the contract (buyer or seller of protection) is allocated.

                     11.   MOVEMENTS IN ALLOWANCES FOR CREDIT LOSSES AND IMPAIRMENT OF EQUITY INSTRUMENTS (12)

                           77.

                           “Increases due to amounts set aside for estimated loan losses during the period” shall be reported when, for the main category of assets or the counterparty, the estimation of the impairment for the period result in the recognition of net expenses; that is, for the given category or counterparty, the increases in the impairment for the period exceed the decreases. “Decreases due to amounts reversed for estimated loan losses during the period” shall be reported when, for the main category of assets or counterparty, the estimation of the impairment for the period result in the recognition of net income; that is, for the given category or counterparty, the decreases in the impairment for the period exceed the increases.

                           78.

                           As explained in paragraph 50 of this Part, “write-offs” may be done either by recognising directly in the statement of profit or loss the reduction in the amount of the financial asset (without using an allowance account) or by reducing the amount of the allowance accounts related to a financial asset. “Decreases due to amounts taken against allowances” means decreases in the accumulated amount of allowances due to “write-offs” made during the period because the related debt instruments are considered uncollectible. “Value adjustments recorded directly to the statement of profit or loss” are “write-offs” made during the period directly against the amount of the related financial asset.

                     12.   COLLATERAL AND GUARANTEES RECEIVED (13)
               12.1.   Breakdown of loans and advances by collateral and guarantees (13.1)

                           79.

                           The pledges and guarantees backing the loans and advances shall be reported by type of pledges: mortgage loans and other collateralised loans, and by financial guarantees. The loans and advances shall be broken down by counterparties.

                           80.

                           In template 13.1, the “maximum amount of the collateral or guarantee that can be considered” shall be reported. The sum of the amounts of a financial guarantee and/or collateral shown in the related columns of template 13.1 shall not exceed the carrying amount of the related loan.

                           81.

                           For reporting loans and advances according to the type of pledge the following definitions shall be used:

                                       (a)

                                       within “Mortgage loans [Loans collateralised by immovable property]”, “Residential” includes loans secured by residential immovable property and “Commercial” loans secured by pledges of commercial immovable property; in both cases as defined in CRR;

                                       (b)

                                       within “Other collateralised loans”, “Cash [Debt instruments issued]” includes pledges of deposits in or debt securities issued by the institution, and “Rest” includes pledges of other securities or assets. The term institution must be understood here as referring to the institution providing the debt security to be used as collateral (which issues it actually) and receiving the loan and advance; not to the reporting institution, which is the one which receives the collateral and grants the loan and advance;

                                       (c)

                                       “Financial guarantees received” include contracts that require the issuer to make specified payments to reimburse the institution of a loss it incurs, because a specified debtor fails to make payment when due in accordance with the original or modified terms of a debt instrument.

                           82.

                           For loans and advances that have simultaneously more than one type of collateral or guarantee, the amount of the “Maximum collateral/guarantee that can be considered” shall be allocated according to its quality starting from the one with the best quality.

                     12.2.   Collateral obtained by taking possession during the period [held at the reporting date] (13.2)

                           83.

                           This template includes the carrying amount of the collateral that has been obtained between the beginning and the end of the reference period and that remain recognised in the balance sheet at the reference date.

                     12.3.   Collateral obtained by taking possession [tangible assets] accumulated (13.3)

                           84.

                           “Foreclosure [tangible assets]” is the cumulative carrying amount of tangible assets obtained by taking possession of collateral that remains recognised in the balance sheet at the reference date excluding those classified as “Property, plant and equipment”.

                     13.   FAIR VALUE HIERARCHY: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AT FAIR VALUE (14)

                           85.

                           Institutions shall report the value of financial instruments measured at fair value according to the hierarchy provided by in IFRS 13.72.

                           86.

                           “Change in fair value for the period” shall include gains or losses from re-measurements in the period of the instruments that continue to exist at the reporting date. These gains and losses are reported as for inclusion in the statement of profit or loss; thus, the amounts reported are before taxes.

                           87.

                           “Accumulated change in fair value before taxes” shall include the amount of gains or losses from re-measurements of the instruments accumulated from the initial recognition to the reference date.

                     14.   DERECOGNITION AND FINANCIAL LIABILITIES ASSOCIATED WITH TRANSFERRED FINANCIAL ASSETS (15)

                           88.

                           Template 15 includes information on transferred financial assets of which part or all do not qualify for de-recognition, and financial assets entirely derecognised for which the institution retains servicing rights.

                           89.

                           The associated liabilities shall be reported according to the portfolio in which the related transferred financial assets were included in the assets side and not according to the portfolio in which they were included in the liability side.

                           90.

                           The column “Amounts derecognised for capital purposes” includes the carrying amount of the financial assets recognised for accounting purposes but derecognised for prudential purposes because the institution is treating them as securitisation positions for capital purposes in accordance with Article 109 of CRR since significant credit risk has been transferred according to the articles 243 and 244 of CRR.

                           91.

                           “Repurchase agreements” (“repos”) are transactions in which the institution receives cash in exchange for financial assets sold at a given price under a commitment to repurchase the same (or identical) assets at a fixed price on a specified future date. Transactions involving the temporary transfer of gold against cash collateral shall also be considered “Repurchase agreements” (“repos”). Amounts received by the institution in exchange for financial assets transferred to a third party (“temporary acquirer”) shall be classified under “repurchase agreements” where there is a commitment to reverse the operation and not merely an option to do so. Repurchase agreements also include repo-type operations which may include:

                                       (a)

                                       Amounts received in exchange for securities temporarily transferred to a third party in the form of securities lending against cash collateral;

                                       (b)

                                       Amounts received in exchange for securities temporarily transferred to a third party in the form of sale/buy-back agreement.

                           92.

                           “Repurchase agreements” (“repos”) and “reverse repurchase loans” (“reverse repos”) involve cash received or loaned out by the institution.

                           93.

                           In a securitisation transaction, when the transferred financial assets are derecognized, institutions shall declare the gains (losses) generated by the item within the income statement corresponding to the “accounting portfolios” in which the financial assets were included prior to their de-recognition.

                     15.   BREAKDOWN OF SELECTED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS ITEMS (16)

                           94.

                           For selected items of the income statement further breakdowns of gains (or income) and losses (or expenses) shall be reported.

                     15.1.   Interest income and expenses by instrument and counterparty sector (16.1)

                           95.

                           The interests shall be broken down both by interest income on financial and other assets and interest expenses on financial and other liabilities. Interest income on financial assets includes interest income on derivatives held for trading, debt securities, and loans and advances. Interest expenses on financial liabilities includes interest expenses on derivatives held for trading, deposits, debt securities issued and other financial liabilities. For the purpose of template 16.1, short positions shall be considered within other financial liabilities. All instruments in the various portfolios are taken into account except those included in the items “Derivatives — Hedge accounting” not used to hedge interest rate risk.

                           96.

                           Interest on derivatives held for trading includes the amounts related to those derivatives held for trading which qualify as “economic hedges” that are included as interest income or expenses to correct the income and expense of the hedged financial instruments from an economic but not accounting point of view.

                     15.2.   Gains or losses on de-recognition of financial assets and liabilities not measured at fair value through profit or loss by instrument (16.2)

                           97.

                           Gains and losses on de-recognition of financial assets and financial liabilities not measured at fair value through profit or loss shall be broken down by type of financial instrument and by accounting portfolio. For each item, the net realised gain or loss stemming from the derecognised transaction shall be reported. The net amount represents the difference between realised gains and realised losses.

                     15.3.   Gains or losses on financial assets and liabilities held for trading by instrument (16.3)

                           98.

                           Gains and losses on financial assets and liabilities held for trading shall be broken down by type of instrument; each item of the breakdown is the net realised and unrealised amount (gains minus losses) of the financial instrument.

                     15.4.   Gains or losses on financial assets and liabilities held for trading by risk (16.4)

                           99.

                           Gains and losses on financial assets and financial liabilities held for trading shall also be broken down by type of risk; each item of the breakdown is the net realised and unrealised amount (gains minus losses) of the underlying risk (interest rate, equity, foreign exchange, credit, commodity and other) associated to the exposure, including related derivatives. Gains and losses from exchange differences shall be included in the item in which the rest of gains and losses arising from the converted instrument are included. Gains and losses on assets and liabilities other than derivatives shall be included as follows:

                                       (a)

                                       Interest rate instruments: including trading of loans and advances, deposits and debt securities (held or issued);

                                       (b)

                                       Equity instruments: including trading of shares, quotas of UCITS and other equity instruments;

                                       (c)

                                       Foreign exchange trading: including exclusively trading on foreign exchanges;

                                       (d)

                                       Credit risk instruments: including trading of credit link notes;

                                       (e)

                                       Commodities: this item includes only derivatives because commodities held with trading intent shall be reported under “Other assets” not under “Financial assets held for trading”.

                                       (f)

                                       Other: including trading of financial instruments which cannot be classified in other breakdowns.

                     15.5.   Gains or losses on financial assets and liabilities designated at fair value to profit or loss by instrument (16.5)

                           100.

                           Gains and losses on financial assets and liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss shall be broken down by type of instrument. Institutions shall report the net realised and unrealised and the amount of change in fair value in the period due to changes in the credit risk (own credit risk of the borrower or issuer).

                     15.6.   Gains or losses from hedge accounting (16.6)

                           101.

                           Gains and losses from hedge accounting shall be broken down by type of hedge accounting: fair value hedge, cash flow hedge and hedge of net investments in foreign operations. Gains and losses related to fair value hedge shall be broken down between the hedging instrument and the hedged item.

                     15.7.   Impairment on financial and non-financial assets (16.7)

                           102.

                           “Additions” shall be reported when, for the accounting portfolio or main category of assets, the estimation of the impairment for the period results in recognition of net expenses. “Reversals” shall be reported when, for the accounting portfolio or main category of assets, the estimation of the impairment for the period result in the recognition of net income.

                     16.   RECONCILIATION BETWEEN ACCOUNTING AND CRR SCOPE OF CONSOLIDATION (17)

                           103.

                           “Accounting scope of consolidation” includes the carrying amount of assets, liabilities and equity as well as the nominal amounts of the off-balance sheet exposures prepared using the accounting scope of consolidation; that is, including in the consolidation insurance undertakings and non-financial corporations.

                           104.

                           In this template, the item “Investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates” shall not include subsidiaries as with the accounting scope of consolidation all subsidiaries are fully consolidated

                           105.

                           “Assets under reinsurance and insurance contracts” shall include assets under reinsurance ceded as well as, if any, assets related to insurance and reinsurance contracts issued.

                           106.

                           Liabilities under insurance and reinsurance contracts' shall include liabilities under insurance and reinsurance contracts issued.

                     17.   GEOGRAPHICAL BREAKDOWN (20)

                           107.

                           Template 20 shall be reported when the institution exceeds the threshold described in Article 5.1(a)(iv). The geographical breakdown by location of the activities in templates 20.1 to 20.3 distinguishes between “domestic activities” and “non-domestic activities”. “Location” means the jurisdiction of incorporation of the legal entity which has recognized the corresponding asset or liability; for branches, it means the jurisdiction of its residence. For these purposes, “Domestic” shall include the activities recognised in Member State where the institution is located.

                           108.

                           Templates 20.4 to 20.7 contain information “country-by-country” on the basis of the residence of the immediate counterparty. The breakdown provided shall include exposures or liabilities with residents in each foreign country in which the institution has exposures. Exposures or liabilities with supranational organisations shall not be assigned to the country of residence of the institution but to the geographical area “Other countries”.

                           109.

                           In template 20.4 for debt instruments, “gross carrying amount” shall be reported as defined in paragraph 45 of Part 2. For derivatives and equity instruments, the amount to be reported is the carrying amount. “Of which: Non-performing” loans and advances shall be reported as defined in paragraphs 145 to 157 of this Annex. Debt forbearance comprises all “debt” contracts for the purpose of template 19 to which forbearance measures, as defined in paragraphs 163 to 179 of this Annex, are extended. Template 20.7 shall be reported with the classification by NACE Codes on a “country-by-country” basis. NACE Codes shall be reported with the first level of disaggregation (by “section”).

                     18.   TANGIBLE AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS: ASSETS SUBJECT TO OPERATING LEASE (21)

                           110.

                           For the purposes of the calculation of the threshold in Article 9(e) tangible assets that have been leased by the institution (lessor) to third parties in agreements that qualify as operating leases under the relevant accounting framework shall be divided by total of tangible assets.

                           111.

                           Under IFRS or compatible National GAAP, assets that have been leased by the institution (as lessor) to third parties in operating leases shall be reported broken down by measurement method.

                     19.   ASSET MANAGEMENT, CUSTODY AND OTHER SERVICE FUNCTIONS (22)

                           112.

                           For the purposes of the calculation of the threshold in Article 9(f), the amount of “net fee and commission income” is the absolute value of the difference between “fee and commission income” and “fee and commission expense”. For the same purposes, the amount of “net interest” is the absolute value of the difference between “interest income” and “interest expenses”.

                     19.1.   Fee and commission income and expenses by activity (22.1)

                           113.

                           The fee and commission income and expenses shall be reported by type of activity. Under IFRS or compatible National GAAP, this template includes fee and commission income and expenses other than:

                                       (a)

                                       amounts considered for the calculation of the effective interest of financial instruments [IFRS 7.20.(c)] and

                                       (b)

                                       amounts arising from financial instruments that are measured at fair value through profit or loss [IFRS 7.20.(c).(i)].

                           114.

                           Transaction costs directly attributable to the acquisition or issue of financial instruments not measured at fair value through profit or loss shall not be included; they form part of the initial acquisition/issue value of these instruments and are amortised to profit or loss over their residual life using the effective interest rate [see IAS 39.43].

                           115.

                           Transaction costs directly attributable to the acquisition or issue of financial instruments measured at fair value through profit or loss shall be included as a part of “Gains or losses on financial assets and liabilities held for trading, net” or “Gains or losses on financial assets and liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss, net”. They shall not be part of the initial acquisition or issuance value of these instruments and are immediately recognized in profit or loss.

                           116.

                           Institutions shall report fee and commission income and expenses according to the following criteria:

                                       (a)

                                       “Securities. Issuances” includes fees and commissions received for the involvement in the origination or issuance of securities not originated or issued by the institution;

                                       (b)

                                       “Securities. Transfer orders” includes fees and commissions generated by the reception, transmission and execution on behalf of customers of orders to buy or sell securities;

                                       (c)

                                       “Securities. Other” includes fees and commissions generated by the institution providing other services related with securities not originated or issued by the institution;

                                       (d)

                                       “Clearing and settlement” includes fee and commission income (expenses) generated by (charged to) the institution when participating in counterparty, clearing and settlement facilities;

                                       (e)

                                       “Asset management”, “Custody”, “Central administrative services for collective investment undertakings”, “Fiduciary transactions”, “Payment services” include fee and commission income (expenses) generated by (charged to) the institution when providing these services;

                                       (f)

                                       “Structured finance” includes fees and commissions received for the involvement in the origination or issuance of financial instruments other than securities originated or issued by the institution;

                                       (g)

                                       “Servicing fees from securitisation activities” includes, on the income side, the fee and commission income generated by the institution providing loan servicing services and on the expense side, the fee and commission expense charged to the institution by loan service providers;

                                       (h)

                                       “Loan commitments given” and “Financial guarantees given” include the amount, recognized as income during the period, of the amortization of the fees and commission for these activities initially recognised as “other financial liabilities”;

                                       (i)

                                       “Loan commitments received” and “Financial guarantees received” include the fee and commission expense recognised by the institution as a consequence of the charge made by the counterparty that has given the loan commitment or the financial guarantee;

                                       (j)

                                       “Other” includes the rest of fee and commission income (expenses) generated by (charged to) the institution such as those derived from “other commitments”, from foreign exchange services (such as exchange of foreign banknotes or coins) or from providing (receiving) other fee-based advice and services.

                     19.2.   Assets involved in the services provided (22.2)

                           117.

                           Business related to asset management, custody functions, and other services provided by the institution shall be reported using the following definitions:

                                       (a)

                                       “Asset management” refers to assets belonging directly to the customers, for which the institution is providing management. “Asset management” shall be reported by type of customer: collective investment undertakings, pension funds, customer portfolios managed on a discretionary basis, and other investment vehicles;

                                       (b)

                                       “Custody assets” refers to the services of safekeeping and administration of financial instruments for the account of clients provided by the institution and services related to custodianship such as cash and collateral management. “Custody assets” shall be reported by type of customers for which the institution is holding the assets distinguishing between collective investment undertakings and others. The item “of which: entrusted to other entities” refers to the amount of assets included in custody assets for which the institution has given the effective custody to other entities;

                                       (c)

                                       “Central administrative services for collective investment” refers to the administrative services provided by the institution to collective investment undertakings. It includes, among others, the services of transfer agent; of compiling accounting documents; of preparing the prospectus, financial reports and all other documents intended for investors; of carrying out the correspondence by distributing financial reports and all other documents intended for investors; of carrying out issues and redemptions and keeping the register of investors; as well as of calculating the net asset value;

                                       (d)

                                       “Fiduciary transactions” refers to the activities where the institution acts in its own name but for the account and at the risk of its customers. Frequently, in fiduciary transactions, the institution provides services, such as custody asset management services to a structured entity or managing portfolios on a discretionary basis. All fiduciary transactions shall be reported exclusively in this item without regarding whether the institution provides additionally other services;

                                       (e)

                                       “Payment services” refers to the collection on behalf of customers of payments generated by debt instruments that are neither recognised on the balance sheet of the institution nor originated by it;

                                       (f)

                                       “Customer resources distributed but not managed” refers to products issued by entities outside the group that the institution has distributed to its current customers. This item shall be reported by type of product;

                                       (g)

                                       “Amount of the assets involved in the services provided” includes the amount of assets in relation to which the institution is acting, using the fair value. Other measurement bases including nominal value may be used if the fair value is not available. In those cases where the institution provides services to entities such as collective investment undertakings, pension funds, the assets concerned may be shown at the value at which these entities report the assets in their own balance sheet. Reported amounts shall include accrued interest, if appropriate.

                     20.   INTERESTS IN UNCONSOLIDATED STRUCTURED ENTITIES (30)

                           118.

                           “Liquidity support drawn” shall mean the sum of the carrying amount of the loan and advances granted to unconsolidated structured entities and the carrying amount of debt securities held that have been issued by unconsolidated structured entities.

                     21.   RELATED PARTIES (31)

                           119.

                           Institutions shall report amounts and/or transactions related to the balance sheet and the off-balance sheet exposures where the counterparty is a related party.

                           120.

                           Intra-group transactions and intra-group outstanding balances shall be eliminated. Under “Subsidiaries and other entities of the same group”, institutions shall include balances and transactions with subsidiaries that have not been eliminated either because the subsidiaries are not fully consolidated with the prudential scope of consolidation or because, in accordance with Article 19 of CRR, the subsidiaries are excluded from the scope of prudential consolidation for being immaterial or because, for institutions that are part of a bigger group, the subsidiaries are of the ultimate parent not of the institution. Under “Associates and joint ventures”, institutions shall include the portions of balances and transactions with joint ventures and associates of the group to which the entity belongs that have not been eliminated when either proportional consolidation or the equity method is applied.

                     21.1.   Related parties: amounts payable to and amounts receivable from (31.1)

                           121.

                           For “Loan commitments, financial guarantees and other commitments received”, the amount that shall be reported is the sum of the “nominal” of loan commitments received, the “maximum collateral/guarantee that can be considered” of financial guarantees received and the “nominal” of the other commitments received.

                     21.2.   Related parties: expenses and income generated by transactions with (31.2)

                           122.

                           “Gains or losses on de-recognition of non-financial assets” shall include all the gains and losses on de-recognition of non-financial assets generated by transactions with related parties. This item shall include the gains and losses on de-recognition of non-financial assets, which have been generated by transactions with related parties and that are part of the following line items of the “Statement of profit or loss”:

                                       (a)

                                       “Gains or losses on de-recognition of investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates”;

                                       (b)

                                       “Gains or losses on de-recognition of non-financial assets other than held for sale”;

                                       (c)

                                       “Profit or loss from non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale not qualifying as discontinued operations”, and;

                                       (d)

                                       “Profit or loss after tax from discontinued operations”.

                     22.   GROUP STRUCTURE (40)

                           123.

                           Institutions shall provide detailed information on subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates as of the reporting date. All subsidiaries regardless the activity they perform shall be reported. Securities classified as “Financial assets held for trading”, “Financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss”, “Available-for-sale financial assets” and Treasury shares, that is to say, own shares of reporting institution owned by it, shall be excluded from the scope of this template.

                     22.1.   Group structure: “entity-by-entity” (40.1)

                           124.

                           The following information shall be reported on a “entity-by-entity” basis:

                                       (a)

                                       “LEI code” includes the LEI code of the investee;

                                       (b)

                                       “Entity code” includes the identification code of the investee. The entity code is a row identifier and shall be unique for each row in template 40.1.

                                       (c)

                                       “Entity name” includes the name of the investee;

                                       (d)

                                       “Entry date” means the date in which the investee entered within the “scope of the group”;

                                       (e)

                                       “Share capital” means the total amount of capital issued by the investee as at the reference date;

                                       (f)

                                       “Equity of Investee”, “Total assets of the Investee” and “Profit or (loss) of the Investee” include the amounts of these items in the last financial statements of the investee;

                                       (g)

                                       “Residence of investee” means the country of residence of the investee.

                                       (h)

                                       “Sector of investee” means the sector of counterparty as defined in paragraph 35 of Part 1;

                                       (i)

                                       “NACE code” shall be provided on the basis of the principal activity of the investee. For non-financial corporations, NACE codes shall be reported with the first level of disaggregation (by “section”); for financial corporations, NACE codes shall be reported with a two level detail (by “division”);

                                       (j)

                                       “Accumulated equity interest (%)” is the percentage of ownership instruments held by the institution as of the reference date;

                                       (k)

                                       “Voting rights (%)” means the percentages of voting rights associated to the ownership instruments held by the institution as of the reference date.

                                       (l)

                                       “Group structure [relationship]” shall indicate the relationship between the parent and the investee (subsidiary, joint venture or associate);

                                       (m)

                                       “Accounting treatment [Accounting Group]” shall indicate the accounting treatment with the accounting scope of consolidation (full consolidation, proportional consolidation, equity method or other);

                                       (n)

                                       “Accounting treatment [CRR Group]” shall indicate the accounting treatment with the CRR scope of consolidation (full consolidation, proportional consolidation, equity method or other);

                                       (o)

                                       “Carrying amount” means amounts reported on the balance sheet of the institution for investees that are neither fully nor proportionally consolidated;

                                       (p)

                                       “Acquisition cost” means the amount paid by the investors;

                                       (q)

                                       “Goodwill link to the investee” means the amount of goodwill reported on the consolidated balance sheet of the institution for the investee in the items “goodwill” or “investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associated”;

                                       (r)

                                       “Fair value of the investments for which there are published price quotations” means the price at the reference date; it shall be provided only if the instruments are quoted.

                     22.2.   Group structure: “instrument-by-instrument” (40.2)

                           125.

                           The following information shall be reported on an “instrument-by-instrument” basis:

                                       (a)

                                       “Security code” includes the ISIN code of the security. For securities without ISIN code assigned, it includes another code that uniquely identifies the security. “Security code” and “Holding company code” are a composite row identifier, and together shall be unique for each row in template 40.2;

                                       (b)

                                       “Holding company code” is the identification code of the entity within the group that holds the investment;

                                       (c)

                                       “Entity code”, “Accumulated equity interest (%)”, “Carrying amount” and “Acquisition cost” are defined above. The amounts shall correspond to the security held by the related holding company.

                     23.   FAIR VALUE (41)
               23.1.   Fair value hierarchy: financial instruments at amortised cost (41.1)

                           126.

                           Information on the fair value of financial instruments measured at amortised cost, using the hierarchy in IFRS 7.27 A shall be reported in this template.

                     23.2.   Use of fair value option (41.2)

                           127.

                           Information on the use of fair value option for financial assets and liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss shall be reported in this template. “Hybrid contracts” includes the carrying amount of hybrid financial instruments classified, as a whole, in these accounting portfolios; that is, it includes non-separated hybrid instruments in their entirely.

                     23.3.   Hybrid financial instruments not designated at fair value through profit or loss (41.3)

                           128.

                           In this template shall be reported information on hybrid financial instruments with the exception of those hybrid contracts measured at fair value through profit or loss under the “fair value option” that are reported in template 41.2.

                           129.

                           “Held for trading” includes the carrying amount of hybrid financial instruments classified, as a whole, as “financial assets held for trading” or “financial liabilities held for trading”; that is it includes non-separated hybrid instruments in their entirely.

                           130.

                           The other rows include the carrying amount of the host contracts that have been separated from the embedded derivatives according to the relevant accounting framework. The carrying amounts of the embedded derivatives separated from these host contracts, in accordance with the relevant accounting framework, shall be reported in templates 10 and 11.

                     24.   TANGIBLE AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS: CARRYING AMOUNT BY MEASUREMENT METHOD (42)

                           131.

                           “Property, plant and equipment”, “Investment property” and “Other intangible assets” shall be reported by the criteria used in their measurement.

                           132.

                           “Other intangible assets” include all other intangible assets than goodwill.

                     25.   PROVISIONS (43)

                           133.

                           This template includes reconciliation between the carrying amount of the item “Provisions” at the beginning and end of the period by the nature of the movements.

                     26.   DEFINED BENEFIT PLANS AND EMPLOYEE BENEFITS (44)

                           134.

                           These templates include accumulated information of all defined benefit plans of the institution. When there is more than one defined benefit plan, aggregated amount of all plans shall be reported.

                     26.1.   Components of net defined benefit plan assets and liabilities (44.1)

                           135.

                           “Components of net defined benefit plan assets and liabilities” shows the reconciliation of the accumulated present value of all net defined benefit liabilities (assets) as well as reimbursement rights [IAS 19.140 (a), (b)].

                           136.

                           “Net defined benefit assets” includes, in the event of a surplus, the surplus amounts that shall be recognized in the balance sheet as they are not affected by the limits set up in IAS 19.63. The amount of this item and the amount recognized in the memo item “Fair value of any right to reimbursement recognized as asset” are included in the item “Other assets” of the balance sheet.

                     26.2.   Movements in defined benefit obligations (44.2)

                           137.

                           “Movements in defined benefit obligations” shows the reconciliation of opening and closing balances of the accumulated present value of all defined benefit obligations of the institution. The effects of the different elements listed in IAS 19.141 during the period are presented separately.

                           138.

                           The amount of “Closing balance [present value]” in the template for movements in defined benefit obligations shall be equal to “Present value defined benefit obligations”.

                     26.3.   Memo items [related to staff expenses] (44.3)

                           139.

                           For reporting of memorandum items related to staff expenses, the following definitions shall be used:

                                       (a)

                                       “Pension and similar expenses” includes the amount recognized in the period as staff expenses for any post — employment benefit obligations (both defined contributions plans and defined benefits plans) and contributions to social security funds.

                                       (b)

                                       “Share based payments” include the amount recognized in the period as staff expenses for share based payments.

                     27.   BREAKDOWN OF SELECTED ITEMS OF STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS (45)
               27.1.   Gains or losses on de-recognition of non-financial assets other than held-for-sale (45.2)

                           140.

                           Gains and losses on de-recognition of non-financial assets other than held for sale shall be broken down by type of asset; each line item shall include the gain or the loss on the asset (such as property, software, hardware, gold, investment) that has been derecognised.

                     27.2.   Other operating income and expenses (45.3)

                           141.

                           Other operating income and expenses shall be broken down according to the following items: fair value adjustments on tangible assets measured using the fair value model; rental income and direct operating expenses from investment property; income and expenses on operating leases other than investment property and the rest of operating income and expenses.

                           142.

                           “Operating leases other than investment property” includes, for the column “income”, the returns obtained, and for the column “expenses” the costs incurred by the institution as lessor in their operating leasing activities other than those with assets classified as investment property. The costs for the institution as lessee shall be included in the item “Other administrative expenses”.

                           143.

                           Gains or losses from remeasurements of holdings of precious metals and other commodities measured at fair value less cost to sell shall be reported among the items included in “Other operating income. Other” or “Other operating expenses. Other”

                     28.   STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY (46)

                           144.

                           The statement of changes in equity discloses the reconciliation between the carrying amount at the beginning of the period (opening balance) and the end of the period (closing balance) for each component of equity.

                     29.   NON-PERFORMING EXPOSURES (18)

                           145.

                           For the purpose of template 18, non-performing exposures are those that satisfy any of the following criteria:

                                       (a)

                                       material exposures which are more than 90 days past due;

                                       (b)

                                       the debtor is assessed as unlikely to pay its credit obligations in full without realisation of collateral, regardless of the existence of any past due amount or of the number of days past due.

                           146.

                           That categorisation as non-performing exposures shall apply notwithstanding the classification of an exposure as defaulted for regulatory purposes in accordance with Article 178 of CRR or as impaired for accounting purposes in accordance with the applicable accounting framework.

                           147.

                           Exposures in respect of which a default is considered to have occurred in accordance with Article 178 CRR and exposures that have been found impaired in accordance with the applicable accounting framework shall always be considered as non-performing exposures. Exposures with “collective allowances for incurred but not reported losses” referred to in paragraph 38 of this Annex shall not be considered as non-performing exposures unless they meet the criteria to be considered as non-performing exposures.

                           148.

                           Exposures shall be categorised for their entire amount and without taking into account the existence of any collateral. Materiality shall be assessed in accordance with Article 178 of CRR.

                           149.

                           For the purpose of template 18, “exposures” includes all debt instruments (loans and advances which include also cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits and debt securities) and off-balance sheet exposures, except those held for trading exposures. Off-balance sheet exposures comprise the following revocable and irrevocable items:

                                       (a)

                                       loan commitments given;

                                       (b)

                                       financial guarantees given;

                                       (c)

                                       other commitments given.

                                 Exposures include non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale in accordance with IFRS 5.

                           150.

                           For the purpose of template 18, an exposure is “past-due” when any amount of principal, interest or fee has not been paid at the date it was due.

                           151.

                           For the purpose of template 18, “debtor” means an obligor within the meaning of Article 178 of CRR.

                           152.

                           A commitment shall be considered as a non-performing exposure for its nominal amount where, when drawn down or otherwise used, it would lead to exposures that present a risk of not being paid back in full without realisation of collateral.

                           153.

                           Financial guarantees given shall be considered as non-performing exposures for their nominal amount where the financial guarantee is at risk of being called by the counterparty (“guaranteed party”), including, in particular, where the underlying guaranteed exposure meets the criteria to be considered as non-performing, referred to in paragraph 145. Where the guaranteed party is past-due on the amount due under the financial guarantee contract, the reporting institution shall assess whether the resulting receivable meets the non-performing criteria.

                           154.

                           Exposures classified as non-performing in accordance with paragraph 145 shall be categorised as either non-performing on an individual basis (“transaction based”) or as non-performing for the overall exposure to a given debtor (“debtor based”). For the categorisation of non-performing exposures on an individual basis or to a given debtor, the following categorisation approaches shall be used for the different types of non-performing exposures:

                                       (a)

                                       for non-performing exposures classified as defaulted in accordance with Article 178 of CRR, the categorisation approach of Article 178 shall be applied;

                                       (b)

                                       for exposures that are classified as non-performing due to impairment under the applicable accounting framework, the recognition criteria for impairment under the applicable accounting framework shall be applied;

                                       (c)

                                       for other non-performing exposures that are neither classified as defaulted nor as impaired, the provisions of Article 178 of CRR for defaulted exposures shall be applied.

                           155.

                           Where an institution has on-balance sheet exposures to a debtor that are past due by more than 90 days and the gross carrying amount of the past due exposures represents more than 20 % of the gross carrying amount of all on-balance sheet exposures to that debtor, all on- and off-balance sheet exposures to that debtor shall be considered as non-performing. When a debtor belongs to a group, the need to also consider exposures to other entities of the group as non-performing shall be assessed, where they are not already considered as impaired or defaulted in accordance with Article 178 of CRR, except for exposures affected by isolated disputes that are unrelated to the solvency of the counterparty.

                           156.

                           Exposures shall be considered to have ceased being non-performing when all of the following conditions are met:

                                       (a)

                                       the exposure meets the exit criteria applied by the reporting institution for the discontinuation of the impairment and default classification;

                                       (b)

                                       the situation of the debtor has improved to the extent that full repayment, according to the original or when applicable the modified conditions, is likely to be made;

                                       (c)

                                       the debtor does not have any amount past-due by more than 90 days.

                                 An exposure shall remain classified as non-performing while those conditions are not met, even though the exposure has already met the discontinuation criteria applied by the reporting institution for the impairment and default classification according to the applicable accounting framework and Article 178 of CRR respectively.
                           The classification of a non-performing exposure as non-current asset held for sale in accordance with IFRS 5 does not discontinue their classification as non-performing exposure, as non-current assets held for sale are included in the scope of definition of non-performing exposures.

                           157.

                           In case of non-performing exposures with forbearance measures (6), those exposures shall be considered to have ceased being non-performing where all the following conditions are met:

                                       (a)

                                       exposures are not considered to be impaired or defaulted;

                                       (b)

                                       one year has passed since the forbearance measures were applied;

                                       (c)

                                       there is not, following the forbearance measures, any past-due amount or concern regarding the full repayment of the exposure according to the post-forbearance conditions. The absence of concerns shall be determined after an analysis of the debtor's financial situation by the institution. Concerns may be considered as no longer existing where the debtor has paid, via its regular payments in accordance with the post-forbearance conditions, a total equal to the amount that was previously past-due (where there were past-due amounts) or that has been written-off (where there were no past-due amounts) under the forbearance measures or the debtor has otherwise demonstrated its ability to comply with the post-forbearance conditions.

                                 Those specific exit conditions shall apply in addition to the criteria applied by reporting institutions for impaired and defaulted exposures according to the applicable accounting framework and Article 178 of CRR respectively.

                           158.

                           Past due exposures shall be reported separately within the performing and non-performing categories for their entire amount. Performing exposures past due by less than 90 days shall be reported separately for their entire amount.

                           159.

                           Non-performing exposures shall be reported broken down by past due time bands. Exposures that are not past due or are past due by 90 days or less but nevertheless are identified as non-performing due to the likelihood of non-full repayment shall be reported in a dedicated column. Exposures that present both past due amounts and a likelihood of non-full repayment shall be allocated by past-due time bands consistent with the number of days that they are past due.
                           Cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits shall be reported in row 070 as well as in rows 080 and 100 of template 18.
                           Non-performing exposures classified as held for sale in accordance with IFRS 5 shall not be reported in template 18.

                           160.

                           The following exposures shall be identified in separate columns:

                                       (a)

                                       exposures which are considered to be impaired in accordance with the applicable accounting framework, except where they are exposures with incurred but not reported losses;

                                       (b)

                                       exposures in respect of which a default is considered to have occurred in accordance with Article 178 of CRR.

                           161.

                           “Accumulated impairment” and “accumulated changes in fair value due to credit risk” figures shall be reported in accordance with paragraph 46. “Accumulated impairment” means the reduction in the carrying amount of the exposure either directly or through the use of an allowance account. Accumulated impairment reported on non-performing exposures shall not include incurred but not reported losses. Incurred but not reported losses shall be reported in accumulated impairment on performing exposures. “Accumulated changes in fair value due to credit risk” shall be reported for exposures designated at fair value through profit and loss in accordance with the applicable accounting framework.

                           162.

                           Information on collateral held and financial guarantee received on non-performing exposures shall be reported separately. Amounts reported for collateral received and financial guarantees received shall be calculated in accordance with paragraphs 79 to 82. Therefore, the sum of the amounts reported for both collateral and financial guarantees shall be capped at the carrying amount of the related exposure.

                     30.   FORBORNE EXPOSURES (19)

                           163.

                           For the purpose of template 19, forborne exposures are debt contracts in respect of which forbearance measures have been applied. Forbearance measures consist of concessions towards a debtor that is experiencing or about to experience difficulties in meeting its financial commitments (“financial difficulties”).

                           164.

                           For the purpose of template 19, a concession refers to either of the following actions:

                                       (a)

                                       a modification of the previous terms and conditions of a contract that the debtor is considered unable to comply with due to its financial difficulties (“troubled debt”) resulting in insufficient debt service ability and that would not have been granted had the debtor not been experiencing financial difficulties;

                                       (b)

                                       a total or partial refinancing of a troubled debt contract, that would not have been granted had the debtor not been experiencing financial difficulties.

                                 A concession may entail a loss for the lender.

                           165.

                           Evidence of a concession includes the following:

                                       (a)

                                       a difference in favour of the debtor between the modified terms of the contract and the previous terms of the contract;

                                       (b)

                                       inclusion in a modified contract of more favourable terms than other debtors with a similar risk profile could have obtained from the same institution at that time.

                           166.

                           The exercise of clauses which, when used at the discretion of the debtor, enable the debtor to change the terms of the contract (“embedded forbearance clauses”) shall be treated as a concession when the institution approves executing those clauses and concludes that the debtor is experiencing financial difficulties.

                           167.

                           “Refinancing” means the use of debt contracts to ensure the total or partial payment of other debt contracts the current terms of which the debtor is unable to comply with.

                           168.

                           For the purpose of template 19, “debtor” includes all the natural and legal entities in the debtor's group which are within the accounting scope of consolidation.

                           169.

                           For the purpose of template 19, “debt” includes loans and advances (which include also cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits), debt securities and revocable and irrevocable loan commitments given, but excludes exposures held for trading. “Debt” includes non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale in accordance with IFRS 5.

                           170.

                           For the purpose of template 19, “exposure” has the same meaning as given for “debt” in paragraph 169.

                           171.

                           For the purpose of template 19, “institution” means the institution which applied the forbearance measures.

                           172.

                           Exposures shall be regarded as forborne where a concession has been made, irrespective of whether any amount is past due or of the classification of the exposures as impaired in accordance with the applicable accounting framework or as defaulted in accordance with Article 178 of CRR. Exposures shall not be treated as forborne where the debtor is not in financial difficulties. Nevertheless the following shall be treated as forbearance measures:

                                       (a)

                                       a modified contract that has been classified as non-performing before the modification or would in the absence of modification be classified as non-performing;

                                       (b)

                                       the modification that has been made to a contract involves a total or partial cancellation by write-offs of the debt;

                                       (c)

                                       the institution approves the use of embedded forbearance clauses for a debtor who is non-performing or who would be considered as non-performing without the use of those clauses;

                                       (d)

                                       simultaneously with or close in time to the concession of additional debt by the institution, the debtor made payments of principal or interest on another contract with the institution that was non-performing or would in the absence of refinancing be classified as non-performing.

                           173.

                           A modification involving repayments made by taking possession of collateral shall be treated as a forbearance measure where that modification constitutes a concession.

                           174.

                           There is a rebuttable presumption that forbearance has taken place in the following circumstances:

                                       (a)

                                       the modified contract was totally or partially past due by more than 30 days (without being non-performing) at least once during the three months prior to its modification or would be more than 30 days past due, totally or partially, without modification;

                                       (b)

                                       simultaneously with or close in time to the concession of additional debt by the institution, the debtor made payments of principal or interest on another contract with the institution that was totally or partially past due by 30 days at least once during the three months prior to its refinancing;

                                       (c)

                                       the institution approves the use of embedded forbearance clauses for 30 days past due debtors or debtors who would be 30 days past due without the exercise of those clauses.

                           175.

                           Financial difficulties shall be assessed at debtor level as referred to in paragraph 168. Only exposures to which forbearance measures have been applied shall be identified as forborne exposures.

                           176.

                           Forborne exposures shall be included within the non-performing exposures category or the performing exposures category in accordance with paragraphs 145 to 162 and 177 to 179. The classification as forborne exposure shall be discontinued when all of the following conditions are met:

                                       (a)

                                       the forborne exposure is considered to be performing, including where it has been reclassified from the non-performing exposures category after an analysis of the financial condition of the debtor showed that it no longer met the conditions to be considered as non-performing;

                                       (b)

                                       a minimum two year probation period has passed from the date the forborne exposure was considered to be performing;

                                       (c)

                                       regular payments of more than an insignificant aggregate amount of principal or interest have been made during at least half of the probation period;

                                       (d)

                                       none of the exposures to the debtor is more than 30 days past due at the end of the probation period.

                           177.

                           Where the conditions referred to in paragraph 176 are not met at the end of the probation period, the exposure shall continue to be identified as performing forborne under probation until all the conditions are met. The conditions shall be assessed on at least a quarterly basis. Forborne exposures which are classified as non-current assets held for sale in accordance with IFRS 5 continue to be classified as forborne exposures, as non-current assets held for sale are included in the scope of the definition of forborne exposures.

                           178.

                           A forborne exposure may be considered as performing from the date the forbearance measures were applied where either of the following conditions is met:

                                       (a)

                                       that extension has not led the exposure to be classified as non-performing;

                                       (b)

                                       the exposure was not considered to be a non-performing exposure at the date the forbearance measures were extended.

                           179.

                           Where additional forbearance measures are applied to a performing forborne exposure under probation that has been reclassified out of the non-performing category or it becomes more than 30 days past due, it shall be classified as non-performing.

                           180.

                           “Performing exposures with forbearance measures” (performing forborne exposures) comprise forborne exposures that do not meet the criteria to be considered as non-performing and are included in the performing exposures category. Performing forborne exposures are under probation according to paragraph 176, including when paragraph 178 applies. Forborne exposures under probation that have been reclassified out of the non-performing exposures category shall be reported separately within the performing exposures with forbearance measures in the column “of which: Performing forborne exposures under probation”.
                           “Non-performing exposures with forbearance measures” (non-performing forborne exposures) comprise forborne exposures that meet the criteria to be considered as non-performing and are included in the non-performing exposures category. Those non-performing forborne exposures include the following:

                                       (a)

                                       exposures which have become non-performing due to the application of forbearance measures;

                                       (b)

                                       exposures which were non-performing prior to the extension of forbearance measures;

                                       (c)

                                       forborne exposures which have been reclassified from the performing category, including exposures reclassified in application of paragraph 179.

                                 Where forbearance measures are extended to non-performing exposures, the amount of those forborne exposures shall be separately identified in the column “of which: forbearance of non-performing exposures”.
                           Forborne exposures classified as cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits shall be reported in row 070 as well as in rows 080 and 100 of template 19.
                           Forborne exposures classified as held for sale in accordance with IFRS 5 shall not be reported in template 19.

                           181.

                           The column “Refinancing” comprises the gross carrying amount of the new contract (“refinancing debt”) granted as part of a refinancing transaction which qualifies as a forbearance measure, as well as the gross carrying amount of the old re-paid contract that is still outstanding.

                           182.

                           Forborne exposures combining modifications and refinancing shall be allocated to the column “Instruments with modifications of the terms and conditions” or the column “Refinancing” according to the measure that has the most impact on cash-flows. Refinancing by a pool of banks shall be reported in the column “Refinancing” for the total amount of refinancing debt provided by or refinanced debt still outstanding at the reporting institution. Repackaging of several debts into a new debt shall be reported as a modification, unless there is also a refinancing transaction that has a larger impact on cash-flows. Where forbearance through modification of the terms and conditions of a troubled exposure leads to its de-recognition and to the recognition of a new exposure, that new exposure shall be treated as forborne debt.

                           183.

                           Accumulated impairment and accumulated changes in fair value due to credit risk shall be reported in accordance with paragraph 46. “Accumulated impairment” means the reduction in the carrying amount of the exposure either directly or through the use of an allowance account. The amount of “accumulated impairment” to be reported in the column “on non-performing exposures with forbearance measures” for non-performing exposures shall not include incurred but not reported losses. Incurred but not reported losses shall be reported in the column “on performing exposures with forbearance measures”. “Accumulated changes in fair value due to credit risk” are reported for exposures designated at fair value through profit and loss in accordance with the applicable accounting framework.

                  PART 3

               MAPPING OF EXPOSURE CLASSES AND COUNTERPARTY SECTORS

                           1.

                           The following tables map exposure classes used to calculate capital requirements according to the CRR to counterparty sectors used in FINREP tables.

                              Table 2

                              Standardised Approach

                                       SA exposure classes (CRR Article 112)

                                       FINREP counterparty sectors

                                       Comments

                                                   (a)

                                                   Central governments or central banks

                                                   (1)

                                                   Central banks

                                                   (2)

                                                   General governments

                                       These exposures shall be assigned to FINREP counterparty sectors according to the nature of the immediate counterparty

                                                   (b)

                                                   Regional governments or local authorities

                                                   (2)

                                                   General governments

                                                   (c)

                                                   Public sector entities

                                                   (2)

                                                   General governments

                                                   (d)

                                                   Multilateral development banks

                                                   (3)

                                                   Credit institutions

                                                   (e)

                                                   International organisations

                                                   (2)

                                                   General governments

                                                   (f)

                                                   Institutions (i.e. credit institutions and investment firms)

                                                   (3)

                                                   Credit institutions

                                                   (4)

                                                   Other financial corporations

                                       These exposures shall be assigned to FINREP counterparty sectors according to the nature of the immediate counterparty

                                                   (g)

                                                   Corporates

                                                   (2)

                                                   General governments

                                                   (4)

                                                   Other financial corporations

                                                   (5)

                                                   Non financial corporations.

                                                   (6)

                                                   Households

                                                   (h)

                                                   Retail

                                                   (4)

                                                   Other financial corporations

                                                   (5)

                                                   Non financial corporations

                                                   (6)

                                                   Households

                                       These exposures shall be assigned to FINREP counterparty sectors according to the nature of the immediate counterparty

                                                   (i)

                                                   Secured by mortgages on immovable property

                                                   (2)

                                                   General governments

                                                   (3)

                                                   Credit institutions

                                                   (4)

                                                   Other financial corporations

                                                   (5)

                                                   Non-financial corporations

                                                   (6)

                                                   Households

                                       These exposures shall be assigned to FINREP counterparty sectors according to the nature of the immediate counterparty.

                                                   (j)

                                                   In default

                                                   (1)

                                                   Central banks

                                                   (2)

                                                   General governments

                                                   (3)

                                                   Credit institutions

                                                   (4)

                                                   Other financial corporations

                                                   (5)

                                                   Non-financial corporations

                                                   (6)

                                                   Households

                                       These exposures shall be assigned to FINREP counterparty sectors according to the nature of the immediate counterparty.

                                                   (ja)

                                                   Items associated with particularly high risk

                                                   (1)

                                                   Central banks

                                                   (2)

                                                   General governments

                                                   (3)

                                                   Credit institutions

                                                   (4)

                                                   Other financial corporations

                                                   (5)

                                                   Non-financial corporations

                                                   (6)

                                                   Households

                                       These exposures shall be assigned to FINREP counterparty sectors according to the nature of the immediate counterparty.

                                                   (k)

                                                   Covered bonds

                                                   (3)

                                                   Credit institutions

                                                   (4)

                                                   Other financial corporations

                                                   (5)

                                                   Non-financial corporations

                                       These exposures shall be assigned to FINREP counterparty sectors according to the nature of the immediate counterparty.

                                                   (l)

                                                   Securitisation positions

                                                   (2)

                                                   General governments

                                                   (3)

                                                   Credit institutions

                                                   (4)

                                                   Other financial corporations

                                                   (5)

                                                   Non-financial corporations

                                                   (6)

                                                   Households

                                       These exposures should be assigned to FINREP counterparty sectors according to the underlying risk of the securitisation. In FINREP, when securitized positions remain recognised in the balance sheet, the counterparty sectors are the sectors of the immediate counterparties of these positions.

                                                   (m)

                                                   Institutions and corporates with a short-term credit assessment

                                                   (3)

                                                   Credit institutions

                                                   (4)

                                                   Other financial corporations

                                                   (5)

                                                   Non-financial corporations

                                       These exposures shall be assigned to FINREP counterparty sectors according to the nature of the immediate counterparty.

                                                   (n)

                                                   Collective investment undertakings

                                       Equity instruments

                                       Investments in CIU shall be classified as equity instruments in FINREP, regardless of whether the CRR allows look-through.

                                                   (o)

                                                   Equity

                                       Equity instruments

                                       In FINREP, equities are separated as instruments under different categories of financial assets

                                                   (p)

                                                   Other items

                                       Various items of the balance sheet

                                       In FINREP, other items may be included under different asset categories.

                              Table 3

                              Internal Ratings Based Approach

                                       IRBA exposure classes (CRR Article 147)

                                       FINREP counterparty sectors

                                       Comments

                                                   (a)

                                                   Central governments and central banks

                                                   (1)

                                                   Central banks

                                                   (2)

                                                   General governments

                                                   (3)

                                                   Credit institutions

                                       These exposures shall be assigned to FINREP counterparty sectors according to the nature of the immediate counterparty

                                                   (b)

                                                   Institutions (i.e. credit institution and investment firms as well as some general governments and multilateral banks)

                                                   (2)

                                                   General governments

                                                   (3)

                                                   Credit institutions

                                                   (4)

                                                   Other financial corporations

                                       These exposures shall be assigned to FINREP counterparty sectors according to the nature of the immediate counterparty

                                                   (c)

                                                   Corporates

                                                   (4)

                                                   Other financial corporations

                                                   (5)

                                                   Non-financial corporations

                                                   (6)

                                                   Households

                                       These exposures shall be assigned to FINREP counterparty sectors according to the nature of the immediate counterparty

                                                   (d)

                                                   Retail

                                                   (4)

                                                   Other financial corporations

                                                   (5)

                                                   Non financial corporations

                                                   (6)

                                                   Households

                                       These exposures shall be assigned to FINREP counterparty sectors according to the nature of the immediate counterparty

                                                   (e)

                                                   Equity

                                       Equity instruments

                                       In FINREP, equities are separated as instruments under different categories of financial assets

                                                   (f)

                                                   Securitisation positions

                                                   (2)

                                                   General governments

                                                   (3)

                                                   Credit institutions

                                                   (4)

                                                   Other financial corporations

                                                   (5)

                                                   Non-financial corporations

                                                   (6)

                                                   Households

                                       These exposures shall be assigned to FINREP counterparty sectors according to the underlying risk of the securitisation positions. In FINREP, when securitized positions remain recognised in the balance sheet, the counterparty sectors are the sectors of the immediate counterparties of these positions

                                                   (g)

                                                   Other non credit obligations

                                       Various items of the balance sheet

                                       In FINREP, other items may be included under different asset categories.’

            (1)  Regulation (EC) No 25/2009 of the European Central Bank of 19 December 2008 concerning the balance sheet of monetary financial institutions sector (recast) (ECB/2008/32) (OJ L 15, 20.1.2009, p. 14).

            (2)  Regulation (EC) No 1893/2006 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 20 December 2006 establishing the statistical classification of economic activities NACE Revision 2 and amending Council Regulation (EEC) No 3037/90 as well as certain EC Regulations on specific statistical domains (OJ L 393, 30.12.2006, p. 1).

            (3)  Council Directive 86/635/EEC of 8 December 1986 on the annual accounts and consolidated accounts of banks and other financial institutions (OJ L 372, 31.12.1986, p. 1).

            (4)  Fourth Council Directive 78/660/EEC of 25 July 1978 based in Article 54(3)(g) of the Treaty on the annual accounts of certain types of companies (OJ L 222, 14.8.1978, p. 11).

            (5)  Commission Recommendation of 6 May 2003 concerning the definition of micro, small and medium-sized enterprises (C(2003)1422) (OJ L 124, 20.5.2003, p. 36).

            (6)  Non performing exposures with forbearance measures refer to exposures listed in paragraph 180.

         ANNEX VI

               ‘ANNEX IX

                  INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPORTING LARGE EXPOSURES AND CONCENTRATION RISK

                  Table of Contents

                           PART I: GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

                        259

                           1.

                           Structure and conventions

                        259

                           PART II: TEMPLATE RELATED INSTRUCTIONS

                        259

                           1.

                           Scope and level of the LE reporting

                        259

                           2.

                           Structure of the LE template

                        260

                           3.

                           Definitions for the purposes of the LE reporting

                        260

                           4.

                           C 26.00 — LE Limits template

                        261

                           4.1.

                           Instructions concerning specific rows

                        261

                           5.

                           C 27.00 — Identification of the counterparty (LE1)

                        262

                           5.1.

                           Instructions concerning specific columns

                        262

                           6.

                           C 28.00 — Exposures in the non-trading and trading book (LE2)

                        264

                           6.1.

                           Instructions concerning specific columns

                        264

                           7.

                           C 29.00 — Details of the exposures to individual clients within groups of connected clients (LE3)

                        269

                           7.1.

                           Instructions concerning specific columns

                        269

                           8.

                           C 30.00 — Maturity buckets of the 10 largest exposures to institutions and the 10 largest exposures to unregulated financial sector entities (LE 4)

                        270

                           8.1.

                           Instructions concerning specific columns

                        270

                           9.

                           C 31.00 — Maturity buckets of the 10 largest exposures to institutions and the 10 largest exposures to unregulated financial sector entities: detail of the exposures to individual clients within groups of connected clients (LE5)

                        271

                           9.1.

                           Instructions concerning specific columns

                        271

                  PART I: GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

               1.   Structure and conventions

                           1.

                           The reporting framework on large exposures (“LE”) shall consist of six templates which include the following information:

                                       (a)

                                       large exposures limits;

                                       (b)

                                       identification of the counterparty (template LE1);

                                       (c)

                                       exposures in the non-trading and trading book (template LE2);

                                       (d)

                                       detail of the exposures to individual clients within groups of connected clients (template LE3);

                                       (e)

                                       maturity buckets of the ten largest exposures to institutions and the ten largest exposures to unregulated financial sector entities (template LE4);

                                       (f)

                                       maturity buckets of the ten largest exposures to institutions and the ten largest exposures to unregulated financial sector entities: detail of the exposures to individual clients within groups of connected clients (template LE5).

                           2.

                           The instructions include legal references as well as detailed information regarding the data that shall be reported in each template.

                           3.

                           The instructions and the validation rules follow the labelling convention set in the following paragraphs, when referring to the columns, rows and cells of the templates.

                           4.

                           The following convention is generally used in the instructions and validation rules: {Template;Row;Column}. An asterisk sign shall be used to express that the validation is done for all the rows reported.

                           5.

                           In the case of validations within a template, in which only data points of that template are used, notations do not refer to a template: {Row;Column}.

                           6.

                           ABS(Value): the absolute value without sign. Any amount that increases the exposures shall be reported as a positive figure. On the contrary, any amount that reduces the exposures shall be reported as a negative figure. Where there is a negative sign (-) preceding the label of an item, no positive figure shall be reported for that item.

                  PART II: TEMPLATE RELATED INSTRUCTIONS

               In this Annex, instructions relating to the reporting of Large Exposures shall also apply to the reporting of significant exposures required by Articles 9 and 11, in accordance with the scope defined in those Articles.
               1.   Scope and level of the LE reporting

                           1.

                           In order to report information on large exposures to clients or groups of connected clients according to Article 394(1) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 (“CRR”) on a solo basis, institutions shall use the templates LE1, LE2 and LE3.

                           2.

                           In order to report information on large exposures to clients or groups of connected clients according to Article 394(1) of CRR on a consolidated basis, the parent institutions in a Member State shall use templates LE1, LE2 and LE3.

                           3.

                           Every large exposure defined in accordance with Article 392 of CRR shall be reported, including the large exposures that shall not be considered for the compliance with the large exposure limit laid down in Article 395 of CRR.

                           4.

                           In order to report information on the 20 largest exposures to clients or groups of connected clients according to the last sentence of Article 394(1) of CRR on a consolidated basis, the parent institutions in a Member State which are subject to Part Three, Title II, Chapter 3, of CRR shall use templates LE1, LE2 and LE3. The exposure value resulting from subtracting the amount in column 320 (“Amounts exempted”) of template LE2 from the amount in column 210 (“Total”) of that same template is the amount that shall be used for determining these 20 largest exposures.

                           5.

                           In order to report information on the ten largest exposures to institutions as well as on the ten largest exposures to unregulated financial sector entities according to points (a) to (d) of Article 394(2) of CRR on a consolidated basis, the parent institutions in a Member State shall use templates LE1, LE2 and LE3. For the reporting of the maturity structure of these exposures according to Article 394(2)(e) of CRR, the parent institutions in a Member State shall use templates LE4 and LE5. The exposure value calculated in column 210 (“Total”) of template LE2 is the amount that shall be used for determining these 20 largest exposures.

                           6.

                           The data on the large exposures and the relevant largest exposures to groups of connected clients and individual clients not belonging to a group of connected clients shall be reported in the template LE2 (in which a group of connected clients shall be reported as one single exposure.

                           7.

                           Institutions shall report in the LE3 template data regarding the exposures to individual clients belonging to the groups of connected clients, which are reported in the LE2 template. The reporting of an exposure to an individual client in the LE2 template shall not be duplicated in the LE3 template.

                     2.   Structure of the LE template

                           8.

                           The columns of the template LE1 shall present the information related to the identification of individual clients or groups of connected clients to which an institution has an exposure.

                           9.

                           The columns of the templates LE2 and LE3 shall present the following blocks of information:

                                       (a)

                                       the exposure value before application of exemptions and before taking into account the effect of the credit risk mitigation, including the direct, indirect exposure and additional exposures arising from transactions where there is an exposure to underlying assets;

                                       (b)

                                       the effect of the exemptions and of the credit risk mitigation techniques;

                                       (c)

                                       the exposure value after application of exemptions and after taking into account the effect of the credit risk mitigation calculated for the purpose of Article 395(1) of CRR.

                           10.

                           The columns of the templates LE4 and LE5 shall present the information regarding the maturity buckets to which the expected maturing amounts of the ten largest exposures to institutions as well as the ten largest exposures to unregulated financial sector entities shall be allocated.

                     3.   Definitions and general instructions for the purposes of the LE reporting

                           11.

                           “Group of connected clients” is defined in Article 4(1)(39) of CRR.

                           12.

                           “Unregulated financial sector entities” are defined in Article 142(1)(5) of CRR.

                           13.

                           “Institutions” is defined in Article 4(1)(3) of CRR

                           14.

                           Exposures to “civil-law associations” shall be reported. In addition, institutions shall add the credit amounts of the civil-law association to the indebtedness of each partner. Exposures towards civil law associations featuring quotas shall be divided or allocated to the partners according to their respective quotas. Certain constructions (e.g. joint accounts, communities of heirs, straw-man loans) working in fact civil law associations have to be reported just like them.

                           15.

                           Assets and off balance sheet items shall be used without risk weights or degrees of risk in accordance to Article 389 of CRR. Specifically, credit conversion factors shall not be applied to off balance sheet items.

                           16.

                           “Exposures” are defined in Article 389 of CRR.

                                       (a)

                                       any asset or off-balance sheet items in the non-trading and trading book including items set out in Article 400 of CRR, but excluding items which fall under effect of points (a) to (d) of Article 390(6) of CRR.

                                       (b)

                                       “indirect exposures” are those exposures allocated to the guarantor or to the issuer of the collateral rather than to the immediate borrower in accordance with Article 403 of CRR. The definitions here may not differ in any possible respect from the definitions provided in the basic act.]

                                 The exposures to groups of connected clients shall be calculated in accordance with Article 390(5).

                           17.

                           The “netting agreements” shall be allowed to be taken into account to the effects of large exposures exposure value as laid down in Article 390(1), (2) and (3) of CRR. The exposure value of a derivative instrument listed in Annex II of CRR shall be determined in accordance with Part Three, Title II, Chapter 6, of CRR with the effects of contracts of novation and other netting agreements taken into account for the purposes of those methods in accordance with Part Three, Title II, Chapter 6, of CRR. The exposure value of repurchase transaction, securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions, long settlement transactions and margin lending transactions may be determined either in accordance with Part Three, Title II, Chapter 4 or Chapter 6, of CRR. In accordance with Article 296 of CRR, the exposure value of a single legal obligation arising from the contractual cross-product netting agreement with a counterparty of the reporting institution shall be reported as “other commitments” in the LE templates.

                           18.

                           The “value of an exposure” shall be calculated according to Article 390 of CRR.

                           19.

                           The effect of the full or partial application of exemptions and eligible credit risk mitigation (CRM) techniques for the purposes of calculating of exposures for the purpose of Article 395(1) CRR is described in Articles 399 to 403 of CRR.

                           20.

                           Reverse repurchase agreements which fall under the reporting for large exposures shall be reported according to Article 402(3) of CRR. Provided that the criteria in Article 402(3) of CRR are met the institution shall report the large exposures to each third party for the amount of the claim that the counterparty to the transaction has on this third party and not for the amount of the exposure to the counterparty.

                     4.   C 26.00 — LE Limits template

               4.1.   Instructions concerning specific rows

                           Rows

                           Legal references and instructions

                              010

                              Non institutions

                           Articles 395(1), 458(2)(d)(ii), 458(10) and 459(b) of CRR.
                           The amount of the applicable limit for counterparties other than institutions shall be reported. This amount is 25 % of the eligible capital, which is reported in row 226 of template 4 of Annex I, unless a more restrictive percentage applies due to the application of national measures in accordance with Article 458 of CRR or the delegated acts adopted in accordance with Article 459(b) of CRR.

                              020

                              Institutions

                           Articles 395(1), 458(2)(d)(ii), 458(10) and 459(b) of CRR.
                           The amount of the applicable limit for counterparties which are institutions shall be reported. According to Article 395(1) of CRR, this amount shall be the following:

                                       —

                                       if the 25 % of the eligible capital is greater than EUR 150 million (or a lower limit than EUR 150 million set out by the competent authority in accordance with the third paragraph of Article 395(1) of CRR, 25 % of the eligible capital shall be reported;

                                       —

                                       if EUR 150 million (or a lower limit set out by the competent authority in accordance with the third paragraph of Article 395(1) of CRR is greater than 25 % of the institution's eligible capital, EUR 150 million (or the lower limit if set out by the competent authority) shall be reported. If the institution has determined a lower limit in terms of its eligible capital, required by the second subparagraph of Article 395(1) of CRR, that limit shall be reported.

                                 These limits may be stricter in case of application of national measures in accordance with Article 395(6) or Article 458 of CRR or the delegated acts adopted in accordance with Article 459(b) of CRR.

                              030

                              Institutions in %

                           Articles 395(1) and 459(a) of CRR.
                           The amount that shall be reported is the absolute limit (reported in row 020) expressed as a percentage of the eligible capital.

                     5.   C 27.00 — Identification of the counterparty (LE1)

               5.1.   Instructions concerning specific columns

                           Column

                           Legal references and instructions

                              010-070

                              Counterparty Identification:

                           Institutions shall report the identification of any counterparty for which information is being submitted in any of the templates C 28.00 to C 31.00. The identification of the group of connected clients shall not be reported, unless the national reporting system provides a unique code for the group of connected clients.
                           According to Article 394(1)(a) of CRR, institutions shall report the identification of the counterparty to which they have a large exposure as defined in Article 392 of CRR.
                           According to Article 394(2)(a) of CRR, institutions shall report the identification of the counterparty to which they have the largest exposures (in the cases where the counterparty is an institution or an unregulated financial sector entity).

                              010

                              Code

                           The code is a row identifier, and must be unique for each row in the table.
                           The code shall be used to identify the individual counterparty. However, the purpose of this column is to link counterparty details in C 27.00 with exposures reported in C 28.00 — C 31.00. The code of the group of connected clients shall not be reported, unless the national reporting system provides a unique code for the group of connected clients. The codes shall be used in a consistent way across time.
                           The composition of the code depends on the national reporting system, unless a uniform codification is available in the Union.

                              020

                              Name

                           The name shall correspond to the name of the group whenever a group of connected clients is reported. In any other case, the name shall correspond to the individual counterparty.
                           For a group of connected clients, the name that shall be reported shall be the name of the parent company or, when the group of connected clients does not have a parent, it shall be the group's commercial name.

                              030

                              LEI Code

                           The legal entity identifier code of the counterparty.

                              040

                              Residence of the counterparty

                           The ISO code 3166-1-alpha-2 of the country of incorporation of the counterparty shall be used (including pseudo-ISO codes for international organisations, available in the last edition of the Eurostat's “Balance of Payments Vademecum”)
                           For groups of connected clients, no residence shall be reported.

                              050

                              Sector of the counterparty

                           One sector shall be allocated to every counterparty on the basis of FINREP economic sector classes:
                           (i) Central Banks; (ii) General Governments; (iii) Credit institutions; (iv) Other financial corporations; (v) Non-financial corporations; (vi) households.
                           For groups of connected clients, no sector shall be reported.

                              060

                              NACE code

                           For the economic sector, the NACE codes (Nomenclature statistique des activités économiques dans l'Union européenne = Statistical Classification of Economic Activities in the European Union) shall be used.
                           This column shall apply only for the counterparties “Other financial corporations” and “Non-financial corporations”. NACE codes shall be used for “Non-financial corporations” with one level detail (e.g. “F — Construction”) and for “Other financial corporations” with a two level detail, which provides separate information on insurance activities (e.g. “K65 — Insurance, reinsurance and pension funding, except compulsory social security”).
                           The “Other financial corporations” and “Non-financial corporations” economic sectors shall be classified on the basis of FINREP counterparty breakdown.
                           For groups of connected clients, no NACE code shall be reported.

                              070

                              Type of counterparty

                           Article 394(2) of CRR
                           The type of the counterparty of the ten largest exposures to institutions and the ten largest exposures to unregulated financial sector entities shall be specified by using “I” for institutions or “U” for unregulated financial sector entities.

                     6.   C 28.00 — Exposures in the non-trading and trading book (LE2)

               6.1.   Instructions concerning specific columns

                           Column

                           Legal references and instructions

                              010

                              Code

                           For a group of connected clients, if a unique code is available at national level, this code shall be reported as the code of the group of connected clients. Where there is no unique code at the national level, the code that shall be reported shall be the code of the parent company in C 27.00.
                           In the cases where the group of connected clients does not have a parent, the code that shall be reported shall be the code of the individual entity which is considered by the institution as the most significant within the group of connected clients. In any other case, the code shall correspond to the individual counterparty.
                           The codes shall be used in a consistent way across time.
                           The composition of the code depends on the national reporting system, unless a uniform codification is available in the EU.

                              020

                              Group or individual

                           The institution shall report “1” for the reporting of exposures to individual clients or “2” for the reporting of exposures to groups of connected clients.

                              030

                              Transactions where there is an exposure to underlying assets

                           Article 390(7) of CRR
                           In accordance with further technical specifications by the national competent authorities, when the institution has exposures to the reported counterparty through a transaction where there is an exposure to underlying assets, the equivalent to “Yes” shall be reported; otherwise the equivalent to “No” shall be reported.

                              040-180

                              Original exposures

                           Articles 24, 389, 390 and 392 of CRR.
                           The institution shall report in this block of columns the original exposures of direct exposures, indirect exposures, and additional exposures arising from transactions where there is an exposure to underlying assets.
                           According to Article 389 of CRR, assets and off balance sheet items shall be used without risk weights or degrees of risk. Specifically, credit conversion factors shall not be applied to off balance sheet items.
                           These columns shall contain the original exposure, i.e. the exposure value without taking into account value adjustments and provisions, which shall be deducted in column 210.
                           The definition and calculation of the exposure value is set out in Articles 389 and 390 of CRR. The valuation of assets and off-balance-sheet items shall be effected in accordance with the accounting framework to which the institution is subject, according to Article 24 of CRR.
                           Exposures deducted from own funds, which are not exposures according to Article 390(6)(e), shall be included in these columns. These exposures shall be deducted in column 200.
                           Exposures referred to in points (a) to (d) of Article 390(6)of CRR shall not be included in these columns.
                           Original exposures shall include any asset and off-balance sheet items according to Article 400 of CRR. The exemptions shall be deducted for the purpose of Article 395(1) of CRR in column 320.
                           Exposures from both non-trading and trading book shall be included.
                           For the breakdown of the exposures in financial instruments, where different exposures arising from netting agreements constitute a single exposure, the latter shall be allocated to the financial instrument corresponding to the principal asset included in the netting agreement (in addition, see the introductory section).

                              040

                              Total original exposure

                           The institution shall report the sum of direct exposures and indirect exposures as well as the additional exposures that arise from the exposure to transactions where there is an exposure to underlying assets.

                              050

                              Of which: defaulted

                           Article 178 of CRR.
                           The institution shall report the part of the total original exposure corresponding to defaulted exposures.

                              060-110

                              Direct exposures

                           Direct exposures shall mean the exposures on “immediate borrower” basis.

                              060

                              Debt instruments

                           Regulation (EC) No 25/2009 (“ECB/2008/32”) Annex II, Part 2, table, categories 2 and 3.
                           Debt instruments shall include debt securities, and loans and advances.
                           The instruments included in this column shall be those qualified as “loans of up to and including one year/over one year and up to and including five years/of over five years' original maturity”, or as “securities other than shares”, according to ECB/2008/32.
                           Repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions (securities financing transactions) and margin lending transactions shall be included in this column.

                              070

                              Equity instruments

                           ECB/2008/32 Annex II, Part 2, table, categories 4 and 5.
                           The instruments included in this column shall be those qualified as “Shares and other equities” or as “MMF shares/units” according to ECB/2008/32.

                              080

                              Derivatives

                           Article 272(2) and Annex II of CRR.
                           The instruments that shall be reported in this column shall include derivatives listed in Annex II of CRR and long settlement transactions, as defined in Article 272(2) of CRR.
                           Credit derivatives that are subject to counterparty credit risk shall be included in this column.

                              090-110

                              Off balance sheet items

                           Annex I of CRR.
                           The value that shall be reported in these columns shall be the nominal value before any reduction of specific credit risk adjustments and without application of conversion factors.

                              090

                              Loan commitments

                           Annex I, points 1(c) and (h), 2(b)(ii), 3(b)(i) and 4(a) of CRR.
                           Loan commitments are firm commitments to provide credit under pre-specified terms and conditions, except those that are derivatives because they can be settled net in cash or by delivering or issuing another financial instrument.

                              100

                              Financial guarantees

                           Annex I, points 1(a),(b) and (f), of CRR.
                           Financial guarantees are contracts that require the issuer to make specified payments to reimburse the holder for a loss it incurs because a specified debtor fails to make payment when due in accordance with the original or modified terms of a debt instrument. Credit derivatives that are not included in the column “derivatives” shall be reported in this column.

                              110

                              Other commitments

                           Other commitments are the items in Annex I to CRR that are not included in the previous categories. The exposure value of a single legal obligation arising from the contractual cross-product netting agreement with a counterparty of the institution shall be reported in this column.

                              120-180

                              Indirect exposures

                           Article 403 of CRR.
                           According to Article 403 of CRR, a credit institution may use the substitution approach where an exposure to a client is guaranteed by a third party, or secured by collateral issued by a third party.
                           The institution shall report in this block of columns the amounts of the direct exposures that are re-assigned to the guarantor or the issuer of collateral provided that the latter would be assigned an equal or lower risk weight than the risk weight which would be applied to the third party under Part Three, Title II, Chapter 2 of CRR. The protected reference original exposure (direct exposure) shall be deducted from the exposure to the original borrower in the columns of “Eligible credit risk mitigation techniques”. The indirect exposure shall increase the exposure to the guarantor or issuer of collateral via substitution effect. This shall apply also to guarantees given within a group of connected clients.
                           The institution shall report the original amount of the indirect exposures in the column that corresponds to the type of direct exposure guaranteed or secured by collateral such as, when the direct exposure guaranteed is a debt instrument, the amount of “Indirect exposure” assigned to the guarantor shall be reported under the column “Debt instruments”.
                           Exposures arising from credit-linked notes shall also be reported in this block of columns, according to Article 399 of CRR.

                              120

                              Debt instruments

                           See column 060.

                              130

                              Equity instruments

                           See column 070.

                              140

                              Derivatives

                           See column 080.

                              150-170

                              Off balance sheet items

                           The value of these columns shall be the nominal value before any reduction of specific credit risk adjustments and conversion factors are applied.

                              150

                              Loan commitments

                           See column 090.

                              160

                              Financial guarantees

                           See column 100.

                              170

                              Other commitments

                           See column 110.

                              180

                              Additional exposures arising from transactions where there is an exposure to underlying assets

                           Article 390(7) of CRR.
                           Additional exposures that arise from transactions where there is an exposure to underlying assets.

                              190

                              (-) Value adjustments and provisions

                           Articles 34, 24, 110 and 111 of CRR.
                           Value adjustment and provisions included in the corresponding accounting framework (Directive 86/635/EEC or Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002) that affect the valuation of exposures according to Articles 24 and 110 of CRR.
                           Value adjustments and provisions against the gross exposure given in column 040 shall be reported in this column.

                              200

                              (-) Exposures deducted from own funds

                           Article 390(6)(e) of CRR.
                           Exposures deducted from own funds, which shall be included in the different columns of Total original exposure, shall be reported.

                              210-230

                              Exposure value before application of exemptions and CRM

                           Article 394(1)(b) of CRR.
                           Institutions shall report the exposure value before taking into account the effect of the credit risk mitigation, where applicable.

                              210

                              Total

                           The exposure value to be reported in this column shall be the amount used for determining whether an exposure is a large exposure according to the definition in Article 392 of CRR.
                           This shall include the original exposure after subtracting value adjustments and provisions and the amount of the exposures deducted from own funds.

                              220

                              Of which: Non-trading book

                           The amount of the non-trading book from the total exposure before exemptions and CRM.

                              230

                              % of eligible capital

                           Articles 4(1)(71)(b) and 395 of CRR.
                           The amount that shall be reported is the percentage of the exposure value before application of exemptions and CRM related to the eligible capital of the institution, as defined in Article 4(1)(71)(b) of CRR.

                              240-310

                              (-) Eligible credit risk mitigation (CRM) techniques

                           Articles 399 and 401 to 403 of CRR.
                           CRM techniques as defined in Article 4(1)(57) of CRR.
                           For the purposes of this reporting, the CRM techniques recognised in Part Three, Title II, Chapter 3 and 4, of CRR shall be used in accordance with Articles 401 to 403 of CRR.
                           CRM techniques may have three different effects in the LE regime: substitution effect; funded credit protection other than substitution effect; and real estate treatment.

                              240-290

                              (-) Substitution effect of eligible credit risk mitigation techniques

                           Article 403 of CRR.
                           The amount of funded and unfunded credit protection that shall be reported in these columns shall correspond to the exposures guaranteed by a third party, or secured by collateral issued by a third party, where the institution decides to treat the exposure as incurred with the guarantor or the issuer of collateral.

                              240

                              (-) Debt instruments

                           See column 060.

                              250

                              (-) Equity instruments

                           See column 070.

                              260

                              (-) Derivatives

                           See column 080.

                              270-290

                              (-) Off balance sheet items

                           The value of these columns shall be without application of conversion factors.

                              270

                              (-) Loan commitments

                           See column 090.

                              280

                              (-) Financial guarantees

                           See column 100.

                              290

                              (-) Other commitments

                           See column 110.

                              300

                              (-) Funded credit protection other than substitution effect

                           Article 401 of CRR.
                           The institution shall report the amounts of funded credit protection, as defined in Article 4(1)(58) of CRR, that are deducted from the exposure value due to the application of Article 401 of CRR.

                              310

                              (-) Real estate

                           Article 402 of CRR.
                           The institution shall report the amounts deducted from the exposure value due to the application of Article 402 of CRR.

                              320

                              (-) Amounts exempted

                           Article 400 of CRR.
                           The institution shall report the amounts exempted from the LE regime.

                              330-350

                              Exposure value after application of exemptions and CRM

                           Article 394(1)(d) of CRR.
                           The institution shall report the exposure value after taking into account the effect of the exemptions and credit risk mitigation calculated for the purpose of Article 395(1) of CRR.

                              330

                              Total

                           This column shall include the amount to be taken into account in order to comply with the large exposures limit set out in Article 395 of CRR.

                              340

                              Of which: Non-trading book

                           The institution shall report the total exposure after application of exemptions and after taking into account the effect of CRM belonging to the non-trading book.

                              350

                              % of eligible capital

                           The institution shall report the percentage of the exposure value after application of exemptions and CRM related to the eligible capital of the institution, as defined in Article 4(1)(71)(b) of CRR.

                     7.   C 29.00 — Details of the exposures to individual clients within groups of connected clients (LE3)

               7.1.   Instructions concerning specific columns

                           Column

                           Legal references and instructions

                              010-360

                           The institution shall report in template LE3 the data of the individual clients belonging to the groups of connected clients included in the rows of template LE2.

                              010

                              Code

                           Columns 010 and 020 are a composite row identifier, and together must be unique for each row in the table.
                           The code of the individual counterparty belonging to the groups of connected clients shall be reported.

                              020

                              Group code

                           Columns 010 and 020 are a composite row identifier, and together must be unique for each row in the table.
                           If a unique code for a group of connected clients is available at national level, this code shall be reported. Where there is no unique code at the national level, the code that shall be reported shall be the code used for reporting exposures to the Group of Connected clients in C 28.00 (LE2).
                           Where a client belongs to several groups of connected clients, it shall be reported as a member of all the groups of connected clients.

                              030

                              Transactions where there is an exposure to underlying assets

                           See column 030 of template LE2.

                              040

                              Type of connection

                           The type of connection between the individual entity and the group of connected clients shall be specified by using either:

                                       “a” within the meaning of Article 4(1)(39)(a) of CRR (control); or

                                       “b” within the meaning of Article 4(1)(39)(b) of CRR (interconnectedness).

                              050-360

                           When financial instruments in template LE2 are provided to the whole group of connected clients they shall be allocated to the individual counterparties in template LE3 in accordance with the business criteria of the institution.
                           The remaining instructions are the same as for template LE2.

                     8.   C 30.00 — Maturity buckets of the ten largest exposures to institutions and the ten largest exposures to unregulated financial sector entities (template LE 4)

               8.1.   Instructions concerning specific columns

                           Column

                           Legal references and instructions

                              010

                              Code

                           The code is a row identifier and must be unique for each row in the table.
                           See column 010 of template LE1.

                              020-250

                              Maturity buckets of the exposure

                           Article 394(2)(e) of CRR
                           The institution shall report this information for the ten largest exposures to institutions and the ten largest exposures to unregulated financial sector entities.
                           The maturity buckets are defined with a monthly interval up to one year, with a quarterly interval from one year up to three years and with larger intervals from three years onwards.
                           Each exposure value before application of exemptions and CRM (column 210 of LE2 template) shall be reported with the whole outstanding amount in the respective maturity bucket of its expected residual maturity. In case of several separate relationships constituting an exposure to a client, each of these parts of the exposure shall be reported with the whole outstanding amount in the respective maturity bucket of its expected residual maturity. Instruments which do not have a fixed maturity, like equity, shall be included in the column “undefined maturity”.
                           The expected maturity of the exposure shall be reported for both direct and indirect exposures.
                           For direct exposures, when allocating expected amounts of equity instruments, debt instruments and derivatives into the different maturity buckets of this template, the instructions of the maturity ladder template of the additional metrics on liquidity shall be used (see consultation paper CP18 published on 23.5.2013).
                           In the case of off-balance sheet items, the maturity of the underlying risk shall be used in the allocation of expected amounts to maturity buckets. More specifically, for forward deposits that means the maturity structure of the deposit; for financial guarantees, the maturity structure of the underlying financial asset; for undrawn facilities of loan commitments, the maturity structure of the loan; and for other commitments, the maturing structure of the commitment.
                           In the case of indirect exposures, the allocation into maturity buckets shall be based on the maturity of the guaranteed operations which generate the direct exposure.

                     9.   C 31.00 — Maturity buckets of the ten largest exposures to institutions and the ten largest exposures to unregulated financial sector entities: detail of the exposures to individual clients within groups of connected clients (template LE5)

               9.1.   Instructions concerning specific columns

                           Column

                           Legal references and instructions

                              010-260

                           The institution shall report in template LE5 the data of the individual counterparties belonging to the groups of connected clients included in the rows of template LE4.

                              010

                              Code

                           Columns 010 and 020 are a composite row identifier and together must be unique for each row in the table.
                           See column 010 of template LE3.

                              020

                              Group code

                           Columns 010 and 020 are a composite row identifier and together must be unique for each row in the table.
                           See column 020 of template LE3.

                              030-260

                              Maturity buckets of the exposures

                           See columns 020-250 of template LE4.’

         ANNEX VII

               ‘ANNEX XVII

                  REPORTING ON ASSET ENCUMBRANCE

                  Table of Contents

               GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
                        273

                           1.

                        STRUCTURE AND CONVENTIONS
                        273

                           1.1.

                        STRUCTURE
                        273

                           1.2.

                        ACCOUNTING STANDARD
                        274

                           1.3.

                        NUMBERING CONVENTION
                        274

                           1.4.

                        SIGN CONVENTION
                        274

                           1.5.

                        LEVEL OF APPLICATION
                        274

                           1.6.

                        PROPORTIONALITY
                        274

                           1.7.

                        DEFINITION OF ENCUMBRANCE
                        275
                     TEMPLATE-RELATED INSTRUCTIONS
                        275

                           2.

                        PART A: ENCUMBRANCE OVERVIEW
                        275

                           2.1.

                        TEMPLATE: AE-ASS. ASSETS OF THE REPORTING INSTITUTION
                        276

                           2.1.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        276

                           2.1.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC ROWS
                        278

                           2.1.3.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC COLUMNS
                        279

                           2.2.

                        TEMPLATE: AE-COL. COLLATERAL RECEIVED BY THE REPORTING INSTITUTION
                        281

                           2.2.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        281

                           2.2.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC ROWS
                        281

                           2.2.3.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC COLUMNS
                        283

                           2.3.

                        TEMPLATE AE-NPL. OWN COVERED BONDS AND ABSS ISSUED AND NOT YET PLEDGED
                        284

                           2.3.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        284

                           2.3.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC ROWS
                        284

                           2.3.3.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC COLUMNS
                        285

                           2.4.

                        TEMPLATE AE-SOU. SOURCES OF ENCUMBRANCE
                        285

                           2.4.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        285

                           2.4.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC ROWS
                        285

                           2.4.3.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC COLUMNS
                        287

                           3.

                        PART B: MATURITY DATA
                        288

                           3.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        288

                           3.2.

                        TEMPLATE: AE-MAT. MATURITY DATA
                        288

                           3.2.1.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC ROWS
                        288

                           3.2.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC COLUMNS
                        289

                           4.

                        PART C: CONTINGENT ENCUMBRANCE
                        290

                           4.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        290

                           4.1.1.

                        SCENARIO A: DECREASE OF 30 % OF ENCUMBERED ASSETS
                        290

                           4.1.2.

                        SCENARIO B: DEPRECIATION OF 10 % IN SIGNIFICANT CURRENCIES
                        290

                           4.2.

                        TEMPLATE: AE-CONT. CONTINGENT ENCUMBRANCE
                        291

                           4.2.1.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC ROWS
                        291

                           4.2.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC COLUMNS
                        291

                           5.

                        PART D: COVERED BONDS
                        291

                           5.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        291

                           5.2.

                        TEMPLATE: AE-CB. COVERED BONDS ISSUANCE
                        292

                           5.2.1.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING Z-AXIS
                        292

                           5.2.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC ROWS
                        292

                           5.2.3.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC COLUMNS
                        292

                           6.

                        PART E: ADVANCED DATA
                        295

                           6.1.

                        GENERAL REMARKS
                        295

                           6.2.

                        TEMPLATE: AE-ADV1. ADVANCED TEMPLATE FOR ASSETS OF THE REPORTING INSTITUTION
                        295

                           6.2.1.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC ROWS
                        295

                           6.2.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC COLUMNS
                        297

                           6.3.

                        TEMPLATE: AE-ADV2. ADVANCED TEMPLATE FOR COLLATERAL RECEIVED BY THE REPORTING INSTITUTION
                        298

                           6.3.1.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC ROWS
                        298

                           6.3.2.

                        INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING SPECIFIC COLUMNS
                        299

                  GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

               1.   STRUCTURE AND CONVENTIONS
               1.1.   Structure

                           1.

                           The framework consists of five sets of templates which comprise a total of nine templates according to the following scheme:

                                       (a)

                                       Part A: Encumbrance overview:

                                                   —

                                                   AE-ASS template. Assets of the reporting institution

                                                   —

                                                   AE-COL template. Collateral received by the reporting institution

                                                   —

                                                   AE-NPL. Own covered bonds and asset-backed securities (hereinafter “ABS”) issued and not yet pledged

                                                   —

                                                   AE-SOU. Sources of encumbrance

                                       (b)

                                       Part B: Maturity data:

                                                   —

                                                   AE-MAT template. Maturity data

                                       (c)

                                       Part C: Contingent encumbrance

                                                   —

                                                   AE-CONT template. Contingent encumbrance

                                       (d)

                                       Part D: Covered bonds

                                                   —

                                                   AE-CB template. Covered bonds issuance

                                       (e)

                                       Part E: Advanced data:

                                                   —

                                                   AE-ADV-1 template. Advanced template for assets of the reporting institution

                                                   —

                                                   AE-ADV-2 template. Advanced template for collateral received by the reporting institution

                           2.

                           For each template legal references are provided as well as further detailed information regarding more general aspects of the reporting.

                     1.2.   Accounting standard

                           3.

                           Institutions shall report carrying amounts under the accounting framework they use for the reporting of financial information in accordance with Articles 9 to 11. Institutions that are not required to report financial information shall use their respective accounting framework.

                           4.

                           For the purposes of this Annex, “IAS” and “IFRS” refer to the international accounting standards as defined in Article 2 of Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002. For institutions which report under IFRS standards, references have been inserted to the relevant IFRS standards.

                     1.3.   Numbering convention

                           5.

                           The following general notation is used in these instructions to refer to the columns, rows and cells of a template: {Template; Row; Column}. An asterisk sign is used to indicate that the validation is applied to the whole row or column. For example {AE-ASS; *; 2} refers to the data point of any row for column 2 of the AE-ASS template.

                           6.

                           In the case of validations within a template the following notation is used to refer to data points from that template: {Row; Column}.

                     1.4.   Sign convention

                           7.

                           Templates in Annex XVI shall follow the sign convention described in paragraphs 9 and 10 of Part I of Annex V.

                     1.5.   Level of application

                           8.

                           The level of application of the reporting on asset encumbrance follows that of the reporting requirements on own funds under the first subparagraph of Article 99(1) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 (CRR). Consequently, institutions that are not subject to prudential requirements in accordance with Article 7 of CRR are not required to report information on asset encumbrance.

                     1.6.   Proportionality

                           9.

                           For the purpose of Article 16a(2)(b), the asset encumbrance level shall be calculated as follows:

                                       —

                                       Carrying amount of encumbered assets and collateral = {AE-ASS;010;010} + {AE-COL;130;010}.

                                       —

                                       Total assets and collateral = {AE-ASS;010;010} + {AE-ASS;010;060} + {AE-COL;130;010} + {AE-COL;130;040}.

                                       —

                                       Asset encumbrance ratio = (Carrying amount of encumbered assets and collateral)/(Total assets and collateral)

                           10.

                           For the purpose of Article 16a(2)(a), the sum of total assets shall be calculated as follows:

                                       —

                                       Total assets = {AE-ASS;010;010} + {AE-ASS;010;060}

                     1.7.   Definition of encumbrance

                           11.

                           For the purpose of this Annex and Annex XVI, an asset shall be treated as encumbered if it has been pledged or if it is subject to any form of arrangement to secure, collateralise or credit enhance any transaction from which it cannot be freely withdrawn.
                           It is important to note, that assets pledged that are subject to any restrictions in withdrawal, such as for instance assets that require prior approval before withdrawal or replacement by other assets, should be considered encumbered. The definition is not based on an explicit legal definition, such as title transfer, but rather on economic principles, as the legal frameworks may differ in this respect across countries. The definition is however closely linked to contractual conditions. The EBA sees the following types of contracts being well covered by the definition (this is a non-exhaustive list):

                                       —

                                       secured financing transactions, including repurchase contracts and agreements, securities lending and other forms of secured lending;

                                       —

                                       various collateral agreements, for instance collateral placed for the market value of derivatives transactions;

                                       —

                                       financial guarantees that are collateralised. It should be noted, that if there is no impediment to withdrawal of collateral, such as prior approval, for the unused part of guarantee, then only the used amount should be allocated (on a pro-rata allocation);

                                       —

                                       collateral placed at clearing systems, CCPs and other infrastructure institutions as a condition for access to service. This includes default funds and initial margins;

                                       —

                                       central bank facilities. Pre-positioned assets should not be considered encumbered, unless the central bank does not allow withdrawal of any assets placed without prior approval. As for unused financial guarantees, the unused part, i.e. above the minimum amount required by the central bank, should be allocated on a pro-rata basis among the assets placed at the central bank;

                                       —

                                       underlying assets from securitisation structures, where the financial assets have not been de-recognised from the institution's financial assets. The assets that are underlying retained securities do not count as encumbered, unless these securities are pledged or provided as collateral in any way to secure a transaction;

                                       —

                                       assets in cover pools used for covered bond issuance. The assets that are underlying covered bonds count as encumbered, except in certain situations where the institution holds the corresponding covered bonds (“own-issued bonds”);

                                       —

                                       as a general principle, assets which are being placed at facilities that are not used and can be freely withdrawn should not be considered encumbered.

                  TEMPLATE-RELATED INSTRUCTIONS

               2.   PART A: ENCUMBRANCE OVERVIEW

                           12.

                           The encumbrance overview templates differentiate assets which are used to support funding or collateral needs at the balance sheet date (“point-in time encumbrance”) from those assets which are available for potential funding needs.

                           13.

                           The overview template shows the amount of encumbered and non-encumbered assets of the reporting institution in a tabular format by products. The same breakdown also applies to collateral received and own debt securities issued other than covered bonds and securitisations.

                     2.1.   Template: AE-ASS. Assets of the reporting institution
               2.1.1.   General remarks

                           14.

                           This paragraph sets out instructions that apply to the main types of transaction that are relevant when completing the AE templates:
                           All transactions that increase the level of encumbrance of an institution have two aspects that shall be reported independently throughout the AE templates. Such transactions shall be reported both as a source of encumbrance and as an encumbered asset or collateral.
                           The following examples describe how to report a type of transaction of this Part but the same rules apply to the other AE templates.
                           (a)   Collateralised deposit

                           A collateralised deposit is reported as follows:

                                       (i)

                                       the carrying amount of the deposit is registered as a source of encumbrance in {AE-SOU; r070; c010};

                                       (ii)

                                       where the collateral is an asset of the reporting institution: its carrying amount is reported in {AE-ASS; *; c010} and {AE-SOU; r070; c030}; its fair value is reported in {AE-ASS; *; c040};

                                       (iii)

                                       where the collateral has been received by the reporting institution, its fair value is reported in {AE-COL; *; c010}, {AE-SOU; r070; c030} and {AE-SOU; r070; c040}.

                                 (b)   Repo/matching repos

                           A repurchase agreement (hereinafter “repo”) is reported as follows:

                                       (i)

                                       the carrying amount of the repo is reported as a source of encumbrance in {AE-SOU; r050; c010};

                                       (ii)

                                       the collateral of the repo should be shown:

                                       (iii)

                                       where the collateral is an asset of the reporting institution: its carrying amount is reported in {AE-ASS; *; c010} and {AE-SOU; r050; c030}; its fair value is reported in {AE-ASS; *; c040};

                                       (iv)

                                       where the collateral has been received by the reporting institution through a previous reverse repurchase agreement (matching repo), its fair value is reported in {AE-COL; *; c010}, {AE-SOU; r050; c030} and in {AE-SOU; r050; c040}.

                                 (c)   Central bank funding

                           As collateralised central bank funding is only a specific case of a collateralised deposit or a repo transaction in which the counterparty is a central bank, the rules in i) and ii) above apply.
                           For operations where it is not possible to identify the specific collateral to each operation, as collateral is pooled together, the collateral breakdown must be done on a proportional basis, based on the composition of the pool of collateral.
                           Assets that have been pre-positioned with central banks are not encumbered assets unless the central bank does not allow withdrawal of any assets placed without prior approval. For unused financial guarantees, the unused part, i.e. the amount above the minimum required by the central bank, is allocated on a pro-rata basis among the assets placed at the central bank.
                           (d)   Securities lending

                           For securities lending with cash collateral the rules for repos/matching repos apply.
                           Securities lending without cash collateral is reported as follows:

                                       (i)

                                       the fair value of the securities borrowed is reported as a source of encumbrance in {AE-SOU; r150; c010}. When the lender does not receive any securities in return for the securities lent but receives a fee instead, {AE-SOU; r150; c010} is reported as zero;

                                       (ii)

                                       where the securities lent as collateral are an asset of the reporting institution: their carrying amount is reported in {AE-ASS; *; c010} and {AE-SOU; r150; c030}; their fair value is reported in {AE-ASS; *; c040};

                                       (iii)

                                       where the securities lent as collateral are received by the reporting institution, their fair value is reported in {AE-COL; *; c010}, {AE-SOU; r150; c030} and {AE-SOU; r150; c040}.

                                 (e)   Derivatives (liabilities)

                           Collateralised derivatives with a negative fair value are reported as follows:

                                       (i)

                                       the carrying amount of the derivative is reported as a source of encumbrance in {AE-SOU; r020; c010};

                                       (ii)

                                       the collateral (initial margins required to open the position and any collateral placed for the market value of derivatives transactions) are reported as follows:

                                                   (i)

                                                   where it is an asset of the reporting institution: its carrying amount is reported in {AE-ASS; *; c010} and {AE-SOU; r020; c030}; its fair value is reported in {AE-ASS; *; c040};

                                                   (ii)

                                                   where it is collateral received by the reporting institution, its fair value is reported in {AE-COL; *; c010}, {AE-SOU; r020; c030} and {AE-SOU; r020; c040}.

                                 (f)   Covered bonds

                           Covered bonds for the entire asset encumbrance reporting are instruments referred to in the first subparagraph of Article 52(4) of the Directive 2009/65/EU, irrespective of whether these instruments take the legal form of a security or not.
                           No specific rules apply to covered bonds where there is no retention of part of the securities issued by the reporting institution.
                           In case of retention of part of the issuance and in order to avoid double counting, the proposed treatment below shall apply:

                                       (i)

                                       where the own covered bonds are not pledged, the amount of the cover pool that is backing those securities retained and not yet pledged is reported in the AE-ASS templates as non-encumbered assets. Additional information about the retained covered bonds not yet pledged (underlying assets, fair value and eligibility of those available for encumbrance and nominal of those non-available for encumbrance) is reported in the AE-NPL template;

                                       (ii)

                                       where the own covered bonds are pledged, then the amount of the cover pool that is backing those securities retained and pledged is included in the AE-ASS template as encumbered assets.

                                 The following table sets out how to report covered bond issuance of EUR 100 of which 15 % is retained and not pledged and 10 % is retained and pledged as collateral in a EUR 11 repo transaction with a central bank, where the cover pool comprises unsecured loans and the carrying amount of the loans is EUR 150.

                                          SOURCES OF ENCUMBRANCE

                                          Type

                                          Amount

                                          Cells

                                          Loans encumbered

                                          Cells

                                          Covered bonds

                                       75 % (100) = 75

                                       {AE-Sources, r110, c010}

                                       75 % (150) = 112,5

                                       {AE-Assets, r100, c10}
                                       {AE-Sources, r110, c030}

                                          Central bank funding

                                       11

                                       {AE-Sources, r060, c010}

                                       10 % (150) = 15

                                       {AE-Assets, r100, c10}
                                       {AE-Sources, r060, c030}

                                          NON ENCUMBRANCE

                                          Type

                                          Amount

                                          Cells

                                          Non-encumbered loans

                                          Cells

                                          Own covered bonds retained

                                       15 % 100 = 15

                                       {AE-Not pledged, r010, c040}

                                       15 % (150) = 22,5

                                       {AE-Assets, r100, c60}
                                       {AE-Not pledged, r020, c010}

                                 (g)   Securitisations

                           Securitisations mean debt securities held by the reporting institution originated in a securitisation transaction as defined in Article 4(61) of CRR.
                           For securitisations that remain in the balance sheet (non-derecognised), the rules for covered bonds apply.
                           For derecognised securitisations, there is no encumbrance where the institution holds some securities. Those securities will appear in the trading book or in the banking book of the reporting institutions as any other security issued by a third party.

                     2.1.2.   Instructions concerning specific rows

                           Rows

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                              Assets of the reporting institution

                           IAS 1.9 (a), Implementation Guidance (IG) 6
                           Total assets of the reporting institution registered in its balance sheet.

                           020

                              Loans on demand

                           IAS 1.54 (i)
                           It includes the balances receivable on demand at central banks and other institutions. Cash on hand, that is, the holding of national and foreign banknotes and coins in circulation that are commonly used to make payments are included in the row “other assets”.

                           030

                              Equity instruments

                           Equity instruments held by the reporting institution as defined in IAS 32.1.

                           040

                              Debt securities

                           Annex V, Part 1, paragraph 26.
                           Debt instruments held by the reporting institution issued as securities that are not loans in accordance with the ECB BSI Regulation.

                           050

                              of which: covered bonds

                           Debt securities held by the reporting institution that are bonds referred to in the first subparagraph of Article 52(4) of Directive 2009/65/EC.

                           060

                              of which: securitisations

                           Debt securities held by the reporting institution that are securitisations as defined in Article 4(61) of CRR.

                           070

                              of which: issued by general governments

                           Debt securities held by the reporting institution which are issued by general governments.

                           080

                              of which: issued by financial corporations

                           Debt securities held by the reporting institution issued by financial corporations as defined in Annex V, Part I, paragraph 35, points (c) and (d).

                           090

                              of which: issued by non-financial corporations

                           Debt securities held by the reporting institution issued by non-financial corporations as defined in Annex V, Part I, paragraph 35, point (e).

                           100

                              Loans and advances other than loans on demand

                           Loans and advances, that is, debt instruments held by the reporting institutions that are not securities, other than balances receivable on demand.

                           110

                              of which: mortgage loans

                           Loans and advances other than loans on demand that are mortgage loans according to Annex V, part 2, paragraph 41(h).

                           120

                              Other assets

                           Other assets of the reporting institution registered in the balance sheet other than those mentioned in the above rows and different from own debt securities and own debt equity instruments that may not be derecognised from the balance sheet by a non-IFRS institution. In this case, own debt instruments shall be included in row 240 of the AE-COL template and own equity instruments excluded from the asset encumbrance reporting.

                     2.1.3.   Instructions concerning specific columns

                           Columns

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                              Carrying amount of encumbered assets

                           Carrying amount of the assets held by the reporting institution that are encumbered according to the definition provided of asset encumbrance. Carrying amount means the amount reported in the asset side of the balance sheet.

                           020

                              of which: issued by other entities of the group

                           Carrying amount of encumbered assets held by the reporting institution that are issued by any entity within the prudential scope of consolidation.

                           030

                              of which: central bank eligible

                           Carrying amount of encumbered assets held by the reporting institution which are eligible for operations with those central banks to which the reporting institution has access. Reporting institutions that cannot positively establish central bank eligibility for an item, for instance jurisdictions that operate without a clear definition of central bank repo eligible assets or do not have access to continuously functioning central bank repo market, may abstain from reporting the associated amount for that item, i.e. leave the reporting field blank.

                           040

                              Fair value of encumbered assets

                           IFRS 13 and Article 8 of Directive 2013/34/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council (1) for non-IFRS institutions.
                           Fair value of the debt securities held by the reporting institution that are encumbered according to the definition provided of asset encumbrance. Fair value of a financial instrument, is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. (See IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement.)

                           050

                              of which: central bank eligible

                           Fair value of the encumbered debt securities held by the reporting institution which are eligible for operations with those central banks to which the reporting institution has access. Reporting institutions that cannot positively establish central bank eligibility for an item, for instance jurisdictions that operate without a clear definition of central bank repo eligible assets or do not have access to continuously functioning central bank repo market, may abstain from reporting the associated amount for that item, i.e. leave the reporting field blank.

                           060

                              Carrying amount of non-encumbered assets

                           Carrying amount of the assets held by the reporting institution that are non-encumbered according to the definition provided of asset encumbrance. Carrying amount means the amount reported in the asset side of the balance sheet.

                           070

                              of which: issued by other entities of the group

                           Carrying amount of non-encumbered assets held by the reporting institution that are issued by any entity within the prudential scope of consolidation.

                           080

                              of which: central bank eligible

                           Carrying amount of non-encumbered assets held by the reporting institution which are eligible for operations with those central banks to which the reporting institution has access. Reporting institutions that cannot positively establish central bank eligibility for an item, for instance jurisdictions that operate without a clear definition of central bank repo eligible assets or do not have access to continuously functioning central bank repo market, may abstain from reporting the associated amount for that item, i.e. leave the reporting field blank.

                           090

                              Fair value of non-encumbered assets

                           IFRS 13 and Article 8 of Directive 2013/34/EU for non-IFRS institutions.
                           Fair value of the debt securities held by the reporting institution that are non-encumbered according to the definition provided of asset encumbrance. Fair value of a financial instrument is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. (See IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement.)

                           100

                              of which: central bank eligible

                           Fair value of the non-encumbered debt securities held by the reporting institution which are eligible for operations with those central banks to which the reporting institution has access. Reporting institutions that cannot positively establish central bank eligibility for an item, for instance jurisdictions that operate without a clear definition of central bank repo eligible assets or do not have access to continuously functioning central bank repo market, may abstain from reporting the associated amount for that item, i.e. leave the reporting field blank.

                     2.2.   Template: AE-COL. Collateral received by the reporting institution
               2.2.1.   General remarks

                           15.

                           For the collateral received by the reporting institution and the own debt securities issued other than own covered bonds or ABSs, the category of “non-encumbered” assets is split between those “available for encumbrance” or potentially eligible to be encumbered and those “non-available for encumbrance”.

                           16.

                           Assets are “non-available for encumbrance” when they have been received as collateral and the reporting institution is not permitted to sell or re-pledge the collateral, except in the case of a default by the owner of the collateral. Own debt securities issued other than own covered bonds or securitisations are non-available for encumbrance when there is any restriction in the terms of the issuance to sell or re-pledge the securities held.

                           17.

                           For the purpose of the asset encumbrance reporting, securities borrowed in exchange for a fee without providing cash-collateral or non-cash collateral are reported as collateral received.

                     2.2.2.   Instructions concerning specific rows

                           Rows

                           Legal references and instructions

                           130

                              Collateral received by the reporting institution

                           All classes of collateral received by the reporting institution.

                           140

                              Loans on demand

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that comprises loans on demand. (See legal references and instructions regarding row 020 of the AE-ASS template.)

                           150

                              Equity instruments

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that comprises equity instruments. (See legal references and instructions regarding row 030 of the AE-ASS template.)

                           160

                              Debt securities

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that comprises debt securities. (See legal references and instructions regarding row 040 of the AE-ASS template.)

                           170

                              of which: covered bonds

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that comprises covered bonds. (See legal references and instructions regarding row 050 of the AE-ASS template.)

                           180

                              of which: securitisations

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that comprises securitisations. (See legal references and instructions regarding row 060 of the AE-ASS template.)

                           190

                              of which: issued by general governments

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that comprises debt securities issued by general governments. (See legal references and instructions regarding row 070 of the AE-ASS template.)

                           200

                              of which: issued by financial corporations

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that comprises debt securities issued by financial corporations. (See legal references and instructions regarding row 080 of the AE-ASS template.)

                           210

                              of which: issued by non-financial corporations

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that comprises debt securities issued by non-financial corporations. (See legal references and instructions regarding row 090 of the AE-ASS template.)

                           220

                              Loans and advances other than loans on demand

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that comprises loans and advances other than loans on demand. (See legal references and instructions regarding row 100 of the AE-ASS template.)

                           230

                              Other collateral received

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that comprises other assets. (See legal references and instructions regarding row 120 of the AE-ASS template.)

                           240

                              Own debt securities issued other than own covered bonds or ABSs

                           Own debt securities issued retained by the reporting institution that are not own covered bonds issued or own securitisations issued. As the retained or repurchased own debt securities issued, according to IAS 39.42, decrease the relating financial liabilities, these securities are not included in the category of assets of the reporting institution (row 010 of the AE-ASS template). Own debt securities that may not be derecognised from the balance sheet by a non-IFRS institution shall be included in this row.
                           Own covered bonds issued or own securitisations issued are not reported in this category since different rules apply to those cases to avoid double counting:

                                       (a)

                                       where the own debt securities are pledged, the amount of the cover pool/underlying assets that are backing those securities retained and pledged is reported in the AE-ASS template as encumbered assets;

                                       (b)

                                       where the own debt securities are not yet pledged, the amount of the cover pool/underlying assets that are backing those securities retained and not yet pledged is reported in the AE-ASS templates as non-encumbered assets. Additional information about this second type of own debt securities not yet pledged (underlying assets, fair value and eligibility of those available for encumbrance and nominal of those non-available for encumbrance) is reported in the AE-NPL template.

                           250

                              TOTAL ASSETS, COLLATERAL RECEIVED AND OWN DEBT SECURITIES ISSUED

                           All assets of the reporting institution registered in its balance sheet, all classes of collateral received by the reporting institution and own debt securities issued retained by the reporting institution that are not own covered bonds issued or own securitisations issued.

                     2.2.3.   Instructions concerning specific columns

                           Columns

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                              Fair value of encumbered collateral received or own debt securities issued

                           Fair value of the collateral received or own debt securities issued held/retained by the reporting institution that are encumbered according to the definition provided of asset encumbrance.
                           Fair value of a financial instrument is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. (See IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement.)

                           020

                              of which: issued by other entities of the group

                           Fair value of the encumbered collateral received or own debt securities issued held/retained by the reporting institution that are issued by any entity within the prudential scope of consolidation.

                           030

                              of which: central bank eligible

                           Fair value of the encumbered collateral received or own debt securities issued held/retained by the reporting institution which are eligible for operations with those central banks to which the reporting institution has access. Reporting institutions that cannot positively establish central bank eligibility for an item, for instance jurisdictions that operate without a clear definition of central bank repo eligible assets or do not have access to continuously functioning central bank repo market, may abstain from reporting the associated amount for that item, i.e. leave the reporting field blank.

                           040

                              Fair value of collateral received or own debt securities issued available for encumbrance

                           Fair value of the collateral received by the reporting institution that are non-encumbered but are available for encumbrance since the reporting institution is permitted to sell or re-pledge it in absence of default by the owner of the collateral. It also includes the fair value of own debt securities issued, other than own covered bonds or securitisations that are non-encumbered but available for encumbrance.

                           050

                              of which: issued by other entities of the group

                           Fair value of collateral received or own debt securities issued other than own covered bonds or asset-backed securities available for encumbrance that are issued by any entity within the prudential scope of consolidation.

                           060

                              of which: central bank eligible

                           Fair value of collateral received or own debt securities issued other than own covered bonds or securitisations available for encumbrance which are eligible for operations with those central banks to which the reporting institution has access. Reporting institutions that cannot positively establish central bank eligibility for an item, for instance jurisdictions that operate without a clear definition of central bank repo eligible assets or do not have access to continuously functioning central bank repo market, may abstain from reporting the associated amount for that item, i.e. leave the reporting field blank.

                           070

                              Nominal of collateral received or own debt securities issued non available for encumbrance

                           Nominal amount of the collateral received held by the reporting institution that are non-encumbered and non-available for encumbrance. It also includes the nominal amount of the own debt securities issued other than own covered bonds or securitisations retained by the reporting institution that are non-encumbered and also non-available for encumbrance.

                     2.3.   Template: AE-NPL. Own covered bonds and ABSs issued and not yet pledged
               2.3.1.   General remarks

                           18.

                           To avoid double counting, the following rule applies in relation to own covered bonds and securitisations issued and retained by the reporting institution:

                                       (a)

                                       where those securities are pledged, the amount of the cover pool/underlying assets that are backing them shall be reported in the AE-ASS template as encumbered assets. The source of funding in the event of pledging own covered bonds and securitisations is the new transaction in which the securities are being pledged (central bank funding or other type of secured funding) and not the original issuance of covered bonds or securitisations;

                                       (b)

                                       where those securities are not yet pledged, the amount of the cover pool/underlying assets that are backing those securities shall be reported in the AE-ASS template as non-encumbered assets.

                     2.3.2.   Instructions concerning specific rows

                           Rows

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                              Own covered bonds and ABSs issued and not yet pledged

                           Own covered bonds and securitisations issued that are retained by the reporting institution and not encumbered.

                           020

                              Retained covered bonds issued

                           Own covered bonds issued that are retained by the reporting institution and not encumbered.

                           030

                              Retained securitisations issued

                           Own securitisations issued that are retained by the reporting institution and not encumbered.

                           040

                              Senior

                           Senior tranches of the own securitisations issued that are retained by the reporting institution and not encumbered. See Article 4(67) of CRR.

                           050

                              Mezzanine

                           Mezzanine tranches of the own securitisations issued that are retained by the reporting institution and not encumbered. All tranches that are not senior tranches, i.e. the last to absorb the loss or first loss tranches, shall be considered mezzanine tranches. See Article 4(67) of CRR.

                           060

                              First loss

                           First loss tranches of the own securitisations issued that are retained by the reporting institution and not encumbered. See Article 4(67) of CRR.

                     2.3.3.   Instructions concerning specific columns

                           Columns

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                              Carrying amount of the underlying pool of assets

                           Carrying amount of the cover pool/underlying assets that back the own covered bonds and own securitisations retained and are not yet pledged.

                           020

                              Fair value of debt securities issued available for encumbrance

                           Fair value of the own covered bonds and own securitisations retained that are non-encumbered but available for encumbrance.

                           030

                              Of which: central bank eligible

                           Fair value of the own covered bonds and own securitisations retained that meet each of the following conditions:

                                       (i)

                                       they are non-encumbered;

                                       (ii)

                                       they are available for encumbrance;

                                       (iii)

                                       they are eligible for operations with those central banks to which the reporting institution has access.

                                 Reporting institutions that cannot positively establish central bank eligibility for an item, for instance jurisdictions that operate without a clear definition of central bank repo eligible assets or do not have access to continuously functioning central bank repo market, may abstain from reporting the associated amount for that item, i.e. leave the reporting field blank.

                           040

                              Nominal of own debt securities issued non-available for encumbrance

                           Nominal amount of the own covered bonds and own securitisations retained that are non-encumbered and also non-available for encumbrance.

                     2.4.   Template: AE-SOU. Sources of encumbrance
               2.4.1.   General remarks

                           19.

                           This template provides information on the importance for the reporting institution of the different sources of encumbrance, including those with no associated funding as loans commitments or financial guarantees received and securities lending with non-cash collateral.

                           20.

                           The total amounts of assets and collateral received in the AE-ASS and the AE-COL templates meet the following validation rule: {AE-SOU; r170; c030} = {AE-ASS; r010; c010} + {AE-COL; r130; c010} + {AE-COL; r240; c010}.

                     2.4.2.   Instructions concerning specific rows

                           Rows

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                              Carrying amount of selected financial liabilities

                           Carrying amount of selected collateralised financial liabilities of the reporting institution insofar as these liabilities entail asset encumbrance for that institution.

                           020

                              Derivatives

                           Carrying amount of the collateralised derivatives of the reporting institution that are financial liabilities, that is, with a negative fair value, insofar as these derivatives entail asset encumbrance for that institution.

                           030

                              of which: over-the-counter

                           Carrying amount of the collateralised derivatives of the reporting institution that are financial liabilities which are traded over-the-counter, insofar as these derivatives entail asset encumbrance.

                           040

                              Deposits

                           Carrying amount of the collateralised deposits of the reporting institution insofar as these deposits entail asset encumbrance for that institution.

                           050

                              Repurchase agreements

                           Carrying amount of the repurchase agreements of the reporting institution insofar as these transactions entail asset encumbrance for that institution.
                           Repurchase agreements (repos) are transactions in which the reporting institution receives cash in exchange for financial assets sold at a given price under a commitment to repurchase the same (or identical) assets at a fixed price on a specified future date. The following variants of repo-type operations are all required to be reported as repurchase agreements: — amounts received in exchange for securities temporarily transferred to a third party in the form of securities lending against cash collateral and — amounts received in exchange for securities temporarily transferred to a third party in the form of a sale/buy-back agreement.

                           060

                              of which: central banks

                           Carrying amount of the repurchase agreements of the reporting institution with central banks insofar as these transactions entail asset encumbrance.

                           070

                              Collateralised deposits other than repurchased agreements

                           Carrying amount of the of the collateralised deposits other than repurchase agreements of the reporting institution insofar as these deposits entail asset encumbrance for that institution.

                           080

                              of which: central banks

                           Carrying amount of the collateralised deposits other than repurchase agreements of the reporting institution with central banks insofar as these deposits entail asset encumbrance for that institution.

                           090

                              Debt securities issued

                           Carrying amount of the debt securities issued by the reporting institution insofar as these securities issued entail asset encumbrance for that institution.
                           The retained part of any issuance shall follow the specific treatment set out in point (vi) of paragraph 15 of Part A so that only the percentage of debt securities placed outside the entities of the group are to be included under this category.

                           100

                              of which: covered bonds issued

                           Carrying amount of covered bonds the assets of which are originated by the reporting institution insofar as these securities issued entail asset encumbrance for that institution.

                           110

                              of which: securitisations issued

                           Carrying amount of the securitisations issued by the reporting institution insofar as these securities issued entail asset encumbrance for that institution.

                           120

                              Other sources of encumbrance

                           Amount of collateralised transactions of the reporting institution other than financial liabilities, insofar as these transactions entail asset encumbrance for that institution.

                           130

                              Nominal of loan commitments received

                           Nominal amount of the loan commitments received by the reporting institution, insofar as these commitments received entail asset encumbrance for that institution.

                           140

                              Nominal of financial guarantees received

                           Nominal amount of the financial guarantees received by the reporting institution, insofar as these guarantees received entail asset encumbrance for that institution.

                           150

                              Fair value of securities borrowed with non-cash collateral

                           Fair value of the securities borrowed by the reporting institution without cash collateral, insofar as these transactions entail asset encumbrance for that institution.

                           160

                              Other

                           Amount of collateralised transactions of the reporting institution other than financial liabilities, not covered by the above items, insofar as these transactions entail asset encumbrance for that institution.

                           170

                              TOTAL SOURCES OF ENCUMBRANCE

                           Amount of all collateralised transactions of the reporting institution insofar as these transactions entail asset encumbrance for that institution.

                     2.4.3.   Instructions concerning specific columns

                           Columns

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                              Matching liabilities, contingent liabilities or securities lent

                           Amount of the matching financial liabilities, contingent liabilities (loan commitments received and financial guarantees received) and of the securities lent with non-cash collateral, insofar as these transactions entail asset encumbrance for that institution.
                           Financial liabilities are reported at their carrying amount; contingent liabilities are reported at their nominal value; and securities lent with non-cash collateral are reported at their fair value.

                           020

                              of which: from other entities of the group

                           Amount of the matching financial liabilities, contingent liabilities (loan commitments received and financial guarantees received) and of the securities lent with non-cash collateral, insofar as the counterparty is any other entity within the prudential scope of consolidation and the transaction entail for the reporting institution asset encumbrance.
                           For rules applying to amount types, see instructions for column 010.

                           030

                              Assets, collateral received and own securities issued other than covered bonds and ABSs encumbered

                           Amount of the assets, collateral received and own securities issued other than covered bonds and securitisations that are encumbered as a result of the different type of transactions specified in the rows.
                           To ensure consistency with the criteria in the templates AE-ASS and AE-COL, assets of the reporting institution registered in the balance sheet are reported at their carrying amount, re-used collateral received and encumbered own securities issued other than covered bonds and securitisations are reported at their fair value.

                           040

                              of which: collateral received re-used

                           Fair value of the collateral received that are re-used/encumbered as a result of the different type of transactions specified in the rows.

                           050

                              Of which: own debt securities encumbered

                           Fair value of the own securities issued other than covered bonds and securitisations that are encumbered as a result of the different type of transactions specified in the rows.

                     3.   PART B: MATURITY DATA
               3.1.   General remarks

                           21.

                           The template included in Part B shows a general overview of the amount of encumbered assets and collateral received re-used that fall under the defined intervals of the matching liabilities' residual maturity.

                     3.2.   Template: AE-MAT. Maturity data
               3.2.1.   Instructions concerning specific rows

                           Rows

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                              Encumbered assets

                           For the purpose of this template, encumbered assets include all of the following:

                                       (a)

                                       the assets of the reporting institution (see instruction for row 010 of the AE-ASS template), which are reported at their carrying amount;

                                       (b)

                                       own debt securities issued other than covered bonds or securitisations (see instruction for row 240 of the AE-COL template), which are reported at fair value.

                                 These amounts are distributed among the set of residual maturity buckets specified in the columns according to the residual maturity of the source of its encumbrance (matching liability, contingent liability or securities lending transaction).

                           020

                              Collateral received re-used (receiving leg)

                           See instructions for row 130 of the AE-COL template and column 040 of the AE-SOU template.
                           The amounts are reported at fair value and distributed among the set of residual maturity buckets specified in the columns according to the residual maturity of the transaction that generated for the entity the reception of the collateral that is being re-used (receiving leg).

                           030

                              Collateral received re-used (re-using leg)

                           See instructions for row 130 of the AE-COL template and column 040 of the AE-SOU template.
                           The amounts are reported at fair value and distributed among the set of residual maturity buckets specified in the columns according to the residual maturity of the source of its encumbrance (re-using leg): matching liability, contingent liability or securities lending transaction.

                     3.2.2.   Instructions concerning specific columns

                           Columns

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                              Open maturity

                           On demand, without a specific maturity date

                           020

                              Overnight

                           Due date earlier or equal to 1 day

                           030

                              > 1 day<=1wk

                           Due date later than 1 day and earlier than or equal to 1 week

                           040

                              > 1 wk<=2wks

                           Due date later than 1 week and earlier than or equal to 2 weeks

                           050

                              > 2wks <=1mth

                           Due date later than 2 weeks and earlier than or equal to 1 month

                           060

                              > 1mth <=3mths

                           Due date later than 1 month and earlier than or equal to 3 months

                           070

                              > 3mths <=6mths

                           Due date later than 3 months and earlier than or equal to 6 months

                           080

                              > 6mths<=1yr

                           Due date later than 6 months and earlier than or equal to 1 year

                           090

                              > 1yr <=2yrs

                           Due date later than 1 year and earlier than or equal to 2 years

                           100

                              > 2yrs <=3yrs

                           Due date later than 2 years and earlier than or equal to 3 years

                           110

                              > 3yrs <=5yrs

                           Due date later than 3 years and earlier than or equal to 5 years

                           120

                              > 5yrs <=10yrs

                           Due date later than 5 years and earlier than or equal to 10 years

                           130

                              > 10yrs

                           Due date later than 10 years

                     4.   PART C: CONTINGENT ENCUMBRANCE
               4.1.   General remarks

                           22.

                           This template requires institutions to calculate the level of asset encumbrance in a number of stressed scenarios.

                           23.

                           Contingent encumbrance refers to the additional assets which may need to be encumbered when the reporting institutions faces adverse developments triggered by an external event over which the reporting institution has no control (including a downgrade, decrease of the fair value of the encumbered assets or a general loss of confidence). In these cases, the reporting institution will need to encumber additional assets as a consequence of already existing transactions. The additional amount of encumbered assets shall be net of the impact of the institution's hedge transactions against the events described under the aforementioned stressed scenarios.

                           24.

                           This template includes the following two scenarios for reporting contingent encumbrance which are set out in more detail in points 4.1.1. and 4.1.2. The information reported shall be the institution's reasonable estimate based on the best available information.

                                       (a)

                                       Decrease of the fair value of the encumbered assets by 30 %. This scenario only covers a change in the underlying fair value of the assets, and not any other change which may affect its carrying amount such as foreign exchange gains or losses or potential impairment. The reporting institution may then be forced to post more collateral in order to keep the value of the collateral constant.

                                       (b)

                                       A 10 % depreciation in each currency in which the institution has aggregate liabilities amounting to or exceeding 5 % of the institution's total liabilities.

                           25.

                           The scenarios shall be reported independently of each other, and significant currency depreciations shall also be reported independently of depreciations of other significant currencies. Consequently institutions shall not take correlations between the scenarios into account.

                     4.1.1.   Scenario A: Decrease of 30 % of encumbered assets

                           26.

                           It shall be assumed that all encumbered assets decrease 30 % in value. The need of additional collateral arising from such a decrease shall take into account existing levels of over-collateralisation, such that only the minimum collateralisation level is maintained. The need of additional collateral shall also take into account the contractual requirements of the contracts and agreements impacted, including threshold triggers.

                           27.

                           Only contracts and agreements, where there is a legal obligation to supply additional collateral shall be included. This includes covered bond issues where there is a legal requirement to uphold minimum levels of over collateralisation but no requirement to maintain existing rating levels on the covered bond.

                     4.1.2.   Scenario B: Depreciation of 10 % in significant currencies

                           28.

                           A currency is a significant currency if the reporting institution has aggregate liabilities in that currency amounting to or exceeding 5 % of the institution's total liabilities

                           29.

                           The calculation of a 10 % depreciation shall take into account both changes on the asset and liability side, i.e. focus the asset-liability mismatches. For instance a repo transactions in USD based on USD assets does not cause additional encumbrance, whereas a repo transaction in USD based on a EUR asset causes additional encumbrance.

                           30.

                           All transactions which have a cross-currency element shall be covered by this calculation.

                     4.2.   Template: AE-CONT. Contingent encumbrance
               4.2.1.   Instructions concerning specific rows

                           31.

                           See instructions concerning specific columns of the AE-SOU template in point 1.5.1. The content of the columns in AE-CONT template does not differ from the AE-SOU template.

                     4.2.2.   Instructions concerning specific columns

                           Columns

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                              Matching liabilities, contingent liabilities or securities lent

                           Same instructions and data as for column 010 of the AE-SOU template.
                           Amount of the matching financial liabilities, contingent liabilities (loan commitments received and financial guarantees received) and of the securities lent with non–cash collateral, insofar as these transactions entail asset encumbrance for that institution.
                           As referred for each row in the template, financial liabilities are reported at their carrying amount, contingent liabilities at their nominal and securities lent with non-cash collateral at their fair value.

                           020

                           A.   Additional amount of encumbered assets

                           Additional amount of assets that would become encumbered due to a legal, regulatory or contractual provision that could be triggered in the event of occurrence of scenario A.
                           Following the instructions laid down in Part A of this Annex, these amounts are reported at their carrying amount if the amount is related to assets of the reporting institution or at their fair value if related to collateral received. Amounts exceeding the non-encumbered assets and collateral of the institution are reported at fair value.

                           030

                           B.   Additional amount of encumbered assets. Significant currency 1

                           Additional amount of assets that would become encumbered due to a legal, regulatory or contractual provision that could be triggered in the event of a depreciation of significant currency number 1 in scenario B.
                           See rules for amount types in row 020.

                           040

                           B.   Additional amount of encumbered assets. Significant currency 2

                           Additional amount of assets that would become encumbered due to a legal, regulatory or contractual provision that could be triggered in the event of a depreciation of significant currency number 2 in scenario B.
                           See rules for amount types in row 020.

                     5.   PART D: COVERED BONDS
               5.1.   General remarks

                           32.

                           The information in this template is reported for all UCITS-compliant covered bonds issued by the reporting institution. UCITS-compliant covered bonds are the bonds referred to in the first subparagraph of Article 52(4) of Directive 2009/65/EC. These are covered bonds issued by the reporting institution if the reporting institution is in relation to the covered bond subject by law to special public supervision designed to protect bond-holders and if for such covered bond it is required that sums deriving from the issue of those bonds shall be invested in accordance with the law in assets which, during the whole period of validity of the bonds, are capable of covering claims attaching to the bonds and which, in the event of failure of the issuer, would be used on a priority basis for the reimbursement of the principal and payment of the accrued interest.

                           33.

                           Covered bonds issued by or on behalf of the reporting institution that are not UCITS-compliant covered bonds shall not be reported within the AE-CB templates.

                           34.

                           The reporting shall be based on the statutory covered bond regime, i.e. the legal framework which applies the to the covered bond programme.

                     5.2.   Template: AE-CB. Covered bonds issuance
               5.2.1.   Instructions concerning z-axis

                           z-axis

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                              Cover pool identifier (open)

                           The cover pool identifier consists of the name or unambiguous abbreviation of the cover pool issuing entity and the designation of the cover pool that individually is subject to the relevant covered bond protective measures.

                     5.2.2.   Instructions concerning specific rows

                           Rows

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                              Nominal amount

                           Nominal amount is the sum of claims to payment of principal, determined in accordance with the respective statutory covered bond regime's rules that apply for determining sufficient coverage.

                           020

                              Present value (swap)/Market value

                           Present value (swap) is the sum of claims to payment of principal and interest, as discounted by a foreign exchange-specific risk-free yield curve, determined in accordance with the relevant statutory covered bond regime's rules that apply for determining sufficient coverage.
                           For columns 080 and 210 referring to cover pool derivative positions, the amount to be reported is its market value.

                           030

                              Asset-specific value

                           The asset-specific value is the economic value of the cover pool assets, as may be described by a fair value according to IFRS 13, a market value observable from executed transactions in liquid markets, or a present value that would discount future cash flows of an asset by an asset-specific interest rate curve.

                           040

                              Carrying amount

                           Carrying amount of a covered bond liability or a cover pool asset is the accounting value at the covered bond issuer.

                     5.2.3.   Instructions concerning specific columns

                           Columns

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                              Compliance with Article 129 of CRR? [YES/NO]

                           Institutions shall specify whether the cover pool meets the requirements set out in Article 129 of CRR in order to be eligible for the preferential treatment set out in Article 129(4) and (5) of that Regulation.

                           012

                              If YES, indicate primary asset class of the cover pool

                           If the cover pool is eligible for the preferential treatment set out in Article 129(4) and (5) of CRR (answer YES in column 011), the primary asset class of the cover pool shall be indicated in this cell. The classification in Article 129(1) of that Regulation shall be used for this purpose and codes “a”, “b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, “f” and “g” shall be indicated accordingly. Code “h” will be applied when the primary asset class of the cover pool does not fall under any of the previous categories.

                           020-140

                              Covered bond liabilities

                           Covered bond liabilities are the liabilities of the issuing entity incurred by issuing covered bonds and extends to all positions as defined by the respective statutory covered bond regime that are subject to the relevant covered bond protective measures (this may, for instance, include securities in circulation as well as the position of counterparts of the covered bond issuer in derivative positions with, from the perspective of the covered bond issuer, a negative market value attributed to the cover pool and treated as covered bond liabilities in accordance with the relevant statutory covered bond regime).

                           020

                              Reporting date

                           Amounts of covered bond liabilities, excluding cover pool derivative positions, according to the different future date ranges.

                           030

                              + 6 months

                           The date “+ 6 months” is the point in time 6 months after the reporting reference date. Amounts shall be provided assuming no change in covered bond liabilities compared to the reporting reference date except for amortization. In the absence of a fixed payment schedule, for amounts outstanding at future dates the expected maturity is to be used in a consistent manner.

                           040-070

                              + 12 months — + 10 years

                           As for “+ 6 months” (column 030) for the respective point in time from the reporting reference date.

                           080

                              Cover pool derivative positions with net negative market value

                           The net negative market value of cover pool derivative positions which from the perspective of the covered bond issuer have a net negative market value. Cover pool derivative positions are such net derivative positions that in accordance with the relevant statutory covered bond regime have been included in the cover pool and are subject to the respective covered bond protective measures in that such derivative positions with a negative market value require coverage by eligible cover pool assets.
                           The net negative market value is to be reported for the reporting reference date only.

                           090-140

                              External credit rating on covered bond

                           Information on external credit ratings on the respective covered bond, as existing on the reporting date, is to be provided.

                           090

                              Credit rating agency 1

                           If a credit rating of at least one credit rating agency exists as of the reporting date, the name of one of these credit rating agencies shall be provided here. If credit ratings by more than three credit rating agencies exist as of the reporting date, the three credit rating agencies to whom information is provided shall be selected based on their respective market prevalence.

                           100

                              Credit rating 1

                           The credit rating issued by the credit rating agency reported in column 090 on the covered bond as of the reporting reference date. If long- and short-term credit ratings by the same credit rating agency exist, the long-term credit rating is to be reported. The credit rating to be reported shall include any modifiers.

                           110, 130

                              Credit rating agency 2 and credit rating agency 3

                           As for credit rating agency 1 (column 090) for further credit rating agencies that have issued credit ratings on the covered bond as of the reporting reference date.

                           120, 140

                              Credit rating 2 and credit rating 3

                           As for credit rating 1 (column 100) for further credit ratings issued by credit rating agencies 2 and 3 on the covered bond existing as of the reporting reference date.

                           150-250

                              Cover pool

                           The cover pool consist of all positions, including cover pool derivative positions, from the perspective of the covered bond issuer, with a net positive market value, that are subject to the respective covered bond protective measures.

                           150

                              Reporting date

                           Amounts of assets in the cover pool, excluding cover pool derivative positions. This amount includes minimum over-collateralisation requirements plus any additional over-collateralisation in excess of the minimum, to the extent subject to the respective covered bond protective measures.

                           160

                              + 6 months

                           The reporting date “+ 6 months” is the point in time 6 months after the reporting reference date. Amounts shall be provided assuming no change in cover pool compared to the reporting date except for amortization. In the absence of a fixed payment schedule, for amounts outstanding at future dates expected maturity is to be used in a consistent manner.

                           170-200

                              + 12 months — + 10 years

                           As for “+ 6 months” (column 160) for the respective point in time from the reporting reference date.

                           210

                              Cover pool derivative positions with net positive market value

                           The net positive market value of cover pool derivative positions which, from the perspective of the covered bond issuer, have a net positive market value. Cover pool derivative positions are such net derivative positions that in accordance with the relevant statutory covered bond regime have been included in the cover pool and are subject to the respective covered bond protective measures in that such derivative positions with a positive market value would not form part of the covered bond issuer's general insolvency estate.
                           The net positive market value is to be reported for the reporting date only.

                           220-250

                              Cover pool amounts in excess of minimum coverage requirements

                           Amounts of cover pool, including cover pool derivative positions with net positive market values, in excess of requirements of minimum coverage (over-collateralisation).

                           220

                              As per the relevant statutory covered bond regime

                           Amounts of over-collateralisation compared with the minimum coverage required by the relevant statutory covered bond regime.

                           230-250

                              As per credit rating agencies' methodology to maintain current external credit rating on covered bond

                           Amounts of over-collateralisation compared with the level that, according to information on the respective credit rating agency's methodology available to the covered bond issuer, would at a minimum be required to support the existing credit rating issued by the respective credit rating agency.

                           230

                              Credit rating agency 1

                           Amounts of over-collateralisation compared with the level that, according to information on the methodology of credit rating agency 1 (column 090) available to the covered bond issuer, would at a minimum be required to support credit rating 1 (column 100).

                           240-250

                              Credit rating agency 2 and credit rating agency 3

                           The instructions for credit rating agency 1 (column 230) also apply to credit rating agency 2 (column 110) and credit rating agency 3 (column 130).

                     6.   PART E: ADVANCED DATA
               6.1.   General remarks

                           35.

                           Part E follows the same structure as in the encumbrance overview templates in Part A with different templates for the encumbrance of the assets of the reporting institution and for the collateral received: AE-ADV1 and AE-ADV2 respectively. Consequently, matching liabilities correspond to the liabilities that are secured by the encumbered assets and no one-to-one relation has to exist.

                     6.2.   Template: AE-ADV1. Advanced template for assets of the reporting institution
               6.2.1.   Instructions concerning specific rows

                           Rows

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010-020

                              Central bank funding (of all types, including repos)

                           All types of liabilities of the reporting institution in which the counterparty of the transaction is a central bank.
                           Assets that have been pre-positioned with central banks shall not be treated as encumbered assets unless the central bank does not allow withdrawal of any asset placed without prior approval. For unused financial guarantees, the unused part, i.e., the amount above the minimum required by the central bank, shall be allocated on a pro-rata basis among the assets placed at the central bank.

                           030-040

                              Exchanged traded derivatives

                           Carrying amount of the collateralised derivatives of the reporting institution that are financial liabilities, insofar as these derivatives are listed or traded on a recognised or designated investment exchange and they entail asset encumbrance for that institution.

                           050-060

                              Over-the counter derivatives

                           Carrying amount of the collateralised derivatives of the reporting institution that are financial liabilities, insofar as these derivatives are traded over-the-counter and they entail asset encumbrance for that institution. (Same instruction in row 030 of the AE-SOU template)

                           070-080

                              Repurchase agreements

                           Carrying amount of the repurchase agreements of the reporting institution in which the counterparty of the transaction is not a central bank, insofar as these transactions entail asset encumbrance for that institution. For tri-party repurchase agreements, the same treatment should be followed as for the repurchase agreements insofar as these transactions entail asset encumbrance for the reporting institution.

                           090-100

                              Collateralised deposits other than repurchase agreements

                           Carrying amount of the collateralised deposits other than repurchase agreements of the reporting institution in which the counterparty of the transaction is not a central bank, insofar as these deposits entail asset encumbrance for that institution.

                           110-120

                              Covered bonds securities issued

                           See instructions in row 100 of the AE-SOU template.

                           130-140

                              Securitisations issued

                           See instructions in row 110 of the AE-SOU template.

                           150-160

                              Debt securities issued other than covered bonds and ABSs

                           Carrying amount of the debt securities issued by the reporting institution other than covered bonds and securitisations insofar as these securities issued entail asset encumbrance for that institution.
                           In the event that the reporting institution had retained some of the debt securities issued, either from the issuance date or thereafter as a result of a repurchase, these retained securities should not be included under this item. Additionally, the collateral assigned to them should be classified as non-encumbered for the purpose of this template.

                           170-180

                              Other sources of encumbrance

                           See instructions in row 120 of the AE-SOU template.

                           190

                              Total encumbered assets

                           For each type of asset specified in the rows of the AE-ADV1 template, the carrying amount of the assets held by the reporting institution that are encumbered.

                           200

                              of which: central bank eligible

                           For each type of asset specified in the rows of the AE-ADV1 template, carrying amount of the assets held by the reporting institution that are encumbered and which are eligible for operations with those central banks to which the reporting institution has access. Reporting institutions that cannot positively establish central bank eligibility for an item, for instance jurisdictions that operate without a clear definition of central bank repo eligible assets or do not have access to continuously functioning central bank repo market, may abstain from reporting the associated amount for that item, i.e. leave the reporting field blank.

                           210

                              Total non-encumbered assets

                           For each type of asset specified in the rows of the AE-ADV1 template, the carrying amount of the assets held by the reporting institution that are non-encumbered. Carrying amount means the amount reported in the asset side of the balance sheet.

                           220

                              of which: central bank eligible

                           For each type of asset specified in the rows of the AE-ADV1 template, carrying amount of the assets held by the reporting institution that are non-encumbered and which are eligible for operations with those central banks to which the reporting institution has access. Reporting institutions that cannot positively establish central bank eligibility for an item, for instance jurisdictions that operate without a clear definition of central bank repo eligible assets or do not have access to continuously functioning central bank repo market, may abstain from reporting the associated amount for that item, i.e. leave the reporting field blank.

                           230

                              Encumbered + non-encumbered assets

                           For each type of asset specified in the rows of the AE-ADV1 template, the carrying amount of the assets held by the reporting institution.

                     6.2.2.   Instructions concerning specific columns

                           Columns

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                              Loans on demand

                           See instructions for row 020 of the AE-ASS template.

                           020

                              Equity instruments

                           See instructions for row 030 of the AE-ASS template.

                           030

                              Total

                           See instructions for row 040 of the AE-ASS template.

                           040

                              of which: covered bonds

                           See description instructions for row 050 of the AE-ASS template.

                           050

                              of which: issued by other entities of the group

                           Covered bonds as described in the instructions for row 050 of the AE-ASS template that are issued by any entity within the prudential scope of consolidation.

                           060

                              of which: securitisations

                           See instructions for row 060 of the AE-ASS template.

                           070

                              of which: issued by other entities of the group

                           Securitisations as described in the instructions for row 060 of the AE-ASS template that are issued by any entity within the prudential scope of consolidation.

                           080

                              of which: issued by general governments

                           See instructions for row 070 of the AE-ASS template.

                           090

                              of which: issued by financial corporations

                           See instructions for row 080 of the AE-ASS template.

                           100

                              of which: issued by non-financial corporations

                           See instructions for row 090 of the AE-ASS template.

                           110

                              Central banks and general governments

                           Loans and advances other than loans on demand to a central bank or a general government.

                           120

                              Financial corporations

                           Loans and advances other than loans on demand to financial corporations.

                           130

                              Non-financial corporations

                           Loans and advances other than loans on demand to non-financial corporations.

                           140

                              of which: mortgages loans

                           Loans and advances other than loans on demand guaranteed with a mortgage given to non-financial corporations.

                           150

                              Households

                           Loans and advances other than loans on demand given to households.

                           160

                              of which: mortgage loans

                           Loans and advances other than loans on demand guaranteed with a mortgage given to households.

                           170

                              Other assets

                           See instruction for row 120 of the AE-ASS template.

                           180

                              Total

                           See instruction for row 010 of the AE-ASS template.

                     6.3.   Template: AE-ADV2. Advanced template for collateral received by the reporting institution
               6.3.1.   Instructions concerning specific rows

                           36.

                           See point 6.2.1 as instructions are similar for both templates.

                     6.3.2.   Instructions concerning specific columns

                           Columns

                           Legal references and instructions

                           010

                              Loans on demand

                           See instructions for row 140 of the AE-COL template.

                           020

                              Equity instruments

                           See instructions for row 150 of the AE-COL template.

                           030

                              Total

                           See instructions for row 160 of the AE-COL template.

                           040

                              of which: covered bonds

                           See instructions in row 170 of the AE-COL template.

                           050

                              of which: issued by other entities of the group

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that are covered bonds issued by any entity within the prudential scope of consolidation.

                           060

                              of which: securitisations

                           See instructions for row 180 of the AE-COL template.

                           070

                              of which: issued by other entities of the group

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that are securitisations issued by any entity within the prudential scope of consolidation.

                           080

                              of which: issued by general governments

                           See instructions for row 190 of the AE-COL template.

                           090

                              of which: issued by financial corporations

                           See instructions for row 200 of the AE-COL template.

                           100

                              of which: issued by non-financial corporations

                           See instructions for row 210 of the AE-COL template.

                           110

                              Central banks and general governments.

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that are loans and advances other than loans on demand to a central bank or a general government.

                           120

                              Financial corporations

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that are loans and advances other than loans on demand to financial corporations.

                           130

                              Non-financial corporations

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that are loans and advances other than loans on demand to non-financial corporations.

                           140

                              of which: mortgages loans

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that are loans and advances other than loans on demand guaranteed with a mortgage given to non-financial corporations.

                           150

                              Households

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that are loans and advances other than loans on demand given to households.

                           160

                              of which: mortgage loans

                           Collateral received by the reporting institution that are loans and advances other than loans on demand guaranteed with a mortgage given to households.

                           170

                              Other assets

                           See instructions for row 230 of the AE-COL template.

                           180

                              Own debt securities issued other than own covered bonds or ABSs

                           See instructions for row 240 of the AE-COL template.

                           190

                              Total

                           See instructions for rows 130 and 140 of the AE-COL template.’

            (1)  Directive 2013/34/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 June 2013 on the annual financial statements, consolidated financial statements and related reports of certain types of undertakings, amending Directive 2006/43/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council and repealing Council Directives 78/660/EEC and 83/349/EEC (OJ L 182, 29.6.2013, p. 19).